Haier R410A 0000001653 User Manual To The Fafb00f1 4123 49b3 A856 717a53959ad0
User Manual: Haier R410A to the manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 414
Download | ![]() |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Safety Precautions Before installing the unit, thoroughly read the following safety precautions. Observe these safety precautions for your safety. WARNING This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important instructions that must be followed to avoid the risk of serious injury or death. CAUTION This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important instructions that must be followed to avoid the risk of serious injury or damage to the unit. After reading this manual, give it to the user to retain for future reference. Keep this manual for easy reference. When the unit is moved or repaired, give this manual to those who provide these services. When the user changes, make sure that the new user receives this manual. WARNING Ask your dealer or a qualified technician to install the unit. In the event of a refrigerant leak, thoroughly ventilate the room. Improper installation by the user may result in water leakage, electric shock, smoke, and/or fire. If refrigerant gas leaks and comes in contact with an open flame, poisonous gases will be produced. Properly install the unit on a surface that can withstand the weight of the unit. When installing the All-Fresh type units, take it into consideration that the outside air may be discharged directly into the room when the thermo is turned off. Unit installed on an unstable surface may fall and cause injury. Direct exposure to outdoor air may have an adverse effect on health. It may also result in food spoilage. Only use specified cables. Securely connect each cable so that the terminals do not carry the weight of the cable. Properly install the unit according to the instructions in the installation manual. Improperly connected or fixed cables may produce heat and start a fire. Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shock, smoke, and/or fire. Have all electrical work performed by an authorized electrician according to the local regulations and instructions in this manual, and a dedicated circuit must be used. Take appropriate safety measures against strong winds and earthquakes to prevent the unit from falling. If the unit is not installed properly, the unit may fall and cause serious injury to the person or damage to the unit. Insufficient capacity of the power supply circuit or improper installation may result in malfunctions of the unit, electric shock, smoke, and/or fire. Do not make any modifications or alterations to the unit. Consult your dealer for repair. Improper repair may result in water leakage, electric shock, smoke, and/or fire. Do not touch the heat exchanger fins. The fins are sharp and dangerous. HWE09080 i GB WARNING Securely attach the terminal block cover (panel) to the unit. After completing the service work, check for a gas leak. If the terminal block cover (panel) is not installed properly, dust and/or water may infiltrate and pose a risk of electric shock, smoke, and/or fire. If leaked refrigerant is exposed to a heat source, such as a fan heater, stove, or electric grill, poisonous gases may be produced. Only use the type of refrigerant that is indicated on the unit when installing or reinstalling the unit. Do not try to defeat the safety features of the unit. Infiltration of any other type of refrigerant or air into the unit may adversely affect the refrigerant cycle and may cause the pipes to burst or explode. Forced operation of the pressure switch or the temperature switch by defeating the safety features of these devices, or the use of accessories other than the ones that are recommended by MITSUBISHI may result in smoke, fire, and/or explosion. When installing the unit in a small room, exercise caution and take measures against leaked refrigerant reaching the limiting concentration. Only use accessories recommended by MITSUBISHI. Ask a qualified technician to install the unit. Improper installation by the user may result in water leakage, electric shock, smoke, and/or fire. Consult your dealer with any questions regarding limiting concentrations and for precautionary measures before installing the unit. Leaked refrigerant gas exceeding the limiting concentration causes oxygen deficiency. Control box houses high-voltage parts. When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less. (It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off.) Consult your dealer or a specialist when moving or reinstalling the unit. Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shock, and/or fire. HWE09080 ii GB Precautions for handling units for use with R410A CAUTION Do not use the existing refrigerant piping. Use a vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve. A large amount of chlorine that is contained in the residual refrigerant and refrigerator oil in the existing piping may cause the refrigerator oil in the new unit to deteriorate. R410A is a high-pressure refrigerant and can cause the existing pipes to burst. If a vacuum pump that is not equipped with a reverse-flow check valve is used, the vacuum pump oil may flow into the refrigerant cycle and cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate. Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper. Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes clean and free of such contaminants as sulfur, oxides, dust, dirt, shaving particles, oil, and water. Prepare tools for exclusive use with R410A. Do not use the following tools if they have been used with the conventional refrigerant (gauge manifold, charging hose, gas leak detector, reverse-flow check valve, refrigerant charge base, vacuum gauge, and refrigerant recovery equipment.). These types of contaminants inside the refrigerant pipes may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate. If the refrigerant or the refrigerating machine oil left on these tools are mixed in with R410A, it may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate. Infiltration of water may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate. Gas leak detectors for conventional refrigerants will not detect an R410A leak because R410A is free of chlorine. Store the pipes to be installed indoors, and keep both ends of the pipes sealed until immediately before brazing. (Keep elbows and other joints wrapped in plastic.) Infiltration of dust, dirt, or water into the refrigerant system may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate or cause the unit to malfunction. Do not use a charging cylinder. If a charging cylinder is used, the composition of the refrigerant will change, and the unit may experience power loss. Use a small amount of ester oil, ether oil, or alkylbenzene to coat flares and flanges. Infiltration of a large amount of mineral oil may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate. Exercise special care when handling the tools for use with R410A. Infiltration of dust, dirt, or water into the refrigerant system may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate. Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system. If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may result in performance loss. HWE09080 Only use refrigerant R410A. The use of other types of refrigerant that contain chlorine (i.e. R22) may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate. iii GB Before installing the unit WARNING Do not install the unit where a gas leak may occur. When installing the unit in a hospital, take appropriate measures to reduce noise interference. If gaseous refrigerant leaks and piles up around the unit, it may be ignited. High-frequency medical equipment may interfere with the normal operation of the air conditioner or vice versa. Do not use the unit to keep food items, animals, plants, artifacts, or for other special purposes. Do not install the unit on or over things that cannot get wet. The unit is not designed to preserve food products. When the humidity level exceeds 80% or if the drainage system is clogged, the indoor unit may drip water. Drain water is also discharged from the heat source unit. Install a centralized drainage system if necessary. Do not use the unit in an unusual environment. Do not install the unit where a large amount of oil or steam is present or where acidic or alkaline solutions or chemical sprays are used frequently. Doing so may lead to a remarkable drop in performance, electric shock, malfunctions, smoke, and/or fire. The presence of organic solvents or corrosive gas (i.e. ammonia, sulfur compounds, and acid) may cause gas leakage or water leakage. HWE09080 iv GB Before installing the unit (moving and reinstalling the unit) and performing electrical work CAUTION Properly ground the unit. Periodically check the installation base for damage. Do not connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod, or grounding wire from a telephone pole. Improper grounding may result in electric shock, smoke, fire, and/or malfunction due to noise interference. If the unit is left on a damaged platform, it may fall and cause injury. Properly install the drain pipes according to the instructions in the installation manual. Keep them insulated to avoid dew condensation. Do not put tension on the power supply wires. If tension is put on the wires, they may break and result in excessive heat, smoke, and/or fire. Improper plumbing work may result in water leakage and damage to the furnishings. Install an earth leakage breaker to avoid the risk of electric shock. Exercise caution when transporting products. Products weighing more than 20 kg should not be carried alone. Do not carry the product by the PP bands that are used on some products. Do not touch the heat exchanger fins. They are sharp and dangerous. When lifting the unit with a crane, secure all four corners to prevent the unit from falling. Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shock, smoke, and/or fire. Use the kind of power supply wires that are specified in the installation manual. The use of wrong kind of power supply wires may result in current leak, electric shock, and/or fire. Properly dispose of the packing materials. Use breakers and fuses (current breaker, remote switch, moulded case circuit breaker) with the proper current capacity. Nails and wood pieces in the package may pose a risk of injury. Plastic bags may pose a risk of choking hazard to children. Tear plastic bags into pieces before disposing of them. The use of wrong capacity fuses, steel wires, or copper wires may result in malfunctions, smoke, and/or fire. Do not spray water on the air conditioner or immerse the air conditioner in water. Otherwise, electric shock and/or fire may result. When handling units, always wear protective gloves to protect your hands from metal parts and high-temperature parts. HWE09080 v GB Before the test run CAUTION Turn on the unit at least 12 hours before the test run. Do not operate the unit without panels and safety guards. Keep the unit turned on throughout the season. If the unit is turned off in the middle of a season, it may result in malfunctions. Rotating, high-temperature, or high-voltage parts on the unit pose a risk of burns and/or electric shock. To avoid the risk of electric shock or malfunction of the unit, do not operate switches with wet hands. Do not turn off the power immediately after stopping the operation. Keep the unit on for at least five minutes before turning off the power to prevent water leakage or malfunction. Do not touch the refrigerant pipes with bare hands during and immediately after operation. Do not operate the unit without the air filter. During or immediately after operation, certain parts of the unit such as pipes and compressor may be either very cold or hot, depending on the state of the refrigerant in the unit at the time. To reduce the risk of frost bites and burns, do not touch these parts with bare hands. HWE09080 Dust particles may build up in the system and cause malfunctions. vi GB CONTENTS I Read Before Servicing [1] Read Before Servicing.............................................................................................................. 3 [2] Necessary Tools and Materials ................................................................................................ 4 [3] Piping Materials ........................................................................................................................ 5 [4] Storage of Piping ...................................................................................................................... 7 [5] Pipe Processing........................................................................................................................ 7 [6] Brazing...................................................................................................................................... 8 [7] Air Tightness Test..................................................................................................................... 9 [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) .................................................................................................. 10 [9] Refrigerant Charging .............................................................................................................. 12 [10] Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak............................................................ 12 [11] Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants ............................................ 13 [12] Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil...................................................................................... 14 II Restrictions [1] System configuration .............................................................................................................. 17 [2] Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables .................................................................. 18 [3] Switch Settings and Address Settings .................................................................................... 19 [4] Sample System Connection ................................................................................................... 26 [5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected ........................... 27 [6] An Example of a System to which an ME Remote Controller is connected ........................... 49 [7] An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected .................................................................................... 53 [8] Restrictions on Pipe Length.................................................................................................... 58 III Heat source Unit Components [1] Heat source Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit........................................................... 75 [2] Control Box of the Heat source Unit ....................................................................................... 78 [3] Heat source Unit Circuit Board ............................................................................................... 81 [4] BC Controller Components..................................................................................................... 88 [5] Control Box of the BC Controller ............................................................................................ 91 [6] BC Controller Circuit Board .................................................................................................... 92 IV Remote Controller [1] Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers .......................................... 97 [2] Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller .................................... 98 [3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller .................................................................. 102 [4] Using the built-in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller........................................ 103 V Electrical Wiring Diagram [1] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Heat source Unit................................................................ 107 [2] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the BC Controller..................................................................... 111 [3] Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster.............................................................. 120 VI Refrigerant Circuit [1] Refrigerant Circuit Diagram .................................................................................................. 123 [2] Principal Parts and Functions ............................................................................................... 126 VII Control [1] Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches .............................................................. 137 [2] Controlling the Heat source Unit........................................................................................... 143 [3] Controlling BC Controller ...................................................................................................... 160 [4] Operation Flow Chart............................................................................................................ 161 VIII Test Run Mode [1] Items to be checked before a Test Run................................................................................ 175 [2] Test Run Method .................................................................................................................. 176 [3] Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount................................................................ 177 [4] Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount......................................................................................... 177 [5] Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode.......................................................................................... 182 [6] The following symptoms are normal. .................................................................................... 186 [7] Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) ......................................................................... 187 HWE09080 GB CONTENTS IX Troubleshooting [1] Error Code Lists.................................................................................................................... 227 [2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller........................................................ 230 [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise ............................................................... 303 [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts............................................................................................ 306 [5] Refrigerant Leak ................................................................................................................... 343 [6] Compressor Replacement Instructions................................................................................. 347 [7] Servicing the BC controller ................................................................................................... 353 [8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display .......................................... 356 X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board [1] How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor ...................................................................... 359 HWE09080 GB I Read Before Servicing [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] HWE09080 Read Before Servicing ....................................................................................................... 3 Necessary Tools and Materials.......................................................................................... 4 Piping Materials ................................................................................................................. 5 Storage of Piping ............................................................................................................... 7 Pipe Processing ................................................................................................................. 7 Brazing............................................................................................................................... 8 Air Tightness Test .............................................................................................................. 9 Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) ........................................................................................... 10 Refrigerant Charging........................................................................................................ 12 Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak ....................................................... 12 Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants ....................................... 13 Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil ................................................................................. 14 -1- GB -2- [ I Read Before Servicing ] I Read Before Servicing [1] Read Before Servicing 1. Check the type of refrigerant used in the system to be serviced. Refrigerant Type Multi air conditioner for building application CITY MULTI WY/WR2 THMU-A/YHMU-A series: R410A 2. Check the symptoms exhibited by the unit to be serviced. Refer to this service handbook for symptoms relating to the refrigerant cycle. 3. Thoroughly read the safety precautions at the beginning of this manual. 4. Preparing necessary tools: Prepare a set of tools to be used exclusively with each type of refrigerant. Refer to "Necessary Tools and Materials" for information on the use of tools.(page 4) 5. Verification of the connecting pipes: Verify the type of refrigerant used for the unit to be moved or replaced. Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper. Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes clean and free of such contaminants as sulfur, oxides, dust, dirt, shaving particles, oil, and water. These types of contaminants inside the refrigerant pipes may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate. 6. If there is a leak of gaseous refrigerant and the remaining refrigerant is exposed to an open flame, a poisonous gas hydrofluoric acid may form. Keep workplace well ventilated. CAUTION Install new pipes immediately after removing old ones to keep moisture out of the refrigerant circuit. The use of refrigerant that contains chloride, such as R22, will cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate. HWE09080 -3- GB [ I Read Before Servicing ] [2] Necessary Tools and Materials Prepare the following tools and materials necessary for installing and servicing the unit. Tools for use with R410A (Adaptability of tools that are for use with R22 or R407C) 1. To be used exclusively with R410A (not to be used if used with R22 or R407C) Tools/Materials Use Notes Gauge Manifold Evacuation and refrigerant charging Higher than 5.09MPa[738psi] on the high-pressure side Charging Hose Evacuation and refrigerant charging The hose diameter is larger than the conventional model. Refrigerant Recovery Cylinder Refrigerant recovery Refrigerant Cylinder Refrigerant charging The refrigerant type is indicated. The cylinder is pink. Charging Port on the Refrigerant Cylinder Refrigerant charging The charge port diameter is larger than that of the current port. Flare Nut Use Type-2 Flare nuts. Connection of the unit with the pipes 2. Tools and materials that may be used with R410A with some restrictions Tools/Materials Use Notes Gas Leak Detector Gas leak detection The ones for use with HFC refrigerant may be used. Vacuum Pump Vacuum drying May be used if a check valve adapter is attached. Flare Tool Flare processing Flare processing dimensions for the piping in the system using the new refrigerant differ from those of R22. Refer to I [3] Piping Materials. Refrigerant Recovery Equipment Refrigerant recovery May be used if compatible with R410A. 3. Tools and materials that are used with R22 or R407C that may also be used with R410A Tools/Materials Use Vacuum Pump with a Check Valve Vacuum drying Bender Bending pipes Torque Wrench Tightening flare nuts Pipe Cutter Cutting pipes Welder and Nitrogen Cylinder Welding pipes Refrigerant Charging Meter Refrigerant charging Vacuum Gauge Vacuum level check Notes Only the flare processing dimensions for pipes that have a diameter of ø12.70 (1/2") and ø15.88 (5/8") have been changed. 4. Tools and materials that must not be used with R410A Tools/Materials Charging Cylinder Use Refrigerant charging Notes Prohibited to use Tools for R410A must be handled with special care to keep moisture and dust from infiltrating the cycle. HWE09080 -4- GB [ I Read Before Servicing ] [3] Piping Materials Do not use the existing piping! 1. Copper pipe materials O-material (Annealed) Soft copper pipes (annealed copper pipes). They can easily be bent with hands. 1/2H-material (Drawn) Hard copper pipes (straight pipes). They are stronger than the O-material (Annealed) at the same radial thickness. The distinction between O-materials (Annealed) and 1/2H-materials (Drawn) is made based on the strength of the pipes themselves. 2. Types of copper pipes Maximum working pressure Refrigerant type 3.45 MPa [500psi] R22, R407C etc. 4.30 MPa [624psi] R410A etc. 3. Piping materials/Radial thickness Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper. The operation pressure of the units that use R410A is higher than that of the units that use R22. Use pipes that have at least the radial thickness specified in the chart below. (Pipes with a radial thickness of 0.7 mm or less may not be used.) Pipe size (mm[in]) Radial thickness (mm) ø6.35 [1/4"] 0.8t ø9.52 [3/8"] 0.8t ø12.7 [1/2"] 0.8t ø15.88 [5/8"] 1.0t ø19.05 [3/4"] 1.0t ø22.2 [7/8"] 1.0t ø25.4 [1"] 1.0t ø28.58 [1-1/8"] 1.0t ø31.75 [1-1/4"] 1.1t ø34.93 [1-3/8"] 1.1t ø41.28 [1-5/8"] 1.2t Type O-material (Annealed) 1/2H-material, H-material (Drawn) The pipes in the system that uses the refrigerant currently on the market are made with O-material (Annealed), even if the pipe diameter is less than ø19.05 (3/4"). For a system that uses R410A, use pipes that are made with 1/2H-material (Drawn) unless the pipe diameter is at least ø19.05 (3/4") and the radial thickness is at least 1.2t. The figures in the radial thickness column are based on the Japanese standards and provided only as a reference. Use pipes that meet the local standards. HWE09080 -5- GB [ I Read Before Servicing ] 4. Thickness and refrigerant type indicated on the piping materials Ask the pipe manufacturer for the symbols indicated on the piping material for new refrigerant. 5. Flare processing (O-material (Annealed) and OL-material only) The flare processing dimensions for the pipes that are used in the R410A system are larger than those in the R22 system. Flare processing dimensions (mm[in]) A dimension (mm) R410A R22, R407C ø6.35 [1/4"] 9.1 9.0 ø9.52 [3/8"] 13.2 13.0 ø12.7 [1/2"] 16.6 16.2 ø15.88 [5/8"] 19.7 19.4 ø19.05 [3/4"] 24.0 23.3 Dimension A Pipe size (mm[in]) (ø19.05 pipes should have a radial thickness of 1.2 t and be made of annealed materials.) If a clutch-type flare tool is used to flare the pipes in the system using R410A, the length of the pipes must be between 1.0 and 1.5 mm. For margin adjustment, a copper pipe gauge is necessary. 6. Flare nut The flare nut type has been changed to increase the strength. The size of some of the flare nuts have also been changed. Flare nut dimensions (mm[in]) B dimension (mm) Pipe size (mm[in]) R410A R22, R407C ø6.35 [1/4"] 17.0 17.0 ø9.52 [3/8"] 22.0 22.0 ø12.7 [1/2"] 26.0 24.0 ø15.88 [5/8"] 29.0 27.0 ø19.05 [3/4"] 36.0 36.0 Dimension B The figures in the radial thickness column are based on the Japanese standards and provided only as a reference. Use pipes that meet the local standards. HWE09080 -6- GB [ I Read Before Servicing ] [4] Storage of Piping 1. Storage location Store the pipes to be used indoors. (Warehouse at site or owner's warehouse) If they are left outdoors, dust, dirt, or moisture may infiltrate and contaminate the pipe. 2. Sealing the pipe ends Both ends of the pipes should be sealed until just before brazing. Keep elbow pipes and T-joints in plastic bags. The new refrigerator oil is 10 times as hygroscopic as the conventional refrigerating machine oil (such as Suniso) and, if not handled with care, could easily introduce moisture into the system. Keep moisture out of the pipes, for it will cause the oil to deteriorate and cause a compressor failure. [5] Pipe Processing Use a small amount of ester oil, ether oil, or alkylbenzene to coat flares and flanges. Use a minimum amount of oil. Use only ester oil, ether oil, and alkylbenzene. HWE09080 -7- GB [ I Read Before Servicing ] [6] Brazing No changes have been made in the brazing procedures. Perform brazing with special care to keep foreign objects (such as oxide scale, water, and dust) out of the refrigerant system. Example: Inside the brazed connection Use of oxidized solder for brazing Use of non-oxidized solder for brazing 1. Items to be strictly observed Do not conduct refrigerant piping work outdoors if raining. Use non-oxidized solder. Use a brazing material (BCuP-3) that requires no flux when brazing between copper pipes or between a copper pipe and copper coupling. If installed refrigerant pipes are not immediately connected to the equipment, then braze and seal both ends. 2. Reasons The new refrigerating machine oil is 10 times as hygroscopic as the conventional oil and is more likely to cause unit failure if water infiltrates into the system. Flux generally contains chloride. Residual flux in the refrigerant circuit will cause sludge to form. 3. Notes Do not use commercially available antioxidants because they may cause the pipes to corrode or refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate. HWE09080 -8- GB [ I Read Before Servicing ] [7] Air Tightness Test No changes have been made in the detection method. Note that a refrigerant leak detector for R22 will not detect an R410A leak. Halide torch R22 leakage detector 1. Items to be strictly observed Pressurize the equipment with nitrogen up to the design pressure (4.15MPa[601psi]), and then judge the equipment's air tightness, taking temperature variations into account. Refrigerant R410A must be charged in its liquid state (vs. gaseous state). 2. Reasons Oxygen, if used for an air tightness test, poses a risk of explosion. (Only use nitrogen to check air tightness.) Refrigerant R410A must be charged in its liquid state. If gaseous refrigerant in the cylinder is drawn out first, the composition of the remaining refrigerant in the cylinder will change and become unsuitable for use. 3. Notes Procure a leak detector that is specifically designed to detect an HFC leak. A leak detector for R22 will not detect an HFC(R410A) leak. HWE09080 -9- GB [ I Read Before Servicing ] [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) (Photo1) 15010H (Photo2) 14010 Recommended vacuum gauge: ROBINAIR 14010 Thermistor Vacuum Gauge 1. Vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve (Photo1) To prevent the vacuum pump oil from flowing into the refrigerant circuit during power OFF or power failure, use a vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve. A reverse-flow check valve may also be added to the vacuum pump currently in use. 2. Standard of vacuum degree (Photo 2) Use a vacuum pump that attains 0.5Torr(65Pa) or lower degree of vacuum after 5 minutes of operation, and connect it directly to the vacuum gauge. Use a pump well-maintained with an appropriate lubricant. A poorly maintained vacuum pump may not be able to attain the desired degree of vacuum. 3. Required precision of vacuum gauge Use a vacuum gauge that registers a vacuum degree of 5Torr(650Pa) and measures at intervals of 1Torr(130Pa). (A recommended vacuum gauge is shown in Photo2.) Do not use a commonly used gauge manifold because it cannot register a vacuum degree of 5Torr(650Pa). 4. Evacuation time After the degree of vacuum has reached 5Torr(650Pa), evacuate for an additional 1 hour. (A thorough vacuum drying removes moisture in the pipes.) Verify that the vacuum degree has not risen by more than 1Torr(130Pa) 1hour after evacuation. A rise by less than 1Torr(130Pa) is acceptable. If the vacuum is lost by more than 1Torr(130Pa), conduct evacuation, following the instructions in section 6. Special vacuum drying. 5. Procedures for stopping vacuum pump To prevent the reverse flow of vacuum pump oil, open the relief valve on the vacuum pump side, or draw in air by loosening the charge hose, and then stop the operation. The same procedures should be followed when stopping a vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve. 6. Special vacuum drying When 5Torr(650Pa) or lower degree of vacuum cannot be attained after 3 hours of evacuation, it is likely that water has penetrated the system or that there is a leak. If water infiltrates the system, break the vacuum with nitrogen. Pressurize the system with nitrogen gas to 0.5kgf/cm2G(0.05MPa) and evacuate again. Repeat this cycle of pressurizing and evacuation either until the degree of vacuum below 5Torr(650Pa) is attained or until the pressure stops rising. Only use nitrogen gas for vacuum breaking. (The use of oxygen may result in an explosion.) HWE09080 - 10 - GB [ I Read Before Servicing ] 7. Notes To evacuate air from the entire system Applying a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve (BV1 and 2) is not enough to attain the desired vacuum pressure. Be sure to apply a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve (BV1 and 2) and also through the check joints on the high and low pressure sides (CJ1 and 2). To evacuate air only from the heat source units Apply a vacuum through the check joints on the high and low pressure sides (CJ1, and 2). To evacuate air from the indoor units and extension pipes Apply a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve (BV1 and 2). HWE09080 - 11 - GB [ I Read Before Servicing ] [9] Refrigerant Charging Cylinder without a siphon Cylinder with a siphon Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder color R410A is pink. Refrigerant charging in the liquid state Valve Valve liquid liquid 1. Reasons R410A is a pseudo-azeotropic HFC blend (boiling point R32=-52°C[-62°F], R125=-49°C[-52°F]) and can almost be handled the same way as a single refrigerant, such as R22. To be safe, however, draw out the refrigerant from the cylinder in the liquid phase. If the refrigerant in the gaseous phase is drawn out, the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and become unsuitable for use. 2. Notes When using a cylinder with a siphon, refrigerant is charged in the liquid state without the need for turning it upside down. Check the type of the cylinder on the label before use. [10] Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak If the refrigerant leaks out, it may be replenished. The entire refrigerant does not need to be replaced. (Charge refrigerant in the liquid state.) Refer to "IX [5] Refrigerant Leak."(page 343) HWE09080 - 12 - GB [ I Read Before Servicing ] [11] Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants 1. Chemical property As with R22, the new refrigerant (R410A) is low in toxicity and chemically stable nonflammable refrigerant. However, because the specific gravity of vapor refrigerant is greater than that of air, leaked refrigerant in a closed room will accumulate at the bottom of the room and may cause hypoxia. If exposed to an open flame, refrigerant will generate poisonous gases. Do not perform installation or service work in a confined area. New Refrigerant (HFC type) Conventional Refrigerant (HCFC type) R410A R407C R22 R32/R125 R32/R125/R134a R22 Composition (wt%) (50/50) (23/25/52) (100) Type of Refrigerant Pseudo-azeotropic Refrigerant Non-azeotropic Refrigerant Single Refrigerant Not included Not included Included A1/A1 A1/A1 A1 72.6 86.2 86.5 Boiling Point (°C/°F) -51.4/-60.5 -43.6/-46.4 -40.8/-41.4 Steam Pressure (25°C,MPa/77°F,psi) (gauge) 1.557/226 0.9177/133 0.94/136 64.0 42.5 44.4 Nonflammable Nonflammable Nonflammable 0 0 0.055 1730 1530 1700 Refrigerant charging in the liquid state Refrigerant charging in the liquid state Refrigerant charging in the gaseous state Available Available Available Chloride Safety Class Molecular Weight Saturated Steam Density (25°C,kg/m3/77°F,psi) Flammability Ozone Depletion Coefficient (ODP)*1 *2 Global Warming Coefficient (GWP) Refrigerant Charging Method Replenishment of Refrigerant after a Refrigerant Leak *1 When CFC11 is used as a reference *2 When CO2 is used as a reference 2. Refrigerant composition R410A is a pseudo-azeotropic HFC blend and can almost be handled the same way as a single refrigerant, such as R22. To be safe, however, draw out the refrigerant from the cylinder in the liquid phase. If the refrigerant in the gaseous phase is drawn out, the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and become unsuitable for use. If the refrigerant leaks out, it may be replenished. The entire refrigerant does not need to be replaced. 3. Pressure characteristics The pressure in the system using R410A is 1.6 times as great as that in the system using R22. Pressure (gauge) Temperature (°C/°F) HWE09080 R410A R407C R22 MPa/psi MPa/psi MPa/psi -20/-4 0.30/44 0.18/26 0.14/20 0/32 0.70/102 0.47/68 0.40/58 20/68 1.34/194 0.94/136 0.81/117 40/104 2.31/335 1.44/209 1.44/209 60/140 3.73/541 2.44/354 2.33/338 65/149 4.17/605 2.75/399 2.60/377 - 13 - GB [ I Read Before Servicing ] [12] Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil 1. Refrigerating machine oil in the HFC refrigerant system HFC type refrigerants use a refrigerating machine oil different from that used in the R22 system. Note that the ester oil used in the system has properties that are different from commercially available ester oil. Refrigerant Refrigerating machine oil R22 Mineral oil R407C Ester oil R410A Ester oil 2. Effects of contaminants*1 Refrigerating machine oil used in the HFC system must be handled with special care to keep contaminants out. The table below shows the effect of contaminants in the refrigerating machine oil on the refrigeration cycle. 3. The effects of contaminants in the refrigerating machine oil on the refrigeration cycle. Cause Symptoms Water infiltration Frozen expansion valve and capillary tubes Hydrolysis Air infiltration Effects on the refrigerant cycle Sludge formation and adhesion Acid generation Oxidization Oil degradation Clogged expansion valve and capillary tubes Poor cooling performance Compressor overheat Motor insulation failure Burnt motor Coppering of the orbiting scroll Lock Burn-in on the orbiting scroll Oxidization Adhesion to expansion valve and capillary tubes Clogged expansion valve, capillary tubes, and drier Poor cooling performance Compressor overheat Infiltration of contaminants into the compressor Burn-in on the orbiting scroll Sludge formation and adhesion Clogged expansion valve and capillary tubes Poor cooling performance Compressor overheat Oil degradation Burn-in on the orbiting scroll Dust, dirt Infiltration of contaminants Mineral oil etc. *1. Contaminants is defined as moisture, air, processing oil, dust/dirt, wrong types of refrigerant, and refrigerating machine oil. HWE09080 - 14 - GB II Restrictions [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] System configuration ....................................................................................................... 17 Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables ........................................................... 18 Switch Settings and Address Settings ............................................................................. 19 Sample System Connection............................................................................................. 26 An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected..................... 27 An Example of a System to which an ME Remote Controller is connected..................... 49 An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected.............................................................................. 53 [8] Restrictions on Pipe Length ............................................................................................. 58 HWE09080 - 15 - GB - 16 - [ II Restrictions ] II Restrictions [1] System configuration 1. Table of compatible indoor units The table below summarizes the types of indoor units that are compatible with different types of heat source units. Composing units Heat source units Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units Maximum number of connectable indoor units P72 - - - 36 - 93 1 - 15 P96 - - - 48 - 124 1 - 20 P120 - - - 60 - 156 1 - 26 P144 P72 P72 - 72 - 187 1 - 31 P168 P96 P72 - 84 - 218 1 - 36 P192 P96 P96 - 96 - 249 1 - 41 P216 P120 P96 - 108 - 280 2 - 46 P240 P120 P120 - 120 - 312 P264 P96 P96 P72 132 - 343 P288 P96 P96 P96 144 - 374 P312 P120 P96 P96 156- 405 P336 P120 P120 P96 168 - 436 P360 P120 P120 P120 180 - 468 Types of connectable indoor units P06 - P96 models R410A series indoor units 2 - 50 1) "Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units" refers to the sum of the numeric values in the indoor unit model names. 2) If the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to a given heat source unit exceeds the capacity of the heat source unit, the indoor units will not be able to perform at the rated capacity when they are operated simultaneously. Select a combination of units so that the total capacity of the connected indoor units is at or below the capacity of the heat source unit whenever possible. 1. Table of compatible indoor units The table below summarizes the types of indoor units that are compatible with different types of heat source units. Heat source units Composing units Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units Maximum number of connectable indoor units P72 - - 36- 108 1 - 18 P96 - - 48 - 144 1 - 24 P120 - - 60 - 180 1 - 30 P144 P72 P72 72 - 216 1 - 36 P168 P96 P72 84 - 252 1 - 42 P192 P96 P96 96 - 288 1 - 48 P216 P120 P96 108 - 324 P240 P120 P120 120 - 360 Types of connectable indoor units P06 - P96 models R410A series indoor units 2 - 50 1) "Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units" refers to the sum of the numeric values in the indoor unit model names. 2) If the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to a given heat source unit exceeds the capacity of the heat source unit, the indoor units will not be able to perform at the rated capacity when they are operated simultaneously. Select a combination of units so that the total capacity of the connected indoor units is at or below the capacity of the heat source unit whenever possible. HWE09080 - 17 - GB [ II Restrictions ] [2] Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables 1. Wiring work (1) Notes 1) Have all electrical work performed by an authorized electrician according to the local regulations and instructions in this manual. 2) Install external transmission cables at least 5cm [1-31/32"] away from the power supply cable to avoid noise interference. (Do not put the control cable and power supply cable in the same conduit tube.) 3) Provide grounding for the heat source unit as required. 4) Run the cable from the electric box of the indoor or heat source unit in such way that the box is accessible for servicing. 5) Do not connect power supply wiring to the terminal block for transmission line. Doing so will damage the electronic components on the terminal block. 6) Use 2-core shielded cables as transmission cables. Use a separate 2-core control cable for each refrigerant system. Do not use a single multiple-core cable to connect indoor units that belong to different refrigerant systems. The use of a multiple-core cable may result in signal transmission errors and malfunctions. Heat source unit Heat source unit BC Controller Indoor unit TB TB 3 7 BC Controller Indoor unit TB TB 3 7 TB TB 3 7 TB TB 3 7 multiple-core cable 2-core shielded cable Remote Controller Remote Controller TB TB 3 7 TB TB 3 7 TB TB 3 7 TB TB 3 7 2-core shielded cable TB3: Terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line TB7: Terminal block for centralized control (2) Control wiring Different types of control wiring are used for different systems. Refer to section "[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected - [7] An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected" before performing wiring work. Types and maximum allowable length of cables Control lines are categorized into 2 types: transmission line and remote controller line. Use the appropriate type of cables and observe the maximum allowable length specified for a given system. If a given system has a long transmission line or if a noise source is located near the unit, place the unit away from the noise source to reduce noise interference. 1) M-NET transmission line Facility type Type All facility types Shielded cable CVVS, CPEVS, MVVS Cable type Number of cores 2-core cable Cable size Larger than 1.25mm2 [AWG16] Maximum transmission line distance between the heat source unit and the farthest indoor unit 200 m [656ft] max. Maximum transmission line distance for central500 m [1640ft] max. ized control and Indoor*The maximum overall line length from the power supply unit on the transmission lines for heat source transmission centralized control to each heat source unit or to the system controller is 200m [656ft] max. line (Maximum line distance via heat source unit) HWE09080 - 18 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 2) Remote controller wiring MA remote controller*1 M-NET remote controller*2 Type VCTF, VCTFK, CVV, CVS, VVR, VVF, VCT Shielded cable MVVS Number of cores 2-core cable 2-core cable Cable size 0.3 to 1.25mm2 *3 [AWG22 to 16] (0.75 to 1.25mm2 ) [AWG18 to 16] 0.3 to 1.25mm2 *3 [AWG22 to 16] (0.75 to 1.25mm2 ) [AWG18 to 16] Cable type Maximum overall line length *4 *4 The section of the cable that exceeds 10m [32ft] must be included in the maximum indoor-heat source transmission line distance. 200 m [656ft] max. *1 MA remote controller refers to MA remote controller (PAR-20MAA, PAR-21MAA), MA simple remote controller, and wireless remote controller. *2 M-NET remote controller refers to ME remote controller and ME simple remote controller. *3 The use of cables that are smaller than 0.75mm2 [AWG18] is recommended for easy handling. *4 When connected to the terminal block on the Simple remote controller, use cables that meet the cable size specifications shown in the parenthesis. [3] Switch Settings and Address Settings 1. Switch setting Refer to section "[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected - [7] An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected" before performing wiring work. Set the switches while the power is turned off. If the switch settings are changed while the unit is being powered, those changes will not take effect, and the unit will not function properly. Units on which to set the switches Symbol Units to which the power must be shut off IC Heat source units *3 and Indoor units LOSSNAY, OA processing unit *1 LC Heat source units *3 and LOSSNAY M-NET remote controller Main/sub remote controller RC Heat source units *3 MA remote controller Main/sub remote controller MA Indoor units CITY MULTI heat source unit*2 OC,OS Heat source units *3 BC controller Main BC Heat source units *3 and BC controller Sub1, 2 BS1, BS2 Heat source units *3 and BC controller CITY MULTI indoor unit Main/sub unit *1. Applicable when LOSSNAY units are connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line. *2. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). *3. Turn off the power to all the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. HWE09080 - 19 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 2. M-NET Address settings (1) Address settings table The need for address settings and the range of address setting depend on the configuration of the system. Unit or controller Setting method Factory address setting Symbol Address setting range IC 0, 01 to Assign the smallest address to the main indoor unit in the 50*1 *4 *6 group, and assign sequential address numbers to the rest of the indoor units in the same group. In an R2 system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. 00 LOSSNAY, OA processing unit LC 00 M-NET remote controller RC 0, 01 to Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these 50*1 *4 *6 units after assigning an address to all indoor units. 101 to Add 100 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in 150 the same group. 151 to Add 150 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in 200*3 the same group. No address settings required. (The main/sub setting must be made if 2 remote controllers are connected to the system.) CITY MULTI Main/sub unit indoor unit M-NET adapter M-NET control interface Free Plan adapter Main remote controller Sub remote controller MA remote controller System controller MA Main OC OS 0, 51 to 100*1 *2 Assign an address that equals the lowest address of the indoor units in the same refrigerant circuit plus 50. Assign sequential addresses to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. *5 00 BC controller (main) BC 0, 51 to 100*1 *2 Assign an address that equals the address of the heat source unit in the same refrigerant system plus 1. If a given address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller, use a different, unused address within the setting range. 00 BC controller (sub1, 2) BS1 BS2 51 to 100 *2 Assign an address to both the sub BC controller 1 and 2 that equals the lowest address of the indoor units that are connected to each of them plus 50. If a sub BC controller is connected, the automatic startup function is not available. Group remote controller System remote controller ON/OFF remote controller Schedule timer (compatible with M-NET) Central controller AG-150A, G(B)-50A Expansion controller PAC-YG50ECA LM adapter GR SC SR SC AN SC ST SC TR SC 201 to 250 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest group number of the group to be controlled and 200. Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range listed on the left to each unit. Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest group number of the group to be controlled and 200. Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range listed on the left to each unit. Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range listed on the left to each unit. The address must be set to "0" to control the K-control unit. 201 SC 201 to 250 Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range listed on the left to each unit. 247 CITY MULTI heat source unit Auxiliary heat source unit RC 101 *6 *6 0, 201 to 250 202 000 *1. If a given address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to other units, use a different, unused address within the setting range. *2. To set the heat source unit address or the auxiliary heat source unit address to "100," set the rotary switches to "50." *3. To set the M-NET remote controller address to "200," set the rotary switches to "00." *4. Some models of indoor units have two or three control boards. Assign an address to the No.1, No. 2, and No. 3 control boards so that the No. 2 control board address equals the No. 1 control board address plus 1, and that the No. 3 control board address equals the No. 1 control board address plus 2. *5. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, and OS. They are designated as OC, and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). *6. No address settings are required for units in a system with a single heat source unit (with some exceptions). Address setting is required if a sub BC controller is connected. HWE09080 - 20 - GB [ II Restrictions ] (2) Power supply switch connector connection on the heat source unit (Factory setting: The male power supply switch connector is connected to CN41.) There are limitations on the total number of units that are connectable to each refrigerant system. Refer to the DATABOOK for details. System configuration System with one heat source unit System with multiple heat source units Power supply unit Connection to the system con- for transmission lines troller _ Group operation of units in a system with multiple heat source units _ Not connected _ _ Power supply switch connector connection Leave CN41 as it is (Factory setting) Not grouped Grouped With connection to the indoorheat source transmission line Not required Grouped/not grouped With connection to the centralized control system Not required*1 (Powered from the heat source unit) Grouped/not grouped Required *1 Grouped/not grouped Disconnect the male connector from the female power supply switch connector (CN41) and connect it to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on only one of the heat source units.*2 *Connect the S (shielded) terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source unit whose CN41 was replaced with CN40 to the ground terminal ( ) on the electric box. Leave CN41 as it is (Factory setting) *1 The need for a power supply unit for transmission lines depends on the system configuration. *2 The replacement of the power jumper connector from CN41 to CN40 must be performed on only one heat source unit in the system. (3) Settings for the centralized control switch for the heat source unit (Factory setting: SW2-1 are set to OFF.) Centralized control switch settings *1 System configuration Connection to the system controller Not connected Leave it to OFF. (Factory setting) Connection to the system controller Connected*2 ON *1. Set SW2-1 on all heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit to the same setting. *2. When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is). (4) Selecting the position of temperature detection for the indoor unit (Factory setting: SW1-1 set to "OFF".) To stop the fan during heating Thermo-OFF (SW1-7 and 1-8 on the indoor units to be set to ON), use the built-in thermistor on the remote controller or an optional thermistor. 1) To use the built-in sensor on the remote controller, set the SW1-1 to ON. Some models of remote controllers are not equipped with a built-in temperature sensor. Use the built-in temperature sensor on the indoor unit instead. When using the built-in sensor on the remote controller, install the remote controller where room temperature can be detected. (Note) Factory setting for SW1-1 on the indoor unit of the All-Fresh Models is ON. 2) When an optional temperature sensor is used, set SW1-1 to OFF, and set SW3-8 to ON. When using an optional temperature sensor, install it where room temperature can be detected. HWE09080 - 21 - GB [ II Restrictions ] (5) Various start-stop controls (Indoor unit settings) Each indoor unit (or group of indoor units) can be controlled individually by setting SW 1-9 and 1-10. Function Operation of the indoor unit when the operation is resumed after the unit was stopped Setting (SW1)*4 *5 9 10 Power ON/OFF by the plug*1,*2,*3 Indoor unit will go into operation regardless of its operation status before power off (power failure). (In approx. 5 minutes) OFF ON Automatic restoration after power failure Indoor unit will go into operation if it was in operation when the power was turned off (or cut off due to power failure). (In approx. 5 minutes) ON OFF Indoor unit will remain stopped regardless of its operation status before power off (power failure). OFF ON *1. Do not cut off power to the heat source unit. Cutting off the power supply to the heat source unit will cut off the power supply to the crankcase heater and may cause the compressor to malfunction when the unit is put back into operation. *2. Not applicable to units with a built-in drain pump or humidifier. *3. Models with a built-in drain pump cannot be turned on/off by the plug individually. All the units in the same refrigerant circuits will be turned on or off by the plug. *4. Requires that the dipswitch settings for all the units in the group be made. *5. Set SW1-9 and SW1-10 to ON to control the external input from/output to the air conditioning units via AG-150A or G(B)50A using the PLC software for general equipment. With these settings made, the power start-stop function becomes disabled. To use the auto recovery function after power failure while these settings are made, set SW1-5 to ON. (6) Miscellaneous settings Cooling-only setting for the indoor unit: Cooling only model (Factory setting: SW3-1 "OFF.") When using indoor unit as a cooling-only unit, set SW3-1 to ON. (7) Various types of control using input-output signal connector on the heat source unit (various connection options) Type Usage Function Input Prohibiting cooling/heating operation (thermo OFF) by an external input to the heat source unit. * Usable for demand control of each refrigerant system DEMAND (level) Terminal to be used*1 CN3D*2 Performs a low level noise operation of the heat source unit by Low-noise mode an external input to the heat source unit. (level)*3 *4 * It can be used as the silent operation device for each refrigerant system. Output Option Adapter for external input (PACSC36NAE) Cooling/heating operation can be changed by an external input to the heat source unit (OC). Auto-changeover CN3N Receives interlock operation signal input from the water circuit pump (field-supplied) Pump interlock operation signal input TB-8 (between poles 3 and 4) *Minimum guaranteed current at no-voltage input contact: 5 mA or below _ Outputs signals to perform interlocked operation of heat source unit and water circuit pump Signal output patterns *When DIP SW2-7 is set to off (factory setting) Signals are output while the compressor is in operation. *When DIP SW2-7 is set to ON Signals are output from the controller while receiving cooling or heating signal. Signals are output while the compressor is stopped during Thermo-OFF. Pump interlock operation signal TB-8 (between poles 1 and 2) *Contact rating: 200VAC 1A or below _ How to extract signals from the heat source unit Operation status CN51 *It can be used as an operation status display device. of the compressor *It can be used for an interlock operation with external devicError status es. Adapter for external output (PACSC37SAE) *1. For detailed drawing, refer to "Example of wiring connection". *2. For details, refer to the next section "Demand control". HWE09080 - 22 - GB [ II Restrictions ] *3. Low-noise mode is valid when Dip SW4-4 on the heat source unit is set to OFF. When DIP SW4-4 is set to ON, 4 levels of on-DEMAND are possible, using different configurations of low-noise mode input and DEMAND input settings.When 2 or more heat source units exist in one refrigerant circuit system, 8 levels of on-DEMAND are possible. When 3 heat source units exist in one refrigerant circuitsystem, 12 levels of on-DEMAND are possible. *4. By setting Dip SW5-5, the Low-noise mode can be switched between the Capacity priority mode and the Low-noise priority mode. When SW5-5 is set to ON: The low-noise mode always remains effective. When SW5-5 is set to OFF: The low noise mode is cancelled when certain operation pressure criteria are met, and the unit goes into normal operation (capacity priority mode). Low-noise mod is effective. Capacity priority mode becomes effective. Cooling Heating Cooling Heating 63HS1<32kg/cm2 63LS>4.6kg/cm2 63HS1>35kg/cm2 63LS<3.9kg/cm2 *5. When multiple heat source units exist in one refrigerant circuit system, settings on every heat source unit (signal input) are required. CAUTION 1) Wiring should be covered by insulation tube with supplementary insulation. 2) Use relays or switches with IEC or equivalent standard. 3) The electric strength between accessible parts and control circuit should have 2750V or more. Example of wiring connection (2) CN3N (1) CN51 Lamp power source Distant control board L1 Relay circuit X Y L2 X Adapter 1 Y 5 4 3 Relay circuit Heat source unit control board Adapter 2 X Heat source unit control board CN3N 1 2 CN51 Y X OFF 3 Y Preparations in the field Preparations in the field Maximum cable length is 10m L1 : Heat source unit error display lamp L2 : Compressor operation lamp (compressor running state) X, Y : Relay (coil =<0.9W : DC12V) 1. Optional part : PAC-SC37SA-E or field supply. (3) CN3D Adapter 2 Relay circuit X 1 2 Y 3 ON OFF Normal ON Cooling Heating Maximum cable length is 10m X : Cooling / Heating Y : Validity / Invalidity of X X,Y : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V Contact rating current >= 0.1A Minimum applicable load =< 1mA at DC 2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply. Heat source unit control board Heat source unit Adapter 2 control board Relay circuit CN3D CN3D 1 2 X 3 Preparations in the field Preparations in the field Maximum cable length is 10m X : Low-noise mode Y : Compressor ON/OFF X,Y : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V Contact rating current >= 0.1A Minimum appicable load =< 1mA at DC 2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply. Maximum cable length is 10m X : Low-noise mode X : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V Contact rating current >= 0.1A Minimum applicable load =< 1mA at DC 2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply. Low-noise mode : The noise level is reduced by controlling the maximum fan frequency and maximum compressor frequency. (4)TB8 Heat source unit Heat source unit TB8 3 4 TB8 63PW Shortcircuit wire 52P 2 Pump interlock circuit (if one is connected) When connecting the pump interlock circuit wires to terminals 3 and 4 of TB8, remove the short-circuit wire. 63PW: Pressure switch (Contact: Minimum applied load 5 mA) HWE09080 1 X X: Relay (Contact rating: 200VAC 1A) 52P: Pump contactor - 23 - GB [ II Restrictions ] (8) Demand control 1) General outline of control Demand control is performed by using the external signal input to the 1-2 and 1-3 pins of CN3D on the heat source units (OC, OS1, and OS2). Between 2 and 12 steps of demand control is possible by setting DIP SW4-4 on the heat source units (OC, OS1, and OS2). Table.1 DipSW4-4 No Demand control switch Input to CN3D *2 OC OS1 OS2 (a) 2 steps(0-100%) OFF OFF OFF OC (b) 4 steps(0-50-75-100%) ON OFF OFF OC (c) OFF ON OFF OS1 (d) OFF OFF ON OS2 ON ON OFF OC and OS1 (f) ON OFF ON OC and OS2 (g) OFF ON ON OS1 and OS2 ON ON ON OC, OS1, and OS2 (e) (h) 8 steps(0-25-38-50-63-75-88-100%) 12 steps(0-17-25-34-42-50-59-67-7584-92-100%) P200-P300YHM models (single-heat source-unit system): 2 and 4 steps shown in the rows (a) and (b) in the table above only. P400-P600YHM models (two-heat source-unit system OC+OS1): 2-8 steps shown in the rows (a), (b), (c), and (e) in the table above only. P650-P900YHM models (three-heat source-unit system OC+OS1+OS2): 2-12 steps shown in the rows (a)-(h) in the table above. *2. External signal is input to CN3D on the heat source unit whose SW4-4 is set to ON. When SW4-4 is set to OFF on all heat source units, the signal is input to the CN3D on the OC. Heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are selectable in a single refrigerant system. *3. If wrong sequence of steps are taken, the units may go into the Thermo-OFF (compressor stop) mode. Ex) When switching from 100% to 50% (Incorrect) 100% to 0% to 50% : The units may go into the Thermo-OFF mode. (Correct) 100% to 75% to 50% *4. The percentage of the demand listed in the table above is an approximate value based on the compressor volume and does not necessarily correspond with the actual capacity. *5. Notes on using demand control in combination with the low-noise mode To enable the low-noise mode, it is necessary to short-circuit 1-2 pin of CN3D on the heat source unit whose SW4-4 is set to OFF. When SW4-4 is set to ON on all heat source units, the following operations cannot be performed. Performing 4-step demand in combination with the low-noise operation in a single-heat source-unit system. Performing 8-step demand in combination with the low-noise operation in a two-heat source-unit system. Performing 12-step demand in combination with the low-noise operation in a three-heat source-unit system. 2) Contact input and control content 2-step demand control The same control as the Thermo-OFF is performed by closing 1-3 pin of CN3D. CN3D 1-3P Open x = 100% Close x = 0% 4-step demand control (When SW4-4 is set to ON on an heat source unit) Demand capacity is shown below. CN3D HWE09080 1-2P 1-3P Open Close Open 100% 75% Close 0% 50% - 24 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 8-step demand control (When SW4-4 is set to ON on two heat source units) Demand capacity is shown below. 8-step demand No.2 CN3D 1-2P No.1 CN3D Open Short-circuit 1-2P 1-3P Open Short-circuit Open Short-circuit Open Open 100% 50% 88% 75% Short-circuit 50% 0% 38% 25% Open 88% 38% 75% 63% Short-circuit 75% 25% 63% 50% Short-circuit *1. The heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are designated as No. 1and No. 2 in the order of address from small to large. Ex) When heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are designated as OS1 and OS2, OS1=No. 1 and OS2=No. 2. 12-step demand control (When SW4-4 is set to ON on three heat source units) Demand capacity is shown below. 12-step demand No.1 CN3D No.2 CN3D No.1 CN3D Open 1-3P Open 1-2P 1-2P 1-3P Open Shortcircuit Open Shortcircuit Open Shortcircuit Open Shortcircuit Open Open 100% 67% 92% 84% 67% 34% 59% 50% Shortcircuit 67% 34% 59% 50% 34% 0% 25% 17% Open 92% 59% 84% 75% 59% 25% 50% 42% Shortcircuit 84% 50% 75% 67% 50% 17% 42% 34% No.2 CN3D Open Short-circuit No.3 CN3D Short-circuit 12-step demand 1-2P Short-circuit 1-2P Open Short-circuit Short-circuit 1-3P Open No.3 CN3D 1-2P 1-2P 1-3P Open Shortcircuit Open Shortcircuit Open Shortcircuit Open Shortcircuit Open Open 92% 59% 84% 75% 84% 50% 75% 67% Shortcircuit 59% 25% 50% 42% 50% 17% 42% 34% Open 84% 50% 75% 67% 75% 42% 67% 59% Shortcircuit 75% 42% 67% 59% 67% 34% 59% 50% Short-circuit Open Short-circuit Short-circuit Open Short-circuit *1. The heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are designated as No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3 in the order of address from small to large. Ex) When heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are designated as OC, OS1, and OS2, OC=No. 1, OS1=No. 2, and OS2=No. 3. HWE09080 - 25 - GB [ II Restrictions ] [4] Sample System Connection Examples of typical system connection are shown on pages [5] to [7]. Refer to the Installation Manual that came with each device or controller for details. (1) An example of a system to which an MA remote controller is connected System configuration Connection to the system controller Address start up for indoor and heat source units 1 System with one heat source unit NO Automatic address setup 2 System with one heat source unit NO Manual address setup 3 Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units NO Manual address setup 4 System with one heat source unit With connection to transmission line for centralized control Manual address setup 5 System with one heat source unit With connection to indoor-heat source transmission line Manual address setup 6 System with one heat source unit With connection to transmission line for centralized control Manual address setup Connection of multiple LOSSNAY units Notes Notes Connection of multiple LOSSNAY units (2) An example of a system to which an ME remote controller is connected 1 System configuration Connection to the system controller Address start up for indoor and heat source units System with one heat source unit With connection to transmission line for centralized control Manual address setup (3) An example of a system to which both MA remote controller and ME remote controller are connected 1 HWE09080 System configuration Connection to the system controller Address start up for indoor and heat source units System with one heat source unit With connection to transmission line for centralized control Manual address setup - 26 - Notes GB [ II Restrictions ] [5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected 1. System with one heat source unit (automatic address setup for both indoor and heat source units) (1) Sample control wiring Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L1 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF OS2 L3 L2 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF OS1 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF Group L4 Group OC IC 00 00 TB7 M1 M2 S TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S 00 00 00 TB3 M1 M2 TB5 M1M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 m1 TB3 M1 M2 00 LC IC A B A A RC B MA L11 MA B L12 Group L13 Group IC IC 00 00 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 00 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 m5 m4 m2 TB5 M1M2 S IC A B MA A B MA (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 3) A transmission booster is required in a system to which more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor units of the 72 model or above is connected) are connected. 4) Automatic address setup is not available if start-stop input (CN32, CN51, CN41) is used for a group operation of indoor units. Refer to "[5] 2. Manual address setup for both indoor and heat source units".(page 29) 5) To connect more than 2 LOSSNAY units to indoor units in the same system, refer to the next section "[5] 2. An example of a system with one heat source unit to which 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected".(page 29) HWE09080 A B MA A B MA m3 (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L1 +L2+L3+L4 200m[656ft] L1 +L2+L11+L12+L13 200m[656ft] 2) Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required. 3) MA remote controller wiring Maximum overall line length (0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16]) m1 200m [656ft] m2+m3 200m [656ft] m4+m5 200m [656ft] - 27 - GB [ II Restrictions ] Set one of the MA remote controllers to sub. (Refer to MA remote controller function selection or the installation manual for the MA remote controller for the setting method.) Group operation of indoor units To perform a group operation of indoor units (IC), daisychain terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on all indoor units (IC) in the same group, and then connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on the indoor unit on one end to the terminal block on the MA remote controller. (Non-polarized two-wire) When performing a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, "Automatic indoor-heat source address setup" is not available. 4) LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire) Interlock operation setting with all the indoor units in the same system will automatically be made. (It is required that the Lossnay unit be turned on before the heat source unit.) Refer to "[5] 2. Manual address setup for both indoor and heat source units" in the following cases: performing an interlock operation of part of the indoor units in the system with a LOSSNAY unit, using LOSSNAY alone without interlocking it with any units, performing an interlock operation of more than 16 indoor units with a LOSSNAY unit, or connecting two or more LOSSNAY units to indoor units in the same system. 5) Switch setting No address settings required. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3) on the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) (Note 1), and terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC). (Non-polarized two-wire) Only use shielded cables. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2), and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield wire of the shielded cable. 2) Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required. 3) MA remote controller wiring Connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block for MA remote controller line (TB15) on the indoor unit (IC) to the terminal block on the MA remote controller (MA). (Nonpolarized two-wire) When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system, connect terminals 1 and 2 of the terminal block (TB15) on the indoor unit (IC) to the terminal block on the two MA remote controllers. (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Address setting range Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit IC Sub unit IC Setting method No settings required. - Notes To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, refer to [5] 2.(page 29) Factory setting 00 2 LOSSNAY LC No settings required. - 00 3 Main MA remote con- remote controller troller MA No settings required. - Main Sub remote controller MA Sub remote controller OC OS1 OS2 No settings required. 4 Heat source unit (Note) Settings to be made according to the remote controller function selection - 00 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2. HWE09080 - 28 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 2. An example of a system with one heat source unit to which 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected (manual address setup for both indoor and heat source units) (1) Sample control wiring Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L3 L2 L1 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF Group OS2 OS1 OC 53 52 51 L4 Group IC 01 TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S TB3 M1 M2 TB5 M1M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S LC IC 02 TB15 1 2 A TB5 M1M2 S B 05 A B MA L11 MA TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 L12 L13 Group IC IC LC 03 04 06 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 A TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S B MA (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 3) A transmission booster is required in a system to which more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor units of the 72 model or above is connected) are connected. HWE09080 (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 1. 2) Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 1. - 29 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 4) LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire) Interlock setting between the indoor units and LOSSNAY units must be entered on the remote controller. (Refer to "IV [3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller" or the installation manual for the MA remote controller for the setting method.) 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 1. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 1. 2) Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 1. When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Same as [5] 1. Group operation of indoor units Same as [5] 1. (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Address setting range Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit IC 01 to 50 Sub unit 2 LOSSNAY 3 MA remote controller 4 Notes Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) LC 01 to 50 Main remote controller MA No settings required. Sub remote controller MA Sub remote controller Settings to be made according to the remote controller function selection OC OS1 OS2 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.(Note) Heat source unit Factory setting Setting method Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. - Main To set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. 00 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2. HWE09080 - 30 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 3. Group operation of units in a system with multiple heat source units (1) Sample control wiring Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF OS2 Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L12 L11 Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40. SW2-1 OFF Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF OS1 Group Group Group OC IC IC IC LC 01 03 06 07 52 51 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB5 TB15 1 2 M1M2S TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S m2 53 TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected A To be connected B A A MA B MA L31 m3 MA B L22 L21 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF 56 55 54 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 OS2 OS1 TB7 M1 M2 S Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected Group OC IC IC IC 02 04 05 TB5 M1M2S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2S TB15 1 2 TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected To be left unconnected A B MA (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other. 4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be performed only on one of the heat source units. 5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only one of the heat source units. 6) A transmission booster is required in a system to which more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor units of the 72 model or above is connected) are connected. HWE09080 (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L11+L12 200m [656ft] L21+L22 200m [656ft] 2) Transmission line for centralized control L31+L21 200m [656ft] 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 1. 4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L12+L31+L22 500m [1640ft] L11+L31+L21 500m [1640ft] - 31 - GB [ II Restrictions ] Only use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) with the shield wire of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 1. When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Same as [5] 1. Group operation of indoor units Same as [5] 2. 4) LOSSNAY connection Same as [5] 2. 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 1. Only use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 1. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the OC, OS1, and OS2 in the same refrigerant circuit If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Address setting range Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. Sub unit 2 LOSSNAY 3 MA remote controller 4 Setting method Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) LC 01 to 50 Main remote controller MA No settings required. - Sub remote controller MA Sub remote controller Settings to be made according to the remote controller function selection OC OS1 OS2 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2. (Note) Heat source unit Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. Notes Factory setting To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 Main To set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. 00 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2. HWE09080 - 32 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 4. A system in which a system controller is connected to the transmission line for centralized control and which is powered from a heat source unit (1) Sample control wiring L11 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L12 Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40. Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON SW2-1 OFF ON OS2 OS1 OC 53 52 51 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 Group Group IC To be left unconnected TB7 M1 M2 S 02 TB15 1 2 TB7 M1 M2 S TB5 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected To be connected A B A B MA MA MA Group OC 56 55 54 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected 07 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S Group IC IC IC LC 04 05 06 08 TB5 M1 M2 S TB5 M1 M2S TB15 1 2 TB7 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2S m2 L31 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON OS1 TB7 M1 M2 S TB5 M1 M2 S L22 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON OS2 03 TB15 1 2 A B L21 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON LC IC m1 TB7 M1 M2 S IC 01 TB5 M1 M2 S Group To be left unconnected A B A B To be left unconnected MA MA L32 m3 Note1 Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is). Note2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208/230V. System controller A B S (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other. 4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be performed only on one of the heat source units. 5) Short-circuit the shield terminal (S terminal) and the earth terminal ( ) on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 6) A transmission booster is required in a system to which more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor units of the 72 model or above is connected) are connected. 7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting). HWE09080 (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 3. 2) Transmission line for centralized control L31+L32(L21) 200m [656ft] 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 1. 4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L32+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft] L32+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft] L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m[1640ft] - 33 - GB [ II Restrictions ] Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) with the shield wire of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 1. When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Same as [5] 1. Group operation of indoor units Same as [5] 1. 4) LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized 2-core cable) Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the ON/OFF remote controller alone or the LM adapter alone is connected. 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 1. Only use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 1. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Daisy-chain terminals A and B on the system controller, terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the heat source units (OC, OS1, and OS2) in the same refrigerant circuit. If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units. If a system controller is connected, set the central control switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all heat source units to "ON." The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Only use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Address setting range Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit IC 01 to 50 Sub unit Setting method Notes To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 Enter the same indoor unit group settings on the system controller as the ones that were entered on the MA remote controller. Main Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 3 MA Main remote con- remote troller controller MA No settings required. - Sub remote controller MA Sub remote controller Settings to be made according to the remote controller function selection OC OS1 OS2 51 to 100 To set the address to Assign sequential ad100, set the rotary switchdress to the heat source units in the same refriger- es to 50. ant circuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.(Note) 4 Heat source unit Factory setting 00 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2. HWE09080 - 34 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 5. An example of a system in which a system controller is connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line (except LM adapter) (1) Sample control wiring L11 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF SW2-1 OFF Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40. SW2-1 OFF OS1 Group 52 51 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected Group IC IC IC LC 01 02 03 07 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S L31 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 A B A B A B MA MA MA L21 TB5 M1 M2 S L22 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF SW2-1 OFF SW2-1 OFF ON TB15 1 2 To be left unconnected To be connected OS2 Group OC 53 TB7 M1 M2 S ON ON m1 OS2 ON Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L12 ON OS1 OC ON 55 54 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S Group IC IC 04 05 TB5 M1 M2 S TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB15 1 2 IC LC 06 08 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected m2 L25 56 Group To be left unconnected A B A B To be left unconnected MA MA m3 Note1 System controller Note1 LM adapters cannot be connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line. A B S (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other. 4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be performed only on one of the heat source units. 5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only one of the heat source units. 6) A maximum of 3 system controllers can be connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line, with the exception that only one G(B)-50A may be connected. 7) When the total number of indoor units exceeds 26, it may not be possible to connect a system controller on the indoor-heat source transmission line. 8) In a system to which more than 18 indoor units including one or more indoor units of 72 model or above are connected, there may be cases in which the system controller cannot be connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line. HWE09080 (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L11+L12 200m [656ft] L21+L22 200m [656ft] L25 200m [656ft] 2) Transmission line for centralized control L31+L21 200m [656ft] 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 1. 4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L25+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft] L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft] L25+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft] - 35 - GB [ II Restrictions ] Set the central control switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all heat source units to "ON." Only use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) with the shield wire of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 1. When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Same as [5] 1. Group operation of indoor units Same as [5] 1. 4) LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor units (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire) Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the ON/OFF remote controller alone is connected. 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3) on the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) (Note 1), terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC), and the S terminal on the system controller. (Non-polarized twowire) Only use shielded cables. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2), the S terminal on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC), and the S terminal on the system controller with the shield wire of the shielded cable. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the OC, OS1, and OS2 in the same refrigerant circuit. If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units. (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit IC Address setting range 01 to 50 Sub unit LOSSNAY 3 MA Main MA remote remote control- controller ler Sub MA remote controller 4 Heat source unit Notes Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2 LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. No settings required. - Sub remote controller Settings to be made according to the remote controller function selection OC 51 to 100 OS1 OS2 Factory setting Setting method Enter the same indoor unit group settings on the system controller as the ones that were entered on the MA remote controller. Assign sequential address to To set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2. (Note) Main 00 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2. HWE09080 - 36 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 6. System with one heat source unit (automatic address setup for both indoor and heat source units) (1) Sample control wiring L1 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF OS L2 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF L4 L3 Group OC BC 00 00 L5 Group IC TB7 M1 M2 S TB3 M1 M2 TB02 M1 M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S 00 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S 00 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 m1 TB3 M1 M2 TB5 M1 M2 S LC IC 00 00 Interlock operation with the ventilation unit A1 B2 A1 B2 A1 B2 MA RC MA *1 M1M2 S L11 TB02 00 BS L12 Group L13 Group IC IC 00 TB5 M1 M2 S 00 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S 00 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 m5 m4 m2 *1. When BS is connected to the system, automatic address setup is not available. IC A1 B2 A1 B2 A1 B2 A1 B2 MA MA MA MA (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 3) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.) 4) Automatic address setup is not available if start-stop input(CN32, CN51, CN41) is used for a group operation of indoor units. Refer to "[5] 7. Manual address setup for both indoor and heat source units" 5) To connect more than 2 LOSSNAY units to indoor units in the same system, refer to the next section "[5] 7. An example of a system with one heat source unit to which 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected". (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L1 +L2+L3+L4+L5 200m[656ft] L1 +L2+L3+L11+L12+L13 200m[656ft] 2) Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required. 3) MA remote controller wiring Maximum overall line length (0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16]) m1 200m [656ft] m2+m3 200m [656ft] m4+m5 200m [656ft] Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required 1 unit When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units 27 - 50 units When the P72 or P96 model is included in the connected indoor units 21 - 39 units m3 2 units - 40 - 50 units The table above shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected. HWE09080 - 37 - GB [ II Restrictions ] remote controllers. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3) on the heat source units (OC and OS), of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB02) on the main BC controller (BC), and of the terminal block for indoorheat source transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC). (Non-polarized two-wire) Only use shielded cables. Set one of the MA remote controllers as a sub controller. (Refer to the Instruction Manual for the MA remote controller for the setting method.) Group operation of indoor units To perform a group operation of indoor units (IC), daisychain terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on all indoor units (IC) in the same group, and then connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on the indoor unit on one end to the terminal block on the MA remotecontroller. (Non-polarized two-wire) When performing a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, "Automatic indoor-heat source addresssetup" is not available. 4) LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire) Interlock operation setting with all the indoor units in the same system will automatically be made. (It is required that the Lossnay unit be turned on before the heat source unit.) When performing an interlocked operation of part of the indoor units in the system with a LOSSNAY unit, using a LOSSNAY unit alone without interlocking it with any units, performing an interlock operation of more than 16 indoor units with a LOSSNAY unit, or connecting two or more LOSSNAY units to the same refrigerant system, the automatic address setup function is not available. 5) Switch setting No address settings required. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source units (OC and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block (TB02) on the BC controller (BC), and the S terminal of the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield of the shielded cable. 2) Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required. 3) MA remote controller wiring Connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block for MA remote controller line (TB15) on the indoor unit (IC) to the terminal block on the MA remote controller (MA). (Non-polarized two-wire) When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system, connect terminals 1 and 2 of the terminal block (TB15) on the indoor unit (IC) to the terminal block on the two MA (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Address setting range Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit IC Sub unit IC Setting method Notes No settings required. - Port number setting is required To perform a group operation of indoor units that feature different functions, the automatic IC/OC address setup function is not available. Factory setting 00 2 LOSSNAY LC No settings required. - 00 3 MA Main remote con- remote controller troller MA No settings required. - Main Sub remote controller MA Sub remote controller Settings to be made with the Sub/Main switch 4 Heat source unit OC OS No settings required. - 00 5 Auxiliary heat source unit BC No settings required. - 00 BC controller The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). HWE09080 - 38 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 7. An example of a system with one heat source unit to which 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected (manual address setup for both indoor and heat source units) (1) Sample control wiring Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L1 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF OS Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF L4 L3 L2 Group OC BC 51 53 L5 Group IC 01 52 TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S TB5 M1M2 S TB02 M1 M2 S 02 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S 05 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 A1 B2 A1 B2 MA MA L11 M1 M2 S TB02 LC IC L12 L13 Group 57 BS IC 03 TB5 M1M2 S LC IC 04 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S 06 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S A1 B2 MA IC IC 07 TB5 M1M2 S 08 TB15 1 2 A1 B2 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 A1 B2 MA MA * If the BC address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to either the OC, OS, or BS, use a different, unused address. OC, OS, and BS addresses (lowest indoor unit address in the group plus +50) have higher priority than the BS address. (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 3) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.) The table above shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected. (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 6. 2) Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 6. Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required 1 unit When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units 27 - 50 units When the P72 or P96 model is included in the connected indoor units 21 - 39 units HWE09080 2 units 40 - 50 units - 39 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 2) Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3) on the heat source units (OC and OS), of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB02) on the main and sub BC controllers (BC and BS), and of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC). (Non-polarized two-wire) Only use shielded cables. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 6. When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Same as [5] 6. Group operation of indoor units Same as [5] 6. 4) LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire) Interlock setting between the indoor units and LOSSNAY units must be entered on the remote controller. (Refer to "IV [3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller" or the installation manual for the MA remote controller for the setting method.) 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source units (OC and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block (TB02) on BC and BS, and the S terminal of the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield of the shielded cable. (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Address setting range Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit IC 01 to 50 Sub unit Factory setting Setting method Notes Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. In a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. Port number setting is required To perform a group operation of indoor units that feature different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. 3 MA Main remote remote controller controller MA No settings required. - Sub remote controller MA Sub remote controller Main Settings to be made with the Sub/ Main switch 4 Heat source unit OC OS 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC and OS.(Note) 5 Auxiliary heat source unit BCcontroller (Sub) BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. BC controller (Main) BC OC (or OS if it exists) +1 To set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller, use a different, unused address within the setting range. The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). HWE09080 - 40 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 8. Group operation of units in a system with multiple heat source units (1) Sample control wiring Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L12 L11 Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40. SW2-1 OFF Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF OS Group OC 51 TB3 M1 M2 IC IC IC LC 53 01 03 06 07 TB5 M1 M2 S TB02 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S m2 52 TB3 M1 M2 Group Group BC TB7 M1 M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected To be connected A1 B2 A1 B2 MA MA MA L31 m3 A1 B2 L22 L21 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF OS Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF Group OC 56 55 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 BC IC IC IC 57 02 04 05 TB5 M1 M2 S TB02 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB7 M1 M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected To be left unconnected A1 B2 MA The left table shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected. (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other. 4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be performed only on one of the heat source units. 5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only one of the heat source units. 6) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.) (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L11+L12 200m [656ft] L21+L22 200m [656ft] 2) Transmission line for centralized control L31+L21 200m [656ft] 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 6. 4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L12+L31+L22 500m [1640ft] L11+L31+L21 500m [1640ft] Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required 1 unit When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units 27 - 50 units When the P72 or P96 model is included in the connected indoor units 21 - 39 units HWE09080 2 units - 40 - 50 units - 41 - GB [ II Restrictions ] (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 7. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 7. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the OC and OS in the same refrigerant circuit If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units. Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source units (OC, OS) with the shield wire of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 6. When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Same as [5] 6. Group operation of indoor units Same as [5] 7. 4) LOSSNAY connection Same as [5] 7. 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Only use shielded cables. (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Address setting range Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit IC 01 to 50 Sub unit Factory setting Setting method Notes Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. In a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. Port number setting is required To perform a group operation of indoor units that feature different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. 3 MA Main remote remote controller controller MA No settings required. - Sub remote controller MA Sub remote controller Main Settings to be made with the Sub/ Main switch 4 Heat source unit OC OS 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC and OS.(Note) 5 Auxiliary heat source unit BCcontroller (Sub) BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. BC controller (Main) BC OC (or OS if it exists) +1 To set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller, use a different, unused address within the setting range. The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). HWE09080 - 42 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 9. A system in which a system controller is connected to the transmission line for centralized control and which is powered from a heat source unit (1) Sample control wiring Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40. SW2-1 OFF Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF Group OC 52 51 TB3 M1M2 TB3 M1M2 To be left unconnected Group 53 TB02 M1M2 S IC IC IC 01 02 03 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 07 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 A B 1 2 A B 1 2 MA MA MA OC 55 TB3 M1M2 TB3 M1M2 57 TB02 M1M2 S TB7 M1M2 S Group IC IC IC LC 04 05 06 08 TB5 M1M2 S TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 To be left unconnected TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S A B 1 2 A B 1 2 L32 To be left unconnected Group BC m2 L31 TB5 M1M2 S L22 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF 56 TB7 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 LC A B 1 2 L21 OS TB5 M1M2 S TB7 M1M2 S To be connected Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF Group BC m1 OS TB7 M1M2 S Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L12 L11 MA MA m3 Note1 System controller Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is). Note2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V. A B S The left table shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected. 7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting). (2) Cautions 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other. Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be performed only on one of the heat source units. Short-circuit the shield terminal (S terminal) and the earth terminal ( ) on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.) (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 8. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25 mm2 [AWG16] min.) L31+L32(L21) 200m [656ft] 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 6. 4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L32+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft] L32+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft] L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m[1640ft] Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required 1 unit When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units 27 - 50 units When the P72 or P96 model is included in the connected indoor units 21 - 39 units HWE09080 2 units - 40 - 50 units - 43 - GB [ II Restrictions ] Daisy-chain the S terminal of the terminal block (TB7) on the system controller, OC, and OS with the shield of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 6. When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Same as [5] 6. Group operation of indoor units Same as [5] 6. 4) LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire) Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the ON/OFF remote controller alone or the LM adapter alone is connected. 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 7. Only use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 7. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Daisy-chain terminals A and B on the system controller, terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the heat source units (OC and OS) in the same refrigerant circuit. If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units. If a system controller is connected, set the central control switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all heat source units to "ON." The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Only use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Address setting range Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit IC 01 to 50 Sub unit Factory setting Setting method Notes Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. In a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. Port number setting is required To perform a group operation of indoor units that feature different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 - Make the same indoor unit group settings with the system controller as the ones that were made with the MA remote controller. Main To set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller, use a different, unused address within the setting range. The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2 LOSSNAY LC 3 Main MA MA remote conremote troller controller Sub MA No settings required. 4 Heat source unit (Note) OC OS 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC and OS.(Note) 5 Auxiliary heat source unit BCcontroller (Sub) BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. BC controller (Main) BC remote controller 01 to 50 Sub remote controller Settings to be made with the Sub/ Main switch OC (or OS if it exists) +1 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). HWE09080 - 44 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 10. An example of a system in which a system controller is connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line (except LM adapter) (1) Sample control wiring Move the male connector . from CN41 to CN40. SW2-1 OFF ON Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON Group OS OC 51 53 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB02 M1 M2 S IC IC LC 01 02 03 07 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 A B 1 2 A B 1 2 A B 1 2 MA MA MA L22 L21 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON OS OC Group BC 56 55 57 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB02 M1 M2 S Group IC IC IC LC 04 05 06 08 TB5 M1 M2 S TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S L25 L31 TB5 M1 M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S To be connected Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON Group IC m1 To be left unconnected Group BC 52 TB7 M1 M2 S Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L12 L11 To be left unconnected TB7 M1 M2 S m2 TB7 M1 M2 S Note1 To be left unconnected A B 1 2 A B 1 2 System controller ABS MA MA m3 Note1 LM adapters cannot be connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line. (2) Cautions 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other. Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be performed only on one of the heat source units. Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only one of the heat source units. A maximum of 3 system controllers can be connected to the indoorheat source transmission line, with the exception that only one G(B)50A may be connected. When the total number of indoor units exceeds 20 (12 if one or more indoor units of the 72 model or above is connected), it may not be possible to connect a system controller to the indoor-heat source transmission line. When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.) HWE09080 1 unit When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units 27 - 50 units When the P72 or P96 model is included in the connected indoor units 21 - 39 units 2 units 40 - 50 units The table above shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected. (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L11+L12 200m [656ft] L21+L22 200m [656ft] L25 200m [656ft] 2) Transmission line for centralized control L31+L21 200m [656ft] 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 6. 4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L25+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft] L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft] - 45 - GB [ II Restrictions ] heat source units to "ON." Only use shielded cables. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoorheat source transmission line (TB3) on the heat source units (OC and OS), of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB02) on the main and sub BC controllers (BC and BS), of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC), and the S terminal of the system controller.(Non-polarized two-wire) Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source units (OC, OS) with the shield wire of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 6. When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Same as [5] 6. Group operation of indoor units Same as [5] 6. 4) LOSSNAY connection Only use shielded cables. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source units (OC and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block (TB02) on the BC and BS, and the S terminal of the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield of the shielded cable. Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor units (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire) Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the ON/OFF remote controller alone is connected. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the OC and OS in the same refrigerant circuit. If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units. Set the central control switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Address setting range Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit IC 01 to 50 Sub unit Factory setting Setting method Notes Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. In a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. Port number setting is required To perform a group operation of indoor units that feature different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 - Make the same indoor unit group settings with the system controller as the ones that were made with the MA remote controller. Main To set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller, use a different, unused address within the setting range. The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2 LOSSNAY LC 3 Main MA MA remote conremote troller controller Sub MA No settings required. 4 Heat source unit OC OS 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC and OS.(Note) 5 Auxiliary heat source unit BCcontroller (Sub) BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. BC controller (Main) BC remote controller 01 to 50 Sub remote controller Settings to be made with the Sub/ Main switch OC (or OS if it exists) +1 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). HWE09080 - 46 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 11. A system with multiple BC controller connections (with a system controller connected to the centralized control line) (1) Sample control wiring L11 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON L12 Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40 SW2-1 OFF ON OS1 Group BC 52 IC 2 1 51 01 53 TB3 M1M2 TB7 M1M2 S Group Group Group OC TB3 M1M2 To be left unconnected TB02 M1M2 S TB5 M1M2 S IC 1 2 02 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S BS IC 2 04 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S IC 2 1 07 57 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S TB02 M1M2 S BS IC 1 TB15 1 2 08 TB5 M1M2 S 2 IC 2 1 61 TB15 1 2 TB02 M1M2S 11 TB5 M1M2 S LC IC 1 TB15 1 2 12 TB5 M1M2S 2 TB15 1 2 13 TB5 M1M2S TB7 M1M2 S To be connected A1 B2 m2 A1 B2 A1 B2 A1 B2 MA MA MA MA m3 L21 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON L22 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON OS1 Group BC L31 55 Group 3 2 1 54 TB3 M1M2 TB3 M1M2 To be left unconnected TB7 M1M2 S IC IC 03 56 TB7 M1M2 S Group OC TB02 M1M2 S TB5 M1M2 S 1 05 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 IC 2 TB15 1 2 BS TB5 M1M2 S IC 3 06 1 59 TB15 1 2 TB02 M1M2 S 09 TB5 M1M2 S LC IC 1 TB15 1 2 10 TB5 M1M2 S 1 TB15 1 2 14 TB5 M1M2 S To be left unconnected A1 B2 m1 MA A1 B2 A1 B2 MA MA L32 Numbers in the square indicate port numbers. Connection to BC controllers Interlock operation with the ventilation unit Note1 System controller ABS *1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is). *2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V. (2) Cautions 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L11+L12 200m [656ft] L21+L22 200m [656ft] 2) Transmission line for centralized control L31+L32(L21) 200m [656ft] 3) MA remote controller wiring Maximum overall line length (0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16]) m1 200m [656ft] m2+m3 200m [656ft] 4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger) L32+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft] L32+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft] L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m[1640ft] ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other. Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be performed only on one of the heat source units. Short-circuit the S (shield) terminal of the terminal block for the central control unit (TB7) and the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source unit whose power jumper was moved from CN41 to CN40. When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.) Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required 1 unit When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units 27 - 50 units When the P72 or P96 model is included in the connected indoor units 21 - 39 units 2 units 40 - 50 units The table above shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the abovementioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected. 7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting). HWE09080 - 47 - GB [ II Restrictions ] Set the central control switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all heat source units to "ON." Only use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the S terminal of the terminal block (TB7) on the system controller, OC, and OS with the shield of the shielded cable. Shortcircuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 3) MA remote controller wiring (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoorheat source transmission line (TB3) on the heat source units (OC and OS), of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB02) on the main and sub BC controllers (BC and BS), and of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC). (Non-polarized two-wire) Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 6. When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). 4) Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source units (OC and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block (TB02) on the BC and BS, and the S terminal of the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield of the shielded cable. Only use shielded cables. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as [5] 6. Group operation of indoor units Same as [5] 6. LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire) Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the ON/OFF remote controller alone or the LM adapter alone is connected. Daisy-chain terminals A and B on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the OC and OS (Note) in the same refrigerant circuit. If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units. 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (5) Address setting method Pro cedures 1 Address setting range Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit IC 01 to 50 Sub unit Setting method Notes Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. In a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. Port number setting is required To perform a group operation of indoor units that feature different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. Fact ory setting 00 Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these 3 MA remote controller Main remote controller MA No settings required. Sub remote controller MA Sub remote controller units after assigning an address to all indoor units. - None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 Make the same indoor unit group settings with the system controller as the ones that were made with the MA remote controller. Mai n To set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. 00 To set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller, use a different, unused address within the setting range. The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 Settings to be made with the Sub/Main switch 4 Heat source unit OC OS 51 to 100 The sum of the smallest address of the indoor units in the same system and 50. Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC and OS.(Note) 5 Auxiliary heat source unit BC controller (Sub) BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. BC controller (Main) BC 51 to 100 OC (or OS if it exists) +1 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). HWE09080 - 48 - GB [ II Restrictions ] [6] An Example of a System to which an ME Remote Controller is connected 1. A system in which a system controller is connected to the centralized control transmission line (1) Sample control wiring L11 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40. SW2-1 OFF ON Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON OS2 Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L12 OS1 Group Group IC 53 52 51 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected IC 01 TB5 M1 M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S 02 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected To be connected A B A B 101 102 103 RC RC RC Group OC 56 55 54 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S TB5 M1 M2S Group IC IC IC LC 04 05 06 08 TB5 M1 M2S TB7 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected m3 To be left unconnected 07 TB15 1 2 m2 L31 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON OS1 TB7 M1 M2 S TB5 M1 M2 S L22 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON OS2 03 TB15 1 2 A B L21 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON LC IC m1 TB7 M1 M2 S Group OC To be left unconnected A B A B 154 104 106 RC RC RC L32 A B Note1 System controller Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is). Note2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208/230V. A B S (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 3 ME remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other. 4) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units. 5) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the terminal block for centralized control on only one of the heat source units. 6) A transmission booster must be connected to a system in which the total number of connected indoor units exceeds 20. 7) A transmission booster is required in a system to which more than 16 indoor including one or more indoor units of the 72 model or above are connected. 8) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting). HWE09080 (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 3. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as [5] 4. 3) ME remote controller wiring Maximum overall line length (0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16]) m1 10m [32ft] m2+m3 10m [32ft] If the standard-supplied cable must be extended, use a cable with a diameter of 1.25mm2 [AWG16]. The section of the cable that exceeds 10m [32ft] must be included in the maximum indoor-heat source transmission line distance described in 1). When connected to the terminal block on the Simple remote controller, use cables that meet the following cable size specifications: 0.75 - 1.25 mm2 [AWG18-14]. 4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25mm2 or larger) Same as [5] 4. - 49 - GB [ II Restrictions ] When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Refer to the section on Switch Setting. Performing a group operation (including the group operation of units in different refrigerant circuits). Refer to the section on Switch Setting. 4) LOSSNAY connection Same as [5] 4. 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 1. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 1. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as [5] 4. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 4. 3) ME remote controller wiring ME remote controller is connectable anywhere on the indoor-heat source transmission line. (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Address setting range Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit Setting method Notes Factory setting IC 01 to 50 To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, desigAssign sequential num- nate the indoor unit in bers starting with the ad- the group with the dress of the main unit in greatest number of the same group +1. functions as the main (Main unit address +1, unit. main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 00 Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. Sub unit 2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 3 Main ME reremote mote controller controller RC 101 to 150 Add 100 to the main unit address in the group 101 Sub remote controller RC 151 to 200 Add 150 to the main unit address in the group It is not necessary to set the 100s digit. To set the address to 200, set the rotary switches to 00. OC OS1 OS2 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2. (Note) To set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. 00 4 Heat source unit The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2. HWE09080 - 50 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 2. A system in which a system controller is connected to the centralized control transmission line (1) Sample control wiring Interlock operation with the ventilation unit L12 L11 Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40. SW2-1 OFF ON Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON Group OS OC BC 52 51 53 TB3 M1M2 TB3 M1M2 Group IC To be left unconnected TB02 M1M2 S TB5 M1M2S TB7 M1 M2S To be connected OC L31 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2S 07 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S A1 B2 A1 B2 101 102 103 RC RC RC 55 TB3 M1M2 TB3 M1M2 Group 57 TB02 M1M2 S TB7 M1M2 S IC IC IC LC 04 05 06 08 TB5 M1M2 S To be left unconnected TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2S L32 m3 To be left unconnected Group BC m2 56 TB7 M1M2 S TB5 M1M2S LC L22 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON OS IC 03 A1 B2 L21 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON TB15 1 2 IC 02 m1 TB7 M1M2 S 01 Group Note1 A1 B2 A1 B2 A1 B2 154 104 106 RC RC RC System controller ABS *1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is). *2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V. (2) Cautions The left table shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected. 7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting). 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 3 ME remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other. 4) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units. 5) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the terminal block for centralized control on only one of the heat source units. 6) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.) (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 8. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as [5] 9. 3) ME remote controller wiring Maximum overall line length (0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16]) m1 10m [32ft] m2+m3 10m [32ft] If the standard-supplied cable must be extended, use a cable with a diameter of 1.25mm2 [AWG16]. The section of the cable that exceeds 10m [32ft] must be included in the maximum indoor-heat source transmission line distance described in (1). When connected to the terminal block on the Simple remote controller, use cables that meet the following cable size specifications: 0.75 - 1.25 mm2 [AWG18-16]. 4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25 mm2 [AWG16] or large) Same as [5] 9. Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required 1 unit 2 units When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units 15 - 34 units 35 - 50 units When the P72 or P96 model is included in the connected indoor units 11 - 26 units 27 - 42 units HWE09080 3 units 43 - 50 units - 51 - GB [ II Restrictions ] When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Refer to the section on Switch Setting. Performing a group operation (including the group operation of units in different refrigerant circuits). Refer to the section on Switch Setting. 4) LOSSNAY connection Same as [5] 9. 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 8. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 6. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as [5] 9. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 9. 3) ME remote controller wiring ME remote controller is connectable anywhere on the indoor-heat source transmission line. (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Address setting range Unit or controller Indoor unit Main unit IC 01 to 50 Sub unit 2 LOSSNAY 3 Factory setting Setting method Notes Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. In a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. Port number setting is required To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, set the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. Main RC ME remote conremote troller controller Sub RC 101 to 150 Add 100 to the main unit address in the group 151 to 200 Add 150 to the main unit address in the group 4 Heat source unit OC OS 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC and OS.(Note) 5 Auxiliary heat source unit BCcontroller (Sub) BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. BC controller (Main) BC remote controller OC (or OS if it exists) +1 It is not necessary to set the 100s digit. To set the address to 200, set the rotary switches to 00. 101 To set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller, use a different, unused address within the setting range. The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). HWE09080 - 52 - GB [ II Restrictions ] [7] An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected 1. PQHY (1) Sample control wiring L11 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON SW2-1 OFF ON OS2 L12 Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40. Group Group SW2-1 OFF ON OS1 OC IC IC IC 53 52 51 01 02 06 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB5 TB15 M1 M2 S 1 2 TB7 M1 M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected A To be connected B A B 106 MA L31 L21 L22 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON SW2-1 OFF ON SW2-1 OFF ON OS2 OS1 56 55 54 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected Group OC TB3 M1 M2 TB7 M1 M2 S RC Group IC IC IC 03 04 05 TB5 TB15 M1 M2 S 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1 M2 S TB15 1 2 TB7 M1 M2 S To be left unconnected A To be left unconnected B A B 104 RC L32 MA Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is). Note1 Note2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208/230V. System controller A B S (2) Cautions 1) Be sure to connect a system controller. 2) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 3) Assign to the indoor units connected to the MA remote controller addresses that are smaller than those of the indoor units that are connected to the ME remote controller. 4) No more than 2 ME remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 5) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 6) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other. 7) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units. 8) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the terminal block for centralized control on only one of the heat source units. 9) A transmission booster must be connected to a system in which the total number of connected indoor units exceeds 20. 10) A transmission booster is required in a system to which more than 16 indoor including one or more indoor units of the 72 model or above are connected. 11) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper HWE09080 connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting). (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 3. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as [5] 4. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 1. 4) ME remote controller wiring Same as [5] 1. 5) Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25mm2 or larger) Same as [5] 4. - 53 - GB [ II Restrictions ] Same as [5] 1. Group operation of indoor units Same as [5] 1. 4) ME remote controller wiring Same as [6] When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Same as [6] Group operation of indoor units Same as [6] 5) LOSSNAY connection Same as [5] 4. 6) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 1. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 1. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as [5] 4. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 4. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 1. When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system (5) Address setting method Procedures 1 Opera- Indoor tion with the unit MA remote controller MA remote controller 2 Address setting range Unit or controller Opera- Indoor tion with the unit ME remote controller Main unit IC 01 to 50 Sub unit Setting method Notes Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. Assign an address smaller than that of the indoor unit that is connected to the ME remote controller. Enter the same indoor unit group settings on the system controller as the ones that were entered on the MA remote controller. To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) Main reMA mote controller No settings required. - Sub remote controller MA Sub remote controller Settings to be made according to the remote controller function selection Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) ME re- Main reRC mote mote concontroller troller RC Sub remote controller 101 to 150 Add 100 to the main unit address in the group. 151 to 200 Add 150 to the main unit address in the group. 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. Factory setting 00 Main Enter the indoor unit group settings on the system controller (MELANS). Assign an address larger than those of the indoor units that are connected to the MA remote controller. To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 It is not necessary to set the 100s digit. To set the address to 200, set the rotary switches to 00. 101 3 LOSSNAY LC 4 Heat source unit To set the address to 100, OC 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat source set the rotary switches to 50. OS1 units in the same refrigerOS2 None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 00 antcircuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.(Note) The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2. HWE09080 - 54 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 2. PQRY (1) Sample control wiring L12 L11 Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40. SW2-1 OFF ON Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON Group Group OS OC BC IC IC IC 52 51 53 01 02 06 TB3 M1M2 TB3 M1M2 TB7 M1M2 S To be left unconnected TB5 M1M2S TB02 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 TB7 M1M2 S To be connected A1 B2 A1 B2 106 MA L22 L31 L21 Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON OS Group OC 55 54 TB3 M1 M2 TB3 M1 M2 Group BC 56 IC IC IC 03 04 05 TB5 M1M2S TB02 M1 M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S TB7 M1 M2 S RC TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S A1 B2 A1 B2 TB15 1 2 TB5 M1M2 S TB15 1 2 To be left unconnected To be left unconnected L32 104 MA RC Note1 System controller *1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is). *2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V. AB S The left table shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected. 10) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting). (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 8. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as [5] 9. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as [5] 6. 4) ME remote controller wiring Same as [6] 2. 5) Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25 mm2 or larger) Same as [5] 4. (2) Cautions 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) Be sure to connect a system controller. ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. Assign to the indoor units connected to the MA remote controller addresses that are smaller than those of the indoor units that are connected to the ME remote controller. No more than 2 ME remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units with each other. Replace the power jumper connector of the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units. Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the terminal block for centralized control on only one of the heat source units. When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.) Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required 1 unit 2 units 3 units When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units 15 - 34 units 35 - 50 units - When the P72 or P96 model is included in the connected indoor units 11 - 26 units HWE09080 27 - 42 units 43 - 50 units - 55 - GB [ II Restrictions ] Group operation of indoor units Same as [5] 6. 4) ME remote controller wiring When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Group operation of indoor units Same as [6] 1. 5) LOSSNAY connection Same as [5] 9. 6) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor-heat source transmission line Same as [5] 8. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 6. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as [5] 9. Shielded cable connection Same as [5] 9. 3) MA remote controller wiring When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system HWE09080 - 56 - GB [ II Restrictions ] (5) Address setting method Procedure s 1 2 Address setting range Unit or controller Operation with the MA remote controller Operation with the ME remote controller Setting method Notes Assign an address smaller than that of the indoor unit that is connected to the ME remote controller. Enter the same indoor unit group settings on the system controller as the ones that were entered on the MA remote controller. To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of Port number setting is required Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. In a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. Sub unit IC 01 to 50 Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) MA remote controller Main remote controller MA No settings required. - Sub remote controller MA Sub remote controller Settings to be made according to the remote controller function selection Indoor unit Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. Sub unit IC 01 to 50 Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) ME remote controller Main remote controller RC 101 to 150 Add 100 to the main unit address in the group. Sub remote controller RC 151 to 200 Add 150 to the main unit address in the group. Indoor unit Factory setting 00 Main Assign an address higher than those of the indoor units that are connected to the MA remote controller. Make the initial settings for the indoor unit group settings via the system controller. To perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. Port number setting is required. Addresses that are assigned to the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller should be higher than the addresses that are assigned to the indoor units that are connected to the main BC controller. 00 It is not necessary to set the 100s digit. To set the address to 200, set it to 00. 101 3 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 4 Heat source unit OC OS 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units are automatically designated as OC and OS.(Note) 00 5 Auxiliary heat source unit BCcontroller (Sub) BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. To set the address to 100, set it to 50. If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller, use a different, unused address within the setting range. The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection of a main BC controller. BC controller (Main) BC OC (or OS if it exists) +1 The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). HWE09080 - 57 - GB [ II Restrictions ] [8] Restrictions on Pipe Length (1) End branching P72 - P120 models A D First branch (Branch joint) Branch header L B cap d e f Indoor Indoor Indoor 4 5 C Branch joint a 6 c b h H (Heat source unit above indoor unit) H' (Heat source unit below indoor unit) Heat source unit 1 Indoor 2 Indoor 3 Indoor Unit: m [ft] Operation Length Height difference Pipe sections Total pipe length A+B+C+D +a+b+c+d+e+f 300 [984] or less Total pipe length (L) from the heat source unit to the farthest indoor unit A+B+C+c or A+D+f 165 [541] or less (Equivalent length 190 [623] or less) Total pipe length from the first branch to the farthest indoor unit ( ) B+C+c or D+f 40 [131] or less Heat source unit above indoor unit H 50 [164] or less Heat source unit below indoor unit H' 40 [131] or less h 15 [49] or less Between indoor and heat source units Between indoor units HWE09080 Allowable length of pipes - 58 - GB [ II Restrictions ] P144 - P360 models Provide a trap on the pipe (gas pipe only) within 2 m from the joint pipe if the total length of the pipe that connects the joint pipe and the heat source unit exceeds 2 m. h2 Note1 Install the pipe that connects the branch pipe and the heat source units in the way that it has a downward inclination toward the branch pipe. To indoor unit Downward inclination To indoor unit Joint pipe 2m [6ft] A B Trap (gas pipe only) D C To indoor unit 2m [6ft] Max. Upward inclination Second gas refrigerant distributor Second liquid refrigerant distributor First liquid refrigerant distributor First gas refrigerant distributor L (Note) E F First branch G I a b c d Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor 1 2 3 4 J h1 H To indoor unit Joint pipe K E To downstream units Note : "Total sum of downstream unit model numbers" in the table is the sum of the model numbers of the units after point E in the figure. M e f g i Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor 5 6 7 8 Unit: m [ft] Pipe sections Allowable length of pipes A+B+C+D 10 [32] or less A+B+C+D+E+F+G+I+J +K+M+a+b+c+d+e+f+g +i 300 [984] or less Total pipe length (L) from the heat source unit to the farthest indoor unit A(B)+C+E+J+K+M+i 165 [541] or less (Equivalent length 190 [623] or less) Total pipe length from the first branch to the farthest indoor unit ( ) G+I+J+i 40 [131] or less Between indoor and heat source units H 50 [164] or less (40 [131] or below if heat source unit is below indoor unit) Between indoor units h1 15 [49] or less Between heat source units h2 0.1[0.3] or less Operation Length Between heat source units Total pipe length Height difference HWE09080 - 59 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 1. Refrigerant pipe size (1) Diameter of the refrigerant pipe between the heat source unit and the first branch (heat source unit pipe size) Heat source unit set name Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch] Gas pipe size (mm) [inch] P72 model ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø9.52 [3/8"] *1 ø22.2 [7/8"] P120 model ø9.52 [3/8"] *2 ø22.2 [7/8"] P144 model ø12.7 [1/2"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"] P168 - 240 model ø15.88 [5/8"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"] P264 - 312models ø19.05 [3/4"] ø34.93 [1-3/8"] P336- 360 models ø19.05 [3/4"] ø41.28 [1-5/8"] P96 model *1. Use ø12.7 [1/2"] pipes if the piping length exceeds 90 m [295 ft]. *2. Use ø12.7 [1/2"] pipes if the piping length exceeds 40 m [131 ft]. (2) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first branch and the indoor unit (indoor unit pipe size) Indoor unit model Pipe diameter (mm) [inch] 06 - 15 models Liquid pipe ø6.35 [1/4"] Gas pipe ø12.7 [1/2"] Liquid pipe ø9.52 [3/8"] Gas pipe ø15.88 [5/8"] Liquid pipe ø9.52 [3/8"] Gas pipe ø19.05 [3/4"] Liquid pipe ø9.52 [3/8"] Gas pipe ø22.2 [7/8"] 18 - 54 models 72 model 96 model (3) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the branches for connection to indoor units Total capacity of the downstream units Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch] Gas pipe size (mm) [inch] - 54 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"] P55 - P72 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] P72 - P108 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] P109 - P144 ø12.7 [1/2"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"] P145 - P240 ø15.88 [5/8"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"] P241 - P308 ø19.05 [3/4"] ø34.93 [1-3/8"] P309 - ø19.05 [3/4"] ø41.28 [1-5/8"] (4) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first distributor and the second distributor HWE09080 Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch] Gas pipe size (mm) [inch] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø34.93 [1-3/8"] - 60 - GB [ II Restrictions ] (5) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first distributor or the second distributor and heat source units Heat source unit model Composing unit models Liquid pipe (mm) [inch] Gas pipe (mm) [inch] P144 P72 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] ø12.7 [1/2"] ø22.2 [7/8"] ø12.7 [1/2"] ø22.2 [7/8"] P72 P168 P96 P72 P192 P96 P96 P216 P120 P96 P240 P120 P120 P264 P96 P96 P72 P288 P96 P96 P96 P312 P120 P96 P96 P336 P120 P120 P96 P360 P120 P120 P120 HWE09080 - 61 - GB [ II Restrictions ] (1) System that requires 16 BC controller ports or fewer Heat source unit *Use a main BC controller when connecting the heat source units of P144 model or above. A H H' BC controller Branch joint (CMY-Y102S-G2) Reducer (P06 - P18 models) (Supplied with the BC Controller) h1 a Junction pipe (CMY-R160-J) Indoor d h2 B b c Indoor Indoor Indoor (P06 - P54 models) (P72 or P96 model) Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below Unit: m [ft] Operation Length Pipe sections Allowable length of pipes A+B+a+b+c+d Refer to the restrictions on the total piping length in the graph on the next page. Total pipe length from the heat source unit to the farthest indoor unit A+B+d 165 [541] or less (Equivalent length 190 [623] or less) Between heat source unit and BC controller A 110 [360] or less Between BC controller and indoor unit B+d 40 [131] or less*1 Heat source unit above indoor unit H 50 [164] or less Heat source unit below indoor unit H' 40 [131] or less Between indoor unit and BC controller h1 15[49](10[32]) or less*2 Between indoor units h2 15[49](10[32]) or less *2 Total pipe length Height difference Between indoor and heat source units *1. When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m [131ft], observe the restrictions in the figure titled "Restrictions on pipe length" below (except the P96 model). *2. When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P72 or above, use the figures in the parentheses as a reference. HWE09080 - 62 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 1) To connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units, use an optional junction pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) and merge the two ports before connecting them. 2) Do not connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port. 3) All the units that are connected to the same ports can only be operated in the same operation mode (cooling/heating). HWE09080 1000 [3280] 900 [2952] 800 [2624] 700 [2296] 600 [1968] 500 [1640] 400 [1312] 300 [984] 200 [656] 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 [32] [64] [98] [131] [164] [196] [229] [262] [295] [328] [360] Pipe length between heat source unit and BC controller (m[ft]) - 63 - The height difference and the pipe length between BC controller and indoor units 70 [229] Pipe length between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft]) Aggregate length of all pipes(m[ft]) Restrictions on pipe length [PQRY-P72, P96, P120THMU-A/YHMU-A] 60 [196] 50 [164] 40 [131] 30 [98] 20 [64] 10 [32] 0 0 5 10 15 [16] [32] [49] Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft]) GB [ II Restrictions ] (2) System that requires more than 16 BC controller ports or with multiple BC controllers Heat source unit Branch joint (CMY-Y202-G2) (CMY-Y102L-G2) (CMY-Y102S-G2) A H BC controller (main) H' C Reducer (P06 - P18 models) (Supplied with the BC Controller) h1 Junction pipe (CMY-R160-J) a Indoor (P06 - P54 models) Indoor e D h1 BC controller (sub) h3 Branch joint (CMY-Y102S-G2) E BC controller (sub) h2 B b d c Indoor Indoor (P72 or P96 model) f h1 Indoor Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below Indoor Unit: m [ft] Operation Length Height difference Pipe sections Allowable length of pipes A+B+C+D+E+a+b+c+d+e+f Refer to the restrictions on the total piping length in the graphon the next page. Total pipe length from the heat source unit to the farthest indoor unit A+C+E+f 165 [541] or less (Equivalent length 190 [623] or less) Between heat source unit and BC controller A 110 [360] or less Between BC controller and indoor unit B+d or C+D+e or C+E+f 40 [131] or less*1 Heat source unit above indoor unit H 50 [164] or less Heat source unit below indoor unit H' 40 [131] or less Between indoor unit and BC controller h1 15 [49](10[32]) or less*2 Between indoor units h2 15 [49](10[32]) or less *2 Between the BC controller (main or sub) and the sub BC controller h3 15 [49] or less Total pipe length Between indoor and heat source units *1. When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m [131ft], observe the restrictions in the figure titled "Restrictions on pipe length" below (except the P96 model). *2. When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P72 or above, use the figures in the parentheses as a reference. HWE09080 - 64 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 1) A system that requires more than 16 BC controller ports requires two or three BC controllers (main and sub), and three pipes will be used between the main and the sub BC controllers. 2) When connecting two sub BC controllers, observe the maximum allowable length in the table above. 3) When connecting two sub BC controllers, install them in parallel. 4) To connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units, use an optional junction pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) and merge the two ports before connecting them. 5) Do not connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port. 6) All the units that are connected to the same ports can only be operated in the same operation mode (cooling/heating). 7) The maximum capacity of the indoor units that is connectable to the CMB-P-NU-GB types of sub BC controllers is P126 or below (when two GB type controllers are connected P126 or below for both combined). The maximum total capacity of indoor units that is connectable to the sub BC controller CMB-P1016NU-HB is P126 or below. If at least one CMB-P1016NU-HB unit is connected, the maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units to a system with two sub controllers is P168 or below. 1000 [3280] 900 [2952] 800 [2624] 700 [2296] 600 [1968] 500 [1640] 400 [1312] 300 [984] 200 [656] 10 20 [32] [64] 70 [229] Pipe length between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft]) Aggregate length of all pipes(m[ft]) Restrictions on pipe length [PQRY-P72, P96, P120THMU-A/YHMU-A] The height difference and the pipe length between BC controller and indoor units 50 [164] 40 [131] 30 [98] 20 [64] 10 [32] 0 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 [98] [131] [164] [196] [229] [262] [295] [328] [360] 0 5 10 15 [16] [32] [49] Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft]) Pipe length between heat source unit and BC controller (m[ft]) HWE09080 60 [196] - 65 - GB [ II Restrictions ] (3) System that requires more than 16 BC controller ports or with multiple BC controllers Heat source unit 1 Heat source unit 2 Branch joint : CMY-Q100VBK On the low-pressure side, the twinning kit connects to the pipes on site inside the heat source unit. When different capacity units are combined, connect the kit to the larger capacity heat source unit. h4 F Branch joint (CMY-Y202-G2) (CMY-Y102L-G2) (CMY-Y102S-G2) G A Indoor e D H BC controller (main) H' a h3 C Branch joint (CMY-Y102S-G2) Reducer (P06 - P18 models) (Supplied with the BC Controller) h1 (P06 - P54 models) E BC controller (sub) h2 B Junction pipe (CMY-R160-J) Indoor h1 BC controller (sub) b c d Indoor Indoor Indoor (P72 or P96 model) f h1 Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below Indoor Unit: m [ft] Operation Length Pipe sections Total pipe length F+G+A+B+C+D+E+a+b+c+d+e Refer to the restrictions on the total pip+f ing length in the graph on the next page. Total pipe length from the heat source unit to the farthest indoor unit F(G)+A+C+E+f 165 [541] or less (Equivalent length 190 [623] or less) Between heat source unit and BC controller F(G)+A 110 [360] or less Between BC controller and indoor unit B+d or C+D+e or C+E+f 40 [131] or less*1 F+G 5 [16] or less Heat source unit above indoor unit H 50 [164] or less Heat source unit below indoor unit H' 40 [131] or less Between indoor unit and BC controller h1 15 [49](10[32]) or less*2 Between indoor units h2 15 [49](10[32]) or less *2 Between the BC controller (main or sub) and the sub BC controller h3 15 [49] or less Between heat source units h4 0.1 [0.3] or less Between heat source units Height difference Allowable length of pipes Between indoor and heat source units *1. When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m [131ft], observe the restrictions in the figure titled "Restrictions on pipe length" below (except the P96 model). *2. When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P72 or above, use the figures in the parentheses as a reference. HWE09080 - 66 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 1) A system that requires more than 16 BC controller ports requires two or three BC controllers (main and sub), and three pipes will be used between the main and the sub BC controllers. 2) When connecting two sub BC controllers, observe the maximum allowable length in the table above. 3) When connecting two sub BC controllers, install them in parallel. 4) To connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units, use an optional junction pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) and merge the two ports before connecting them. 5) Do not connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port. 6) All the units that are connected to the same ports can only be operated in the same operation mode (cooling/heating). 7) The maximum capacity of the indoor units that is connectable to the CMB-P-NU-GB types of sub BC controllers is P126 or below (when two GB type controllers are connected, P126 or below for both combined). The maximum total capacity of indoor units that is connectable to the sub BC controller CMB-P1016NU-HB is P126 or below. If at least one CMB-P1016NU-HB unit is connected, the maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units to a system with two sub controllers is P168 or below. Restrictions on pipe length 1000 [3280] 900 [2952] 800 [2624] 700 [2296] 600 [1968] 500 [1640] 400 [1312] 300 [984] 200 [656]10 20 [32] [64] 70 [229] Pipe length between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft]) Aggregate length of all pipes(m[ft]) [PQRY-P144, P168, P192, P216, P240THMU-A/YHMU-A] The height difference and the pipe length between BC controller and indoor units 50 [164] 40 [131] 30 [98] 20 [64] 10 [32] 0 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 [98] [131] [164] [196] [229] [262] [295] [328] [360] 0 Pipe length between heat source unit and BC controller (m[ft]) HWE09080 60 [196] 5 [16] 10 [32] 15 [49] Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft]) - 67 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 2. Refrigerant pipe size (1) Between heat source unit and the first twinning pipe (Part A) Unit : mm [inch] Refrigerant pipe size Connection to heat source unit and BC controller Heat source unit P72 Low-pressure pipe High-pressure pipe Low-pressure pipe High-pressure pipe ø19.05 [3/4"] ø15.88 [5/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø15.88 [5/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø22.2 [7/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] P96 P120 P144 P168 P192 ø22.2[7/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"] P216 ø28.58 [1-1/8"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"] P240 (2) Between BC controller and indoor unit (Sections a, b, c, d, e, and f ) Unit : mm [inch] Refrigerant pipe size Indoor unit connection (Flare connection for all models) Indoor unit P06, P08, P12, P15, P18 Liquid pipe Gas pipe Liquid pipe Gas pipe ø6.35 [1/4"] ø12.7 [1/2"] ø6.35 [1/4"] ø12.7 [1/2"] ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"] ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"] P24, P27, P30 P36, P48, P54 P72 ø19.05 [3/4"] ø12.7 [1/2"] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø12.7 [1/2"] P96 ø22.2[7/8"] ø22.2[7/8"] (3) Between the main and sub BC controllers (Section C) Unit : mm [inch] Refrigerant pipe size (Brazed connection on all models ) Indoor unit Liquid pipe - P72 High-pressure gas pipe Low-pressure gas pipe ø15.88 [5/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø9.52 [3/8"] P73 - P108 ø22.2 [7/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] P109 - P126 ø12.7 [1/2"] P127 - P144 ø28.58 [1-1/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] P145 - P168 ø15.88 [5/8"] Select the proper size pipes for the main unit based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to both sub BC controllers. Select the proper size pipes for the sub controller side based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to the sub controller. HWE09080 - 68 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 3. Connecting the BC controller (1) Size of the pipe that fits the standard BC controller ports P72 - P120 models Connection: Brazed connection To heat source unit BC controller *1 Reducer (Standard supplied parts) Indoor *2 Junction pipe kit (Model name: CMY-R160-J) (Optional accessory) Indoor Indoor Branch joint (Model name:CMY-Y102S-G2) (Optional accessory) B A Indoor Indoor Indoor P18 model or below P24-P54 models P72 or P96 model 3* Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below (All units connected to the same port must be in the same operating mode.) The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P24-P54 models of indoor units. To connect other types of indoor units, follow the procedure below. Unit : mm [inch] Pipe sections Operation Heat source unit side High-pressure side (liquid) Low-pressure side (gas) PQRY-P72THMU-A/YHMU-A ø15.88 [5/8"] (Brazed connection) ø19.05 [3/4"] (Brazed connection) PQRY-P96THMU-A/YHMU-A PQRY-P120THMU-A/YHMU-A ø19.05 [3/4"] (Brazed connection) ø22.2 [7/8"] (Brazed connection) ø9.52 [3/8"] (Flare connection) ø15.88 [5/8"] (Flare connection) Indoor unit side * BC controllers can only be connected to P72 - P120 models of heat source units. HWE09080 - 69 - GB [ II Restrictions ] 1) To connect P06 - P18 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller. 2) To connect P36 - P96 models of indoor units (or when the total capacity of indoor units exceeds P31), use a junction pipe kit and merge the two nozzles. 70 [2-25/32"] Liquid pipe side:3/8F (Flare connection) Gas pipe side:5/8F (Flare connection) 234 [9-7/32"] Liquid pipe side:3/8F (Flare connection) Gas pipe side:5/8F (Flare connection) Liquid pipe side: 6.35[1/4"]ID Gas pipe side: 12.7[1/2"]ID Liquid pipe side: Gas pipe side: 9.52[3/8”]ID 19.05[3/4”]ID(*1) Supplied with a thermal insulation cover Note) Use the flare nut that is supplied with the BC controller. 3) To connect multiple indoor units to a port (or to a junction pipe) Maximum total capacity of connected indoor units: P54 or below (in a system with a junction pipe: P96 or below) Maximum number of connectable indoor units: 3 units Branch joint: Use CMY-Y102S-G2 (optional accessory). Refrigerant pipe selection (size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above): Select the proper size pipes based on the total capacity of the downstream indoor units, using the table below as a reference. Unit : mm [inch] HWE09080 Total capacity of indoor units Liquid pipe Gas pipe P54 or below ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"] P55 - P72 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] P73 - P96 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] - 70 - GB [ II Restrictions ] (2) Size of the pipe that fits the main BC controller ports P72 - P240 models To heat source unit Branch joint (Model name:CMY-Y102S-G2) (Optional accessory) Connection: Brazed connection BC controller (main) *1 Reducer (Standard supplied parts) Indoor Indoor Indoor *2 Junction pipe kit (Model name: CMY-R160-J) (Optional accessory) P18 model or below P24-P54 models P72 or P96 model A B Indoor Indoor Indoor 3* Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below (All units connected to the same port must be in the same operating mode.) The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P24-P54 models of indoor units. To connect other types of indoor units, follow the procedure below. 1) To connect P06-P18 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller. 2) To connect the units between the P36 and P96 models of indoor units (or when the total capacity of indoor units is P31 or above), use a junction pipe kit and merge the two nozzles. 3) To connect multiple indoor units to a port (or to a junction pipe) Maximum total capacity of connected indoor units: P54 or below (in a system with a junction pipe: P96 or below) Maximum number of connectable indoor units: 3 units Branch joint: Use CMY-Y102S-G2 (optional accessory). Refrigerant pipe selection (size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above): Select the proper based on the total capacity of the downstream indoor units, using the table below as a reference. Unit : mm [inch] Total capacity of indoor units Liquid pipe Gas pipe P54 or below ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"] P55 - P72 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] P73 - P96 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] Unit : mm [inch] Pipe sections Model Heat source unit side High pressure side (Liquid) Low-pressure side (Gas) PQRY-P72THMU-A/YHMU-A ø15.88 [5/8"] (Brazed connection) ø19.05 [3/4"] (Brazed connection) PQRY-P96THMU-A/YHMU-A ø19.05 [3/4"] (Brazed connection) ø22.2 [7/8"] (Brazed connection) PQRY-P120THMU-A/YHMU-A PQRY-P144TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A ø22.2 [7/8"] (Brazed connection) PQRY-P168TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A PQRY-P192TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A PQRY-P216TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A ø28.58 [1-1/8"] (Brazed connection) PQRY-P240TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A Indoor unit side HWE09080 ø28.58 [1-1/8"] (Brazed connection) ø9.52 [3/8"] (Flare connection) - 71 - ø15.88 [5/8"] (Flare connection) GB [ II Restrictions ] (3) Size of the pipe that fits the sub BC controller ports Connection: Brazed connection To Main BC controller BC controller (sub) *1 Reducer (Standard supplied parts) Indoor Indoor Branch joint (Model name:CMY-Y102S-G2) (Optional accessory) *2 Junction pipe kit (Model name: CMY-R160-J) (Optional accessory) A Indoor Indoor P18 model or below P24-P54 models P72 or P96 model B Indoor Indoor 3* Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below (All units connected to the same port must be in the same operating mode.) The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P24-P54 models of indoor units. To connect other types of indoor units, follow the procedure below. 1) To connect P06-P18 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller. 2) To connect the units between the P36 and P96 models of indoor units (or when the total capacity of indoor units is P31 or above), use a junction pipe kit and merge the two nozzles. 3) To connect multiple indoor units to a port (or to a junction pipe) Maximum total capacity of connected indoor units: P54 or below (in a system with a junction pipe: P96 or below) Maximum number of connectable indoor units: 3 units Branch joint: Use CMY-Y102S-G2 (optional accessory). Refrigerant pipe selection (size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above): Select the proper based on the total capacity of the downstream indoor units, using the table below as a reference. Unit : mm [inch] Total capacity of indoor units Liquid pipe Gas pipe P54 or below ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"] P55 - P72 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] P73 - P96 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] Unit : mm [inch] Operation On the BC controller side Pipe sections Total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to the BC controller High-pressure side (liquid) Low-pressure side (gas) P72 model or below ø15.88 [5/8"] (Brazed connection) ø19.05 [3/4"] (Brazed connection) P73 - P108 ø19.05 [3/4"] (Brazed connection) ø22.2 [7/8"] (Brazed connection) P109 - P126 P127 - P144 P145 - P168 ø22.2 [7/8"] (Brazed connection) ø28.58 [1-1/8"] (Brazed connection) Liquid pipe side ø9.52 [3/8"] (Brazed connection) ø12.7 [1/2"] (Brazed connection) ø15.88 [5/8"] (Brazed connection) Select the proper size pipes for the main unit based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to both sub BC controllers. Select the proper size pipes for the sub controller side based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to the sub controller. HWE09080 - 72 - GB III Heat source Unit Components [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] HWE09080 Heat source Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit.................................................... 75 Control Box of the Heat source Unit ................................................................................ 78 Heat source Unit Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 81 BC Controller Components .............................................................................................. 88 Control Box of the BC Controller...................................................................................... 91 BC Controller Circuit Board.............................................................................................. 92 - 73 - GB - 74 - [ III Heat source Unit Components ] III Heat source Unit Components [1] Heat source Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit 1. Front view of a heat source unit (1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A Top panel Control box Front panel HWE09080 - 75 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] 2. Refrigerant circuit (1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A LEVINV Check valve(CV7a) Solenoid valve(SV7a) Solenoid valve(SV9) Check valve(CV6a) Low-pressure sensor (63LS) Component cooler heat exchanger Solenoid valve block (SV4a, SV4b, SV4d) 4-way valve(21S4a) Check valve(CV5a) Solenoid valve(SV7b) Check valve(CV3a) High-pressure sensor(63HS1) High-pressure switch(63H1) Check valve(CV2a) Transformer Box (YHMU only) Accumulator (ACC) Check valve(CV4a) Check valve(CV11) Water heat exchanger Refrigerant service valve (low pressure)(BV1) Compressor(COMP) Refrigerant service valve (high pressure)(BV2) Check joint (high pressure)(CJ1) Check joint (low pressure)(CJ2) Oil separator(O/S) Solenoid valve(SV1a) Check valve(CV8) HWE09080 - 76 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] (2) PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A LEVINV Check valve(CV7a) Solenoid valve(SV7a) Solenoid valve(SV9) Low-pressure sensor (63LS) Double pipe(SCC) Check valve(CV6a) Component cooler heat exchanger 4-way valve(21S4a) Solenoid valve block (SV4a, SV4b, SV4d) Check valve (CV1a) Solenoid valve(SV7b) High-pressure sensor(63HS1) High-pressure switch(63H1) LEV1 LEV2b LEV2a Transformer Box (YHMU only) Check valve(CV4a) Water heat exchanger Refrigerant service valve (low pressure)(BV1) Refrigerant service valve (high pressure)(BV2) Accumulator(ACC) Solenoid valve(SV1) Compressor(COMP) Check valve(CV8) Check joint (high pressure)(CJ1) Check joint (low pressure)(CJ2) Oil separator(O/S) HWE09080 - 77 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] [2] Control Box of the Heat source Unit (1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A DC reactor (DCL) Electromagnetic relay (72C) Relay board Control board Inrush current resistor Note2 Noise filter INV board Note2 Ground terminal Smoothing capacitor Power supply terminal block (C1) (TB1) Note1 M-NET board Terminal block for transmission line (TB3,TB7) Pump interlock terminal block (TB8) 1) Exercise caution not to damage the bottom and the front panel of the control box. Damage to these parts affect the waterproof and dust proof properties of the control box and may result in damage to its internal components. 2) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them. HWE09080 - 78 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] (2) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A Control box houses high-voltage parts. When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less. (It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off.) Electromagnetic relay Capacitor (72C) (C100) Inrush current resistor (R1,R5) Note2 Relay board Control board DC reactor (DCL) Noise filter Power supply terminal block L1,L2,L3 (TB1) M-NET board Ground terminal Fuse (F4) Fuse (F5) Note1 INV board Terminal block for transmission line (TB3, TB7) Pump interlock terminal block (TB8) 1) Exercise caution not to damage the bottom and the front panel of the control box. Damage to these parts affect the waterproof and dust proof properties of the control box and may result in damage to its internal components. 2) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them. HWE09080 - 79 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] 1. Transformer Box (1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A Transformer (T03) Transformer (T02) HWE09080 - 80 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] [3] Heat source Unit Circuit Board 1. Heat source unit control board CNDC Bus voltage input P N CN2 Serial communication signal input CN801 GND INV board Pressure switch Output 17VDC connection CN332 Output 18VDC GND CN4 GND Serial communication signal output CNAC2 L1 L2 CN505 72C driving output (THMU) LEV driving output LED1 Service LED CN51 Output 12VDC Compressor ON/OFF output Error output SWU1,2 Address switch SW1-5 Dip switch Actuator driving output CN72 72C driving output (YHMU) Sensor input LED3 Lit when powered LED2 Lit during normal CPU operation CNAC L1 L2 HWE09080 F01 Fuse 250V AC/3.15A CN41 Power supply for CN40 centralized control OFF Power supply for centralized control ON CN102 Power supply input for centralized control system (30VDC) Indoor-heat source transmission line input/output (30VDC) External signal input (contact input) - 81 - CNVCC2 Output 12VDC Output 5VDC GND CNIT Output 12VDC GND Output 5VDC Power supply detection input Power supply ON/OFF signal output CNS2 Transmission line input/output for centralized control system (30VDC) GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] 2. M-NET board CN04 Bus voltage input CN03(THMU only) (YHMU only) (THMU only) Bus voltage input Bus voltage output F01 P (THMU only) 250V N P 3.15A N CN102 Power supply output for centralized control system (30VDC) Indoor-heat source transmission line input/output (30VDC) CNS2 Transmission line input/output for centralized control system (30VDC) Grounding CNIT Input 12VDC GND Input 5VDC Power supply detection output Power supply ON/OFF signal input LED1 Power supply for indoor transmission line Grounding HWE09080 Ground terminal for TB7 Terminal block for transmission line transmission line for TB3 Indoor-heat source transmission block centralized control Grounding - 82 - TP1,2 Check pins for indoor-heat source transmission line GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] 3. INV board (1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A CN6 Open: No-load operation setting Short-circuited: Normal setting SC-P1 Rectifier diode output (P) CN5V GND Output 5VDC LED1 Lit: Inverter in normal operation Blink: Inverter error IGBT (Rear) CN4 GND(Control board) Serial communication signal output C30,31,32 Smoothing capacitor CNDC Bus voltage output P N RSH1,2 Overcurrent detection resistor CN2 Serial communication signal output GND Input 17VDC SC-P2 Bus voltage Input(P) SC-V Inverter output(V) SC-W Inverter output(W) TB-P(Note) Bus voltage output(P) TB-N(Note) Bus voltage output(N) CT12 Current sensor(U) SC-T Input(L3) SC-R Input(L1) CT3 Current sensor(L3) CT22 Current sensor(W) SC-U Inverter output(U) SC-S Input(L2) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them. HWE09080 - 83 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] (2) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A SC-P1 CN6 Rectifier diode output (P) Open: No-load operation setting CN5V RSH1 SC-P2 Short-circuited: Normal setting GND Overcurrent detection LED1 Bus voltage Input(P) Lit: Inverter in normal operation 5VDC output resistor Blink: Inverter error CN4 GND(Control board) Serial communication signal output Bus voltage check terminal (P) Note CN2 Serial communication signal output GND 17VDC input IGBT (Rear) CN1 Bus voltage output N P Bus voltage check terminal (N) Note 1 CNTYP Inverter board type SC-V Inverter output(V) SC-L1 Input(L1) SC-W Inverter output(W) SC-U Inverter output(U) SC-L2 Input(L2) SC-L3 Input(L3) CT12 Current sensor(U) CT22 Current sensor(W) C30 C37 Smoothing capacitor CT3 Current sensor(L3) 1) Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less. (It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off.) HWE09080 - 84 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] 4. Relay board CN83 Pump interlock signal output Pump interlock signal output Pump interlock signal input Pump interlock signal input CNAC4 L1 input L2 CNOUT2 12 VDC input Relay driving signal input (X21) Relay driving signal input (X22) Relay driving signal input (X23) Relay driving signal input (X24) Relay driving signal input (X25) HWE09080 - 85 - CNPW Pump interlock signal output Pump interlock signal output GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] 5. Noise Filter (1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A TB21 Input/output(L1) CN02 Output L1 L2 Grounding TB22 Input/output(L2) F2 Fuse 250VAC 6.3A TB23 Input/output(L3) F1 Fuse 250VAC 6.3A CN01 Input L3 L2 L1 HWE09080 - 86 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] (2) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A CN5 Output (Rectified L2-L3 current) P N CN4 Output (Rectified L2-L3 current) P N CN6 Input L2 L3 CN2 Surge absorber circuit Surge absorber circuit Short circuit Short circuit Grounding F1,F2,F3,F4 Fuse 250VAC 6.3A Grounding CN1A Input L1 CN1B Input L3 L2 HWE09080 TB21 TB22 TB23 Input/output(L1) Input/output(L2) Input/output(L3) - 87 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] [4] BC Controller Components 1. CMB-P (1) Front NU-G, GA Liquid pipe (Indoor unit side) Gas pipe (Indoor unit side) (2) Rear view TH11 PS1 SVM1 LEV3 LEV1 PS3 Gas/Liquid separator TH16 Tube in tube heat exchanger TH12 TH15 HWE09080 - 88 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] (3) Rear view LEV2 TH16 PS3 PS1 LEV3 TH11 LEV1 SVM2 Gas/Liquid separator Tube in tube heat exchanger SVM1 TH12 HWE09080 TH15 - 89 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] 2. CMB-P (1) Front NU-GB, HB Liquid pipe (Indoor unit side) Gas pipe (Indoor unit side) (2) Rear view TH12 LEV3 TH15 HWE09080 - 90 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] [5] Control Box of the BC Controller 1. CMB-P1016NU-G, GA Transformer Terminal block for power supply Terminal block for transmission line Relay board HWE09080 BC controller board - 91 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] [6] BC Controller Circuit Board 1. BC controller circuit board (BC board) SW4 HWE09080 SW5 SW6 SW2 - 92 - SW1 GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] 2. RELAY BOARD (RELAY 4 board) 3. RELAY BOARD (RELAY 10 board) HWE09080 - 93 - GB [ III Heat source Unit Components ] HWE09080 - 94 - GB IV Remote Controller [1] [2] [3] [4] HWE09080 Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers ................................... 97 Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller ............................. 98 Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller ........................................................... 102 Using the built-in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller ................................. 103 - 95 - GB - 96 - [ IV Remote Controller ] IV Remote Controller [1] Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers There are two types of remote controllers: ME remote controller, which is connected on the indoor-heat source transmission line, and MA remote controller, which is connected to each indoor unit. 1. Comparison of functions and specifications between MA and ME remote controllers MA remote controller*1*2 Functions/specifications ME remote controller*2*3 Remote controller address settings Not required Required Indoor-heat source unit address settings Not required (required only by a system with one heat source unit)*4 Required Wiring method Non-polarized 2-core cable Non-polarized 2-core cable To perform a group operation, daisychain the indoor units using non-polarized 2-core cables. Remote controller connection Connectable to any indoor unit in the group Connectable anywhere on the indoor-heat source transmission line Interlock with the ventilation unit Each indoor unit can individually be interlocked with a ventilation unit. (Set up via remote controller in the group.) Each indoor unit can individually be interlocked with a ventilation unit. (Set up via remote controller.) Changes to be made upon grouping change MA remote controller wiring between in- Either the indoor unit address and remote door units requires rewiring. controller address must both be changed, or the registration information must be changed via MELANS. *1. MA remote controller refers to MA remote controller (PAR-20MAA, PAR-21MAA), MA simple remote controller, and wireless remote controller. *2. Either the MA remote controller or the ME remote controller can be connected when a group operation of units in a system with multiple heat source units is conducted or when a system controller is connected. *3. ME remote controller refers to ME remote controller and ME simple remote controller. *4. Depending on the system configuration, some systems with one heat source unit may require address settings. 2. Remote controller selection criteria MA remote controller and ME remote controller have different functions and characteristics. Choose the one that better suits the requirements of a given system. Use the following criteria as a reference. MA remote controller*1*2 ME remote controller*1*2 There is little likelihood of system expansion and grouping changes. Grouping (floor plan) has been set at the time of installation. There is a likelihood of centralized installation of remote controllers, system expansion, and grouping changes. Grouping (floor plan) has not been set at the time of installation. To connect the remote controller directly to the OA processing unit. *1. ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. *2. A system controller must be connected to a system to which both MA remote controller and ME remote controller are connected. Heat source unit Heat source unit group group MA remote controller Indoor unit group BC controller HWE09080 M-NET transmission line (indoor-heat source transmission line) M-NET transmission line (indoor-heat source transmission line) group BC controller ME remote controller - 97 - Indoor unit GB [ IV Remote Controller ] [2] Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller 1. Group settings/interlock settings Make the following settings to perform a group operation of units that are connected to different heat source units or to manually set up the indoor-heat source unit address. (A) Group settings...........Registration of the indoor units to be controlled with the remote controller, and search and deletion of registered information. (B) Interlock settings........Registration of LOSSNAY units to be interlocked with the indoor units, and search and deletion of registered information [Operation Procedures] (1) Address settings Register the indoor unit to be controlled with the remote controller. 1 Bring up either the blinking display of HO by turning on the unit or the ˚C TEMP. ON/OFF normal display by pressing the ON/OFF button. The display window must look like one of the two figures below to proceed to the C next step. CENTRALLY CONTROLLED ON OFF DAILY AUTO OFF CLOCK 1Hr. ˚C REMAINDER STAND BY DEFROST NOT AVAILABLE CLOCK→ON→OFF FILTER CHECK MODE TEST RUN LIMIT TEMP. FILTER G CHECK TEST PAR-F27MEA (A) Group Settings 2 Bring up the Group Setting window. -Press and hold buttons A [FILTER] and B [ ] simultaneously for 2 seconds to bring up the display as shown below. D H [Normal display] A TIMER SET E [Blinking display of HO ] ?F B (B) Interlock Settings 6 Bring up the Interlock Setting window. -Press button G [ ] to bring up the following display. Press again to go back to the Group Setting window as shown under step 2 . Both the indoor unit address and interlocked unit address will be displayed together. Indoor unit address display window Indoor unit Interlocked unit address address display window display window 3 Select the unit address. - Select the address of the indoor unit to be registered by pressing button C [TEMP. ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back through the addresses. 4 Register the indoor unit whose address appears on the To search for an address, go to section (2) Address Search. 7 Bring up the address of the indoor unit and the address of the LOSSNAY to be interlocked on the display. - Select the address of the indoor unit to be registered by pressing button C [TEMP. ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back through the addresses. - Select the address of the LOSSNAY unit to be interlocked by pressing button H [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back through the interlocked unit addresses. display. - Press button D [TEST] to register the indoor unit address whose address appears on the display. - If registration is successfully completed, unit type will appear on the display as shown in the figure below. - If the selected address does not have a corresponding indoor unit, an error message will appear on the display. Check the address, and try again. 8 Make the settings to interlock LOSSNAY units with indoor units. - Press button D [TEST] while both the indoor unit address and the address of the LOSSNAY units to be interlocked are displayed to enter the interlock setting. - Interlock setting can also be made by bringing up the LOSSNAY address in the indoor unit address display window and the indoor unit address in the interlocked unit address display window. Unit type (Indoor unit in this case) blinks to indicate a registration error. (Indicates that selected address does not have a corresponding unit.) (Displayed alternately) 5 To register the addresses for multiple indoor units, repeat steps 3 and 4 above. If registration is successfully completed, the two displays as shown on the left will appear alternately. If the registration fails, will blink on the display. (Indicates that the selected address does not have a corresponding unit.) To search for an address, go to section (2) Address Search. NOTE : Interlock all the indoor units in the group with the LOSSNAY units; otherwise, the LOSSNAY units will not operate. To next page. HWE09080 - 98 - GB [ IV Remote Controller ] 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 in the previous page to interlock all the indoor units in a group with the LOSSNAY unit. (C) To return to the normal display When all the group settings and interlock settings are made, take the following step to go back to the normal display. 10 Press and hold buttons A [FILTER] and B [ ] simultaneously for 2 seconds to go back to the window as shown in step 1 . To go back to the normal display, To search for an address, follow step 10 . go to section (2) Address Search. (2) Address search To search for the address of indoor units that have been entered into the remote controller, follow steps 1 and 2 . (A) To search group settings (B) Interlock setting search 11 Bring up the Group Setting window. After performing step 6 , proceed as follows: 12 Bring up the address of the indoor unit to be searched on - Each pressing of button E [ ] will bring up the address of a registered indoor unit and its unit type on the display. the display. - Select the address of the indoor unit to be searched by pressing button H [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back through the interlocked addresses. Unit type (Indoor unit in this case) LOSSNAY can be searched in the same manner by bringing up the LOSSNAY address in the Interlocked unit address display window. 13 Bring up on the display the address of the LOSSNAY unit that was interlocked with the indoor unit in step 12 . - With each pressing of button E [ ], the address of the LOSSNAY and indoor unit that is interlocked with it will be displayed alternately. - When only one unit address is registered, the same address will remain on the display regardless of how many times the button is pressed. - When the address of multiple units are registered (i.e. 011, 012, 013 ), they will be displayed one at a time in an ascending order with each pressing of button E [ ] . Address of an interlocked LOSSNAY unit (Displayed alternately) 14 Bring up the address of another registered unit on the To delete an address, go to section (3) Address Deletion. display. - After completing step 13 , a subsequent pressing of button E [ ] will bring up the address of another registered unit. (The display method is the same as the one in step 13 .) To go back to the normal display, follow step 10 . Address of another interlocked unit (Displayed alternately) To delete an address, go to section (3) Address Deletion . (3) Address deletion The addresses of the indoor units that have been entered into the remote controller can be deleted by deleting the group settings. The interlock settings between units can be deleted by deleting the interlock settings. Follow the steps in section (2) Address Search to find the address to be deleted and perform deletion with the address being displayed in the display window. To delete an address, the address must first be bought up on the display. 15 Delete the registered indoor unit address or the interlock setting between units. - Press button F? [CLOCK ON OFF] twice while either the indoor unit address or the address of the interlocked unit is displayed on the display to delete the interlock setting. HWE09080 - 99 - GB [ IV Remote Controller ] (A) To delete group settings (B) To delete interlock settings will be displayed in the room temperature display window. If deletion is successfully completed, - - will appear in the unit type display window. If the deletion fails, will appear in the unit type display window. In this case, repeat the steps above. (Displayed alternately) - If a transmission error occurs, the selected setting will not be deleted, and the display will appear as shown below. In this case, repeat the steps above. will be displayed in the room temperature display window. To go back to the normal display, follow step 10 . (4) Making (A) Group settings and (B) Interlock settings of a group from any arbitrary remote controller (A) Group settings and (B) Interlock settings of a group can be made from any arbitrary remote controller. Refer to (B) Interlock Settings under section 1 Group Settings/Interlock Settings for operation procedures. Set the address as shown below. (A) To make group settings Interlocked unit address display window...Remote controller address Indoor unit address display window...........The address of the indoor unit to be controlled with the remote controller (B) To make interlock settings Interlocked unit address display window...LOSSNAY address Indoor unit address display window..........The address of the indoor unit to be interlocked with the LOSSNAY 2. Remote controller function selection via the ME remote controller In the remote controller function selection mode, the settings for four types of functions can be made or changed as necessary. 1) Skip-Auto-Mode setting The automatic operation mode that is supported by some simultaneous cooling/heating type units can be made unselectable via the ME remote controller. 2) Operation mode display selection mode (Display or non-display of COOL/HEAT during automatic operation mode) When the automatic operation mode is selected, the indoor unit will automatically perform a cooling or heating operation based on the room temperature. In this case, or will appear on the remote controller display. This setting can be changed so that only will appear on the display. 3) Room temperature display selection mode (Display or non-display of room temperature) Although the suction temperature is normally displayed on the remote controller, the setting can be changed so that it will not appear on the remote controller. 4) Narrowed preset temperature range mode The default temperature ranges are 19 C to 30 C in the cooling/dry mode and 17 C to 28 C in the heating mode and 19 C to 28 C in the auto mode. By changing these ranges (raising the lower limit for the cooling/dry mode and lowering the upper limit for the heating mode), energy can be saved. NOTE When making the temperature range setting on the simultaneous cooling/heating type units that supports the automatic operation mode to save on energy consumption, enable the Skip-Auto-Mode setting to make the automatic operation mode unselectable. If the automatic operation mode is selected, the energy-saving function may not work properly. When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode, the setting for the Skip-Auto-Mode, restricted preset temperature range mode (AUTO), and operation mode display selection mode are invalid. If an attempt is made to change the preset temperature range, “LIMIT TEMP.” appears on the display. [Function selection mode sequence on the remote controller] Normal display 1 1 Remote controller function selection mode Skip-Auto-Mode setting *2 2 3 Temperature range setting mode (AUTO) TEMP. 2 ON/OFF CLOCKONOFF FILTER 5 CHECK TEST PAR-F27MEA 3 2 *1 *1 [Normal display] 1 : Press and hold the [CHECK] and [ ] buttons simultaneously for two seconds. ) ] button ) ] button Operation mode display selection mode (Display or non-display of the automatic mode) 2 3 *2 2 : [SET TEMP. ( 3 : [SET TEMP. ( Restricted preset temperature range mode (Cooling) TIMER SET 4 2 3 Restricted preset temperature range mode (Heating) 2 3 Room temperature display selection mode HWE09080 3 - 100 - 2 3 *1 : Skip-Auto-Mode is enabled *2 : Skip-Auto-Mode is disabled GB [ IV Remote Controller ] [Operation Procedures] 1. Press the [ON/OFF] button on the remote controller to bring the unit to a stop. The display will appear as shown in the previous page (Normal display). 2. Press buttons 1 [CHECK] and [ ] simultaneously for 2 seconds to go into the “Skip-Auto-Mode setting.” under the remote controller function selection mode. Press button 2 [SET TEMP. ( )] or 3 [SET TEMP. ( )] to go into the other four modes under the remote controller function selection mode. Skip-Auto-Mode setting (Making the automatic operation mode unselectable) This setting is valid only when the controller is connected to the simultaneous cooling/heating type air conditioning units that support the automatic operation mode. “ ” blinks and either “ON” or “OFF” lights up on the controller. Pressing the 4 [TIMER SET ( between “ON” and “OFF.” [TIMER SET ( ) (( ) or ( )] button switches ))] button When set to “ON,” the automatic operation mode is available for selection in the function selection mode. When set to “OFF,” the automatic operation mode is not available for selection in the function selection mode, and an automatic operation cannot be performed. (The automatic operation mode is skipped in the function selection mode sequence.) Operation mode display selection mode (Changing the type of display that appears during the automatic mode operation) When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode, the setting for this mode is invalid. will blink, and either “ON”or “OFF” will light up. Press button 4 [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] in this state to switch between “ON” and “OFF.” [TIMER SET ( When it is set to ON, When it is set to OFF, only ) (( ))] button will appear on the display during automatic operation mode. will appear on the display during automatic operation mode. Restricted preset temperature range mode (The range of preset temperature can be changed.) 1) Temperature range setting for the cooling/dry mode will light up in the display window, and the temperature range for the cooling/dry mode will appear on the display. [Lower limit temperature]: Appears in the preset temperature display window [Upper limit temperature: Appears in the time display window Switch between the Lower and Upper limit temperature setting by pressing the 5 [CLOCK-ON-OFF] button. The selected temperature setting blinks. [TIMER SET ( ) (( ))] button [The left figure shows the display that appears when the current temperature range setting is between 19 C and 30 C in the Cool/Dry mode, and the lower limit temperature is selected to be set.] Press button 4 [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the lower limit temperature to the desired temperature. [Settable range for the lower limit temperature] : 19 C [Settable range for the upper limit temperature] : 30 C 30 C (Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display) 19 C (Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display) 2) Temperature range setting for heating “ ” and the settable temperature range for heating appear on the display. As with the Cool/Dry mode, use the 5 [CLOCK-ON-OFF] button and the 4 [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the temperature range. [Settable range for the lower limit temperature] : 17 C [Settable range for the upper limit temperature] : 28 C 28 C (Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display) 17 C (Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display) 3) Temperature range setting for the automatic mode When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode, the setting for this mode is invalid. “ ” and the temperature range for the automatic operation mode appear on the display. As with the Cool/Dry mode, use the 5 [CLOCK-ON-OFF] button and the 4 [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the temperature range. 28 C (Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display) [Settable range for the lower limit temperature] : 19 C [Settable range for the upper limit temperature] : 28 C 19 C (Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display) Room temperature display selection mode (Switching between the display or non-display of room temperature on the controller) “ 88 C ” blinks and either “ON” or “OFF” lights up on the controller. Pressing the 4 [TIMER SET ( switches between “ON” and “OFF.” ˚C ) or ( )] button ˚C [TIMER SET ( ) (( ))] button When set to “ON,” room temperature always appears on the display during operation. When set to “OFF,” room temperature does not appear on the display during operation. HWE09080 - 101 - GB [ IV Remote Controller ] [3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller 1. LOSSNAY interlock setting (Make this setting only when making an interlock settings between the LOSSNAY units and the Freeplan model of units.) Make this setting only when necessary. Perform this operation to enter the interlock setting between the LOSSNAY and the indoor units to which the remote controller is connected, or to search and delete registered information. In the following example, the address of the indoor unit is 05 and the address of the LOSSNAY unit is 30. [Operation Procedures] 1 Press the [ON/OFF] button on the remote controller to bring the unit to a stop. The display window on the remote controller must look like the figure below to proceed to step 2 . 2 Press and hold the [FILTER] and [ ] buttons simultaneously for two seconds to perform a search for the LOSSNAY that is interlocked with the indoor unit to which the remote controller is connected. 3 Search result - The indoor unit address and the interlocked LOSSNAY address will appear alternately. - Without interlocked LOSSNAY settings 4 If no settings are necessary, exit the window by pressing and holding the [FILTER] and [ ] buttons simultaneously for 2 seconds. Go to step 1. Registration Procedures to make the interlock settings with LOSSNAY units, or go to step 2. Search Procedures to search for a particular LOSSNAY unit. Go to step 3. Deletion Procedures to delete any LOSSNAY settings. < 1. Registration Procedures > 5 To interlock an indoor unit with a LOSSNAY unit, press the [ TEMP. ( ) or ( )] button on the remote controller that is connected to the indoor unit, and select its address (01 to 50). 6 Press the [ CLOCK ( ) or ( )] button to select the address of the LOSSNAY to be interlocked (01 to 50). Indoor unit address LOSSNAY address 7 Press the [TEST] button to register the address of the selected indoor unit and the interlocked LOSSNAY unit. - Registration completed The registered indoor unit address and IC, and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and LC will appear alternately. - Registration error If the registration fails, the indoor unit address and the LOSSNAY address will be displayed alternately. Registration cannot be completed: The selected unit address does not have a corresponding indoor unit or a LOSSNAY unit. Registration cannot be completed: Another LOSSNAY has already been interlocked with the selected indoor unit. HWE09080 - 102 - GB [ IV Remote Controller ] < 2. Search Procedures > 8 To search for the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with a particular indoor unit, enter the address of the indoor unit into the remote controller that is connected to it. 9 Press the [ MENU] button to search for the address of the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with the selected indoor unit. - Search completed (With a LOSSNAY connection) The indoor unit address and IC, and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and LC will appear alternately. - Search completed (No interlocked settings with a LOSSNAY exist.) - The selected address does not have a corresponding indoor unit. < 3. Deletion Procedures > Take the following steps to delete the interlock setting between a LOSSNAY unit and the interlocked indoor unit from the remote controller that is connected to the indoor unit. 10 Find the address of the LOSSNAY to be deleted (See section 2. Search Procedures. ), and bring up the result of the search for both the indoor unit and LOSSNAY on the display. 11 Press the [ ON/OFF] button twice to delete the address of the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with the selected indoor unit. - Registration completed The indoor unit address and , and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and will appear alternately. -Deletion error If the deletion fails [4] Using the built-in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller 1. Selecting the position of temperature detection (Factory setting: SW1-1 on the controller board on the indoor unit is set to OFF.) To use the built-in sensor on the remote controller, set the SW1-1 on the controller board on the indoor unit to ON. Some models of remote controllers are not equipped with a built-in temperature sensor. Use the built-in temperature sensor on the indoor unit instead. When using the built-in sensor on the remote controller, install the remote controller where room temperature can be detected. HWE09080 - 103 - GB [ IV Remote Controller ] HWE09080 - 104 - GB V Electrical Wiring Diagram [1] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Heat source Unit......................................................... 107 [2] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the BC Controller .............................................................. 111 [3] Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster....................................................... 120 HWE09080 - 105 - GB - 106 - HWE09080 - 107 - CN01 CX1 F1 AC250V 6.3A T Z1 U DSA1 3 1 U U Z3 TB21 TB1 L1 L1 red F2 AC250V 6.3A T CX2 CX3 Z2 Power supply 3~ 60Hz 208/230V 5 U Z4 CY3 CY2 CY1 SV4a,b,d SV7a,b SV9 LEVINV MF1 SV1a LEV2a,b 63HS1 63LS 72C CT12,22,3 CH11 DCL LEV1 Symbol 21S4a 63H1 CX4 1 L2 L3 black TB23 CX5 CX6 L3 3 CN02 L Ground black white red red black red *5 TB-P SC-P2 black THHS Z24,25 TH7 TH8 THINV TH2 TH3 TH4 TH5 TH6 TB8 TB7 CT3 + + THHS t° RSH1 SC-R red V Motor (Compressor) W white white U MS 3~ red red CT12 SC-U C1 SC-V RSH2 3 CN2 5 7 1 yellow orange red Operation ON signal *6 black TB8 1 2 3 4 black CT22 SC-W CNDC pink 1 CN4 2 blue Explanation Power supply Indoor/Heat source transmission cable Central control transmission cable Operation ON signal, Pump Interlock Thermistor Subcool bypass outlet temperature Pipe temperature Discharge pipe temperature ACC inlet pipe temperature Subcooled liquid refrigerant temperature Water inlet temperature Water outlet temperature Outlet temp.detect of heat exchanger for inverter IGBT temperature Function setting connector Terminal block white + R30 C30 C31 C32 SC-S ZNR1 U CN6 12 LED1:Normal operation(Lit) /Error(Blink) 1 SC-P1 black SC-T IGBT Symbol TB1 TB3 *5 TB-N INV Board black Explanation 4-way valve Pressure High pressure protection for the switch heat source unit Pressure High pressure sensor Low pressure Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit) Current sensor(AC) Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor) DC reactor HIC bypass,Controls refrigerant Linear expansion flow in HIC circuit valve Pressure control,Refrigerant flow rate control Heat exchanger for inverter Fan motor(Radiator panel) For opening/closing the bypass Solenoid valve circuit under the O/S Heat exchanger capacity control Heat exchanger capacity control For opening/closing the bypass circuit L2 white TB22 G Noise Filter C1 33 DCL 34 44 + 23 43 13 24 *7 R1 72C *5 14 red 7 5 3 1 4 1 CNAC4 RELAY Board CNOUT2 yellow CNPW blue CN83 654321 21 4 CN502 CN506 1 6 5 1 6 5 1 3 6 1 CN510 yellow CN509 blue CN508 black CN507 3 red 6 5 1 3 6 5 CN504 1 green 3 X14 X12 X09 X08 X07 X06 X05 X04 X03 X02 X72 red CNAC 1 2 3 CNOUT1 4 yellow 5 6 CN503 1 blue 3 1 2 CN505 1 black 3 2 1 CNT01 G SWU1 1's digit 1 7 5 CN2 Function setting *3 CN03 black F01 AC250V 3.15A T 1 1 CN102 1234 21 CNS2 yellow red CNIT 1 2 3 45 54321 CNIT red CN211 1 2 CN215 2 1 black 3 CN202 2 1 red 3 CN201 2 1 CN992 2 yellow 1 2 CN990 1 CN212 2 1 CNTYP4 2 1 green 4 CN213 3 2 red 1 CNTYP5 3 1 green CNTYP1 2 1 black 6 5 4 CNLVE 3 yellow 2 1 6 CNLVC 5 4 red 3 2 1 6 CNLVB 5 4 red 3 2 1 6 5 4 CNLVA 3 2 1 *4 Indoor/Outdoor transmission cable TP1 TP2 Central control transmission cable TB7 M1 M2 S LED1:Power supply to Indoor/Outdoor transmission line TB3 M1 M2 4321 CN102 CNS2 CN41 1 4 OFF 12 M-NET power supply circuit CN04 3 red CN3D 321 M-NET Board 3 blue CN3N 321 TB7 Power selecting CN40 connector 1 4 ON yellow LED2:CPU in operation LED1 Display setting 10 10 10 10 10 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 LED3:Lit when powered yellow CN3K 321 12 CN4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1 1 1 1 1 LED1 12 CNT02 ON/OFF output Error detection output CN51 1 *3 3 4 5 Compressor blue CN63PW 12 4 12V 1 3 CN801 yellow Control Board Unit address setting SWU2 10's digit Power failure detection circuit 12 F01 AC250V 3.15A T *1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring not supplied with the unit. *2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control box boundaries. *3.Refer to the Data book for connecting input/output signal connectors. *4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the heat source units in the same refrigerant system together. *5.Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them. *6.Refer to the Data book for wiring terminal block for Pump Interlock and Operation ON signal. *7.Control box houses high-voltage parts. Before inspecting the inside of the control box,turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage at both ends of the main capacitor (C1) has dropped to DC20V or less. *6 Pump Interlock M ~ SV4d SV9 SV4a SV7a 21S4a MF1 SV4b SV7b CH11 SV1a red A2 72C A1 white U ZNR01 CPU power supply circuit CNDC 3 pink CNAC2 2 black 1 1 P 63H1 Z24 Z25 t° t° t° t° t° t° t° t° 1 2 3 1 2 3 LEVINV LEV2b LEV2a LEV1 TH4 TH2 63HS1 63LS TH8 TH5 TH3 TH7 TH6 THINV M M M M [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] V Electrical Wiring Diagram [1] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Heat source Unit (1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A GB HWE09080 G - 108 - 5 U Z4 3 1 U U Z3 CY1 CY2 TB21 L1 L1 SV4a,b,d SV7a,b SV9 MF1 SV1a 63HS1 63LS 72C CT12,22,3 CH11 DCL LEVINV Symbol 21S4a 63H1 L2 white TB22 CX4 1 L3 L Ground black white red black red *5 *5 Fan motor(Radiator panel) Solenoid For opening/closing the bypass valve circuit under the O/S Heat exchanger capacity control Heat exchanger capacity control For opening/closing the bypass circuit black CT3 SC-T IGBT TB7 THHS Z24,25 TH4 TH5 TH7 TH8 THINV TB8 + + W white MS 3~ V white Motor (Compressor) U red red CT12 SC-U C1 SC-V RSH2 CN2 5 7 1 1 2 *6 1 red Operation ON signal black TB8 black CT22 SC-W CNDC pink 3 CN4 orange 2 yellow 3 4 blue Pump Interlock *6 Explanation Power supply Terminal block Indoor/Heat source transmission cable Central control transmission cable Operation ON signal, Pump Interlock Thermistor Discharge pipe temperature ACC inlet pipe temperature Water inlet temperature Water outlet temperature Outlet temp.detect of heat exchanger for inverter IGBT temperature Function setting connector red SC-R t° THHS RSH1 R30 C30 C31 C32 + SC-S white Symbol TB1 TB3 TB-N TB-P 4-way valve Pressure High pressure protection for the switch heat source unit High pressure Pressure sensor Low pressure Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit) Current sensor(AC) Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor) DC reactor Heat exchanger for inverter Linear expansion valve Explanation L3 black TB23 CX5 CX6 3 CN02 L2 Power supply 3~ 60Hz 208/230V TB1 red F2 AC250V 6.3A T CX2 CX3 Z2 CY3 CN01 CX1 F1 AC250V 6.3A T Z1 U DSA1 Noise Filter C1 U ZNR1 12 CN6 LED1:Normal operation(Lit) /Error(Blink) 1 SC-P1 black SV9 SV4a SV7a 21S4a SV1a CN502 CN506 1 6 5 1 6 5 1 CN510 yellow CN509 blue CN508 3 black 6 1 CN507 3 red 6 5 1 3 6 5 CN504 1 green 3 1 2 3 CNOUT1 4 yellow 5 6 CN503 1 blue 3 1 2 CN505 1 black 3 CNAC2 2 black 1 red CNAC X14 X12 X09 X08 X07 X06 X05 X04 X03 X02 X72 2 1 CNT01 SWU1 1's digit LED1 CN03 black F01 AC250V 3.15A T 1 1 CN102 1234 *4 CN215 2 1 black 54321 CNIT red red 1 CN211 2 CNIT 12345 21 CNS2 yellow Indoor/Outdoor transmission cable 2 1 CN202 3 2 red 1 3 CN201 2 1 CN992 yellow 2 CN990 1 CNTYP4 2 1 green 4 CN213 2 red 1 CNTYP5 3 1 green 6 5 CNLVE 4 3 yellow 2 1 TP1 TP2 Central control transmission cable TB7 M1 M2 S LED1:Power supply to Indoor/Outdoor transmission line TB3 M1 M2 4321 CN102 yellow CNS2 CN41 1 4 OFF 12 CN40 1 4 ON M-NET power supply circuit CN04 3 red CN3D 321 M-NET Board 3 blue CN3N 321 LED1 Display setting TB7 Power selecting connector Function setting 10 10 10 10 10 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 LED2:CPU in operation blue yellow CN63PW CN3K 12 4 321 *3 CN2 ON/OFF output Error detection output CN51 1 *3 3 4 Compressor 5 LED3:Lit when powered 12V 7 5 1 12 CN4 OFFON OFFON OFFON OFFON OFFON 1 1 1 1 1 12 CNT02 Control Board 1 3 CN801 yellow Unit address setting SWU2 10's digit Power failure detection circuit G F01 AC250V 3.15A T 12 *1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring not supplied with the unit. *2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control box boundaries. *3.Refer to the Data book for connecting input/output signal connectors. *4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the heat source units in the same refrigerant system together. *5.Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them. *6.Refer to the Data book for wiring terminal block for Pump Interlock and Operation ON signal. *7.Control box houses high-voltage parts. Before inspecting the inside of the control box,turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage at both ends of the main capacitor (C1) has dropped to DC20V or less. MF1 M ~ SV4d SV4b SV7b CH11 red A2 72C A1 white CPU power supply circuit ZNR01 U CNDC 3 pink Z24 Z25 t° t° t° t° t° 1 2 3 1 2 3 M TH4 THINV 63HS1 63LS TH8 TH5 TH7 LEVINV ( *7 SC-P2 INV Board black RELAY Board 4 CNAC4 1 1 (2) PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A + red 43 23 24 72C 13 33 14 DCL 34 44 red *5 R1 CNOUT2 yellow CNPW blue CN83 7 5 3 1 654321 21 4 P 63H1 [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] ) GB HWE09080 CN1A - 109 - red 3 C10 TB1 black 1 CN1B C9 C8 C7 C17 L1 L1 6 5 4 3 2 purple 1 460V L1 L2 CN07 6 5 4 3 L3 C5 R6 L3 T03 (Transformer) 1 2 3 4 CNTR3 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 L1 L2 L2 L3 1 F5 AC 600V 3A F CNTR2 Ground F4 AC 600V 3A F L white black red white black T02 (Transformer) L2 L3 3 Diode Bridge F4 AC250V 6.3A T C6 CN6 1 yellow 3 red U Z5 CN5 red 1 R4 D1 R5 TB21 TB22 TB23 L2 C4 CN06 2 purple 1 460V 㧗 CN4 3 blue Noise Filter 1 Power Source ޓ3~ ޓ60Hz ޓ460V white 4 R1 R2 R3 C1 C2 F1 C3 F2 Z4 U F3 DSA G Transformer box 1 Z1 Z2 Z3 U U U F1,F2,F3 AC250V 6.3A T 1 CN2 3 6 5 G 5 6 7 8 INV Board R30 R32 R34 black white red ZNR1 SC-L3 Explanation CT3 SC-L1 U CT12 SC-L2 SC-U t° THHS V MS 3~ 1 yellow orange black TB8 1 2 3 4 black CT22 SC-W 3 1 CNTYP black CN2 7 5 1 CN4 2 W Operation ON signal *7 white white SC-V *7 Pump Interlock Symbol TB1 Terminal block TB3 Motor (Compressor) U red red RSH1 C1 LED1:Normal operation(Lit) / Error(Blink) 21 CN6 RELAY Board 1 4 CNAC4 blue MF1 SV4b SV7b 5 72C 6 Explanation Power supply 4-way valve Indoor/Heat source transmission Pressure High pressure protection for the cable switch heat source unit 63HS1 Central control transmission Pressure High pressure TB7 cable sensor Low pressure 63LS 72C Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit) Operation ON signal, TB8 Pump Interlock CT12,22,3 Current sensor(AC) CH11 Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor) TH2 Thermistor Subcool bypass outlet temperature TH3 Pipe temperature DCL DC reactor TH4 Discharge pipe temperature HIC bypass,Controls refrigerant Linear LEV1 expansion flow in HIC circuit TH5 ACC inlet pipe temperature valve Subcooled liquid refrigerant Pressure control,Refrigerant flow TH6 LEV2a,b temperature rate control TH7 Water inlet temperature LEVINV Heat exchanger for inverter TH8 Water outlet temperature MF1 Fan motor(Radiator panel) Outlet temp.detect of heat Solenoid For opening/closing the bypass THINV SV1a exchanger for inverter circuit under the O/S valve IGBT temperature THHS Heat exchanger capacity control SV4a,b,d Z24,25 Function setting connector SV7a,b Heat exchanger capacity control SV9 For opening/closing the bypass circuit Symbol 21S4a 63H1 R31 R33 R35 C31 C33 IGBT C35 C37 FT-N SC-P1 black C100 R5 *5 black 2 1 3 72C 4 R1 *6 FT-P red CNTR1 N 4 1 C30 C32 C34 C36 P CN1 SC-P2 red DCL 654321 CNOUT2 yellow CN83 7 5 3 1 4 21 CNPW blue red *1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring not supplied with the unit. *2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control box boundaries. *3.Refer to the Data book for connecting input/output signal connectors. *4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the heat source units in the same refrigerant system together. *5.Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them. *6.Control box houses high-voltage parts. Before inspecting the inside of the control box,turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less. *7.Refer to the Data book for wiring terminal block for Pump Interlock and Operation ON signal. M 㨪 SV4d SV9 SV4a SV7a 21S4a CH11 SV1a CN502 CNAC2 black CN506 1 6 5 1 6 5 1 CN510 yellow CN509 blue CN508 3 black 6 1 CN507 3 red 6 5 1 3 6 5 CN504 1 green 3 X14 X12 X09 X08 X07 X06 X05 X04 CNAC red 1 2 3 CNOUT1 4 yellow 5 6 X03 X02 2 1 12V 12 CNT01 F01 AC250V 3.15A T 2 CN72 ZNR01 1 red U CPU power supply circuit CNDC 3 pink CN503 1 blue 3 1 2 2 1 1 10 SW5 G *3 yellow blue CN63PW CN3K 12 4 321 10 SW3 12 CN4 CN04 3 red M-NET Board 10 SW2 SW1 LED1 Display setting 10 21 red CNIT 12345 1 3 54321 CN215 2 black 1 1 CN211 2 3 CN202 2 red 1 3 CN201 2 1 CN992 2 yellow 1 2 CN990 1 2 CN212 1 CNTYP4 2 1 green 4 CN213 3 2 red 1 CNTYP5 3 1 green CNTYP1 2 1 black CNTYP2 black 6 5 4 CNLVE 3 2 1 6 5 CNLVC 4 3 red 2 1 6 5 CNLVB 4 3 red 2 1 6 5 4 CNLVA 3 2 1 63H1 Central control transmission cable CNS2 CNIT yellow red LED1:Power supply to Indoor/Outdoor transmission line TB7 TB3 M1 M2 M1 M2 S TP1 TP2 Indoor/Outdoor transmission cable *4 4321 CN102 TB7 Power selecting CN40 connector 4 ON 1 yellow CN41 CNS2 4 OFF 12 1 Function setting SW4 CN102 1234 10 M-NET power supply circuit 1 blue CN3N CN3D 321 321 LED2:CPU in operation LED3:Lit when powered CN2 LED1 1 7 5 12 CNT02 OFF ON OFF ON OFFON OFF ON OFF ON 1 1 1 1 1 CN51 1 *3 3 Compressor ON/OFF output 4 5 Error detection output Unit address setting SWU2 SWU1 10's 1's digit digit Control Board Power failure detection circuit 1 3 CN801 yellow P Z24 Z25 M t° t° t° t° t° t° 1 2 3 1 2 3 TH4 TH2 63HS1 63LS TH8 TH5 TH3 TH7 TH6 THINV LEVINV M LEV2b M LEV2a t° t M LEV1 [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] (3) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A GB HWE09080 CN1A - 110 - red 3 1 Z1 Z2 Z3 U U U black TB1 1 CN1B C9 C8 C7 C10 C17 + CN4 3 blue L1 purple 460V purple 460V L3 C5 R6 R4 C6 + D1 L2 1 2 6 5 4 3 CN07 1 2 6 5 4 3 CN06 L2 L3 3 - Ground F4 AC 600V 3A F red white black black white red 3 1 T03 (Transformer) F5 AC 600V 3A F 1 2 3 4 CNTR3 1 2 3 4 CNTR2 2 3 4 L1 L2 L2 L3 CNTR1 1 F4 AC250V 6.3A T T02 (Transformer) L3 L Z5 1 Diode Bridge CN6 yellow U R5 CN5 red TB21 TB22 TB23 L2 Transformer box L1 L1 C4 Noise Filter Power Source 3~ 60Hz 460V white 4 R1 R2 R3 C1 C2 F1 C3 F2 F3 Z4 U DSA 1 + + + + + 5 6 7 8 black white red 1 2 R5 C100 CT3 SC-L3 SC-L1 U ZNR1 *5 black 21 CN6 CT12 SC-L2 SC-U t° THHS C1 SV4a,b,d SV7a,b MF1 SV1a 63HS1 63LS 72C CT12,22,3 CH11 DCL LEVINV Symbol 21S4a 63H1 W white MS 3~ V white SC-V Motor (Compressor) U red red RSH1 1 TB8 1 red 2 orange yellow 3 4 blue *7 Pump Interlock 4-way valve Pressure High pressure protection for the switch heat source unit Pressure High pressure sensor Low pressure Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit) Current sensor(AC) Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor) DC reactor Heat exchanger for inverter Linear expansion valve Fan motor(Radiator panel) For opening/closing the bypass Solenoid circuit under the O/S valve Heat exchanger capacity control Heat exchanger capacity control Explanation *7 Operation ON signal black black CT22 SC-W 3 1 CNTYP black CN2 7 5 1 CN4 2 RELAY Board LED1:Normal operation(Lit) / Error(Blink) 1 R35 R33 R31 C37 C35 C33 IGBT SC-P1 3 72C 4 black C31 FT-N FT-P red *6 + INV Board R34 R32 R30 C36 C34 C32 + N 4 1 C30 P CN1 + SC-P2 red R1 3 1 CNAC4 4 TB8 TB7 TB1 TB3 Symbol SV9 Solenoid valve Terminal block M ~ SV4d SV9 SV4a SV7a 21S4a CH11 SV1a CN502 CN506 1 6 5 1 6 5 1 CN510 yellow CN509 blue CN508 3 black 6 1 CN507 3 red 6 5 1 3 6 5 CN504 1 green 3 1 2 3 CNOUT1 4 yellow 5 6 CN503 1 blue 3 1 CNAC red X14 X12 X09 X08 X07 X06 X05 X04 X03 X02 2 1 2 CN72 ZNR01 1 red U CNAC2 2 black 2 1 CPU power supply circuit CNDC 3 pink Explanation For opening/closing the bypass circuit Power supply Indoor/Heat source transmission cable Central control transmission cable Operation ON signal, Pump Interlock MF1 SV4b SV7b 5 72C 6 1 THHS Z24,25 *3 CN102 1234 CN04 3 red M-NET Board M-NET power supply circuit 1 CN3D 321 red CNIT 12345 Indoor/Outdoor transmission cable 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 54321 CNIT red CN211 CN215 black TP1 TP2 Central control transmission cable TB7 M1 M2 S t° 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 1 t° t° t° t° 3 2 1 Z24 Z25 CN202 red 2 1 2 1 2 1 4 1 3 CN201 CN992 yellow CN990 CN213 red CNTYP4 2 1 green CNTYP5 3 1 green CNTYP2 black CNLVE LED1:Power supply to Indoor/Outdoor transmission line 21 CNS2 yellow TB3 M1 M2 yellow CNS2 12 *4 4321 CN102 CN41 4 OFF 1 Explanation Thermistor Discharge pipe temperature ACC inlet pipe temperature Water inlet temperature Water outlet temperature Outlet temp.detect of heat exchanger for inverter IGBT temperature Function setting connector G blue CN3N 321 LED1 Display setting TB7 Power selecting connector CN40 1 4 ON Function setting 10 10 10 10 10 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 LED2:CPU in operation yellow CN3K 321 12 CN4 LED1 CN2 Compressor ON/OFF output Error detection output *3 1 7 5 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1 1 1 1 1 12 CNT02 LED3:Lit when powered 3 4 5 1 CN51 Unit address setting SWU2 SWU1 10's 1's digit digit blue CN63PW 12 4 12V 1 3 CN801 yellow Control Board Power failure detection circuit Symbol TH4 TH5 TH7 TH8 THINV F01 AC250V 3.15A T 12 CNT01 63H1 M TH4 THINV 63HS1 63LS TH8 TH5 TH7 LEVINV ( F1,F2,F3 AC250V 6.3A T 1 3 6 5 G DCL 5 CN83 CNOUT2 yellow 7 654321 21 CNPW blue 4 P (4) PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A CN2 G *1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring not supplied with the unit. *2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control box boundaries. *3.Refer to the Data book for connecting input/output signal connectors. *4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the heat source units in the same refrigerant system together. *5.Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them. *6.Control box houses high-voltage parts. Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power,keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less. *7.Refer to the Data book for wiring terminal block for Pump Interlock and Operation ON signal. [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] ) GB HWE09080 - 111 - TH16 TH15 TH12 TH11 PS3 PS1 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 DSA ZNR01 ZNR02 X6 4 3 2 CN11 CN05 (Red) LEV1 LEV3 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW5 SW4 CN07 (Yellow) 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 OFF ON OFF 8 SW1 CN12 1 F01 250VAC 6.3A F 3 5 7 5 3 1 3 1 CN36(Green) X21 X33 1 8 1 X7 SW2 X8 7 5 3 1 CN29(Green) 7 6 5 4 7 5 3 1 CN28(Blue) X31 X3 X4 7 5 3 1 CN26 3 1 CN27(Red) X30 X1 X2 CNTR (Red) X32 10 1 CN02 2 3 ON 1 X5 CN10 CN13 (Red) CNP3 2 CN03 (Yellow) 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 CNP1 (Black) 3 1 2 CONT.B TR 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 T1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 T4 T3 T2 3 2 1 4 3 3 1 2 1 2 SVM1 SV4B SV4A SV4C SV3B SV3A SV3C SV2B SV2A SV2C SV1B SV1A SV1C Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission Line G G POWER SUPPLY ~208V-230V 60Hz BREAKER(15A) FUSE(15A) TB01 TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT L1 L2 PULL BOX 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 TB02 S(SHIELD) M2 M1 Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows. SW1:0 SW2:0 (Symbol explanation) Symbol Name Transformer TR TH11,12,15,16 Thermistor sensor Expansion valve LEV1,3 Pressure sensor PS1,3 Circuit BC controller CONT.B board Terminal block TB01 (for power source) Terminal block TB02 (for Transmission) SV1~4A,B,C Solenoid valve SVM1 Solenoid valve T1~4 Terminal F01 Fuse AC250V 6.3A F [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] [2] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the BC Controller (1) CMB-P104NU-G model GB HWE09080 - 112 - TH16 TH15 TH12 TH11 PS3 PS1 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 CN11 1 2 3 4 5 6 LEV1 LEV3 SW5 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 SW4 CN05 (Red) OFF ON OFF 8 SW1 CN07 (Yellow) 4 3 2 1 DSA ZNR01 5 TB01 L1 L2 G ZNR02 CN12 1 G POWER SUPPLY ~208V-230V 60Hz 3 F01 250VAC 6.3A F 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 3 1 5 3 1 1 1 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 BREAKER(15A) FUSE(15A) PULL BOX T1 T5 T4 T3 SV5B SV5A SV5C SV4B SV4A SV4C SV3B SV3A SV3C 2 3 3 1 4 3 2 T6 SVM1 SV6B SV6A SV6C 1 CMB-P106NU-G ONLY 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 SV2B SV2A SV2C SV1B SV1A SV1C Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission line T2 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 TB02 S(SHIELD) M2 M1 TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT CN36(Green) X21 X35 X11 X12 CN31(Yellow) X34 X9 1 CN30(Black) X10 X33 8 1 X7 SW2 X8 7 5 3 1 CN29(Green) 7 6 5 4 7 5 3 1 CN28(Blue) X6 X31 X3 X4 7 5 3 1 CN27(Red) X30 X1 X32 10 1 CN02 2 3 ON 1 X5 CN10 CN13 (Red) CNP3 2 CN03 (Yellow) 3 1 CNTR 3 (Red) CN26 X2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 CNP1 (Black) 3 1 2 CONT.B TR Name Transformer Thermistor sensor Expansion valve Pressure sensor Circuit BC controller board Terminal block (for power source) Terminal block (for Transmission) Solenoid valve Solenoid valve Terminal Fuse AC250V 6.3A F Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows. SW1:0 SW2:0 TB02 SV1~6A,B,C SVM1 T1~6 F01 TB01 CONT.B Symbol TR TH11,12,15,16 LEV1,3 PS1,3 (Symbol explanation) [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] (2) CMB-P105,106NU-G models GB - 113 - 3 2 1 TB02 SV1~10A,B,C SVM1 T1~10 F01 TB01 Symbol TR TH11,12,15,16 LEV1,3 PS1,3 REL.B CONT.B 1 ZNR01 3 ZNR02 CN38 1 X8 Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it. LEV1 CN05 (Red) 8 LEV3 SW5 SW4 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN07 (Yellow) OFF 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 ON 2 3 ON OFF 1 1 3 5 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 X21 3 1 CN36(Green) X35 X11 CN31(Yellow) X12 X34 X9 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows. SW1:0 SW2:0 CN12 250VAC 6.3A F DSA F01 7 5 3 1 CN30(Black) X10 X7 SW1 X33 SW2 7 5 3 1 CN29(Green) 8 CN11 CN10 7 6 5 4 7 CN28(Blue) X31 X3 X4 5 3 1 CN26 3 1 CN27(Red) X30 X1 X2 CNTR (Red) X32 10 CN50 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 X5 6 5 4 3 2 1 X6 CN51 2 CN13 (Red) CNP3 CN02 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 CN03 (Yellow) Name Transformer Thermistor sensor Expansion valve Pressure sensor Circuit Relay board BC controller Terminal block (for power source) Terminal block (for Transmission) Solenoid valve Solenoid valve Terminal Fuse AC250V 6.3A F (Symbol explanation) TH16 TH15 TH12 TH11 PS3 CNP1 (Black) 2 G TB01 L1 L2 3 3 2 2 1 1 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 T1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 T6 T5 T4 T3 2 1 4 T2 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 SV6B SV6A SV6C SV5B SV5A SV5C SV4B SV4A SV4C SV3B SV3A SV3C SV2B SV2A SV2C SV1B SV1A SV1C G FUSE(15A) PULL BOX 3 1 CN39 3 3 2 2 SVM1 16 16 1 1 3 2 2 1 3 5 15 14 13 15 14 13 4 T10 3 4 3 1 2 1 3 5 7 1 2 12 11 10 12 11 10 4 T9 3 4 CN53 6 5 4 3 2 1 CMB-P1010NU-G ONLY 7 1 1 CMB-P1010NU-G ONLY POWER SUPPLY ~208V-230V 60Hz BREAKER(15A) TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 CN35(Blue) 1 X20 2 X19 3 SV10C SV10A SV10B X39 3 CN34(Black) 1 2 X18 PS1 X17 CONT.B 3 8 8 3 4 9 9 1 5 4 1 6 6 3 5 1 CN52 7 2 1 4 4 3 2 5 5 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 1 2 7 7 4 T7 1 2 T8 3 4 X16 3 2 1 X15 Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission line X37 SV9C SV9A SV9B X38 SV8C SV8A SV8B X14 TB02 S(SHIELD) M2 M1 CN32 SV7C SV7A SV7B X13 HWE09080 X36 TR REL.B [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] (3) CMB-P108,1010NU-G models GB CN33(Red) TH16 TH15 TH12 TH11 PS3 - 114 - 2 1 3 2 1 LEV1 LEV3 SW5 SW4 CN05 (Red) 1 8 8 SW1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 OFF ON OFF ON 1 SW2 10 CN07 (Yellow) CN11 CN10 CN13 (Red) CNP3 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 CN02 2 Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows. SW1:0 SW2:0 3 2 1 3 CNVCC1 CN03 (Yellow) CNP1 (Blue) (Black) 3 4 ZNR01 1 3 F01 250VAC 6.3A F CN12 5 ZNR02 X7 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 X21 5 3 1 3 1 CN36(Green) X35 X11 CN31(Yellow) X12 X34 X9 CN30(Black) X10 X33 X8 2 3 7 5 3 1 CN29(Green) X32 X5 X6 1 8 7 6 5 CN28(Blue) 5 3 1 4 X31 X3 X4 7 5 3 1 CN26 3 1 CN27(Red) X30 X1 X2 CNTR (Red) 7 CNOUT3 DSA 3 3 2 1 CNOUT1 1 CN38 G 1 T1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 SV6B SV6A SV6C SV5B SV5A SV5C SV4B SV4A SV4C SV3B SV3A SV3C SV2B SV2A SV2C SV1B SV1A SV1C BREAKER(15A) TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT POWER SUPPLY ~208V-230V PULL BOX 60Hz 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 G FUSE(15A) TB01 L1 L2 3 3 2 2 1 1 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 16 16 3 3 T10 2 2 CNOUT2 CNOUT4 1 2 3 4 7 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 3 1 15 14 13 15 14 13 4 4 X20 1 2 X19 PS1 3 3 T9 2 2 5 3 1 12 11 10 12 11 10 4 4 X18 CONT.B X17 SV10C SV10A SV10B X39 SV9C SV9A SV9B X38 3 2 1 7 1 1 5 7 7 2 2 3 8 8 3 3 T8 1 9 9 4 4 X16 Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission line X15 TB02 S(SHIELD) M2 M1 7 1 1 5 4 4 2 2 3 5 5 3 3 T7 1 6 6 4 4 X14 SV8C SV8A SV8B X37 SV7C SV7A SV7B X13 HWE09080 X36 TR 7 1 1 1 3 2 1 CNVCC2 (Blue) 3 X57 X55 X56 CN45(Green) X54 X52 X53 CN44(Yellow) X51 X49 X50 CN43(Red) X48 X46 X47 CN42 X45 X43 X44 CN41(Green) X42 X40 X41 CN40 (Yellow) 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 REL.B 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 TB02 SV1~16A,B,C SVM1 T1~16 F01 TB01 Symbol TR TH11,12,15,16 LEV1,3 PS1,3 REL.B CONT.B T11 T12 1 1 2 3 1 3 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 T16 T15 T14 3 2 SV13B SV13A SV13C SV12B SV12A SV12C SV11B SV11A SV11C SVM1 SV16B SV16A SV16C SV15B SV15A SV15C SV14B SV14A SV14C CMB-P1016NU-G ONLY T13 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 2 3 1 1 Name Transformer Thermistor sensor Expansion valve Pressure sensor Circuit Relay board BC controller Terminal block (for power source) Terminal block (for Transmission) Solenoid valve Solenoid valve Terminal Fuse AC250V 6.3A F (Symbol explanation) [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] (4) CMB-P1013,1016NU-G models GB CN39 CN32 CN33(Red) CN34(Black) CN35(Blue) TH16 TH15 TH12 TH11 PS3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 LEV1 LEV2 LEV3 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW5 SW4 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 SW1 SW2 CN06 (Blue) OFF ON OFF 1 CN07 (Yellow) 4 3 2 10 ZNR02 CN12 1 3 F01 250VAC 6.3A F DSA 5 X33 8 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 3 3 1 CN46(Yellow) X60 1 CN36(Green) X21 X35 X11 X12 7 5 3 1 CN31(Yellow) X34 X9 CN30(Black) X10 X7 CN11 X8 7 1 7 5 3 1 CN29(Green) 6 5 CN10 X32 4 7 5 3 1 CN28(Blue) X31 X3 X4 3 CN26 CN27(Red) X30 X1 X2 3 CN05 (Red) 3 X5 ZNR01 1 CN38 2 ON 2 CN02 X6 CN13 (Red) CNP3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 CNP1 (Black) 3 G TB01 L1 L2 3 3 2 2 1 1 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 SV6B SV6A SV6C SV5C SV5B SV5A SV4B SV4A SV4C SV3B SV3A SV3C SV2B SV2A SV2C SV1B SV1A SV1C G FUSE(15A) BREAKER(15A) PULL BOX TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 2 1 1 3 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 2 1 2 1 POWER SUPPLY ~208V-230V 60Hz 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1 CN53 16 16 T10 3 3 2 2 7 1 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 3 1 15 14 13 15 14 13 4 4 T9 3 3 2 2 7 1 1 3 1 7 7 7 1 5 5 5 3 6 6 1 4 4 REL.B 1 7 2 1 3 2 4 T7 3 4 CN52 5 8 8 9 9 2 3 2 4 T8 3 4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 3 1 12 11 10 12 11 10 4 4 1 Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows. SW1:0 SW2:0 CMB-P1010NU-GA ONLY Name Transformer Thermistor sensor Expansion valve Pressure sensor Circuit Relay board BC controller Terminal block (for power source) Terminal block (for Transmission) Solenoid valve Solenoid valve Terminal Fuse AC250V 6.3A F CN39 2 2 1 1 TB02 SV1~10A,B,C SVM1,2 T1~10 F01 TB01 Symbol TR TH11,12,15,16 LEV1~3 PS1,3 REL.B CONT.B SVM2 SVM1 1 CN35(Blue) CNTR (Red) X20 CN50 X19 CN03 (Yellow) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SV10C SV10A SV10B X39 3 6 5 4 3 2 1 CN34(Black) PS1 CN51 X18 1 2 X17 3 2 1 (Symbol explanation) X16 CONT.B CN33(Red) Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission line CN32 TB02 S(SHIELD) M2 M1 X15 SV9C SV9A SV9B X38 SV8C SV8A SV8B X37 SV7C SV7A SV7B X14 - 115 - X13 HWE09080 X36 TR [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] (5) CMB-P108,1010NU-GA models GB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 LEV3 LEV2 - 116 - LEV1 ON OFF ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN05 (Red) CN06 (Blue) CN11 CN10 CN13 (Red) CNP3 CN07 (Yellow) 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 SW5 SW4 SW1 SW2 8 8 1 10 4 CN12 1 3 250VAC 6.3A F DSA F01 ZNR01 ZNR02 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 7 5 3 3 3 1 CN46(Yellow) X60 1 CN36(Green) X21 X35 X11 1 CN31(Yellow) X12 X34 X9 1 CN30(Black) X10 X33 X7 CNOUT3 7 5 3 1 CN29(Green) X32 X5 X8 3 3 CN28(Blue) X6 X31 X3 X4 7 5 3 1 CN26 1 CN27(Red) X30 X1 X2 CNTR (Red) 2 5 3 CN38 1 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CNOUT1 Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block.Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows. SW1:0 SW2:0 TH16 TH15 TH12 TH11 PS3 3 2 1 2 CNVCC1 CN03 CN02 CNP1 (Blue) (Yellow) (Black) 3 G TB01 L1 L2 G T1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 SV6B SV6A SV6C SV5B SV5A SV5C SV4B SV4A SV4C SV3B SV3A SV3C SV2B SV2A SV2C SV1B SV1A SV1C POWER SUPPLY ~208V-230V PULL BOX 60Hz 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 FUSE(15A) BREAKER(15A) TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT 3 3 2 2 1 1 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 16 16 3 3 T10 2 2 CNOUT2 CNOUT4 1 2 3 4 7 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 3 1 15 14 13 15 14 13 4 4 X20 3 X19 1 2 3 3 T9 2 2 5 3 1 12 11 10 12 11 10 4 4 X18 3 2 1 X17 SV10C SV10A SV10B X39 SV9C SV9A SV9B X38 PS1 7 1 1 5 7 7 2 2 3 8 8 3 3 T8 1 9 9 4 4 X16 CONT.B X15 Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission line 7 1 1 T7 5 3 1 2 2 4 4 3 3 5 5 6 6 4 4 X14 TB02 S(SHIELD) M2 M1 X13 SV8C SV8A SV8B X37 SV7C SV7A SV7B X36 HWE09080 7 1 1 CN39 TR 1 X42 X40 X41 X57 X55 X56 CN45(Green) X54 X52 X53 CN44(Yellow) X51 X49 X50 CN43(Red) X48 X46 X47 CN42 X45 X43 X44 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 CNVCC2 (Blue) CN40 (Yellow) 3 2 CN41(Green) 1 3 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REL.B T11 1 2 3 1 3 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 T16 T15 T14 T13 T12 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 SVM1 SVM2 SV16B SV16A SV16C SV15B SV15A SV15C CMB-P1016NU-GA ONLY SV14B SV14A SV14C SV13B SV13A SV13C SV12B SV12A SV12C SV11B SV11A SV11C (Symbol explanation) Symbol Name Transformer TR TH11,12,15,16 Thermistor sensor Expansion valve LEV1~3 Pressure sensor PS1,3 REL.B Circuit Relay board BC controller CONT.B Terminal block TB01 (for power source) Terminal block TB02 (for Transmission) SV1~16A,B,C Solenoid valve SVM1,2 Solenoid valve T1~16 Terminal F01 Fuse AC250V 6.3A F [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] (6) CMB-P1013,1016NU-GA models GB CN32 CN33(Red) CN34(Black) CN35(Blue) HWE09080 - 117 - TH15 TH12 1 4 3 2 1 LEV3 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN07 (Yellow) OFF ON OFF SW5 SW4 8 8 SW1 DSA ZNR01 ZNR02 CN12 1 F01 250VAC 6.3A F 3 5 X33 SW2 1 8 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 CN29(Green) X8 X32 X7 CN11 CN10 7 5 3 1 CN28(Blue) X31 X3 X4 7 6 5 4 3 7 5 3 1 CN27(Red) X30 X1 X2 3 1 CN26 CNTR (Red) X5 10 1 CN02 2 X6 ON 1 2 CN13 (Red) 2 CN03 (Yellow) 3 1 1 2 CONT.B TR 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 T2 T1 4 3 2 1 4 3 T4 T3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 SV4B SV4A SV4C SV3B SV3A SV3C SV2B SV2A SV2C SV1B SV1A SV1C Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission Line G G POWER SUPPLY ~208V-230V 60Hz BREAKER(15A) FUSE(15A) TB01 TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT L1 L2 PULL BOX 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 TB02 S(SHIELD) M2 M1 Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows. SW1:0 SW2:0 (Symbol explanation) Symbol Name Transformer TR Thermistor sensor TH12,15 Expansion valve LEV3 Circuit BC controller CONT.B board Terminal block TB01 (for power source) Terminal block TB02 (for Transmission) SV1~4A,B,C Solenoid valve T1~4 Terminal F01 Fuse AC250V 6.3A F [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] (7) CMB-P104NU-GB model GB TH15 TH12 1 CN07 (Yellow) LEV3 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 OFF ON OFF 3 2 1 1 SW5 8 8 SW1 SW4 SW2 ZNR01 ZNR02 CN12 DSA F01 250VAC 6.3A F 1 3 5 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 X35 X11 7 5 3 1 CN31(Yellow) X12 X34 X9 CN30(Black) X10 X33 ON 8 1 X7 CN11 X8 7 5 3 1 CN29(Green) 7 6 CN10 X32 5 7 5 3 1 CN28(Blue) X31 X3 X4 3 4 7 5 3 1 CN26 3 1 CN27(Red) X30 X1 X2 CNTR (Red) X5 10 3 CN38 1 2 CN50 X6 CN13 (Red) CN02 1 1 2 CN03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 G TB01 L1 L2 3 3 2 2 1 1 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 SV6B SV6A SV6C SV5B SV5A SV5C SV4B SV4A SV4C SV3B SV3A SV3C SV2B SV2A SV2C SV1B SV1A SV1C G CN39 3 1 16 16 5 3 1 15 14 13 15 14 13 POWER SUPPLY ~208V-230V 60Hz FUSE(15A) BREAKER(15A) PULL BOX TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 4 3 4 2 3 1 1 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 X20 1 CN35(Blue) 2 X19 1 X39 2 7 7 CN33(Red) 2 7 1 1 CN32 T7 5 3 1 1 7 2 1 2 4 4 3 3 REL.B Name Transformer Thermistor sensor Expansion valve Circuit Relay board BC controller Terminal block TB01 (for power source) Terminal block TB02 (for Transmission) SV1~8A,B,C Solenoid valve T1~8 Terminal F01 Fuse AC250V 6.3A F Symbol TR TH12,15 LEV3 REL.B CONT.B 5 5 6 6 4 4 CN52 5 3 8 8 3 2 7 7 T8 3 1 9 9 4 4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 3 1 12 11 10 12 11 10 X18 3 CN34(Black) CONT.B X17 TB02 S(SHIELD) M2 M1 X38 TR X16 (Symbol explanation) X14 SV8C SV8A SV8B X15 - 118 - X37 SV7C SV7A SV7B X13 HWE09080 X36 Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power Indoor/outdoor (heat source) line to it. Transmission line 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows. SW1:0 SW2:0 [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] (8) CMB-P108NU-GB model GB - 119 - M t° t° 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN07 (Yellow) CN12 1 3 5 F01 250VAC 6.3A F 7 5 3 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 X35 X11 X12 7 5 3 1 CN31(Yellow) X34 X09 X10 CN30(Black) X33 X07 X08 CN29(Green) X32 X05 X06 CN28(Blue) X31 X03 X04 CN27(Red) X30 X01 X02 1 CN26 CNTR(Red) SV1A 3 T1 1 4 4 3 T6 2 2 3 1 4 3 T5 2 1 4 3 T4 2 1 4 3 T3 2 1 4 3 T2 2 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 SV6C SV6A SV6B SV5C SV5A SV5B SV4C SV4A SV4B SV3C SV3A SV3B SV2C SV2A SV2B SV1C SV1B 2 4 4 1 2 3 1 Indoor/outdoor Transmission line 16 16 G G FUSE(15A) BREAKER(15A) TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT POWER SUPPLY TB01 ~208V-230V PULL BOX L1 L2 3 3 2 2 1 1 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 2.The initial set values of swith on CONT.B are as follows. SW1:0 SW2:0 U DSA ZNR02 U 3 1 ZNR01 CNOUT3 3 4 CN11 3 4 2 1 1 2 8 8 4 3 2 1 CNOUT1 7 8 CN38 LD1:CPU in operation 6 SW6 SW5 8 7 1 SW4 CONT.B 5 ON OFF ON OFF 1 8 SW2 SW1 1 6 CN10 CN13 (Red) ON OFF 1 10 5 4 2 1 Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block.Never connect power line to it. LEV3 TH15 TH12 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1 CNVCC1 CN03 CN02 (Blue) (Yellow) 3 2 1 TB02 S(SHIELD) M2 M1 3 3 T10 2 2 CNOUT2 CNOUT4 1 2 3 4 7 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 3 1 15 14 13 15 14 13 4 4 SV10C X20 3 T9 3 2 2 5 3 1 12 11 10 12 11 10 4 4 SV9C X18 SV10A X19 SV9A X17 SV10B X39 SV9B X38 7 1 1 CN33(Red) REL.B 5 7 7 2 2 3 8 8 3 T8 3 1 9 9 4 4 SV8C X16 7 1 1 7 1 1 5 4 4 2 2 3 5 5 3 T7 3 1 6 6 4 4 SV7C X14 SV8A X15 SV7A X13 SV8B X37 SV7B X36 HWE09080 CN39 TR 3 2 1 CNVCC2 (Blue) X57 X55 X56 CN45(Green) X54 X52 X53 CN44(Yellow) X51 X49 X50 CN43(Red) X48 X46 X47 CN42 X45 X43 X44 CN41(Green) X42 X40 X41 CN40 (Yellow) 1 3 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3T16 2 1 4 3T15 2 1 4 3T14 2 1 4 3T13 2 1 4 3T12 2 1 4 3T11 2 1 SV16C SV16A SV16B SV15C SV15A SV15B SV14C SV14A SV14B SV13C SV13A SV13B SV12C SV12A SV12B SV11C SV11A SV11B (Symbol explanation) Symbol Name Transformer TR Thermister sensor TH12,15 Expansion valve LEV3 REL.B Circuit Relay board BC controller CONT.B Terminal block TB01 (for power source) Terminal block TB02 (for Transmission) SV1~16A,B,C Solenoid valve T1~T16 Terminal F01 Fuse AC250V 6.3A F [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] (9) CMB-P1016NU-HB model GB CN32 CN34(Black) CN35(Blue) [ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ] [3] Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster Terminal block for power supply (TB1) 250V 5A L Red Red Red Red Red 100V/200VAC White White Black 1 Varistor 3 E Noise filter Green/Yellow U White White White White 2 4 Black Red Varistor U Green DSA Red Red Blue Grounding White Choke coil Red White Red 4 1 3 2 1 CN2 Stabilized power supply 2 3 Black Black CN1 Blue CN2 1 2 CN3 1 2 1 2 CN4 Electronic control board S White White Red Red Black Black Red Red Terminal block 2 for B transmission line (TB3) Expanded (indoor unit) side A CN1 2 1 S HWE09080 - 120 - Terminal block 1 for B transmission line (TB2) Expanded (heat source unit) side A GB VI Refrigerant Circuit [1] Refrigerant Circuit Diagram ........................................................................................... 123 [2] Principal Parts and Functions ........................................................................................ 126 HWE09080 - 121 - GB - 122 - [ VI Refrigerant Circuit ] VI Refrigerant Circuit [1] Refrigerant Circuit Diagram 1. Heat source unit (1) PQHY-P72, P96, P120 models ST1 21S4a BV1 Solenoid valve block CV1 CV7a SV4a SV9 ST17 CJ1 SV4b SV4d TH8 63H1 CJ2 63HS1 SV7a SV7b 63LS CP1 Water circuit TH7 O/S THINV ST3 SV1a TH5 TH4 LEVINV ST13 Component cooler heat exchanger CV8 CV3a CV4a CV6a LEV2b Acc Comp BV2 TH6 TH3 TH2 ST2 LEV2a HIC LEV1 (2) PQRY-P72, P96, P120 models 21S4a Solenoid valve block CV7a SV4a SV4d SV4b 63LS ST17 CJ1 TH8 63H1 CJ2 63HS1 SV7a SV7b CP1 TH7 O/S THINV ST3 SV1a Component cooler heat exchanger TH5 TH4 Water circuit LEVINV ST13 CV8 CV3a CV2a CV5a BV1 CV4a Comp HWE09080 ST1 CV6a Acc SV9 - 123 - BV2 GB [ VI Refrigerant Circuit ] 2. BC controller (1) CMB-P104 - P1010NU-G Solenoid valve block TH15 Gas/Liquid separator LEV3 TH12 PS1 TH11 PS3 LEV1 TH16 Check valve block SVM1 (2) CMB-P108, P1013, P1016NU-GA (main) Solenoid valve block TH15 Gas/Liquid separator LEV3 TH12 PS1 TH11 SVM2 PS3 LEV1 TH16 LEV2 Check valve block SVM1 HWE09080 - 124 - GB [ VI Refrigerant Circuit ] (3) CMB-P104, P108NU-GB (sub) Solenoid valve block TH12 CP TH15 LEV3 HIC-C Check valve block (4) CMB-P1016NU-HB (sub) Solenoid valve block TH12 CP TH15 LEV3 HIC-C Check valve block HWE09080 - 125 - GB [ VI Refrigerant Circuit ] [2] Principal Parts and Functions 1. Heat source unit Part name Symbols (functions) Compressor MC1 (Comp1) High pressure sensor 63HS1 Notes Usage Adjusts the amount of circulating refrigerant by adjusting the operating frequency based on the operating pressure data 1) Detects high pressure 2) Regulates frequency and provides high-pressure protection Specifications Low-pressure shell scroll compressor Wirewound resistance 20°C[68°F] : 0.268ohm(THMU) 0.981ohm(YHMU) 63HS1 123 Connector Pressure 0~4.15 MPa [601psi] Vout 0.5~3.5V 0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi] Pressure [MPa] =1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69 Pressure [psi] =(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145 GND (Black) Vout (White) Vcc (DC5V) (Red) 1 2 3 Low pressure sensor 63LS 1) Detects low pressure 2) Provides low-pressure protection 63LS 123 Connector Pressure 0~1.7 MPa [247psi] Vout 0.5~3.5V 0.173V/0.098 MPa [14psi] Pressure [MPa] =0.566 x Vout [V] - 0.283 Pressure [psi] =(0.566 x Vout [V] - 0.283) x 145 1 2 3 Pressure switch 63H1 Thermis- TH4 tor (Discharge) 1) Detects high pressure 2) Provides high-pressure protection 1) Detects discharge air temperature 2) Provides high-pressure protection 0°C[32°F] :698kohm 10°C[50°F] :413kohm 20°C[68°F] :250kohm 30°C[86°F] :160kohm 40°C[104°F] :104kohm 50°C[122°F] : 70kohm 60°C[140°F] : 48kohm 70°C[158°F] : 34kohm 80°C[176°F] : 24kohm 90°C[194°F] :17.5kohm 100°C[212°F] :13.0kohm 110°C[230°F] : 9.8kohm HWE09080 - 126 - Check method GND (Black) Vout (White) Vcc (DC5V) (Red) 4.15MPa[601psi] OFF setting Degrees Celsius R 120 = 7.465k R 25/120 = 4057 Rt = 7.465 exp 4057 1 273 t Resistance check 1 393 GB [ VI Refrigerant Circuit ] Part name Symbols (functions) Thermis- TH2 tor TH3 (Pipe temperature) Notes Usage PQHY only LEV1 is controlled based on the TH2, TH3, and TH6 values PQHY only Controls defrosting during heating operation 1) Frequency control 2) LEV1 is controlled according to the amount of subcool at the heat exchanger outlet, which is calculated based on the HPS data and TH3 value. TH7 (Water inlet temperature) 1) Detects water inlet temperature 2) Protects water heat exchanger from high and low temperatures 3) Controls water heat exchanger TH8 (Water outlet temperature) 1) Detects water inlet temperature 2) Protects water heat exchanger from freezing up TH5 TH6 HWE09080 Check method Resistance check Degrees Celsius R 0 = 15k R 0/80 = 3460 R t = 15 exp 3460 1 273 t 1 273 0°C[32°F]: 15kohm 10°C[50°F]: 9.7kohm 20°C[68°F]: 6.4kohm 25°C[77°F]: 5.3kohm 30°C[86°F]: 4.3kohm 40°C[104°F]: 3.1kohm Water heat exchanger is controlled based on the 63LS and TH5 values. PQHY only LEV1 is controlled based on the TH2, TH3, and TH6 values THINV Determines the LEV that controls refrigerant flow on the component cooler THHS Inverter heat sink temperature Controls inverter cooling fan based on THHS temperature THBOX Control box internal temperature detection Solenoid valve Specifications Degrees Celsius R 50 = 17k R 25/120 = 4016 R t = 17 exp 4016 1 273 t 1 323 0°C[32°F]: 161kohm 10°C[50°F]: 97kohm 20°C[68°F]: 60kohm 25°C[77°F]: 48kohm 30°C[86°F]: 39kohm 40°C[104°F]: 25kohm SV1a Discharge-suction bypass 1) High/low pressure bypass at start-up and stopping, and capacity control during lowload operation 2) High-pressure-rise prevention SV4a - SV4d Heat exchanger capacity control Controls heat source unit heat exchanger capacity SV7a,7b Heat exchanger capacity control Controls heat source unit heat ex- AC208 - 230V changer capacity Closed while being powered/ open while not being powered SV9 High-pressure-rise prevention - 127 - AC208 - 230V Open while being powered/ closed while not being powered Continuity check with a tester AC208 - 230V Open while being powered/ closed while not being powered GB [ VI Refrigerant Circuit ] Part name Symbols (functions) Notes Usage Specifications Check method Heater CH11 Heats the refrigerant in the compressor Cord heater 1035 ohm 51W Resistance check 4-way valve 21S4a Changeover between heating and cooling AC208-230V Dead: cooling cycle Live: heating cycle Continuity check with a tester Electronic expansion valve LEV1 (for SC control) PQHY only Regulates the amount of bypass flow from the heat source unit liquid pipe during cooling 12 VDC Stepping motor driven valve opening 0-480 pulses (direct driven) Same as with the indoor LEV. The resistance values differs from that of the LEVs on indoor unit. (Refer to the section on Troubleshooting the LEV(page 310 )) LEV2a LEV2b (Refrigerant flow control PQHY only Controls the refrigerant flow during heating 12 VDC Stepping motor driven valve opening 1400 pulses Same as with the indoor LEV. HWE09080 - 128 - GB [ VI Refrigerant Circuit ] 2. Indoor Unit Part Name Symbol (functions) Linear LEV expansion valve Notes Usage Specification Check method 1) Adjusts superheat at the indoor heat exchanger outlet during cooling 2) Adjusts subcool at the heat exchanger outlet of the indoor unit during cooling DC12V Opening of stepping motor driving valve 0-(1400) pulses Refer to the section "Continuity Test with a Tester". Continuity between white, red, and orange. Continuity between yellow, brown, and blue. White M Red Orange Yellow Brown Blue Thermistor HWE09080 TH1 (Suction air temperature) Indoor unit control (Thermo) TH2 (Pipe temperature) 1) Indoor unit control (Frost prevention, Hot adjust) 2) LEV control during heating operation (subcool detection). TH3 (Gas pipe temperature) LEV control during cooling operation (superheat detection) TH4 Outdoor air temperature) Indoor unit control (Thermo) Temperature sensor (Indoor air temperature) Indoor unit control (Thermo) - 129 - Resistance check R0=15k R0/80=3460 Rt = 15exp{3460( 1 1 )} 273+t 273 0°C [32°F]:15kohm 10°C [50°F] :9.7kohm 20°C [68°F]:6.4kohm 25°C [77°F] :5.3kohm 30°C [86°F] :4.3kohm 40°C [104°F] :3.1kohm GB [ VI Refrigerant Circuit ] 3. BC controller (1) G type Part name Pressure sensor Symbols (functions) PS1 (High pressure side) PS3 (Intermediate pressure) Thermistor Solenoid valve Specifications 1) Detects high pressure 2) LEV control PS1 123 1) Detects intermediate pressure 2) LEV control Connector Check method Pressure 0~4.15 MPa [601psi] Vout 0.5~3.5V 0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi] Pressure [MPa] =1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69 Pressure [psi] =(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145 1 2 3 GND (Black) Vout (White) Vcc (DC5V) (Red) LEV control (Liquid level control) TH12 (Bypass outlet temperature) LEV control (Superheat) TH15 (Bypass inlet temperature) LEV control (Superheat) TH16 (Liquid refrigerant temperature) LEV control (Subcool) SVM1 Opens during cooling and de- AC208-230V frost modes Open while being powered/ closed while not being powProvides refrigerant to indoor ered unit in cooling operation SV B Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation SV C Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation LEV1 LEV3 HWE09080 Usage TH11 (Liquid inlet temperature) SV A LEV Part code R 0 = 15k R 0/80 = 3460 R t = 15 exp 3460 1 273 t 1 273 0°C[32°F] : 15kohm 10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm 20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm 25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm 30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm 40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm 1) Liquid level control DC12V 2) Pressure differential con- Opening of a valve driven by a stepping motor trol 0-2000 pulses - 130 - Continuity check with a tester Same as indoor LEV GB [ VI Refrigerant Circuit ] (2) GA type Part name Pressure sensor Symbols (functions) PS1 (High pressure side) PS3 (Intermediate pressure) Thermistor Solenoid valve Specifications 1) Detects high pressure 2) LEV control PS1 123 1) Detects intermediate pressure 2) LEV control Connector Check method Pressure 0~4.15 MPa [601psi] Vout 0.5~3.5V 0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi] Pressure [MPa] =1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69 Pressure [psi] =(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145 1 2 3 GND (Black) Vout (White) Vcc (DC5V) (Red) LEV control (Liquid level control) TH12 (Bypass outlet temperature) LEV control (Superheat) TH15 (Bypass inlet temperature) LEV control (Superheat) TH16 (Liquid refrigerant temperature) LEV control (Subcool) SVM1 Opens during cooling and de- AC208-230V frost modes Open while being powered/ closed while not being powPressure differential control ered R 0 = 15k R 0/80 = 3460 R t = 15 exp 3460 1 273 t 1 273 0°C[32°F] : 15kohm 10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm 20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm 25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm 30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm 40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm SV A Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation SV B Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation SV C Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation LEV1 LEV2 1) Liquid level control DC12V 2) Pressure differential con- Opening of a valve driven by a stepping motor trol 0-2000 pulses Subcool control LEV3 HWE09080 Usage TH11 (Liquid inlet temperature) SVM2 LEV Part code - 131 - Continuity check with a tester Same as indoor LEV GB [ VI Refrigerant Circuit ] (3) GB type Part name Thermistor Solenoid valve LEV HWE09080 Symbols (functions) Part code Usage TH12 (Bypass outlet temperature) LEV control (Superheat) TH15 (Bypass inlet temperature) LEV control (Superheat) SV A Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation SV B Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation SV C Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation LEV3 Pressure differential control Specifications R 0 = 15k R 0/80 = 3460 R t = 15 exp 3460 - 132 - 1 273 t Check method 1 273 0°C[32°F] : 15kohm 10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm 20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm 25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm 30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm 40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm AC208-230V Open while being powered/ closed while not being powered Continuity check with a tester DC12V Opening of a valve driven by a stepping motor 0-2000 pulses Same as indoor LEV GB [ VI Refrigerant Circuit ] (4) HB type Part name Thermistor Solenoid valve LEV HWE09080 Symbols (functions) Part code Usage TH12 (Bypass outlet temperature) LEV control (Superheat) TH15 (Bypass inlet temperature) LEV control (Superheat) SV A Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation SV B Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation SV C Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation LEV3 Pressure differential control Specifications R 0 = 15k R 0/80 = 3460 R t = 15 exp 3460 - 133 - 1 273 t Check method 1 273 0°C[32°F] : 15kohm 10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm 20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm 25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm 30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm 40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm AC208-230V Open while being powered/ closed while not being powered Continuity check with a tester DC12V Opening of a valve driven by a stepping motor 0-2000 pulses Same as indoor LEV GB [ VI Refrigerant Circuit ] HWE09080 - 134 - GB VII Control [1] [2] [3] [4] HWE09080 Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches ....................................................... 137 Controlling the Heat source Unit .................................................................................... 143 Controlling BC Controller ............................................................................................... 160 Operation Flow Chart..................................................................................................... 161 - 135 - GB - 136 - [ VII Control ] VII Control [1] Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches 1. Heat source unit (1) Control board Function according to switch setting Switch Switch setting timing Function OFF ON OFF ON Units that require switch setting Note.2 OC OS C C C C B B A - SWU 1-2 Unit address setting Set to 00 or 51-100 with the dial switch Before power on SW1 1-10 For self-diagnosis/ operation monitoring Refer to the LED monitor display on the heat source unit board. Anytime after power on 1 Centralized control switch Without connection to the centralized controller With connection to the centralized con- Before power on troller 2 Deletion of connection information Normal control Deletion (OC) Storage of IC/ OC error history C C (OS) Storage of OS error history (OC) Deletion of IC/ Anytime after power on OC error history (When switched from OFF (OS) Deletion of to ON) OS error history - Pump down mode After being energized and while the compressor is stopped A Normal control - A - 3 Deletion of error history SW Before power on SW2 4 Pump down mode 5 6 Power on signal output switch 7 During Thermo-ON During ThermoOFF Anytime after power on 8 - - - - - - 9 10 - - - - - - 1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason. 2) A: Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units. B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective. C: The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made. 3) Refer to "VII [2] Controlling the Heat source Unit" for details.(page 143) HWE09080 - 137 - GB [ VII Control ] Function according to switch setting Switch OFF SW3 Switch setting timing Function ON OFF ON 1 Test run mode: enabled/disabled SW3-2 disabled SW3-2 enabled Anytime after power on 2 Test run mode: ON/ OFF Stops all ICs Sends a test-run signal to all IC After power on and when SW3-1 is on. 3 Water heat exCN51-3,5 signal out- Heat source unit erchanger coupling put switch ror output prevention output Anytime after power on 4 Water heat exchangIneffective er freeze prevention Anytime after power on Effective Note 4 Units that require switch setting Note.2 OC OS A - A - C C A - 5 6 7 8 9 - - - - - - 10 - - - - - - 1 2 - - - Anytime after being energized (except during initial startup mode. Automatically cancelled 90 minutes after compressor startup) A - C C C C - - 3 Refrigerant amount adjustment 4 Low-noise mode/ Low-noise mode step demand switch(Note 3) ing SW4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Cumulative compressor operation time data deletion - Normal operation mode Cumulative compressor operation time data is retained. Refrigerant amount adjust mode Step demand mode Before being energized Cumulative compressor operation time data is deleted. - - Anytime after power on (when the unit is turned on) - 1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason. 2) A: Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units. B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective. C: The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made. 3) The noise level is reduced by controlling the compressor frequency. A setting of CN3D is required.(page 24) 4) If the inlet water temperature (TH7) drops below 5ºC [41ºF] while the compressor is stopped, or the outlet water temperature (TH8) drops below 3ºC [37ºF], Cooling-only operation will be performed to prevent freeze-ups. This operation will terminate when one of the following conditions is met: 1) Both the TH7 and TH8 readings (water temperature) exceed 10ºC [50ºF], 2) Two hours have passed since the beginning of the Cooling-only operation, or 3) Signal to resume normal operation is received. HWE09080 - 138 - GB [ VII Control ] Function according to switch setting Switch OFF 1 2 3 4 5 SW5 Switch setting timing Function Low-noise mode selection Capacity priority mode(Note 3) ON OFF - ON - Low-noise mode Before being energized Units that require switch setting Note.2 OC OS A - 6 7 - - - - - - 8 9 10 Backup heating Ineffective Effective Any time after power on A - 1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason. 2) A: Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units. B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective. C: The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made. 3) When set to the capacity priority mode and if the following conditions are met, the quiet mode will terminate, and the unit will go back into the normal operation mode. Cooling-only/Cooling-main: High pressure is high. Heating-only/Heating-main: Low pressure is low. (2) INV board Functions are switched with the following connector. Connector Function Function according to connector Enabled CN6 shortcircuit connector Enabling/disabling the following error detection functions; ACCT sensor failure (5301 Detail No. 115) ACCT sensor circuit failure (5301 Detail No.117) IPM open/ACCT erroneous wiring (5301 Detail No. 119) Detection of ACCT erroneous wiring (5301 Detail No.120) Error detection enabled Disabled Setting timing Enabled Disabled Error detecAnytime after power on tion disable (No load operation is possible.) CN6 short-circuit connector is mated with the mating connector. Leave the short-circuit connector on the mating connector during normal operation to enable error detection and protect the equipment from damage. HWE09080 - 139 - GB [ VII Control ] 2. Function of the switch (Indoor unit) (1) Dipswitches 1) SW1,3 Switch SW1 Function according to switch setting Function Notes 1 Room temperature detection position 2 Clogged filter detection 3 Filter check reminder time setting 4 Outside air intake 5 Remote display option 6 Humidifier control OFF ON Indoor unit inlet Built-in sensor on the remote controller Not available Available Forced heating operation at OA temp of 5 C or below Fan speed setting for Heating Thermo-OFF 100h 2500h Disabled Enabled Fan output Thermo-ON signal OFF ON Set to ON (built-in sensor on the remote controller) on All Fresh (PEFY-P-NMHU-E-F) model units Always set to OFF on PKFY-P-NBMU-E model units During heating operation Always on while in the heating mode Fan speed setting for Heating Thermo-OFF 7 Switch setting timing Very Low Low Not available Available According to the SW1-7 setting Applicable to All Fresh model units (PEFY-P-NMHU-E-F) only Preset speed 8 - SW3 - - 9 Self-recovery after power failure Disabled 10 Power source start-stop Disabled Enabled Heat pump Cooling only Enabled While the unit is stopped (Remote controller OFF) Applicable to All Fresh model units (PEFY-P-NMHU-E-F) only 1 Unit model selection 2 Louver Not available Available 3 Vane Not available Available 4 Vane swing function Not available Available 5 - - - Vane angle limit setting for cooling operation Downblow B,C Horizontal Always set to Downblow B or C on PKFY-P-NBMU-E model units Initial vane position Enabled Disabled PLFY-P-NLMU-E model only 7 Automatic LEV value conversion function Not available Available 8 Heating 4 C[7.2 F] up Enabled Disabled 9 SHm setting 2 5 The setting depends on the model and type. 10 SCm setting 10 15 The setting depends on the model and type. 6 Always set to OFF on PKFY-P-NBMU-E model units Set to OFF on floor-standing (PFFY) type units Note 1. Settings in the shaded areas are factory settings.(Refer to the table below for the factory setting of the switches whose factory settings are not indicated by the shaded cells.) Note 2. If both SW1-7 and SW1-8 are set to ON, the fan remains stopped during heating Thermo-OFF. To prevent incorrect temperature detection due to a build-up of warm air around the indoor unit, use the built-in temperature sensor on the remote controller (SW1-1) instead of the one on the indoor unit inlet thermistor. Note 3. By setting SW3-1, SW1-7, and SW1-8 to a certain configuration, the fan can be set to remain stopped during cooling Thermo-OFF. See the table below for details. Switch setting Fan speed during Thermo-OFF SW3-1 SW1-7 SW1-8 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON HWE09080 OFF ON OFF ON Heating Cooling Cooling-only/heat pump Very Low Low Preset speed Heat pump Preset speed Cooling-only Preset speed Stop Stop Stop Stop Heat pump - 140 - GB [ VII Control ] (2) Address switch Actual indoor unit address setting varies in different systems. Refer to the installation manual for the heat source unit for details on how to make the address setting. Each address is set with a combination of the settings for the 10's digit and 1's digit. (Example) When setting the address to "3", set the 1's digit to 3, and the 10's digit to 0. When setting the address to "25", set the 1's digit to 5, and the 10's digit to 2. 3. Function of the switch (1) MA remote controller (PAR-20MAA) The SW is located at the bottom of the remote controller under the cover. Operate the switches to perform the remote controller main/sub setting or other function settings. Normally, do not change the settings of switches other than the SW1 (main/ sub switching switch). (All the switches are set to "ON" at factory setting.) ON 1 2 3 4 Switching switch Switch ON OFF Remote controller main/sub setting Main Sub 2 At power on of the remote controller Normal startup 3 Cooling/heating display set by automatic setting 4 Suction temperature display (discharge temperature display) 1 Function Remote controller Operation by switch settings Switch setting timing When two remote controllers are connected to one group, set either of the remote controllers to "Sub". Before power on Timer mode startup When the program timer (only few stock products are available) is connected, set to "Timer mode startup" to resume the operation with timer mode after power is restored. Before power on Displayed Not displayed When the automatic mode is set and the "Cooling"/"Heating" display is not necessary, set to "Not displayed". Before power on Displayed Not displayed When the suction temperature (discharge temperature) display is not necessary, set to "Not displayed". Before power on The MA remote controller (PAR-21MAA) does not have the switches listed above. Refer to the installation manual for the function setting. HWE09080 - 141 - GB [ VII Control ] (2) ME remote controller (PAR-F27MEA) Set the address of the remote controller with the rotary switch. 4 56 78 9 78 9 4 56 10's digit 1's digit (left) (right) 01 23 23 78 9 23 01 01 4 56 01 23 78 9 Rotary switch 45 6 Remote controller unit Example: In case of address 108 Address setting range Setting method Main remote controller 101-150 Add 100 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the same group. Sub remote controller 151-200 Add 150 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the same group. Setting of rotary switch Address No. 01-99*1 101-199 with the 100's digit automatically being set to 1*2 00 200 *1. At factory shipment, the rotary switch is set to 01. *2. The address range that can be set with the ME remote controller is between 101 and 200. When the dials are set to a number between 01 and 99, the 100's digit is automatically set to [1]. When the dials are set to 00, the 100's digit is automatically set to [2]. To set addresses, use a precision slotted screw driver [2.0 mm [0.08 in] (w)], and do not apply than 19.6N. The use of any other tool or applying too much load may damage the switch. 4. Switch functions (Control board) Function according to switch setting Switch 1 Function Model setting 2-5 ON R410A - Always leave this switch to OFF. - - - 1 2 - SW4 6 Switch setting timing OFF No. of ports *1 Before being energized 7, 8 - - - - 1-6 - - - - SW5 7 Model setting Refer to the table below. Before being energized 8 Model setting Refer to the table below. Before being energized *1. When a junction pipe kit was used to merge two ports to connect the indoor units with a total capacity of between P31 and P54, turn DIP SW4-6 to ON. When connecting a main and a sub BC controller, change the SW setting on only the main BC controller. (It is not necessary to change the SW setting on the sub BC controller. ) Model setting SW5-8 Switch OFF OFF ON G type SW5-7 ON HWE09080 GAtype GB (HB) type - 142 - GB [ VII Control ] [2] Controlling the Heat source Unit -1- Outline of Control Method The heat source units are designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). The setting of heat source unit can be verified by using the self-diagnosis switch (SW1). SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Display The unit is designated as the OC: “oc” appears on the display. The unit is designated as OS: “oS” appears on the display The OC determines the operation mode and the control mode, and it also communicates with the indoor units. The OS exercises autonomous distributed control (over defrost, error detection, and actuator control etc.) according to the operation/control mode signals that are sent from the OC. -2- Startup sequence rotation At the initial startup, heat source units start up in the order of "OC and OS." Startup sequence rotation is performed while all the indoor units are stopped. (Even after two hours of operation, startup sequence rotation is not performed while the compressor is in operation.) In a system with multiple heat source units (OC and OS), when the integrated operation time of the unit in operation (either OC or OS) reaches one hour during a cooling operation at low outside temperature, that unit will stop and the other unit will go into operation. Refer to [-13-Control at Initial Start-up] for the initial startup. Performing startup sequence rotation does not change the basic operation of OC and OS. Only startup sequence is changed. Startup sequence of the heat source units can be checked with the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the OC. SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Display OC→OS: “oc” and the “OC” address appear alternately on the display. OS→OC: “oS” and the “OS” address appear alternately on the display. -3- Initial Control When the power is turned on, the initial processing of the microcomputer is given top priority. During the initial processing, control processing of the operation signal is suspended. (The control processing is resumed after the initial processing is completed. Initial processing involves data processing in the microcomputer and initial setting of each of the LEV opening. This process will take up to 5 minutes.) During the initial processing, the LED monitor on the heat source unit's control board displays S/W version -> refrigerant type -> heat pump -> cooling only and capacity -> and communication address in turn every second. -4- Control at Start-up The upper limit of frequency during the first 3 minutes of the operation is 50 Hz. When the power is turned on, normal operation will start after the initial start-up mode (to be described later) has been completed (with a restriction on the frequency). HWE09080 - 143 - GB [ VII Control ] -5- Bypass Control Bypass solenoid valves (SV1a), which bypass the high- and low- pressure sides, perform the following functions. (1) Bypass solenoid valve (SV1a) (ON = Open) SV1a Operation ON OFF When the compressor on each heat source unit starts up ON for 4 minutes. After the restoration of thermo or 3 minutes after restart ON for 4 minutes. During cooling or heating operation with the compressor stopped Always ON. Exception: OFF when 63HS1-63LS is 0.2MPa[29psi] or less After the operation has stopped ON for 3 minutes. Exception: OFF when 63HS1-63LS is 0.2MPa[29psi] or less During defrost operation ON When low pressure (63LS) drops While the compressor is operating at the minimum frequency and when the low pres- below 0.23MPa[33psi]. sure (63LS) drops (3 or more minutes after compressor startup) When low pressure (63LS) exceeds 0.38MPa[55psi]. When high pressure (63HS1) rises When 63HS1 is or below 3.43MPa[497psi] and 30 seconds have passed When 63HS1 exceeds 3.62MPa[525psi] (2) Bypass solenoid valve (SV9) (ON = Close) SV9 Operation When high pressure (63HS1) rises during the heating operation OFF ON When 63HS1 exceeds 3.50MPa [507psi] When the pressure is 2.70MPa[391psi]or below Others HWE09080 Always ON - 144 - GB [ VII Control ] -6- Compressor Frequency Control Depending on the capacity required, the frequency of the compressor is controlled to keep constant evaporation temperature (0°C [32°F] = 0.71 MPa [103 psi]) during cooling operation, and condensing temperature (49°C [120°F] = 2.88 MPa [418 psi]) during heating operation. The table below summarizes the operating frequency ranges of the inverter compressor during normal operation. The OS in the multiple-heat source-unit system operates at the actual compressor frequency value that is calculated by the OS based on the preliminary compressor frequency value that the OC determines. Frequency/cooling (Hz) Frequency/heating (Hz) Max Min Max Min P72 model 66 35 66 15 P96 model 90 35 80 15 P120 model 114 35 104 15 Model The maximum frequency during heating operation is affected by the water temperature to a certain extent. (1) Pressure limit The upper limit of high pressure (63HS1) is preset, and when it exceeds the upper limit, the frequency is decreased every 15 seconds. The actuation pressure is when the high-pressure reading on 63HS1 is 3.58MPa[519psi]. (2) Discharge temperature limit Discharge temperature (TH4) of the compressor in operation is monitored, and when it exceeds the upper limit, the frequency is decreased every minute. Operating temperature is 115°C [239°F]. (3) Periodic frequency control Frequency control other than the ones performed at start-up, upon status change, and for protection is called periodic frequency control (convergent control) and is performed in the following manner. Periodic control cycle Periodic control is performed after the following time has passed 30 seconds after compressor start-up 30 seconds after frequency control based on discharge temperature or pressure limit The amount of frequency change The amount of frequency change is controlled to approximate the target value based on the evaporation temperature (Te) and condensing temperature (Tc). HWE09080 - 145 - GB [ VII Control ] -7- Refrigerant Recovery Control Recovery of refrigerant is performed during heating operation to prevent the refrigerant from accumulating inside the unit while it is stopped (unit in fan mode), or inside the indoor unit that is in cooling mode or in heating mode with thermo off. It is also performed during cooling operation to prevent an excessive amount of refrigerant from accumulating in the heat source heat exchanger. (1) During heating operation Starting refrigerant recovery mode The refrigerant recovery mode in heating starts when all of the following three conditions are met: 15 minutes have passed since the completion of previous refrigerant recovery. TH4 > 115°C [239°F] Frequencies below 50 Hz Refrigerant recovery 1) Refrigerant is recovered with the LEV on the applicable indoor unit (unit under stopping mode, fan mode, cooling, heating with thermo off) being opened for 30 seconds. Opening of LEV during refrigerant recovery Opening of indoor unit LEV: 400 pulses 30 seconds Initial opening of LEV Start Finish 2) Periodic capacity control of the heat source units and periodic LEV control of the indoor units will be suspended during refrigerant recovery operation; they will be performed after the recovery has been completed. (2) During cooling operation Starting refrigerant recovery mode The refrigerant recovery mode starts when all the following conditions are met: 30 minutes have passed since the completion of previous refrigerant recovery. When the unit keeps running for 3 minutes in a row or more with high discharge temperature TH4 > 105°C [221°F] or 63HS1 > 3.43 MPa [497 psi] (35 kg/cm2G) and SC0 > 10°C [18°F] Refrigerant recovery The opening of LEV1 is increased and periodic control begins again. -8- Refrigerant Recovery Control Refrigerant recovery is performed for each BC port during heating operation to prevent the refrigerant from accumulating inside the units that are stopped (in the fan mode), in the cooling mode, or in the heating Thermo-OFF mode. It is also performed during cooling operation to prevent an excessive amount of refrigerant from accumulating in the heat source heat exchanger. Starting criteria for the refrigerant recovery cycle (during Cooling-only, Cooling-main, Heating-only, or Heating-main mode) The refrigerant recovery mode starts when all of the following conditions are met: 1) When 5 minutes have passed in the Heating-only or Heating-main mode or 30 seconds have passed in the Cooling-only or Cooling-main mode since the completion of the previous refrigerant recovery cycle AND the when following conditions are met. TH4 > 105°C [221°F] 2) When the port is not in the 4-minute restart delay mode Starting criteria for the refrigerant recovery cycle (during Cooling-only, Cooling-main, Heating-only, or Heating-main mode) 1) When the port is in the cooling Thermo-OFF, fan, or stop mode SV C at the port turns on for 30 seconds. ( indicates port No.) 2) The opening of LEV1 and LEV3 is increased. -9- Capacity Control of Heat Exchanger (1) Control method Depending on the capacity required, the rotation speed of the heat source unit fan is controlled by the inverter to keep a constant condensing temperature of (water temperature +10°C [50°F]) during cooling operation and a constant evaporation temperature of (0°C [32°F] =0.71 (1) Control method Depending on the capacity required, the rotation speed of the heat source unit fan is controlled by the inverter to keep a constant condensing temperature of (water temperature +10°C [50°F]) during cooling operation and a constant evaporation temperature of (0°C [32°F] =0.71 ) The OC, OS1, and OS2 controls the subcool coil individually. The LEV is controlled every 30 seconds to maintain constant the subcool at the heat source unit heat exchanger outlet that is calculated from the values of high pressure (63HS1) and liquid piping temperature (TH3), or the superheat that is calculated from the values of low pressure (63LS) and the bypass outlet temperature (TH2) of the subcool coil. LEV opening is controlled based on the values of the inlet (TH6) and the outlet (TH3) temperatures of the subcool coil, high pressure (63HS1), and discharge temperature (TH4). In a single-heat source-unit system, the LEV is closed (0) in the heating mode, while the compressor is stopped, and during cooling Thermo-OFF. In a multiple-heat source-unit system, the LEV closes (0) during heating operation, while the compressor is stopped, or during cooling Thermo-OFF. The LEV opens to a specified position when 15 minutes have passed after Thermo-OFF. (65 pulses) LEV1 outputs 0 pulse during the defrost cycle, and 300 pulses if either of the following formulas are satisfied: 63LS<2kgf/cm2 or TH4100ºC [212ºF]. -12- Refrigerant flow control (Linear expansion valve ) Refrigerant flow is controlled by each unit in the combined models during heating. Refrigerant flow control is performed by the OC, OS1, and OS2 individually. The valve opens to a specified angle during cooling (Opening: 1400 pulses) Valve opening is controlled based on the values of high pressure (63HS1), discharge temperature (TH4), low pressure( 63LS), and piping temperature (TH5). The valve moves to the predetermined position while the unit is stopped. -13- Control at Initial Start-up When started up for the first time before 12 hours have elapsed after power on, the unit goes into the initial startup mode. At the completion of the initial operation mode on the OC, OS1, and OS2, they will go into the normal control mode. 1. Flowchart of initial operation (1) P72, P96, P120 models Initial startup mode starts. 50 F 60Hz Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. or F < 50Hz Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. Initial startup mode complete HWE09080 - 149 - GB [ VII Control ] (2) P144, P168, P192, P216, P240 models Initial startup mode starts. The compressor on the OC starts up. F 60Hz The total operating load of the indoor unit after 5 minutes of operation is P96 or above. (*1 Qj 50) No Yes The compressor on the OC remains in operation, and the compressor on the OS starts up. *2 The compressor on the OC starts up. 50 F 60Hz (OC) Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. or F < 50Hz (OC) Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. 50 F 60Hz (both OC and OS) Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. or F < 50Hz (both OC and OS) Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. *3 Both the OC and OS stop. The startup sequence of the OC and OS is rotated. The compressor on the OS starts up. 50 F 60Hz (OS) Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. or F < 50Hz (OS) Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. *2 The air conditioning load is too small for both the OC and the OS to simultaneously stay in operation. Initial startup mode complete *3 The air conditioning load is high enough for both OC and OS to simultaneously stay in operation. *1 HWE09080 Qj:Total capacity (model name) code - 150 - GB [ VII Control ] (3) P264, P288, P312, P336, P360 models Initial startup mode starts. The compressor on the OC starts up. F 60Hz No The total operating load of the indoor unit after 5 minutes of operation is P96 or above. ( *1 Qj 50) Yes The total operating load of the indoor unit after 5 minutes of operation is between P96 and P400. (50 < *1 Qj< 200) Yes No The compressor on the OS remains in operation, and the compressors on the OS1 and OS2 start up. *2 50 F 60Hz (OC, OS1, and OS2) Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. or F < 50Hz (OC, OS1, and OS2) Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. The compressor on the OC remains in operation, and the compressor on the OS1 starts up. The compressor on the OC starts up. *3 50 F 60Hz (OC) Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. or F < 50Hz (OC) Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. 50 F 60Hz (both OC and OS1) Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. or F < 50Hz (both OC and OS1) Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. *4 *2 The air conditioning load is too small for the OC, OS1, and OS2 to simultaneously stay in operation. *3 The air conditioning load is too small for both OC and OS1, or OS1 and OS2 to simultaneously stay in operation. The OC, OS1, and OS2 stop. The OC, OS1, and OS2 stop. The startup sequence of the OC, OS1, and OS2 is rotated. (The startup sequence of the OC, OS1 and OS2 is changed.) The startup sequence of the OC, OS1, and OS2 is rotated. (The startup sequence of the OC, OS1 and OS2 is changed.) The compressor on the OS1 remains in operation, and the compressor on the OS2 starts up. 50 F 60Hz (both OS1 and OS2) Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. or F < 50Hz (both OS1 and OS2) Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. *4 The air conditioning load is high enough for OC, OS1 and OS2 to simultaneously stay in operation. The compressor on the OS1 starts up. *5 50 F 60Hz (OS1) Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. or F < 50Hz (OS1) Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. The OC, OS1, and OS2 stop. The startup sequence of the OC, OS1, and OS2 is rotated. (The startup sequence of the OC, OS1 and OS2 is changed.) *5 The air conditioning load is high enough for both OC and OS1, or OS1 and OS2 to simultaneously stay in operation. The compressor on the OS2 starts up. 50 F 60Hz (OS2) Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. or F < 50Hz (OS2) Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. Initial startup mode complete *1 HWE09080 Qj:Total capacity (model name) code - 151 - GB [ VII Control ] -14- Emergency Operation Mode 1. Problems with the heat source unit Emergency operation mode is a temporary operation mode in which the heat source unit that is not in trouble operates when one of the heat source units in the P144 through P240 models is in trouble or when one or two of the heat source units in the P264 through P360 models are in trouble. This mode can be started by performing an error reset via the remote controller. (1) 1) 2) 3) Starting the emergency operation When an error occurs, the error source and the error code will be displayed on the display on the remote controller. The error is reset using the remote controller. If an error code appears that permits an emergency operation in step 1) above, (See the table below.), the retry operation starts. 4) If the same error is detected during the retry operation (step 3 above), an emergency operation can be started by resetting the error via the remote controller. Error codes that permit an emergency operation (Applicable to both OC and OS) Trouble source Compressor Inverter Thermistor TH2 TH3 TH4 TH5 TH6 TH7 TH8 Power Error codes that permit an emergency operation Error code description 0403 4220, 4225 4230 4240 4250, 4255 5110 5301 5102 5103 5104 5105 5106 5107 Serial communication error Bus voltage drop Heatsink overheat protection Overload protection Overcurrent relay trip Heatsink temperature sensor failure (THHS) Current sensor/circuit failure Subcool heat exchanger bypass outlet temperature sensor failure Pipe temperature sensor failure Discharge temperature sensor failure Accumulator inlet temperature sensor failure Subcool heat exchanger liquid outlet sensor failure Outside air temperature sensor failure 5108 4102 Water outlet temperature sensor fault Open phase 4115 Power supply sync signal abnormality Emergency operation pattern (2 heat source units) OC failure pattern Trouble OC Normal OS Emergency Cooling Permitted operation Heating Permitted Maximum total capacity of indoor units (Note 1) OS failure pattern Normal Trouble Permitted Permitted 60% Emergency operation pattern (3 heat source units) OC OS1 OS2 Emergency operation Cooling Heating Maximum total capacity of indoor units (Note 1) OC failure pattern OS1 failure pattern OS2 failure pattern Trouble Normal Normal Permitted Permitted Normal Trouble Normal Permitted Permitted Normal Normal Trouble Permitted Permitted 60% OC, OS1 failure OC, OS2 failure OS1, OS2 failure pattern pattern pattern Trouble Trouble Normal Permitted Permitted Trouble Normal Trouble Permitted Permitted Normal Trouble Trouble Permitted Permitted 40% (Note 1) If an attempt is made to put into operation a group of indoor units whose total capacity exceeds the maximum allowable capacity, some of the indoor units will go into the same condition as Thermo-OFF. HWE09080 - 152 - GB [ VII Control ] (2) Ending the emergency operation 1) End conditions When one of the following conditions is met, emergency operation stops, and the unit makes an error stop. When the integrated operation time of compressor in cooling mode has reached four hours. When the integrated operation time of compressor in heating mode has reached two hours. When an error is detected that does not permit the unit to perform an emergency operation. 2) Control at or after the completion of emergency operation At or after the completion of emergency operation, the compressor stops, and the error code reappears on the remote controller. If another error reset is performed at the completion of an emergency mode, the unit repeats the procedures in section (1) above. To stop the emergency mode and perform a current-carrying operation after correcting the error, perform a power reset. 2. Communication circuit failure or when some of the heat source units are turned off This is a temporary operation mode in which the heat source unit that is not in trouble operates when communication circuit failure occurs or when some of the heat source units are turned off. (1) Starting the emergency operation (When the OC is in trouble) 1) When an error occurs, the error source and the error code appear on the display on the remote controller. 2) Reset the error via the remote controller to start an emergency operation. Precautions before servicing the unit When the OC is in trouble, the OS temporarily takes over the OC's function and performs an emergency operation. When this happens, the indoor unit connection information are changed. In a system that has a billing function, a message indicating that the billing system information has an error may appear on the TG-2000A. Even if this message appears, do not change (or set) the refrigerant system information on the TG-2000A. After the completion of an emergency operation, the correct connection information will be restored. (2) Starting the emergency operation (When the OS is in trouble) 1) A communication error occurs. -> An emergency operation starts in approximately six minutes. Error codes that permit an emergency operation (Applicable to both OC and OS) Trouble source Circuit board failure or the power to the heat source units is off HWE09080 Error codes that permit an emergency operation 6607 6608 - 153 - Error code description No acknowledgement error No response error GB [ VII Control ] Emergency operation pattern (2 heat source units) OC OS Emergency Cooling operation Heating Maximum total capacity of indoor units (Note 1) OC failure OS failure pattern pattern Trouble Normal Normal Trouble Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Capacity that matches the total capacity of the operable heat source units Emergency operation pattern (3 heat source units) OC OS1 OS2 Emergency operation Cooling Heating Maximum total capacity of indoor units (Note 1) OC failure pattern OS1 failure pattern OS2 failure pattern Trouble Normal Normal Permitted Permitted Normal Trouble Normal Permitted Permitted Normal Normal Trouble Permitted Permitted OC, OS1 failure OC, OS2 failure OS1, OS2 failure pattern pattern pattern Trouble Trouble Normal Permitted Permitted Trouble Normal Trouble Permitted Permitted Normal Trouble Trouble Permitted Permitted Capacity that matches the total capacity of the operable heat source units (Note 1) If an attempt is made to put into operation a group of indoor units whose total capacity exceeds the maximum allowable capacity, some of the indoor units will go into the same condition as Thermo-OFF. (3) Ending the emergency operation When communication is restored, the emergency mode is cancelled, and the units go into the normal operation mode. HWE09080 - 154 - GB [ VII Control ] -15- Control Method Control method The control system configuration for the PQRY models is shown in the chart below. Daisy-chained non-polar 2-wire transmission line Data signal exchange between system equipment Non-polar 2-wire serial communication method Calculation, processing 16-bit CPU microcomputer operation processing * System control Adjustment of refrigerant flow rate Adjustment of rotation speed of compressor or fan Autonomous distributed control system (F2-VPM control) Rotation speed control of compressor or fan depending on the refrigerant pressure value and the changing speed Heat source unit Self-contained capacity control depending on the load Indoor unit Refrigerant distribution control depending on the operation mode BC controller Autonomous distributed control system : A system that consists of three independent sub control systems, instead of a single centralized control system, that work together to maintain the overall control of the entire system. HWE09080 - 155 - GB [ VII Control ] -16- Cooling/heating Circuit Control and General Function of System Equipment Operation status Gas Two-phase Liquid Schematic diagram of refrigerant circuit High-pressure gas 4-way valve Check valve Selector valve L M A O Lowpressure pipe Heat exchanger Pressure Low-pressure two-phase L Low-pressure gas M Gas Heat exchanger L L M Cooling only Schematic diagram of refrigerating cycle A Liquid LEV L M Gas-liquid separator High-pressure liquid Indoor unit Highpressure pipe Heat source unit LEV M High-pressure liquid Enthalpy (energy) O Gas-liquid mixture BC controller High-pressure gas Cooling N A Lowpressure gas M L Cooling Low-pressure two-phase N O L M J G I L K Cooling B N Cooling main L F D G E B N M High-pressure liquid K L Lowpressure two- phase O M High-pressure liquid O L M L M L A M Heating only A E J Low-pressure gas F H High-pressure two-phase I A D C H Heating Highpressure gas C M L M Highpressure gas F F High-pressure liquid O Low-pressure gas Heating J A B Lowpressure two- phase C D Heating High-pressure liquid B M C D C D Heating B Heating main A D Cooling H K Highpressure gas I E HWE09080 B C E F G Low-pressure gas F Lowpressure two- phase K J H G High-pressure liquid I - 156 - M GB [ VII Control ] -17- Operation Mode (1) Indoor unit operation mode The operation mode can be selected from the following 5 modes using the remote controller. 1 Cooling mode 2 Heating mode 3 Dry mode 4 Fan mode 5 Stopped mode (2) Heat source unit operation mode 1 Cooling mode All indoor units in operation are in cooling mode. 2 Heating mode All indoor units in operation are in heating mode. 3 Stopped mode All indoor units are in fan mode or stopping mode. When the heat source unit is performing a cooling operation, the operation mode of the connected indoor units that are not in the cooling mode (Stopped, Fan, Thermo-OFF) cannot be changed to heating from the remote controller. If this attempt is mode, "Heating" will flash on the remote controller. The opposite is true when the heat source unit is performing a heating operation. (The first selection has the priority.) HWE09080 - 157 - GB [ VII Control ] -18- Operation Mode (1) Indoor unit operation mode The operation mode can be selected from the following 6 modes using the remote controller. 1 Cooling mode 2 Heating mode 3 Dry mode 4 Automatic cooling/heating mode 5 Fan mode 6 Stopping mode (2) Heat source unit operation mode 1 Cooling only mode All indoor units in operation are in cooling mode. 2 Heating only mode All indoor units in operation are in heating mode. 3 Cooling main mode Coexistence of units in cooling and heating modes. 4 Heating main mode Coexistence of units in cooling and heating modes. 5 Stopping mode All indoor units are in fan mode or stopping mode. When units in cooing and heating coexist, the operation mode (cooling main mode or heating main mode) will be determined by the heat source unit, based on the refrigerant pressure and speed variation data. (3) Operation pattern for automatic cooling/heating mode When the automatic cooling/heating mode is selected from remote controller functions, the indoor temperature will be detected in pattern as shown in the figure below, and the operation mode (cooling or heating) will automatically be selected. Switches to cooling mode 1 C [2 F] Temperature rise 1.5 C [3 F] 1.5 C [3 F] Cooling Fan Fan Cooling operation under Thermo-ON conditions Set temperature (Variable between 19 C and 28 C [ 67 F and 83 F]) Heating operation under Thermo-ON conditions Heating 1 C [2 F] Switches to heating mode (4) Relationship between the operation mode and the load capacity (kW) (within a system) 0 100(%) Heating load Cooling load Cooling load capacity Heating load capacity Heating = X 100 load (%) Cooling load + Heating load capacity capacity X100 = Cooling Cooling load + Heating load load (%) capacity capacity 100(%) 0 Cooling only mode Cooling main mode Heating main mode Heating only mode Total heat recovery mode HWE09080 - 158 - GB [ VII Control ] -19- DEMAND Control Cooling/heating operation can be prohibited (Thermo-OFF) by an external input to the heat source units. When DIP SW4-4 is set to ON, the 4-step DEMAND control is enabled. Eight-step demand control is possible in the system with two heat source units. Twelve-step demand control is possible in the system with three heat source units. Refer to Chapter II [3] 2.(7) "Various types of control using input-output signal connector on the heat source unit (various connection options)" for details.(page 22) HWE09080 - 159 - GB [ VII Control ] [3] Controlling BC Controller 1. Control of SV A, SV B, and SV C SV A, SV B, and SV C turn on or off depending on the operation mode of the branch. Mode Port Cooling Heating Stopped SV A ON OFF OFF SV B OFF ON OFF SV C ON OFF OFF 2. Control of SVM1 and 1b SVM turns on or off depending on the operation mode. Operation mode Cooling only Cooling main Heating only Heating main Stopped SVM1,1b ON Pressure differential control*1 OFF OFF OFF *1. Pressure differential control: The detected differential pressure (PS1 and PS3) is controlle every minute so as to be within a certain range. 3. Control of LEV LEV opening (sj) is controlled as follows depending on the operation mode. Operation mode Cooling only Cooling main Heating only Heating main Stopped 110 110*3 1200 Pressure differential control*2 Pressure differential control*2 60 60 60 60 LEV1 G,GA type 2000 LEV2 (only GA type) GB,HB type LEV3 Superheat control*4 LEV3 Superheat control*4 Liquid level control*1differential control*2 Superheat control*4 *1. Liquid level control: The liquid level detected by the liquid inlet temperature (TH11 sensor) is controlled so as to be within a certain range. *2. Pressure differential control: The detected differential pressure (PS1 and PS3) is controlle every minute so as to be within a certain range. *3. Can be 110 or more due to pressure rise on the liquid side (PS1). *4. Superheat control: The amound of superheat that is calculated on the bypass inlet and outlet temperature (G, GA, :TH12,TH15, GB, HB: TH12, TH15) is controlled every minute so as to be within a certain range. 4. Control of SVM2, and 2b Operation mode Cooling only Cooling main Heating only Heating main Stopped SVM2,2b OFF OFF Pressure differential control*1 Pressure differential control*1 OFF *1. Pressure differential control: The detected differential pressure (PS1 and PS3) is controlled every minute so as to be within a certain range. HWE09080 - 160 - GB [ VII Control ] [4] Operation Flow Chart 1. Mode determination flowchart (1) Indoor unit (cooling, heating, dry, fan mode) Start Normal operation Breaker turned on Error NO Unit in the stopped state YES 1 Operation SW turned on From heat source unit YES NO 1. Protection function self-holding cancelled. *Note 1 2. Indoor unit LEV fully closed. Remote controller display lit off *Note 2 NO Error mode YES YES Operation mode Auxiliary heater ON NO 1. Auxiliary heater OFF 2. Low fan speed for 1 minute YES 3-minute drain pump ON Error stop Error display Cooling mode Heating mode Dry mode Fan mode Self-holding of protection function Cooling display Heating display Dry display Fan display FAN stop Drain pump ON NO Error command to heat source unit Indoor unit LEV fully closed. *Note 1 *Note 3 YES Prohibition NO Refer to 2-(1) Cooling operation. *Note 3 YES *Note 3 YES Prohibition Prohibition NO NO Refer to 2-(2) Heating operation. Refer to 2-(3) for dry operation. Fan operations Prohibition "Blinking display on the remote controller" Operation command to heat source unit (to 2 ) *Note 1. Indoor unit LEV fully closed : Opening 41. *Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the heat source unit side. If some of the indoor units are experiencing a problem (except water leakage), only those indoor units that are experiencing the problems will stop. If the heat source unit is experiencing a problem, all connected indoor units will stop. *Note 3. The operation will be prohibited when the set cooling/heating mode is different from that of the heat source unit. HWE09080 - 161 - GB [ VII Control ] (2) Heat source unit (cooling and heating modes) Start Normal operation Error NO Breaker turned on Unit in the stopped state YES "HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on the remote controller NO *Note 1 Indoor units registered to the remote controller YES NO 1. Protection function self-holding cancelled. 2. LEV1 fully closed. 2 From indoor unit Operation command YES Operation mode Cooling / Heating *Note 2 Error mode YES Error stop NO 72C ON 1. 72C OFF 2. Inverter output 0Hz 3. All solenoid valves OFF *Note 3 Operation mode Refer to Cooling/Dry Operation 2-(1) and 2-(3) Error display on the heat source unit LED Self-holding of protection function Error command to indoor unit Refer to heating Operation 2-(2). Operation command to indoor unit To 1 . *Note 1. For about 3 minutes after power on, search for the indoor unit address, for the remote controller address, and for the group information will start. During this, "HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on the display of the remote controller. When the indoor unit to be controlled by the remote controller is missing, "HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" keeps blinking on the display of the remote controller even after 3 or more minutes after power on. *Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the heat source unit side. The heat source unit stops only when all of the connected indoor units are experiencing problems. The operation of even a single indoor unit will keep the heat source unit running. The error will be indicated on the LED display. *Note 3. The heat source unit operates according to the operation mode commanded by the indoor unit. However, when the heat source unit is running a cooling operation, come of the operating indoor units will stop, or the operation of these indoor units will be prohibited even when the indoor unit mode is switched from fan mode to heating mode. This also applies when the heat source unit is running a heating operation. HWE09080 - 162 - GB [ VII Control ] 2. Operations in each mode (1) Cooling operation Cooling operation Normal operation During test run mode 4-way valve OFF Indoor unit fan operation Test run mode ON Unit in the stopped state *Note 1 YES NO NO Thermostat ON YES YES 3-minute restart prevention NO 1. Inverter output 0Hz 2. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 LEV2a, LEV2b rated opening 3. All solenoid valves OFF 4. 72C OFF 1. Inverter frequency control 2. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 control LEV2a, LEV2b fully opened 3. Solenoid valve control 4. 72C control *Note 1. The indoor fan operates at the set notch under cooling mode regardless of the ON/OFF state of the thermostat. HWE09080 - 163 - GB [ VII Control ] (2) Heating operation Normal operation Heating operation Unit in the stopped state During test run mode NO 4-way valve ON Test run mode ON YES NO NO Thermostat ON YES YES 3-minute restart prevention NO 1. Indoor unit fan operation at Very Low speed 2. Inverter output 0Hz 3. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 Fully closed LEV2a, LEV2b rated opening 4. All solenoid valves OFF 5. Heat source unit fan stop 6. 72C OFF HWE09080 1. Indoor-heat source unit fan control 2. Inverter frequency control 3. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1,LEV2a, LEV2b control 4. Solenoid valve control 5. 72C control - 164 - GB [ VII Control ] (3) Dry operation Dry operation Normal operation Thermostat ON 4-way valve OFF Test run mode ON Unit in the stopped state YES *Note 2 NO Thermostat ON NO Suction temperature 18°C[64°F] YES *Note 1 1. Indoor unit fan stop 2. Inverter output 0Hz 3. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 fully closed. LEV2a, LEV2b rated opening. 4. Solenoid valve OFF 5. 72C OFF 1. Heat source unit (compressor) intermittent operation 2. Indoor unit fan intermittent operations (Synchronized with the compressor: low speed, OFF operations) 1 or 2 *Note 1.When the indoor unit inlet temperature exceeds 18°C [64°F], the heat source unit (compressor) and the indoor unit fan start the intermittent operation simultaneously. When the indoor unit inlet temperature becomes 18°C [64°F],or less, the fan always runs (at low speed). The heat source unit, the indoor unit, and the solenoid valve operate in the same way as they do in the cooling operation when the compressor is turned on. *Note 2.Thermostat is always kept on during test run mode, and indoor and heat source unit intermittent operation (ON) time is a little longer than that of normal operation. HWE09080 - 165 - GB [ VII Control ] 1. Mode determination flowchart (1) Indoor unit (cooling, heating, dry, fan mode) Start Normal operation Breaker turned on Error Stop NO YES 1 Operation SW turned on NO YES *Note 1 1. Protection function self-holding cancelled. 2. Indoor unit LEV fully closed. Remote controller display lit off *Note 2 NO Error mode YES YES Auxiliary heater ON NO 1. Auxiliary heater OFF FAN stop 2. Low fan speed for 1 minute YES Drain pump ON NO 3-minute drain pump ON Operation mode Error stop Error display Cooling mode Heating mode Dry mode Automatic cooling/heating mode Fan mode Self-holding of protection function Cooling display Heating display Dry display Auto COOL/HEAT display Fan display Error command to heat source unit Indoor unit LEV fully closed. *Note 1 *Note 3 YES *Note 3 YES *Note 3 YES *Note 3 YES Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition NO NO NO NO Refer to 2-(1) for cooling operation. Refer to 2-(2) for heating operation. Refer to 2-(3) for dry operation. Auto cooling/heating mode Fan operations Prohibition "Blinking display on the remote controller" 1 1 *Note 1. Indoor unit LEV fully closed : Opening 41. *Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit side or the BC controller or heat source unit side. If some of the indoor units are experiencing a problem, only those indoor units that are experiencing the problem will stop. If the BC controller or the heat source unit is experiencing a problem, all the connected units will stop. *Note 3. If multiple indoor units are connected to a port and there is a discrepancy in the operation mode between the indoor unit and the port, the operation will be prohibited. (Operation mode blinks on the remote controller, the Fan stops, indoor unit LEV becomes fully closed.) HWE09080 - 166 - GB [ VII Control ] (2) Heat source unit (cooling only, heating only, cooling main and heating main modes) Start Normal operation Breaker turned on Error NO Unit in the stopped state YES "HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on the remote controller *Note 1 NO Indoor units registered to the remote controller YES 2 NO Operation command Protection function self-holding cancelled. YES fan Operation mode Cooling only, Heating only Mixture of units in cooling and heating *Note 2 1. 52C1 4-way valve OFF 2. Inverter output 0Hz 3. All solenoid valves OFF YES Error mode NO 72C ON Error stop *Note 3 Mixture of units in cooling and heating Operation mode Operation mode Cooling Only Heating Only Cooling Main Error display on the heat source unit LED *Note 4 Self-holding of protection function Heating Main Operation command to the BC controller Operation command to the BC controller 2 *Note 1. For about 3 minutes after power on, search for the indoor unit address, for the remote controller address, and for the group information will start. During this, "HO"/ "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on the display of the remote controller. When the indoor unit to be controlled by the remote controller is missing, "HO"/ "PLEASE WAIT" keeps blinking on the display of the remote controller even after 3 or more minutes after power on. *Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the heat source unit side. The heat source unit stops only when all of the connected indoor units are experiencing problems. The operation of even a single indoor unit will keep the heat source unit running. The error will be indicated on the LED display. *Note 3. The units will follow the operation mode commands from the BC controller *Note 4. When the operation mode commands from the BC controllers are mixed (both cooling and heating), the actual operation mode is determined by the heat source unit. HWE09080 - 167 - GB [ VII Control ] (3) BC controller (cooling only, heating only, cooling main and heating main modes) Start Breaker turned on Normal operation Error NO Unit in the stopped state YES NO Operation command YES Protection function self-holding cancelled. 1. Determination of operation mode (Cooling only, Heating only, Mixture of units in cooling and heating) 2. Transmitted to the heat source unit Reception of operation mode command from the heat source unit *Note 1 YES Error mode NO Fan Operation mode All units in the same mode Solenoid valves OFF LEV Fully closed Cooling Only Mixture of units in cooling and heating Operation mode Error stop Operation mode Heating Only Error command to heat source unit Self-holding of protection function Cooling Main Heating Main Error command to indoor unit 3 Note 1. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit side or the BC controller or heat source unit side. If some of the indoor units are experiencing a problem, only those indoor units that are experiencing the problem will stop. If the BC controller or the heat source unit is experiencing a problem, all the connected units will stop. HWE09080 - 168 - GB [ VII Control ] 2. Operations in each mode (1) Cooling operation Cooling operation Normal operation During test run mode 4-way valve OFF Indoor unit fan operation Test run mode ON Unit in the stopped state *Note 1 YES NO NO Thermostat ON YES YES 3-minute restart prevention NO 1. Inverter output 0Hz 2. Indoor unit LEV, Oil return LEV fully closed 3. Solenoid valves OFF 4. BC controller solenoid valves OFF 5. BC controller LEV fully closed 1. Inverter frequency control 2. Indoor unit LEV, Oil returnLEV control 3. Solenoid valve control 4. BC controller solenoid valve control 5. BC controller control *Note 1. The indoor fan operates at the set notch under cooling mode regardless of the ON/OFF state of the thermostat. HWE09080 - 169 - GB [ VII Control ] (2) Heating operation Normal operation Heating operation Unit in the stopped state During test run mode 4-way valve ON Test run mode ON YES NO NO YES Thermostat ON YES 3-minute restart prevention NO 1. Indoor unit fan operation at Very Low speed 2. Inverter output 0Hz 3. Indoor unit LEV fully open 4. Solenoid valve OFF 5. BC controller solenoid valve control 6. BC controller LEV control HWE09080 1. Indoor-heat source unit fan control 2. Inverter frequency control 3. Indoor unit LEV fully open 4. Solenoid valve control 5. BC controller solenoid valve control 6. BC controller LEV control - 170 - GB [ VII Control ] (3) Dry operation Dry operation Normal operation Thermostat ON 4-way valve OFF Test run mode ON Unit in the stopped state YES *Note 2 NO Thermostat ON NO Suction temperature 18 C[64 F] YES *Note 1 1. Indoor unit fan stop 2. Inverter output 0Hz 3. Indoor unit LEV fully closed. 4. Solenoid valve OFF 5. BC controller Solenoid valve OFF 6. BC controller LEV fully closed 1. Heat source unit (compressor) intermittent operation 2. Indoor unit fan intermittent operations (Synchronized with the compressor: low speed, OFF operations) 1 2 *Note 1.When the indoor unit inlet temperature exceeds 18 C [64 F], the heat source unit (compressor) and the indoor unit fan start the intermittent operation simultaneously. When the indoor unit inlet temperature becomes 18 C [64 F],or less, the fan always runs (at low speed). The heat source unit, the indoor unit, and the solenoid valve operate in the same way as they do in the cooling operation when the compressor is turned on. *Note 2.Thermostat is always kept on during test run mode, and indoor and heat source unit intermittent operation (ON) time is a little longer than that of normal operation. HWE09080 - 171 - GB [ VII Control ] HWE09080 - 172 - GB VIII Test Run Mode [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] HWE09080 Items to be checked before a Test Run ......................................................................... 175 Test Run Method ........................................................................................................... 176 Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount ......................................................... 177 Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount .................................................................................. 177 Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode................................................................................... 182 The following symptoms are normal. ............................................................................. 186 Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) .................................................................. 187 - 173 - GB - 174 - [ VIII Test Run Mode ] VIII Test Run Mode [1] Items to be checked before a Test Run (1) Check for refrigerant leak and loose cables and connectors. (2) Measure the insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the ground with a 500V megger and make sure it reads at least 1.0Mohm. Do not operate the unit if the insulation resistance is below 1.0Mohm. Do not apply megger voltage to the terminal block for transmission line. Doing so will damage the controller board. The insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the ground could go down to close to 1Mohm immediately after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor. If insulation resistance reads at least 1Mohm, by turning on the main power and powering the crankcase heater for at least 12 hours, the refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate and the insulation resistance will go up. Do not measure the insulation resistance of the terminal block for transmission line for the unit remote controller. (3) Check that the valve on the gas pipe and liquid pipe are fully open. Securely tighten the cap. (4) Check the phase sequence and the voltage of the power supply. (5) [When a transmission booster is connected] Turn on the transmission booster before turning on the heat source units. If the heat source units are turned on first, the connection information for the refrigerant circuit may not be properly recognized. In case the heat source units are turned on before the transmission booster is turned on, perform a power reset on the heat source units after turning on the power booster. (6) Turn on the main power to the unit at least 12 hours before test run to power the crankcase heater. Insufficient powering time may result in compressor damage. (7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, perform a test run with the power supply unit being energized. Leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting). HWE09080 - 175 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] [2] Test Run Method The figure shows an MA remote controller (PAR-21MAA). ON/OFF button Set Temperature buttons Down Fan Speed button Up TIME SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT TIMER Hr ON AFTER AFTER OFF ERROR CODE FUNCTION FILTER FC FC WEEKLY SIMPLE AUTO OFF ONLY1Hr. Operation Mode button TEMP. MENU BACK Louver button Operation button) ( MONITOR/SET PAR-21MAA ON/OFF ON/OFF FILTER DAY CHECK TEST OPERATION CLOCK Test Run button CLEAR Vertical Air Direction button To preceding operation number. Ventilation button ( Operation button) To next operation number. Operation procedures Turn on the main power. "PLEASE WAIT" appears on the LCD for up to five minutes. Leave the power on for 12 hours. (Energize the crankcase heater.) Press the Test button twice. Operation mode display "TEST RUN" and OPERATION MODE are displayed alternately. Press the Operation Mode button. Make sure that the air is blowing out. Switch to cooling (or heating) operation by pressing the Operation Mode button. Make sure that cold (or warm) air blows out. Press the Fan Speed button. Make sure that the fan speed changes with each pressing of the button. Change the air flow direction by pressing the Vertical Air Direction button or the Louver button. Make sure that the air flow direction changes with each pressing of the button. Confirm the operation of all interlocked equipment, such as ventilation equipment. Cancel the test run by pressing the ON/OFF button. Stop Note 1: Refer to the following pages if an error code appears on the remote controller or when the unit malfunctions. 2: The OFF timer will automatically stop the test run after 2 hours. 3: The remaining time for the test run will be displayed in the time display during test run. 4: The temperature of the liquid pipe on the indoor unit will be displayed in the room temperature display window on the remote controller during test run. 5: On some models, "NOT AVAILABLE" may appear on the display when the Vane Control button is pressed. This is normal. 6: If an external input is connected, perform a test run using the external input signal. 7: Perform simultaneous all-system operation for 15 minutes or longer because system error detection may take 15 minutes maximum. HWE09080 - 176 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] [3] Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount It is important to have a clear understanding of the characteristics of refrigerant and the operating characteristics of air conditioners before attempting to adjust the refrigerant amount in a given system. 1. Operating characteristic and refrigerant amount The following table shows items of particular importance. 1) During cooling operation, the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the smallest when all indoor units are in operation. 2) During heating operation, the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the largest when all indoor units are in operation. 3) General tendency of discharge temperature Discharge temperature tends to rise when the system is short on refrigerant. Changing the amount of refrigerant in the system while there is refrigerant in the accumulator has little effect on the discharge temperature. The higher the pressure, the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise. The lower the pressure, the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise. 4) When the amount of refrigerant in the system is adequate, the compressor shell temperature is 10 to 60°C [18 to 108°F] higher than the low pressure saturation temperature (Te). -> If the temperature difference between the compressor shell temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is smaller than 5°C [9°F], an overcharging of refrigerant is suspected. [4] Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount 1. Symptoms Overcharging or undercharging of refrigerant can cause the following symptoms: Before attempting to adjust the amount of refrigerant in the system, thoroughly check the operating conditions of the system. Then, adjust the refrigerant amount by running the unit in the refrigerant amount adjust mode. The system comes to an abnormal stop, displaying 1500 (overcharged refrigerant) on the controller. Overcharged refrigerant The operating frequency does not reach the set frequency, and there is a problem with performance. Insufficient refrigerant amount The system comes to an abnormal stop, displaying 1102 (abnormal discharge temperature) on the controller. 2. Amount of refrigerant (1) To be checked during operation Operate all indoor units in either cooling-only or heating-only mode, and check such items as discharge temperature, subcooling, low pressure, suction temperature, and shell bottom temperature to estimate the amount of refrigerant in the system. Symptoms Conclusion Discharge temperature is high. (Normal discharge temperature is below 95°C [203°F].) Low pressure is unusually low. Slightly undercharged refrigerant Suction superheat is large. (Normal suction superheat is less than 20°C [36°F].) Compressor shell bottom temperature is high. (The difference between the compressor shell bottom temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is greater than 60°C [108°F].) Discharge superheat is small. (Normal discharge superheat is greater than 10°C [18°F].) Compressor shell bottom temperature is low. (The difference between the compressor shell bottom temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is less than 5°C [9°F].) HWE09080 - 177 - Slightly overcharged refrigerant GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 3. Amount of refrigerant to be added The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is factory-charged to the heat source units. The amount necessary for extended pipe (field piping) is not included and must be added on site. Heat source unit model P72 P96 P120 Amount of pre-charged refrigerant in the heat source unit (kg) 5.0 5.0 5.0 Amount of pre-charged refrigerant in the heat source unit [lbs] 11.0 11.0 11.0 (1) Calculation formula The amount of refrigerant to be added depends on the size and the length of field piping. (unit in m[ft]) Amount of added refrigerant (kg) = (0.29x L1) + (0.2 x L2) + (0.12 x L3) + (0.06 x L4) + (0.024 x L5) +ǩ Amount of added refrigerant (oz) = (3.12x L1' ) +(2.15 x L2' ) + (1.29 x L3' ) + (0.65 x L4' ) + (0.26 x L5' ) + ǩ L1 : Length of ø19.05 [3/4"] liquid pipe (m) L2 : Length of ø15.88 [5/8"] liquid pipe (m) L3 : Length of ø12.7 [1/2"] liquid pipe (m) L4 : Length of ø9.52 [3/8"] liquid pipe (m) L5 : Length of ø6.35 [1/4"] liquid pipe (m) ǩ, ǩ' : Refer to the table below. L1' L2' L 3' L 4' L 5' Total capacity of connected indoor units ǩ(kg) ǩ'(oz) - 27 2.0 71 28 - 54 2.5 89 55 - 126 3.0 106 127 - 144 3.5 124 145 - 180 4.5 159 181 - 234 5.0 177 235 - 273 6.0 212 274 - 307 8.0 283 308 - 342 9.0 318 343 - 411 10.0 353 412 - 480 12.0 424 481 - 14.0 494 : Length of ø19.05 [3/4"] liquid pipe [ft] : Length of ø15.88 [5/8"] liquid pipe [ft] : Length of ø12.7 [1/2"] liquid pipe [ft] : Length of ø9.52 [3/8"] liquid pipe [ft] : Length of ø6.35 [1/4"] liquid pipe [ft] Round up the calculation result to the nearest 0.1kg. (Example: 18.04kg to 18.1kg) Round up the calculation result in increments of 4oz (0.1kg) or round it up to the nearest 1oz. (Example: 178.21Q\ to 179oz) HWE09080 - 178 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] (2) Example: PQHY-P144TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A 9.52 (3 m) 9.52 (1 m) 9.52 (10 m) 15.88 (10 m) × Liquid separator 9.52 (10 m) 9.52 (20 m) 9.52 (10 m) 9.52 (10 m) 6.35 (10 m) 15.88 (30 m) 96 model [3/8"] [9 ft] 48 model [3/8"] [3 ft] 30 model 24 model 06 model [3/8"][32 ft] [3/4"] [32 ft] × Liquid separator [3/8"] [65 ft] [3/8"] [32 ft] [3/8"] [32 ft] [3/8"] [32 ft] [1/4"] [32 ft] [3/4"][98 ft] 96 model 48 model 30 model 24 model 06 model (3) Sample calculation All the pipes in the figure are liquid pipes. 15.88 : 30 m + 10 m = 40 m 9.52 : 3 m + 1m + 10 m + 10 m + 20 m + 10 m + 10 m = 64 m 6.35 : 10 m According to the above formula Amount of refrigerant to be charged (kg) = (0.2 X 40) + (0.06 X 64) + (0.024 X 10) + 5.0 = 17.08kg The calculation result would be 17.08, and it is rounded up to the nearest 0.1. The final result will be as follows: Amount of refrigerant to be charged = 17.1kg All the pipes in the figure are liquid pipes. [3/4"] : [98 ft] + [32 ft] = [130 ft] [3/8"] : [9 ft] + [3 ft] + [32 ft] + [32 ft] + [65 ft] + [32 ft] + [32 ft] = [205 ft] [1/4"] : [32 ft] According to the above formula Amount of refrigerant to be charged (oz) = (2.15 X 130) + (0.65 X 205) + (0.26 X 32) + 177 = 598.07oz The calculation result would be 598.07 oz, and it is rounded up to the nearest 1 oz. The final result will be as follows: Amount of refrigerant to be charged = 599 oz CAUTION Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system. If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may result in performance loss. HWE09080 - 179 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 4. Amount of refrigerant to be added The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is factory-charged to theheat source units. The amount necessary for extended pipe (field piping) is not included and must be added on site. Heat source unit model P72 P96 P120 Amount of pre-charged refrigerant in the heat source unit (kg) 5.0 5.0 5.0 Amount of pre-charged refrigerant in the heat source unit [lbs] 11.0 11.0 11.0 (1) Calculation formula The amount of refrigerant to be added depends on the size and the length of field piping. (unit in m[ft]) Amount of added refrigerant (kg) = (0.36 x L1) + (0.23 x L2) + (0.16 x L3) + (0.11 x L4)+ (0.2 x L5) + (0.12 x L6) + (0.06 x L7) + (0.024 x L8) + ǩ1 + ǩ2 + ǩ3 + ǩ4 Amount of added refrigerant (oz) = (3.88 x L1' ) + (2.48 x L2' ) + (1.73 x L3' ) + (1.19 x L4' )+ (2.16 x L5' ) + (1.30 x L6' ) + (0.65 x L7' ) + (0.26 x L8' ) + ǩ1' + ǩ2' + ǩ3' + ǩ4' L1' L2' L3' L4' L5' L6' L7' L8' L1 : Length of ø28.58[1-1/8"] high pressure pipe (m) L2 : Length of ø22.2[7/8"] high pressure pipe (m) L3 : Length of ø19.05[3/4"] high pressure pipe (m) L4 : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] high pressure pipe (m) L5 : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] liquid pipe (m) L6 : Length of ø12.7[1/2"] liquid pipe (m) L7 : Length of ø9.52[3/8"] liquid pipe (m) L8 : Length of ø6.35[1/4"] liquid pipe (m) ǩ1,ǩ2,ǩ3,ǩ4, ǩ1' , ǩ2' , ǩ3' , ǩ4' : Refer to the table below. Heat source unit total index Amount for the BC controllers (main/sub) ǩ1(kg) ǩ1' (oz) P72 : Length of ø28.58[1-1/8"] high pressure pipe [ft] : Length of ø22.2[7/8"] high pressure pipe [ft] : Length of ø19.05[3/4"] high pressure pipe [ft] : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] high pressure pipe [ft] : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] liquid pipe [ft] : Length of ø12.7[1/2"] liquid pipe [ft] : Length of ø9.52[3/8"] liquid pipe [ft] : Length of ø6.35[1/4"] liquid pipe [ft] BC controller (sub) 1 1.0 35 2 2.0 71 P96 Total capacity of connected indoor units 28 Amount for the Indoor unit ǩ4(kg) ǩ4' (oz) - 27 2.0 71 - 54 2.5 89 P120 55 - 126 3.0 106 P144 127 - 144 3.5 124 P168 145 - 180 4.5 159 P192 181 - 234 5.0 177 P216 235 - 273 6.0 212 P240 274 - 307 8.0 283 308 - 342 9.0 318 343 - 411 10.0 353 412 - 480 12.0 424 481 - 14.0 494 3.0 106 Round up the calculation result to the nearest 0.1kg. (Example: 18.04kg to 18.1kg) Round up the calculation result in increments of 4oz (0.1kg) or round it up to the nearest 1oz. (Example: 78.21oz to 79oz) HWE09080 - 180 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] (2) Example Heat source unit 1 Heat source unit 2 h4 Branch joint kit 5 F G A BC controller h1 BC controller(HB) D h3 Branch joint (CMY-Y102S-G2) Reducer (P06 - P18) (Supplied with the BC Controller) h2 BC controller(HB) E B Junction pipe kit a (CMY-R160-J) b c (Optional accessory) 1 e C H H′ h1 Indoor Branch joint (CMY-Y202-G2) (CMY-Y102L-G2) (CMY-Y102S-G2) 2 3 Indoor Indoor (P06 - P54) (P72 or P96) d f h1 4 Indoor Indoor Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below 6 Indoor (3) Sample calculation When Indoor unit1:30 model Indoor unit2:96 model Indoor unit3:12 model Indoor unit4:15 model Indoor unit5:12 model Indoor unit6:24 model A: B: C: D: E: F: G: 28.58 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52 22.2 19.05 [1-1/8"] [3/8"] [3/8"] [3/8"] [3/8"] [7/8"] [3/4"] 40m [131ft] 10m [32ft] 20m [65ft] 5m [16ft] 5m [16ft] 3m [9ft] 1m [3ft] a: b: c: d: e: f : 9.52 9.52 6.35 6.35 6.35 9.52 [3/8"] [3/8"] [1/4"] [1/4"] [1/4"] [3/8"] 10m[32ft] 5m[16ft] 5m[16ft] 10m[32ft] 5m[16ft] 5m[16ft] The aggregate length of each liquid pipe type. 28.58 A = 40m[131ft] 22.2 F = 30m[98ft] 19.05 G = 1m[3ft] 9.52 C+D+E+a+b+f = 50m[164ft] 6.35 c+d+e = 20m[65ft] The final result will be as follows: Amount of refrigerant to be charged = 40×0.36+3×0.23+1×0.16+50×0.06+20×0.024+7.5+2+2+5 = 35.3kg HWE09080 - 181 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] [5] Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode 1. Procedures Follow the procedures below to add or extract refrigerant as necessary depending on the operation mode. When the function switch (SW4-3) on the main board on the heat source unit (OC only) is turned to ON, the unit goes into the refrigerant amount adjust mode, and the following sequence is followed. SW4-3 on the OS is invalid, and the unit will not go into the refrigerant amount adjust mode. Operation When the unit is in the refrigerant amount adjust mode, the LEV on the indoor unit does not open as fully as it normally does during cooling operation to secure subcooling. 1) Adjust the refrigerant amount based on the values of TH4, TH3, TH6, and Tc, following the flowchart below. Check the TH4, TH3, TH6, and Tc values on the OC, OS1, and OS2 by following the flowchart. The TH4, TH3, TH6, and Tc values can be displayed by setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the main board on the OC, OS1, and OS2. 2) There may be cases when the refrigerant amount may seem adequate for a short while after starting the unit in the refrigerant amount adjust mode but turn out to be inadequate later on (when the refrigerant system stabilizes). When the amount of refrigerant is truly adequate. TH3-TH6 on the heat source unit is 5°C [9°F] or above and SH on the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F]. The refrigerant amount may seem adequate at the moment, but may turn out to be inadequate later on. TH3-TH6 on the heat source unit is 5°C [9°F] or less and SH on the indoor unit is 5°C [9°F] or less. Wait until the TH3-TH6 reaches 5°C [9°F] or above and the SH of the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F] to determine that the refrigerant amount is adequate. 3) High pressure must be at least 2.0MPa[290psi] to enable a proper adjustment of refrigerant amount to be made. 4) Refrigerant amount adjust mode automatically ends 90 minutes after beginning. When this happens, by turning off the SW43 and turning them back on, the unit will go back into the refrigerant amount adjust mode. Self-diagnosis swithes on TH4 1 2 3 4 5 6 Self-diagnosis swithes on TH3 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 ON Self-diagnosis swithes on TH6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Self-diagnosis swithes on Tc 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 ON HWE09080 6 ON 6 7 8 9 10 ON - 182 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] Start Turn on SW4-3 on the OC. YES NO Put all indoor units in the test run mode and run the units in cooling mode. Has the initial start-up mode been completed? *Refer to the previous page for *Notes 1-4 in the chart. NO YES Has it been at least 30 minutes since start up? NO Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS1, OS2 at or below 100°C [212°F]? Note 1 NO YES Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the lowpressure side. YES Has the operating frequency of the compressor on the OC, OS1, and OS2 become stable? Note 3 NO YES Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy. Note 2 Does 8°C [14.4°F] Tc-TH3 12°C [21.6°F] hold true? (Use the largest “Tc - TH3” value of the OC, OS1, and OS2.) NO Note 1 YES Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low pressure side. NO Does Tc-TH6 20°C [36°F] hold true? (Check this item on the unit whose “Tc – TH3” value was used in the step above.) Note 1 YES Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount and check(Tc-TH3) Note 2 Does the following hold true? Tc-TH3 8°C [14.4°F] NO YES Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy. Note 2 Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low pressure side. NO Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS1, OS2 at or below 95°C [203°F] Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low pressure side. Gradually draw out refrigerant from the service port on the low pressure side. YES Adjustment complete Turn off SW4-3 on the OC. Note 4 CAUTION Do not release the extracted refrigerant into the air. CAUTION Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system. If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may result in performance loss. HWE09080 - 183 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2. Procedures Follow the procedures below to add or extract refrigerant as necessary depending on the operation mode. When the function switch (SW4-3) on the main board on the heat source unit (OC only) is turned to ON, the unit goes into the refrigerant amount adjust mode, and the following sequence is followed. SW4-3 on the OS is invalid, and the unit will not go into the refrigerant amount adjust mode. Operation When the unit is in the refrigerant amount adjust mode, the LEV on the indoor unit does not open as fully as it normally does during cooling operation to secure subcooling. 1) Adjust the refrigerant amount based on the TH4 value, following the flowchart below. Check the TH4, SC11, SC16, and Tc values on the OC, OS by following the flowchart. The TH4, SC11, and SC16 values can be displayed by setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the main board on the OC, OS. 2) There may be cases when the refrigerant amount may seem adequate for a short while after starting the unit in the refrigerant amount adjust mode but turn out to be inadequate later on (when the refrigerant system stabilizes). When the amount of refrigerant is truly adequate. Subcool (SC11 and SC16) of the BC controller is 5°C [9°F] or above and SH on the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F]. The refrigerant amount may seem adequate at the moment, but may turn out to be inadequate later on. Subcool (SC11 and SC16) of the BC controller is 5°C [9°F] or less and SH on the indoor unit is 5°C [9°F] or less. Wait until the Subcool (SC11 and SC16) of the BC controller reaches 5°C [9°F] or above and the SH of the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F] to determine that the refrigerant amount is adequate. SC11: Subcool of liquid refrigerant at BC controller inlet; SC16: Subcool of liquid refrigerant at BC controller outlet 3) High pressure must be at least 2.0MPa [290psi] to enable a proper adjustment of refrigerant amount to be made. 4) Refrigerant amount adjust mode automatically ends 90 minutes after beginning. When this happens, by turning off the SW43 and turning them back on, the unit will go back into the refrigerant amount adjust mode. Self-diagnosis swithes on TH4 1 2 3 4 5 6 Self-diagnosis swithes on SC11 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10 ON ON Self-diagnosis swithes on SC16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Use these switches to check the TH4, SC11, and SC16. HWE09080 - 184 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] Start Turn on SW4-3 on the OC. YES NO Put all indoor units in the test run mode and run the units in cooling mode. *Refer to the previous page for *Notes 1-4 in the chart. NO Has the initial start-up mode been completed? YES NO Has it been at least 30 minutes since start up? YES Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS at or below 100°C [212°F]? Note 1 NO Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the lowpressure side. YES Has the operating frequency of the compressor on the OC, OS become stable? Note 3 NO YES NO Does SH ≥ 5K [41ºF] hold true for all indoor units? YES Has the indoor unit LEV opening stabilized? Note 2 YES Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount and check(Tc-TH3) Note 2 Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy. Note 2 5K[41°F] ≤ SC11? Note 2 NO Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low pressure side. YES Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low pressure side. NO Does 10 ≤ SC16 ≤ 30K [86ºF] hold true? Note1 YES NO Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount and check(Tc-TH3) Note 2 Does 10K [50ºF] > SC16 hole true? Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy. Note 2 Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low pressure side. NO Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS at or below 95°C [203°F]? YES NO YES Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low pressure side. Gradually draw out refrigerant from the service port on the low pressure side. Adjustment complete Turn off SW4-3 on the OC. Note 4 CAUTION Do not release the extracted refrigerant into the air. CAUTION Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system. If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may result in performance loss. HWE09080 - 185 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] [6] The following symptoms are normal. Symptoms Remote controller display The indoor unit does not start after starting cooling (heating) operation. "Cooling (heating)" icon blinks on the display. The fan speed does not reach the set speed when operation switch is turned on. When the main power is turned on, the display shown on the right appears on the indoor unit remote controller for 5 minutes. The drain pump keeps running after the unit has stopped. Normal display Unlit When the auxiliary heater is turned on, the fan operates for one minute after stopping to dissipate heat. STAND BY The fan operates at extra low speed for 5 minutes after it is turned on or until the pipe temperature reaches 35°C[95°F], then it operates at low speed for 2 minutes, and finally it operates at the set speed. (Pre-heating stand-by) "HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" icons blink on the display. Unlit The drain pump is running while the unit is stopped. Normal display Sound of the refrigerant flow is heard from the indoor unit immediately after starting operation. Normal display HWE09080 The system is starting up. Wait until the blinking display of "HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" go off. The drain pump stays in operation for three minutes after the unit in the cooling mode is stopped. When drain water is detected, the drain pump goes into operation even while the unit is stopped. Indoor unit and BC controller make noise during cooling/ heating changeover. Warm air sometimes comes out of the indoor units that are not in the heating mode. The unit cannot perform a heating (cooling) operation when other indoor units are performing a cooling (heating) operation. After an hour of cooling operation with the auto vane in the vertical position, the vane may automatically move into the horizontal position. Louver blades will automatically move into the horizontal position while the unit is in the defrost mode, pre-heating stand-by mode, or when the thermostat triggers unit off. The auto vane adjusts its position by itself. The fan keeps running after the unit has stopped. Cause This noise is made when the refrigerant circuit is reversed and is normal. Normal display This is caused by the transient instability of the refrigerant flow and is normal. This is due to the fact that the LEVs on some of the indoor units are kept slightly open to prevent the refrigerant in the indoor units that are not operating in the heating mode from liquefying and accumulating in the compressor. It is part of a normal operation. - 186 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] [7] Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) 1. Single unit (1) Cooling operation Heat source unit model Item DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F] 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85] 29.4[85] m3/h 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 2 2 2 2 36/36 48/48 5 [16-3/8 ] 5 [16-3/8 ] 10 [32-3/4 ] 10 [32-3/4 ] 25 [82] 25 [82] - Hi Hi kg [lbs-oz] 11.8 [27] 13.0 [29] Current A 17.7 23.3 Voltage V 230 230 Compressor frequency Hz 66 90 325/325 387/387 80 100 1400 1400 2.20/0.81 [319/117] 2.27/0.81 [329/117] [G/h] [gpm] No. of connected units Indoor unit Unit No. of units in operation Model - Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe m [ft] Total pipe length Fan speed Refrigerant charge Heat source unit Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) Pulse LEV2 Pressure switch Sectional temperatures High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 PQHY-P96YHMU-A Indoor temperature Heat source water flow rate Operating conditions PQHY-P72YHMU-A MPa [psi] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 33 [91] 34 [93] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 47 [117] 40 [104] LEV inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] 6 [43] 6 [43] Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet °C [°F] Heat exchanger outlet - 187 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] Heat source unit model Item PQHY-P120YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85] m3/h [G/h] [gpm] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Heat source water flow rate No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 3 Unit No. of units in operation Model 3 - Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8 ] m [ft] Total pipe length Fan speed 35 [115] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 13.6 [30] Current A 23.8 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz 114 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) 325/325/387 Pulse LEV2 Pressure switch Sectional temperatures Heat source unit 100 1400 High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Indoor unit HWE09080 10 [32-3/4 ] - Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 36/36/48 MPa [psi] 2.30/0.81 [334/117] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] Accumulator inlet 8 [46] Accumulator outlet 8 [46] °C [°F] Compressor inlet 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 42 [108] LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] - 188 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] (2) Heating operation Heat source unit model Item DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-] 21.1°C/- [70°F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70] 21.1[70] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 2 2 2 2 36/36 48/48 5 [16-3/8 ] 5 [16-3/8 ] 10 [32-3/4 ] 10 [32-3/4 ] 25 [82] 25 [82] - Hi Hi kg [lbs-oz] 11.8 [27] 13.0 [29] Current A 18.6 25.2 Voltage V 230 230 Compressor frequency Hz 60 72 332/332 406/406 0 0 1400 1400 2.64/0.80 [383/116] 2.90/0.80 [421/116] Heat source water flow rate /h [G/h] [gpm] No. of connected units Indoor unit Unit No. of units in operation Model - Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe m [ft] Total pipe length Fan speed Refrigerant charge Heat source unit Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) Pulse LEV2 Pressure switch High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) MPa [psi] Discharge (TH4) Sectional temperatures Heat source unit 73 [163] 80 [176] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104] LEV inlet 37 [99] 38 [100] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] 70 [158] Accumulator outlet °C [°F] Compressor inlet Indoor unit HWE09080 PQHY-P96YHMU-A Indoor temperature m3 Operating conditions PQHY-P72YHMU-A - 189 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] Heat source unit model Item PQHY-P120YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70] 3 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Heat source water flow rate m /h [G/h] [gpm] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 3 Unit No. of units in operation Model 3 - Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8 ] m [ft] Total pipe length Fan speed 35 [115] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 13.6 [30] Current A 28.3 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz 90 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) 332/332/406 Pulse LEV2 Pressure switch High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Heat source unit MPa [psi] HWE09080 2.68/0.80 [389/116] 81 [178] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] Accumulator outlet 4 [39] °C [°F] Compressor inlet Indoor unit 0 1400 Discharge (TH4) Sectional temperatures 10 [32-3/4 ] - Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 36/36/48 4 [39] Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] LEV inlet 39 [102] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 190 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2. 2-unit combination (1) Cooling operation 2-unit combination Item PQHY-P144YSHMU-A PQHY-P72YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85] 3/h Heat source water flow rate m G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 4 Unit No. of units in operation Model 4 - 36/36/36/36 Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 45 [148] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 20.3 [45] Current A 42.3 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 66 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) Sectional temperatures High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 66 325/325/325/325 Pulse LEV2 Pressure switch PQHY-P72YHMU-A MPa [psi] 80 80 1400 1400 2.20/0.81 [319/117] 2.20/0.81 [319/117] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 33 [91] 33 [91] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 47 [117] 47 [117] Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet °C [°F] LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] - 191 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQHY-P168YSHMU-A PQHY-P96YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85] 3/h Heat source water flow rate m G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 4 Unit No. of units in operation Model 4 - 36/36/48/48 Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 45 [148] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 23.1 [51] Current A 42.3 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 78 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) Sectional temperatures High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 78 325/325/387/387 Pulse LEV2 Pressure switch PQHY-P72YHMU-A MPa [psi] 90 90 1400 1400 2.23/0.81 [323/117] 2.23/0.81 [323/117] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 33 [91] 33 [91] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 47 [117] Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet °C [°F] LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] - 192 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQHY-P192YSHMU-A PQHY-P96YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85] 3/h Heat source water flow rate m G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 4 Unit No. of units in operation Model 4 - 48/48/48/48 Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 45 [148] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 24.6 [54] Current A 51.8 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 90 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) Sectional temperatures High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 90 387/387/387/387 Pulse LEV2 Pressure switch PQHY-P96YHMU-A MPa [psi] 100 100 1400 1400 2.27/0.81 [329/117] 2.27/0.81 [329/117] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 34 [93] 34 [93] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104] Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet °C [°F] LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] - 193 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQHY-P216YSHMU-A PQHY-P120YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85] 3/h Heat source water flow rate m G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 5 Unit No. of units in operation Model 5 - 36/36/48/48/48 Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 65 [213] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 26.2 [58] Current A 52.2 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 98 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) Sectional temperatures High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 98 325/325/387/387/387 Pulse LEV2 Pressure switch PQHY-P96YHMU-A MPa [psi] 159 159 1400 1400 2.28/0.81 [331/117] 2.28/0.81 [331/117] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] 35 [95] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 42 [108] 40 [104] Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet °C [°F] LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] - 194 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQHY-P240YSHMU-A PQHY-P120YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85] 3/h Heat source water flow rate m G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 6 Unit No. of units in operation Model 6 - 36/36/36/36/48/48 Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 65 [213] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 26.2 [58] Current A 32.7 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 105 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) Sectional temperatures High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 105 325/325/325/325/387/387 Pulse LEV2 Pressure switch PQHY-P120YHMU-A MPa [psi] 159 159 1400 1400 2.30/0.81 [334/117] 2.30/0.81 [334/117] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] 35 [95] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 42 [108] 40 [104] Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet °C [°F] LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] - 195 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] (2) Heating operation 2-unit combination Item PQHY-P144YSHMU-A PQHY-P72YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/-[70°F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70] 3/h Heat source water flow rate m G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 4 Unit No. of units in operation Model 4 - 36/36/36/36 Main pipe pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 45 [148] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 20.3 [45] Current A 25.5 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 60 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse MPa [psi] Discharge (TH4) Sectional temperatures Heat source unit 0 1400 1400 2.64/0.80 [383/116] 2.64/0.80 [383/116] 77 [171] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 [104] 40 [104] Accumulator outlet °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 0 77 [171] Compressor inlet Indoor unit 60 332/332/332/332 LEV2 Pressure switch PQHY-P72YHMU-A LEV inlet 37 [99] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 196 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQHY-P168YSHMU-A PQHY-P96YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/-[70°F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70] 3/h Heat source water flow rate m G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 4 Unit No. of units in operation Model 4 - 36/36/48/48 Main pipe pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 45 [148] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 23.1 [51] Current A 44.3 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 66 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse MPa [psi] Sectional temperatures 1400 1400 2.80/0.80 [406/116] 2.80/0.80 [406/116] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 [104] 40 [104] Accumulator outlet °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 0 77 [171] Compressor inlet Indoor unit 0 77 [171] Discharge (TH4) Heat source unit 66 332/332/406/406 LEV2 Pressure switch PQHY-P72YHMU-A LEV inlet 37 [99] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 197 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQHY-P192YSHMU-A PQHY-P96YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/-[70°F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70] 3/h Heat source water flow rate m G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 4 Unit No. of units in operation Model 4 - 48/48/48/48 Main pipe pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 45 [148] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 24.6 [55] Current A 51.1 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 72 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse MPa [psi] Sectional temperatures 1400 1400 2.90/0.80 [421/116] 2.90/0.80 [421/116] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 [104] 40 [104] Accumulator outlet °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 0 80 [176] Compressor inlet Indoor unit 0 80 [176] Discharge (TH4) Heat source unit 72 406/406/406/406 LEV2 Pressure switch PQHY-P96YHMU-A LEV inlet 37 [99] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 198 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQHY-P216YSHMU-A PQHY-P120YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/-[70°F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70] 3/h Heat source water flow rate m G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 5 Unit No. of units in operation Model 5 - 36/36/48/48/48 Main pipe pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 65 [213] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 26.2 [58] Current A 55.1 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 81 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse MPa [psi] Sectional temperatures 1400 1400 2.75/0.80 [399/116] 2.75/0.80 [399/116] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 [104] 40 [104] Accumulator outlet °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 0 81 [178] Compressor inlet Indoor unit 0 81 [178] Discharge (TH4) Heat source unit 81 332/332/406/406/406 LEV2 Pressure switch PQHY-P96YHMU-A LEV inlet 35 [95] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 199 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQHY-P240YSHMU-A PQHY-P120YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/-[70°F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70] 3/h Heat source water flow rate m G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 6 Unit No. of units in operation Model 6 - 36/36/36/36/48/48 Main pipe pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 65 [213] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 26.2 [58] Current A 33.5 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 90 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse MPa [psi] Sectional temperatures 1400 1400 2.68/0.80 [389/116] 2.68/0.80 [389/116] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 [104] 40 [104] Accumulator outlet °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 0 81 [178] Compressor inlet Indoor unit 0 81 [178] Discharge (TH4) Heat source unit 90 332/332/332/332/406/406 LEV2 Pressure switch PQHY-P120YHMU-A LEV inlet 35 [95] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 200 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 3. 3-unit combination (1) Cooling operation 3-unit combination PQHY-P264YSHMU-A Item PQHYP96YHMU-A PQHYP96YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F] Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 29.4 [85] Heat source water flow rate m3/h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit No. of units in operation Model Branch pipe 6 6 - 48/48/48/48/36/36 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [ 32-3/4 ] Total pipe length Fan speed Heat source unit 65 [213-1/4] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 23.5 [52] Current A 62.6 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 82 82 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse MPa [psi] 141 138 1400 1400 1400 2.25/0.81 2.25/0.81 2.25/0.81 [326/117] [326/117] [326/117] 65 [149] 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 34 [93] 34 [93] 34 [93] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 19 [67] 19 [67] 19 [67] 47 [117] 47 [117] 47 [117] 19 [65] 6 [42] °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 130 Discharge (TH4) Accumulator inlet Heat source Accumulator outlet unit Sectional Compressor inlet temperatures Indoor unit 82 387/387/387/387/325/325 LEV2 Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Main pipe Pipe length PQHYP72YHMU-A LEV inlet Heat exchanger outlet - 201 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 3-unit combination PQHY-P288YSHMU-A Item PQHYP96YHMU-A PQHYP96YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F] Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 29.4 [85] Heat source water flow rate m3/h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit No. of units in operation Model Branch pipe 6 6 - 48/48/48/48/48/48 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [ 32-3/4 ] Total pipe length Fan speed Heat source unit 65 [213-1/4] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 25.5 [57] Current A 69.9 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 90 90 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse MPa [psi] 141 185 1400 1400 1400 2.27/0.81 2.27/0.81 2.27/0.81 [329/117] [329/117] [329/117] 65 [149] 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 34 [93] 34 [93] 34 [93] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 19 [67] 19 [67] 19 [67] 40 [104] 40 [104] 40 [104] 19 [65] 6 [42] °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 141 Discharge (TH4) Accumulator inlet Heat source Accumulator outlet unit Sectional Compressor inlet temperatures Indoor unit 90 387/387/387/387/387/387 LEV2 Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Main pipe Pipe length PQHYP96YHMU-A LEV inlet Heat exchanger outlet - 202 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 3-unit combination PQHY-P312YSHMU-A Item PQHYP120YHMU-A PQHYP96YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F] Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 29.4 [85] Heat source water flow rate m3/h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit No. of units in operation Model Branch pipe 6 6 - 54/54/54/54/48/48 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [ 32-3/4 ] Total pipe length Fan speed Heat source unit 65 [213-1/4] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 25.5 [57] Current A 77.2 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 95 95 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse MPa [psi] 141 185 1400 1400 1400 2.28/0.81 2.28/0.81 2.28/0.81 [331/117] [331/117] [331/117] 65 [149] 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 34 [93] 34 [93] 34 [93] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 19 [67] 19 [67] 19 [67] 40 [104] 40 [104] 40 [104] 19 [65] 6 [42] °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 141 Discharge (TH4) Accumulator inlet Heat source Accumulator outlet unit Sectional Compressor inlet temperatures Indoor unit 95 395/395/395/387/387/387 LEV2 Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Main pipe Pipe length PQHYP96YHMU-A LEV inlet Heat exchanger outlet - 203 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 3-unit combination PQHY-P336YSHMU-A Item PQHYP120YHMU-A PQHYP120YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F] Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 29.4 [85] Heat source water flow rate m3/h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit No. of units in operation Model Branch pipe 7 7 - 48/48/48/48/48/48/48 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [ 32-3/4 ] Total pipe length Fan speed Heat source unit 65 [213-1/4] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 26.5 [59] Current A 84.2 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 100 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse MPa [psi] 141 141 185 1400 1400 1400 2.29/0.81 2.29/0.81 2.29/0.81 [332/117] [332/117] [332/117] 65 [149] 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] 35 [95] 35 [95] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 19 [67] 19 [67] 19 [67] 40 [104] 40 [104] 40 [104] 19 [65] 6 [42] °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 100 Discharge (TH4) Accumulator inlet Heat source Accumulator outlet unit Sectional Compressor inlet temperatures Indoor unit 100 387/387/387/387/387/387/387 LEV2 Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Main pipe Pipe length PQHYP96YHMU-A LEV inlet Heat exchanger outlet - 204 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 3-unit combination PQHY-P360YSHMU-A Item PQHYP120YHMU-A PQHYP120YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F] Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 29.4 [85] Heat source water flow rate m3/h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit No. of units in operation Model Branch pipe 7 7 - 54/54/54/54/48/48/48 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [ 32-3/4 ] Total pipe length Fan speed Heat source unit 75 [246-1/16] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 26.8 [60] Current A 89.0 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 105 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse MPa [psi] 100 100 100 1400 1400 1400 2.30/0.81 2.30/0.81 2.30/0.81 [334/117] [334/117] [334/117] 65 [149] 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] 35 [95] 35 [95] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 19 [67] 19 [67] 19 [67] 42 [105] 42 [105] 42 [105] 19 [65] 6 [42] °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 105 Discharge (TH4) Accumulator inlet Heat source Accumulator outlet unit Sectional Compressor inlet temperatures Indoor unit 105 395/395/395/395/387/387/387 LEV2 Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Main pipe Pipe length PQHYP120YHMU-A LEV inlet Heat exchanger outlet - 205 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] (2) Heating operation 3-unit combination PQHY-P264YSHMU-A Item PQHYP96YHMU-A PQHYP96YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 21.1 [70] Heat source water flow rate m3/h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit No. of units in operation Model Branch pipe 6 6 - 48/48/48/48/36/36 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed Heat source unit 65 [213-1/4] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 23.5 [52] Current A 66.1 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 70 70 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse 0 MPa [psi] Discharge (TH4) Heat exchanger outlet Accumulator inlet Heat source Accumulator outlet unit Sectional Compressor inlet temperatures °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom Indoor unit HWE09080 70 406/406/406/406/332/332 LEV2 Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Main pipe Pipe length PQHYP72YHMU-A 1400 1400 1400 2.81/0.80 2.81/0.80 2.81/0.80 [408/116] [408/116] [408/116] 77 [171] 77 [171] 77 [171] 5 [41] 5 [41] 5 [41] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 40 [104] LEV inlet 38 [100] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 206 - [104] 40 [104] GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 3-unit combination PQHY-P288YSHMU-A Item PQHYP96YHMU-A PQHYP96YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 21.1 [70] Heat source water flow rate m3/h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit No. of units in operation Model Branch pipe 6 6 - 48/48/48/48/48/48 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed Heat source unit 65 [213-1/4] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 25.5 [57] Current A 71.0 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 72 72 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse 0 MPa [psi] Discharge (TH4) Heat exchanger outlet Accumulator inlet Heat source Accumulator outlet unit Sectional Compressor inlet temperatures °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom Indoor unit HWE09080 72 406/406/406/406/406/406 LEV2 Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Main pipe Pipe length PQHYP96YHMU-A 1400 1400 1400 2.90/0.80 2.90/0.80 2.90/0.80 [421/116] [421/116] [421/116] 80 [176] 80 [176] 80 [176] 5 [41] 5 [41] 5 [41] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 40 [104] LEV inlet 39 [102] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 207 - [104] 40 [104] GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 3-unit combination PQHY-P312YSHMU-A Item PQHYP120YHMU-A PQHYP96YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 21.1 [70] Heat source water flow rate m3/h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit No. of units in operation Model Branch pipe 6 6 - 54/54/54/54/48/48 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed Heat source unit 65 [213-1/4] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 25.5 [57] Current A 71.7 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 78 78 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse 0 MPa [psi] Discharge (TH4) Heat exchanger outlet Accumulator inlet Heat source Accumulator outlet unit Sectional Compressor inlet temperatures °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom Indoor unit HWE09080 78 414/414/414/414/406/406 LEV2 Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Main pipe Pipe length PQHYP96YHMU-A 1400 1400 1400 2.82/0.80 2.82/0.80 2.82/0.80 [409/116] [409/116] [409/116] 80 [176] 80 [176] 80 [176] 5 [41] 5 [41] 5 [41] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 40 [104] LEV inlet 38 [100] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 208 - [104] 40 [104] GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 3-unit combination PQHY-P336YSHMU-A Item PQHYP120YHMU-A PQHYP120YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 21.1 [70] Heat source water flow rate m3/h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit No. of units in operation Model Branch pipe 7 7 - 48/48/48/48/48/48/48 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed Heat source unit 65 [213-1/4] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 26.5 [59] Current A 79.1 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 83 83 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse 0 MPa [psi] Discharge (TH4) Heat exchanger outlet Accumulator inlet Heat source Accumulator outlet unit Sectional Compressor inlet temperatures °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom Indoor unit HWE09080 83 406/406/406/406/406/406/406 LEV2 Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Main pipe Pipe length PQHYP96YHMU-A 1400 1400 1400 2.72/0.80 2.72/0.80 2.72/0.80 [395/116] [395/116] [395/116] 81 [178] 81 [178] 81 [178] 5 [41] 5 [41] 5 [41] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 40 [104] LEV inlet 39 [102] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 209 - [104] 40 [104] GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 3-unit combination PQHY-P360YSHMU-A Item PQHYP120YHMU-A PQHYP120YHMU-A Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 21.1 [70] Heat source water flow rate m3/h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit No. of units in operation Model Branch pipe 7 7 - 54/54/54/54/48/48/48 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed Heat source unit 75 [246-1/16] - Hi kg [lbs-oz] 26.8 [60] Current A 84.3 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 90 90 Indoor unit LEV opening SC (LEV1) High pressure (after O/S)/ Low pressure (before accumulator) Pulse 0 MPa [psi] Discharge (TH4) Heat exchanger outlet Accumulator inlet Heat source Accumulator outlet unit Sectional Compressor inlet temperatures °C [°F] Compressor shell bottom Indoor unit HWE09080 90 414/414/414/414/406/406/406 LEV2 Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Main pipe Pipe length PQHYP120YHMU-A 1400 1400 1400 2.68/0.80 2.68/0.80 2.68/0.80 [389/116] [389/116] [389/116] 81 [178] 81 [178] 81 [178] 5 [41] 5 [41] 5 [41] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 40 [104] LEV inlet 39 [102] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 210 - [104] 40 [104] GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 4. Single unit (1) Cooling only operation Heat source unit model Item Model name of BC controller 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85] 29.4[85] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 2 2 2 2 36/36 48/48 5 [16-3/8] 5 [16-3/8] 10 [32-3/4] 10 [32-3/4] 25 [82] 25 [82] Hi Hi kg [lbs-oz] 11.8 [27] 13.0 [29] Current A 17.7 23.3 Voltage V 230 230 Compressor frequency Hz 66 90 325/325 387/387 2000//160 2000//170 2.20/0.81 [319/117] 2.27/0.81 [329/117] 2.10/2.10 [305/305] 2.17/2.17 [315/315] Indoor unit m [G/h] [gpm] Unit No. of units in operation Model Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe m [ft] Total pipe length Fan speed Refrigerant charge Indoor unit LEV opening Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Sectional temperatures High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 CMB-P104NU-G 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F] No. of connected units Pressure switch CMB-P104NU-G DB/WB Heat source water flow rate Heat source unit PQRY-P96YHMU-A Indoor temperature 3/h Operating conditions PQRY-P72YHMU-A MPa [psi] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 33 [91] 34 [93] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 47 [117] 40 [104] LEV inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] 6 [43] 6 [43] Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet °C [ °F] Heat exchanger outlet - 211 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] Heat source unit model Item PQRY-P120YHMU-A Model name of BC controller CMB-P104NU-G Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85] m3/h [G/h] [gpm] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Heat source water flow rate No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 3 Unit No. of units in operation Model 3 Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] Total pipe length Fan speed 35 [115] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 13.6 [30] Current A 23.8 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz 105 Indoor unit LEV opening 325/325/387 Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Pressure switch Sectional temperatures High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 10 [32-3/4] Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 36/36/48 2000//180 MPa [psi] 2.30/0.81 [334/117] 2.20/2.20 [319/319] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] Accumulator inlet 8 [46] Accumulator outlet 8 [46] °C [ °F] Compressor inlet 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 42 [108] LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] - 212 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] (2) Heating only operation Heat source unit model Item Model name of BC controller 21.1°C/ [70 °F/] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70] 21.1[70] m3/h 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 2 2 2 2 36/36 48/48 5 [16-3/8] 5 [16-3/8] 10 [32-3/4] 10 [32-3/4] 25 [82] 25 [82] Hi Hi kg [lbs-oz] 11.8 [27] 13.0 [29] Current A 18.6 25.2 Voltage V 230 230 Compressor frequency Hz 60 72 332/332 406/406 110//520 110//590 2.64/0.80 [383/116] 2.90/0.80 [421/116] 2.61/2.29 [378/332] 2.87/2.55 [416/370] [G/h] [gpm] Indoor unit Unit No. of units in operation Model Main pipe Branch pipe m [ft] Total pipe length Fan speed Refrigerant charge Indoor unit LEV opening Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) MPa [psi] Discharge (TH4) Sectional temperatures Heat source unit 73 [163] 80 [176] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104] LEV inlet 37 [99] 38 [100] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] 70 [158] Accumulator outlet °C [ °F] Compressor inlet Indoor unit HWE09080 CMB-P104NU-G 21.1°C/ [70 °F/] Pipe length Pressure switch CMB-P104NU-G DB/WB No. of connected units Heat source unit PQRY-P96YHMU-A Indoor temperature Heat source water flow rate Operating conditions PQRY-P72YHMU-A - 213 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] Heat source unit model Item PQRY-P120YHMU-A Model name of BC controller CMB-P104NU-G Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/ [70 °F/] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70] m3/h [G/h] [gpm] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Heat source water flow rate No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 3 Unit No. of units in operation Model 3 Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] Total pipe length Fan speed 35 [115] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 13.6 [30] Current A 28.3 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz 90 Indoor unit LEV opening 332/332/406 Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Pressure switch High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) 110//660 MPa [psi] Discharge (TH4) Sectional temperatures Heat source unit 2.68/0.80 [389/116] 2.64/2.32 [383/336] 81 [178] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] Accumulator outlet 4 [39] °C [ °F] Compressor inlet Indoor unit HWE09080 10 [32-3/4] Refrigerant charge Heat source unit 36/36/48 4 [39] Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] LEV inlet 39 [102] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 214 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 5. 2-unit combination (1) Cooling only operation 2-unit combination Item PQRY-P144YSHMU-A PQRY-P72YHMU-A Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4 [85] m3/h Heat source water flow rate G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 4 No. of units in operation 4 36/36/36/36 Main pipe Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 45 [148] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 20.3 [45] Current A 42.3 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 66 Indoor unit LEV opening Sectional temperatures High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 66 325/325/387/387 Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Model Pipe length Heat source unit PQRY-P72YHMU-A 2000/2000/210 MPa [psi] 2.20/0.81 [319/117] 2.20/0.81 [319/117] 2.10/2.10 [305/305] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 33 [91] 33 [91] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 47 [117] Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet °C [ °F] LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] - 215 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQRY-P168YSHMU-A PQRY-P96YHMU-A Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4 [85] m3 Heat source water flow rate /h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 4 No. of units in operation 4 36/36/48/48 Main pipe Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 45 [148] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 23.1 [51] Current A 42.3 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 78 Indoor unit LEV opening Sectional temperatures High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 78 325/325/387/387 Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Model Pipe length Heat source unit PQRY-P72YHMU-A 2000/2000/210 MPa [psi] 2.23/0.81 [323/117] 2.23/0.81 [323/117] 2.13/2.13 [309/309] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 33 [91] 33 [91] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 47 [117] Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet °C [ °F] LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] - 216 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQRY-P192YSHMU-A PQRY-P96YHMU-A Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4 [85] m3 Heat source water flow rate /h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 4 No. of units in operation 4 48/48/48/48 Main pipe Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 45 [148] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 24.6 [55] Current A 51.8 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 90 Indoor unit LEV opening Sectional temperatures High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 90 387/387/387/387 Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Model Pipe length Heat source unit PQRY-P96YHMU-A 2000/2000/220 MPa [psi] 2.27/0.81 [329/117] 2.27/0.81 [329/117] 2.17/2.17 [315/315] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 34 [93] 34 [93] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104] Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet °C [ °F] LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] - 217 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQRY-P216YSHMU-A PQRY-P120YHMU-A Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4 [85] m3 Heat source water flow rate /h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 5 Unit No. of units in operation Model 5 36/36/48/48/48 Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 65 [213] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 26.2 [58] Current A 52.2 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit Indoor unit LEV opening 98 98 325/325/387/387/387 Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Pressure switch Sectional temperatures High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 PQRY-P96YHMU-A 2000/2000/230 MPa [psi] 2.28/0.81 [331/117] 2.28/0.81 [331/117] 2.18/2.18 [316/316] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] 35 [95] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 42 [108] 40 [104] Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet °C [ °F] LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] - 218 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQRY-P240YSHMU-A PQRY-P120YHMU-A Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4 [85] m3 Heat source water flow rate /h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 6 Unit No. of units in operation Model 6 36/36/36/36/48/48 Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 65 [213] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 26.2 [58] Current A 32.7 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit Indoor unit LEV opening 105 105 325/325/325/325/387/387 Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Pressure switch Sectional temperatures High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) Heat source unit Indoor unit HWE09080 PQRY-P120YHMU-A 2000/2000/240 MPa [psi] 2.30/0.81 [334/117] 2.30/0.81 [334/117] 2.20/2.20 [319/319] Discharge (TH4) 65 [149] 65 [149] Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] 35 [95] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 42 [108] 42 [108] Accumulator inlet Accumulator outlet °C [ °F] LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] - 219 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] (2) Heating only operation 2-unit combination Item PQRY-P144YSHMU-A PQRY-P72YHMU-A Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70 °F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1 [70] m3 Heat source water flow rate /h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 4 No. of units in operation 4 36/36/36/36 Main pipe Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 45 [147] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 20.3 [45] Current A 25.5 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 60 Indoor unit LEV opening 332/332/332/332 High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) 110/110/870 MPa [psi] Heat source unit 2.61/2.29 [378/332] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 [104] 40 [104] Accumulator outlet °C [ °F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 2.64/0.80 [383/116] 77 [171] Compressor inlet Indoor unit 2.64/0.80 [383/116] 77 [171] Discharge (TH4) Sectional temperatures 60 Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Model Pipe length Heat source unit PQRY-P72YHMU-A LEV inlet 37 [99] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 220 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQRY-P168YSHMU-A PQRY-P96YHMU-A Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70 °F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1 [70] m3 Heat source water flow rate /h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 4 No. of units in operation 4 36/36/48/48 Main pipe Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 45 [147] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 23.1 [51] Current A 44.3 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 66 Indoor unit LEV opening 332/332/406/406 High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) 110/110/870 MPa [psi] Heat source unit 2.77/2.45 [402/355] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 [104] 40 [104] Accumulator outlet °C [ °F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 2.80/0.80 [406/116] 77 [171] Compressor inlet Indoor unit 2.80/0.80 [406/116] 77 [171] Discharge (TH4) Sectional temperatures 66 Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Model Pipe length Heat source unit PQRY-P72YHMU-A LEV inlet 37 [99] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 221 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQRY-P192YSHMU-A PQRY-P96YHMU-A Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70 °F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1 [70] m3 Heat source water flow rate /h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions IIndoor unit 4 No. of units in operation 4 48/48/48/48 Main pipe Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 45 [147] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 24.6 [55] Current A 51.1 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge 72 Indoor unit LEV opening 406/406/406/406 High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) 110/110/980 MPa [psi] Heat source unit 2.87/2.55 [416/370] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 [104] 40 [104] Accumulator outlet °C [ °F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 2.90/0.80 [421/116] 80 [176] Compressor inlet Indoor unit 2.90/0.80 [421/116] 80 [176] Discharge (TH4) Sectional temperatures 72 Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Pressure switch 5.76 [1522] [25.4] Unit Model Pipe length Heat source unit PQRY-P96YHMU-A LEV inlet 37 [99] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 222 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQRY-P216YSHMU-A PQRY-P120YHMU-A Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70 °F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1 [70] m3 Heat source water flow rate /h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 5 Unit No. of units in operation Model 5 36/36/48/48/48 Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 65 [213] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 26.2 [58] Current A 55.1 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit Indoor unit LEV opening 81 81 332/332/406/406/406 Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Pressure switch High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) 110/110/1050 MPa [psi] Heat source unit 2.72/2.40 [395/348] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 [104] 40 [104] Accumulator outlet °C [ °F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 2.75/0.80 [399/116] 81 [178] Compressor inlet Indoor unit 2.75/0.80 [399/116] 81 [178] Discharge (TH4) Sectional temperatures PQRY-P96YHMU-A LEV inlet 35 [95] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 223 - GB [ VIII Test Run Mode ] 2-unit combination Item PQRY-P240YSHMU-A PQRY-P120YHMU-A Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70 °F/-] Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1 [70] m3 Heat source water flow rate /h G/h gpm 5.76 [1522] [25.4] 5.76 [1522] [25.4] No. of connected units Operating conditions Indoor unit 6 Unit No. of units in operation Model 6 36/36/36/36/48/48 Main pipe Pipe length Branch pipe 5 [16-3/8] m [ft] 10 [32-3/4] Total pipe length Fan speed 65 [213] Hi kg [lbs-oz] 26.2 [58] Current A 33.5 Voltage V 230 Compressor frequency Hz Refrigerant charge Heat source unit Indoor unit LEV opening 90 90 332/332/332/332/406/406 Pulse BC controller (1/2/3) Pressure switch High pressure (63HS1)/ Low pressure (63LS) BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3) 110/110/1120 MPa [psi] Heat source unit 2.64/2.32 [383/336] Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39] 40 [104] 40 [104] Accumulator outlet °C [ °F] Compressor shell bottom HWE09080 2.68/0.80 [389/116] 81 [178] Compressor inlet Indoor unit 2.68/0.80 [389/116] 81 [178] Discharge (TH4) Sectional temperatures PQRY-P120YHMU-A LEV inlet 35 [95] Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] - 224 - GB IX Troubleshooting [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] HWE09080 Error Code Lists ............................................................................................................. 227 Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller................................................. 230 Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise......................................................... 303 Troubleshooting Principal Parts ..................................................................................... 306 Refrigerant Leak ............................................................................................................ 343 Compressor Replacement Instructions.......................................................................... 347 Servicing the BC controller ............................................................................................ 353 Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display ................................... 356 - 225 - GB - 226 - [ IX Troubleshooting ] IX Troubleshooting [1] Error Code Lists 4300 01 Serial communication error O 1102 1202 - Discharge temperature fault O 1301 - - Low pressure fault O 1302 1402 - High pressure fault O 1500 1600 - Refrigerant overcharge O - 1605 - Preliminary suction pressure fault O 2000 2100 - Pump interlock error O 2134 2234 - Abnormal water temperature O 2135 2235 - Water heat exchanger freeze up O 2500 - - Drain sensor submergence O 2502 - - Drain pump fault O 2503 - - Drain sensor (Thd) fault O 2600 - - Water leakage O 2601 - - Water supply cutoff O 4102 4152 - Open phase O 4106 - - Transmission power supply fault O 4115 - - Power supply signal sync error O 4116 - - RPM error/Motor error 4220 O [108] Abnormal bus voltage drop O [109] Abnormal bus voltage rise O [111] Logic error O [131] Low bus voltage at startup O 4330 - Heatsink overheat protection O 4240 4340 - Overload protection O [101] IPM error O [102] ACCT overcurrent (H/W detection) O [103] DCCT overcurrent (H/W detection) O [104] Short-circuited IPM/Ground fault O [105] Overcurrent error due to short-circuited motor O [106] Instantaneous overcurrent O [107] Overcurrent O Heatsink overheat protection at startup O 4260 5101 HWE09080 Notes O O O 4320 4230 4250 LOSSNAY 0403 Error code definition BC controller Error (preliminary) detail code Indoor unit Preliminary error code Heat source unit Error Code Remote controller Searched unit 4350 - 1202 - - Temperature sensor fault Return air temperature (TH21) OA processing unit inlet temperature (TH4) - 227 - O O GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] Indoor unit pipe temperature (TH22) 5102 1217 - Temperature sensor fault O O Indoor unit gas-side pipe temperature (TH23) 5103 1205 00 Temperature sensor fault O OA processing unit gasside pipe temperature (TH3) Pipe temperature at heat exchanger outlet (TH3) O O OA processing unit intake air temperature (TH1) 5104 1202 - Temperature sensor fault O Outside temperature (TH24) Heat source unit discharge temperature (TH4) O 1204 - Temperature sensor fault Accumulator inlet temperature (TH5) O 5106 1216 - Temperature sensor fault HIC circuit outlet temperature (TH6) O 5107 1221 - Temperature sensor fault Water inlet pipe (TH7) O 5108 1218 - Temperature sensor fault Water outlet pipe (TH8) O 5112 1215 - Temperature sensor fault Component cooler heat exchanger outlet (THINV) O 5110 1214 01 Temperature sensor fault Heatsink temperature (THHS) O 5111 - - 5112 - - 5115 - - 5116 - - 5201 - - High-pressure sensor fault (63HS1) O 5201 1402 - High-pressure sensor fault (Heat source unit HPS/BC controller PS1) O 5203 - - Intermediate pressure sensor fault (BC controller PS3) HWE09080 Detectable only by the AllFresh type indoor units O 5105 Temperature sensor fault (BC controller) Liquid inlet temperature (TH11) O Bypass outlet temperature (TH12) O LEV3 outlet temperature (TH15) O LEV3 inlet temperature (TH16) O - 228 - Notes O OA processing unit pipe temperature (TH2) HIC bypass circuit outlet temperature (TH2) Remote controller Error code definition LOSSNAY Error (preliminary) detail code BC controller Preliminary error code Indoor unit Error Code Heat source unit Searched unit O O GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 5301 [115] ACCT sensor fault O [117] ACCT sensor circuit fault O [119] Open-circuited IPM/Loose ACCT connector O [120] Faulty ACCT wiring O Remote controller Error code definition LOSSNAY Error (preliminary) detail code BC controller Preliminary error code Indoor unit Error Code Heat source unit Searched unit 4300 5701 - - Loose float switch connector 6201 - - Remote controller board fault (nonvolatile memory error) O 6202 - - Remote controller board fault (clock IC error) O 6600 - - Address overlaps O O 6601 - - Polarity setting error O 6602 - - Transmission processor hardware error 6603 - - 6606 - 6607 O O O O O O O O O Transmission line bus busy error O O O O O - Communication error between device and transmission processors O O O O O - - No ACK error O O O O O 6608 - - No response error O O O O O 6831 - - MA controller signal reception error (No signal reception) O O 6832 - - MA remote controller signal transmission error (Synchronization error) O O 6833 - - MA remote controller signal transmission error (H/ W error) O O 6834 - - MA controller signal reception error (Start bit detection error) O O 7100 - - Total capacity error O 7101 - - Capacity code setting error O 7102 - - Wrong number of connected units O 7105 - - Address setting error O 7106 - - Attribute setting error 7107 - - Port setting error 7110 - - Connection information signal transmission/reception error 7111 - - Remote controller sensor fault 7113 - - Function setting error O 7117 - - Model setting error O 7130 - - Incompatible unit combination O HWE09080 Notes O O O O O - 229 - O O O GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller 1. Error Code 0403 Serial communication error 2. Error definition and error detection method Serial communication error between the control board and the INV board on the compressor. Detail code 01: Between the control board and the INV board 3. Cause, check method and remedy (1) Faulty wiring Check the following wiring connections. 1) Between Control board and Fan board Control board FAN board CN2 CN21 CN4 CN4 CN332 CN18V 2) Between Control board and INV board Control board INV board CN2 CN2 CN4 CN4 (2) INV board failure and Control board failure Replace the INV board or the Fan board when the power turns on automatically, even if the power source is reset. Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter. HWE09080 - 230 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 1102 Discharge temperature fault 2. Error definition and error detection method 1) If the discharge temperature of 120 °C [248°F] or more is detected during the above operation (the first detection), the heat source unit stops once, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes automatically. 2) If the discharge temperature of 120° C [248°F] or more is detected again (the second detection) within 30 minutes after the second stop of the heat source unit described above, the mode will be changed to 3 - minute restart mode, then the heat source unit will restart in 3 minutes. 3) If the discharge temperature of 120°C [248°F] or more is detected (the third detection) within 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit described above (regardless of the first or the second stop), the heat source unit will make an error stop, and the error code "1102" will be displayed. 4) If the discharge temperature of 120°C [248°F] or more is detected more than 30 minutes after the previous stop of the heat source unit, the detection is regarded as the first detection, and the operation described in step 1 above will start. 5) For 30 minutes after the stop (the first stop or the second stop) of the heat source unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Gas leak, gas shortage Refer to the page on refrigerant amount evaluation.(page 177) (2) Overload operation Check operating conditions and operation status of indoor/ heat source units. (3) LEV failure on the indoor unit (4) BC controller LEV malfunction Cooling only : LEV3 Cooling main : LEV1,2,3 Heating only or heating main : LEV3 (5) BC controller SVM1 and 2 malfunction -> Cooling only or defrost (6) BC controller SVA malfunction -> Cooling only or cooling main Perform a heating operation and check the operation. Cooling: LEV on the indoor unit BC controller LEV1,2,3 Heat source unit LEV2a,2b BC controller SVM1,2 BC controller SVA,C Heating: LEV on the indoor unit Heat source unit LEV2a,2b BC controller LEV3 BC controller SVB BC controller SV4a - 4d Refer to the page on troubleshooting LEV.(page 310) (7) BC controller SVB malfunction -> Heating only or heating main (8) Solenoid valve SV malfunction 4a-4d,7a,7b :heating only, heating main (9) Heat source unit LEV1 actuation failure Heat source unit LEV2a and LEV2b actuation failure (10) Port address setting error. Confirm the port address of the indoor unit. (11) Closed ball valve Confirm that the ball valve is fully open. (12) Insufficient heat source water flow, heat source water supply cutoff, dirty or clogged water heat exchangerHeating Check the water heat exchanger for clogging. Check the heat source water circulation pump. (13) Gas leak between low and high pressures (4-way valve failure, Compressor failure, Solenoid valve (SV1a) failure) Perform a cooling or heating operation and check the operation. (14) Thermistor failure (TH4) Check the thermistor resistor.(page 260) (15) Input circuit failure on the controller board thermistor Check the inlet air temperature on the LED monitor. HWE09080 - 231 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 1301 Low pressure fault 2. Error definition and error detection method When starting the compressor from Stop Mode for the first time if low pressure reads 0.098MPa [14psi] immediately before start-up, the operation immediately stops. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause (1) Inner pressure drop due to a leakage. (2) Low pressure sensor failure (3) Short-circuited pressure sensor cable due to torn outer rubber (4) A pin on the male connector is missing. (5) Disconnected wire (6) Failure of the low pressure input circuit on the controller board HWE09080 Check method and remedy Refer to the section on troubleshooting the low pressure sensor.(page 307) - 232 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 1302 High pressure fault 1 (Heat source unit) 2. Error definition and error detection method 1) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor during operation (the first detection), the heat source stops once, turns to antirestart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes automatically. 2) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor again (the second detection) within 30 minutes after the first stop of the heat source unit, the heat source unit stops once, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes automatically. 3) If the pressure of 3.87MPa [561psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor (the third detection) within 30 minutes of the second stop of the heat source unit, the heat source unit will make an error stop, and the error code "1302" will be displayed. 4) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected more than 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit, the detection is regarded as the first detection, and the operation described in step 1 above will start. 5) For 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display. 6) The heat source unit makes an error stop immediately when not only the pressure sensor but also the pressure switch detects 4.15+0,-0.15 MPa [601+0,-22 psi] 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Indoor unit LEV actuation failure Heating (2) BC controller LEV malfunction Heating only or heating main : Indoor LEV 3 (3) BC controller SVM1 and 2 malfunction ->Cooling only BC controller SVA and SVC malfunction ->Cooling only or cooling main BC controller SVB malfunction ->Heating only or heating main Solenoid valve SV malfunction 4a-4d ->Cooling only or cooling main (4) (5) Perform a heating operation and check the operation. Cooling: LEV on the indoor unit Heat source unit LEV1,2,3 BC controller LEV2a,2b BC controller SVM1,1b,2,2b BC controller SVA Heating: LEV on the indoor unit BC controller LEV3 BC controller SVM2,2b BC controller SVB,SV4a - 4d Refer to the page on troubleshooting for LEV and solenoid valve.(page 310) (6) Heat source unit LEV2a and LEV2b actuation failureCooling (7) Port address setting error. Confirm the port address of the indoor unit. (8) Refrigerant service valve actuation failure Confirm that the refrigerant service valve is fully (9) Short cycle on the indoor unit side (10) Clogged filter on the indoor unit Check the indoor units for problems and correct them, if any. (11) Reduced air flow due to dirty fan on the indoor unit fan (12) Dirty heat exchanger of the indoor unit (13) Insufficient heat source water flow (14) Heat source water supply cutoff (15) Dirty or clogged water heat exchanger Items (13) through (15) above reduce the condensing capability of the unit, resulting in high-pressure rise during heating operation. (16) Solenoid valve (SV1a) malfunction The by-pass valve (SV1a) can not control rise in high pressure. Refer to the section on troubleshooting the solenoid valve.(page 308) (17) Thermistor failure (TH3, TH7) Check the thermistor resistor.(page 260) (18) Pressure sensor failure (19) Failure of the thermistor input circuit and pressure sensor input circuit on the controller board Thermistor mounting problem (TH3, TH7) Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the high pressure sensor. (page 306) Check the sensor temperature/pressure on the LED monitor. Check the sensor temperature/pressure on the LED monitor. (20) Check the water heat exchanger for clogging. Check the heat source water circulation pump. (21) Disconnected male connector on the pressure switch (63H1) or disconnected wire (22) Voltage drop caused by unstable power supply voltage HWE09080 - 233 - Check the input voltage at the power supply terminal TB1. GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 1302 High pressure fault 2 (Heat source unit) 2. Error definition and error detection method If the pressure of 0.098MPa [14psi] or lower is registered on the pressure sensor immediately before start-up, it will trigger an abnormal stop, and error code "1302" will be displayed. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inner pressure drop due to a leakage. Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the high pressure sensor.(page 306) (2) Pressure sensor failure (3) Shorted-circuited pressure sensor cable due to torn outer rubber (4) A pin on the male connector on the pressure sensor is missing or contact failure (5) Disconnected pressure sensor cable (6) Failure of the pressure sensor input circuit on the controller board 1. Error Code 1500 Refrigerant overcharge 2. Error definition and error detection method An error can be detected by the discharge temperature superheat. 1) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied during operation (first detection), the heat source unit stops, goes into the 3minute restart mode, and starts up in three minutes. 2) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied again within 30 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit (second detection), the unit comes to an abnormal stop, and the error code "1500" appears. 3) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied 30 minutes or more after the first stoppage of the heat source unit, the same sequence as Item "1 above (first detection) is followed. 4) For 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Overcharged refrigerant Refer to the page on refrigerant amount evaluation.(page 177) (2) Thermistor input circuit failure on the control board Check the temperature and pressure readings on the sensor that are displayed on the LED monitor. (3) Faulty mounting of thermistor (TH4) Check the temperature and pressure readings on the thermistor that are displayed on the LED monitor. (4) Heat source unit LEV2a and LEV2b actuation failureHeating Refer to the section on troubleshooting the LEV. (page 310) HWE09080 - 234 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 2000 Pump interlock error 2. Error definition and error detection method 1) This error is detected by the pump interlock circuit (TB8 3-4). 2) If it is detected that the pump interlock circuit (TB8 3-4) is open (first detection) during operation or immediately before startup, the heat source unit stops and goes into the 10-minute restart delay mode. 3) If the pump interlock circuit (TB8 3-4) has remained open for continuous 10 minutes (second detection) since the first stoppage of the heat source unit, the unit will make an abnormal stop, and the error code "2000" appears on the LED. 4) For the 10 minutes from the time the heat source stopped is considered a preliminary error, and it is indicated on the LED. 5) This error is indicated on the LED only when Dip switch SW2-8 on the control board of the heat source unit is set to OFF. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Heat source water circulation pump fault Operate the pump, and check for proper operation. (2) Broken wire Check the field wiring for proper installation and conduction. (3) Loose connectors or contact failure Check the connectors for proper connection. (4) Interlock signal input circuit fault on the relay board (5) Interlock signal input circuit fault on the control board HWE09080 - 235 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 2134 Abnormal water temperature 2. Error definition and error detection method 1) If a water inlet pipe temperature (TH7) of 5°C[41ºF] or below OR 50°C[122ºF] or above is detected (first detection) during operation, the heat source unit stops, goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode, and automatically restarts after three minutes. 2) If a water inlet pipe temperature (TH7) of 5°C[41ºF] or below OR 50°C[122ºF] or above is detected again (second detection) within 30 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit, the unit will make an abnormal stop, and the error code "2134" appears on the LED. 3) If a water inlet pipe temperature (TH7) of 5°C[41ºF] or below OR 50°C[122ºF] or above is detected after 30 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit, this is considered as the first detection, and the sequence as described in section 1) above is followed. 4) The period of 30 minutes after a stoppage of the heat source unit is considered a preliminary error, and a preliminary error code appears on the LED display. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Heat source water circulation pump fault Operate the pump, and check for proper operation. (2) Cooling tower or heater problem Check the cooling tower and heater, and correct any problems found. (3) Thermistor fault (TH7) Check thermistor resistance. (4) Thermistor signal input circuit fault on the control board Check the sensor reading on the LED. (5) Improper installation of thermistor (TH7) Check the sensor reading on the LED. HWE09080 - 236 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 2135 Water heat exchanger freeze up 2. Error definition and error detection method 1) If either of the following conditions is detected (first detection) during operation, the heat source unit stops, goes into the 3minute restart delay mode, and automatically restarts after three minutes. Water outlet pipe temperature (TH8) of 4°C[39ºF] or below is detected. All of the following conditions are continuously met for one minute during Heating-all or Heating-main operation: Compressor frequency < Minimum frequency + 20 AND Evaporation temperature (Te) < -2ºC[28°F] AND Accumulator inlet pipe temperature (TH5) 3°C[37ºF]. 2) If the conditions above (1) are met again within 60 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit (second detection), the unit will make an abnormal stop, and the error code "2135" will appear on the LED. 3) If the conditions above (1) are met again after 60 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit, it is considered the first detection, and the sequence as described in section 1) above is followed. 4) For the 60 minutes from the time the heat source stopped is considered a preliminary error, and it is indicated on the LED. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Heat source water circulation pump fault Operate the pump, and check for proper operation. (2) Heater problem Check the heater, and correct any problems found. (3) Poorly maintained field-installed water pipes Identify and remove the cause of water flow reduction, such as a clogged strainer or cavitation. (4) Dirty or clogged water heat exchanger Check the pressure difference between the unit's inlet and outlet. (5) Thermistor fault (TH5, TH8) Check thermistor resistance. (6) Thermistor signal input circuit fault on the control board Check the sensor reading on the LED. (7) Improper installation of thermistor (TH5, TH8) Check the sensor reading on the LED. HWE09080 - 237 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 2500 Drain sensor submergence (Models with a drain sensor) 2. Error definition and error detection method 1) If an immersion of the drain sensor in the water is detected while the unit is in any mode other than the Cool/Dry mode and when the drain pump goes from OFF to ON, this condition is considered preliminary water leakage. While this error is being detected, humidifier output cannot be turned on.(Applicable to the units manufactured in or after October 1996) 2) If the immersion of the sensor in the water is detected four consecutive times at an hour interval, this is considered water leakage, and "2500" appears on the monitor. 3) Detection of water leakage is also performed while the unit is stopped. 4) Preliminary water leakage is cancelled when the following conditions are met: One hour after the preliminary water leakage was detected, it is not detected that the drain pump goes from OFF to ON. The operation mode is changed to Cool/Dry. Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature -10°C[ -18°F] 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Drain water drainage problem Clogged drain pump Clogged drain piping Backflow of drain water from other units Check for proper drainage. (2) Adhesion of water drops to the drain sensor Trickling of water along the lead wire Rippling of drain water caused by filter clogging 1) Check for proper lead wire installation. 2) Check for clogged filter. (3) Failure of the relay circuit for the solenoid valve Replace the relay. (4) Indoor unit control board failure Drain sensor circuit failure If the above item checks out OK, replace the indoor unit control board. HWE09080 - 238 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 2500 Drain sensor submergence (Models with a float switch) 2. Error definition and error detection method 1) If an immersion of the float switch in the water is detected while the unit is in any mode other than the Cool/Dry mode and when the drain pump goes from OFF to ON, this condition is considered preliminary water leakage. While this error is being detected, humidifier output cannot be turned on. 2) If the drain pump turns on within one hour after preliminary water leakage is detected and the above-mentioned condition is detected two consecutive times, water leakage error water leakage is detected, and "2500" appears on the monitor. 3) Detection of water leakage is also performed while the unit is stopped. 4) Preliminary water leakage is cancelled when the following conditions are met: One hour after the preliminary water leakage was detected, it is not detected that the drain pump goes from OFF to ON. The operation mode is changed to Cool/Dry. Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature - 10°C[-18°F] 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Drain water drainage problem Clogged drain pump Clogged drain piping Backflow of drain water from other units Check for proper drainage. (2) Stuck float switch Check for slime in the moving parts of the float switch. Check for normal operation of the float switch. (3) Float switch failure Check the resistance with the float switch turned on and turned off. Drain pump operation triggered by a submergence of the liquid level sensor (except during the Cooing/Dry mode) 6 minutes Drain pump output 6 minutes ON OFF ON Float switch OFF input 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds Submergence of Sensor in the air the sensor Preliminary water leakage Within 1-hour period HWE09080 - 239 - Submergence of the sensor 15 seconds Sensor in the air 15 seconds Submergence of the sensor Water leakage Within 1-hour period GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 2502 Drain pump fault (Models with a drain sensor) 2. Error definition and error detection method 1) Make the drain sensor thermistor self-heat. If the temperature rise is small, it is interpreted that the sensor is immersed in water. This condition is considered to be a preliminary error, and the unit goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode. 2) If another episode of the above condition is detected during the preliminary error, this is considered a drain pump error, and "2502" appears on the monitor. 3) This error is always detected while the drain pump is in operation. 4) The following criteria are met when the criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit (system stoppage) are met. "Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature - 10 °C [ -18°F] " has been detected for 30 minutes. The immersion of drain sensor is detected 10 consecutive times. The conditions that are listed under items 1) through 3) above are always met before the criteria for the forced stoppage of the heat source unit. 5) The indoor unit that detected the conditions that are listed in item 4) above brings the heat source unit in the same refrigerant circuit to an error stop (compressor operation prohibited), and the heat source unit brings all the indoor units in the same refrigerant circuit that are in any mode other than Fan or Stop to an error stop. "2502" appears on the monitor of the units that came to an error stop. 6) Forced stoppage of the heat source unit Detection timing: The error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped. 7) Ending criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit Power reset the indoor unit that was identified as the error source and the heat source unit that is connected to the same refrigerant circuit. Forced stoppage of the heat source unit cannot be cancelled by stopping the unit via the remote controller. (Note) Items 1) - 3) and 4) - 7) are detected independently from each other. The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller are those of the indoor unit (or OA processing unit) that caused the error. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Drain pump failure Check for proper functioning of the drain pump. (2) Drain water drainage problem Clogged drain pump Clogged drain piping Check for proper drainage. (3) Adhesion of water drops to the drain sensor Trickling of water along the lead wire Rippling of drain water caused by filter clogging 1) Check for proper lead wire installation. 2) Check for clogged filter. (4) Indoor unit control board failure Drain pump drive circuit failure Drain heater output circuit failure If the above item checks out OK, replace the indoor unit control board. (5) Items (1) through (4) above and an indoor unit electronic valve closure failure (leaky valve) occurred simultaneously. Check the solenoid valves on the indoor unit for leaks. HWE09080 - 240 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 2502 Drain pump fault (Models with a float switch) 2. Error definition and error detection method 1) The immersion of sensor tip in water is detected by the ON/OFF signal from the float switch. Submergence of the sensor When it is detected that the float switch has been ON for 15 seconds, it is interpreted that the sensor tip is immersed in water. Sensor in the air When it is detected that the float switch has been OFF for 15 seconds, it is interpreted that the sensor tip is not immersed in water. 2) If it is detected that the float switch has been ON for 3 minutes after the immersion of the sensor tip was detected, this is considered a drain pump failure, and "2502" appears on the monitor. The total time it takes for this error to be detected is 3 minutes and 15 seconds, including the time it takes for the first immersion of the sensor tip to be detected. 3) Detection of drain pump failure is performed while the unit is stopped. 4) The following criteria are met when the criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit (system stoppage) are met. "Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature - 10°C [ -18°F] " has been detected for 30 minutes. It is detected by the float switch that the sensor tip has been immersed in water for 15 minutes or more. The conditions that are listed under items 1) through 3) above are always met before the criteria for the forced stoppage of the heat source unit. 5) The indoor unit that detected the conditions that are listed in item 4) above brings the heat source unit in the same refrigerant circuit to an error stop (compressor operation prohibited), and the heat source unit brings all the indoor units in the same refrigerant circuit that are in any mode other than Fan or Stop to an error stop. 6) Forced stoppage of the heat source unit Detection timing: The error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped. This error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped. 7) Ending criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit Power reset the indoor unit that was identified as the error source and the heat source unit that is connected to the same refrigerant circuit. Forced stoppage of the heat source unit cannot be cancelled by stopping the unit via the remote controller. (Note) Items 1) - 3) and 4) - 7) are detected independently from each other. The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller are those of the indoor unit (or OA processing unit) that caused the error. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Drain pump failure Check for proper functioning of the drain pump mechanism (2) Drain water drainage problem Clogged drain pump Clogged drain piping Check for proper drainage. (3) Stuck float switch Check for slime in the moving parts of the float switch. Check for normal operation of the float switch. (4) Float switch failure Check the resistance with the float switch turned on and turned off. (5) Indoor unit control board failure Drain pump drive circuit failure Float switch input circuit failure Replace indoor unit control board. (6) Items (1) through (5) above and an indoor unit electronic valve closure failure (leaky valve) occurred simultaneously. Check the solenoid valves on the indoor unit for leaks. HWE09080 - 241 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 2503 Drain sensor (Thd) fault 2. Error definition and error detection method If the open or short circuit of the thermistor has been detected for 30 seconds, this condition is considered to be a preliminary error, and the unit goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode. If another episode of the above condition is detected during the preliminary error, this is considered a drain sensor error.(If the short or open circuit of the thermistor is no longer detected, normal operation will be restored in 3 minutes.) This error is detected when one of the following conditions are met. During Cool/Dry operation Liquid pipe temperature minus inlet temperature is equal to or smaller than - 10°C[ -18°F] (except during the defrost cycle) When the liquid temperature thermistor or suction temperature thermistor or short or open circuited. Drain pump is in operation. One hour has elapsed since the drain sensor went off. Short: 90 °C [194 °F] or above Open: - 20 °C [-4 °F] or below 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Faulty connector (CN31) insertion. 1) Check for connector connection failure. Reinsert the connector, restart the operation, and check for proper operation. (2) Broken or semi-broken thermistor wire 2) Check for a broken thermistor wire. (3) Thermistor failure 3) Check the resistance of the thermistor. 0°C[32 °F]:6.0k 10°C[50 °F]:3.9k 20°C[68°F]:2.6k 30°C[86°F]:1.8k 40°C[104 °F]:1.3k (4) Indoor unit control board (error detection circuit) failure 4) Replace the indoor unit control board if the problem recurs when the unit is operated with the No.-1 and No.-2 pins on the drain sensor connector (CN31) being short-circuited. If the above item checks out OK, there are no problems with the drain sensor. Turn off the power and turn it back on. HWE09080 - 242 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 2600 Water leakage 2. Cause, check method and remedy Check that water does not leak from the pipes in such as the humidifier. 1. Error Code 2601 Water supply cutoff 2. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) The water tank of the humidifier is empty. Check the amount of supply water. Check for the solenoid valve and for the connection. (2) The solenoid valve for humidification is OFF. Check the connector. (3) Disconnected float switch Check the connecting part. (4) Poor operation of float switch Check for the float switch. (5) Frozen water tank Turn off the power source of the water tank to defrost, and turn it on again. HWE09080 - 243 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4102 (THMU-A) Open phase 2. Error definition and error detection method An open phase of the power supply (L1 phase, L2 phase) was detected at power on. The L3 phase current is outside of the specified range. The open phase of the power supply may not always be detected if a power voltage from another circuit is applied. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy Check the input voltage to the power supply terminal block TB1. (1) Power supply problem Open phase voltage of the power supply Power supply voltage drop (2) Noise filter problem Coil problem Circuit board failure (3) Wiring failure Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is 188 V or above. If the voltage is below 188V, check the wiring connection between the noise filter board CN02 and control board CNAC. Confirm that the wiring between TB23 and INV board SC-T is put through CT3. (4) Blown fuse Check that F01 on the control board is not blown. ->If a blown fuse is found, check for a short-circuiting or earth fault of the actuator. (5) CT3 failure Replace the inverter if this problem is detected after the compressor has gone into operation. (6) Control board failure Replace the control board if none of the above is causing the problem. HWE09080 Check the coil connections. Check for coil burnout. Confirm that the voltage at the CN02 connector is 188 V or above. - 244 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4102 (YHMU-A) Open phase 2. Error definition and error detection method An open phase of the power supply (L1 phase, L2 phase) was detected at power on. The L3 phase current is outside of the specified range. The open phase of the power supply may not always be detected if a power voltage from another circuit is applied. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy Check the input voltage to the power supply terminal block TB1. (1) Power supply problem Open phase voltage of the power supply Power supply voltage drop (2) Noise filter problem Coil problem Circuit board failure (3) Wiring failure Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is 190 V or above. If the voltage is below 190, check the wiring between noise filter CN6, noise filter CN2, transformer box, and control board CNAC. Confirm that the wiring between noise filter TB23 and INV board SC-L3 is put through CT3. (4) Blown fuse Check F01 on the control board, F4, and F5 for a blown fuse. ->If a blown fuse is found, check for a short-circuiting or earth fault of the actuator. (5) CT3 failure Replace the inverter if this problem is detected after the compressor has gone into operation. (6) Control board failure Replace the control board if none of the above is causing the problem. HWE09080 Check the coil connections. Check for coil burnout. Check that the voltage across TB21 and TB22 on the noise filter board is 414V or above. - 245 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4106 2. Error definition and error detection method Transmission power output failure 3. 1) 2) 3) 4) Cause Wiring failure Transmission power supply cannot output voltage because overcurrent was detected. Voltage cannot be output due to transmission power supply problem. Transmission voltage detection circuit failure 4. Check method and remedy Check the items in IX [4] -7- (2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit on all heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. 2. Error definition and error detection method Transmission power reception failure 3. Cause One of the heat source units stopped supplying power, but no other heat source units start supplying power. 4. Check method and remedy Check the items in IX [4] -7- (2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit on all heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit. HWE09080 - 246 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4115 (THMU-A) Power supply signal sync error 2. Error definition and error detection method The frequency cannot be determined when the power is switched on. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Power supply error Check the voltage of the power supply terminal block (TB1). (2) Noise filter problem Coil problem Circuit board failure (3) Faulty wiring Check fuse F01 on the control board. (4) Wiring failure Between noise filter board CN02 and control board CNAC Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is 188 V or above. (5) Control board failure If none of the items described above is applicable, and if the trouble reappears even after the power is switched on again, replace the control board. Check the coil connections. Check for coil burnout. Confirm that the voltage at the CN02 connector is 188 V or above. 1. Error Code 4115 (YHMU-A) Power supply signal sync error 2. Error definition and error detection method The frequency cannot be determined when the power is switched on. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Power supply error (2) Noise filter problem Coil problem Circuit board failure (3) Faulty wiring Check F01 on the control board, F4, and F5 for a blown fuse. (4) Wiring failure Between noise filter CN2, transformer box, and control board CNAC Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is 190 V or above. (5) Control board failure If none of the items described above is applicable, and if the trouble reappears even after the power is switched on again, replace the control board. HWE09080 Check the voltage of the power supply terminal block (TB1). Check the coil connections. Check for coil burnout. Check that the voltage across TB21 and TB22 on the noise filter board is 414V or above. - 247 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4116 RPM error/Motor error 2. Error definition and error detection method LOSSNAY The motor keep running even if the power is OFF. The thermal overload relay is ON. (Only for the three-phase model) Indoor unit If detected less than 180rpm or more than 2000rpm, the indoor unit will restart and keep running for 3 minutes.If detected again, the display will appear. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Board failure Replace the board. (2) Motor malfunction Check for the motor and the solenoid switch. (3) Solenoid switch malfunction HWE09080 - 248 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4220 (THMU-A) Abnormal bus voltage drop (Detail code 108) 2. Error definition and error detection method If Vdc 160V or less is detected during Inverter operation. (S/W detection) 3. Cause, check method and remedy (1) Power supply environment Check whether the unit makes an instantaneous stop when the detection result is abnormal or a power failure occurs. Check whether the power voltage is 188V or less across all phases. (2) Voltage drop detected 4220 Check the voltage between the tab terminal TB-P and TB-N on the INV board while the inverter is stopped. -> Check the following items if it is 253V or above. 1) Confirm on the LED monitor that the bus voltage is above 160 V. Replace the INV board if it is below 160 V. 2) Check the voltage at CN505 on the control board. ->Go to (3). 3) Check the coil connections (L1 - L3) and for coil burnout. 4) Check the wiring connections between the following sections Between the noise filter board and INV board. Between the INV board and DCL. Between the INV board and C1. Replace 72C if no problems are found.-> Check the following items if the voltage is below 253V. 1) Check the coil connections (L1 - L3) and for coil burnout. 2) Check the wiring between the noise filter board and INV board. 3) Check the connection to SC-P1 and SC-P2 on the INV board. 4) Check the in-rush current resistor value. Replace the INV board if no problems are found. (3) Control board failure Check that 200 VAC is applied to connector CN505 on the control board while the inverter is operating. If voltage is absent or the wrong voltage is applied, check the fuse F01. Replace the control board if no problems are found with the fuse. Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 328) HWE09080 - 249 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4220 (YHMU-A) Abnormal bus voltage drop (Detail code 108) 2. Error definition and error detection method If Vdc 289V or less is detected during Inverter operation. (S/W detection) 3. Cause, check method and remedy (1) Power supply environment Check whether the unit makes an instantaneous stop when the detection result is abnormal or a power failure occurs. Check whether the power voltage (Between L1 and L2, L2 and L3, and L1 and L3) is 414V or less across all phases. (2) Voltage drop detected 4220 Check the voltage between the FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped and if it is 420 V or above, check the following items. 1) Confirm on the LED monitor that the bus voltage is above 289V. Replace the INV board if it is below 289 V. 2) Check the voltage at CN72 on the control board. ->Go to (3). 3) Check the noise filter coil connections and for coil burnout. 4) Check the wiring connections between the following sections Between the noise filter board and INV board. Between the INV board and DCL. Replace 72C if no problems are found. 5) Check the IGBT module resistance on the INV board (Refer to the Trouble shooting for IGBT module). Check the voltage between the FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped and if it is less than 420 V, check the following items. 1) Check the coil connections and for coil burnout on the noise filter. 2) Check the wiring between the noise filter board and INV board. 3) Check the connection to SC-L1 and SC-L2 on the INV board. 4) Check the in-rush current resistor value. 5) Check the 72C resistance value. 6) Check the DCL resistance value. Replace the INV board if no problems are found. (3) Control board failure Check that 12VDC is applied to connector CN72 on the control board while the inverter is operating. If voltage is absent or the wrong voltage is applied, check the fuse F01. Replace the control board if no problems are found with the fuse. Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 333) HWE09080 - 250 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4220 (THMU-A) Abnormal bus voltage rise (Detail code 109) 2. Error definition and error detection method If Vdc 400V is detected during inverter operation. 3. Cause, check method and remedy (1) Different voltage connection Check the power supply voltage on the power supply terminal block (TB1). (2) INV board failure If the problem recurs, replace the INV board. In the case of 4220: INV board Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 328) 1. Error Code 4220 (YHMU-A) Abnormal bus voltage rise (Detail code 109) 2. Error definition and error detection method If Vdc 830V is detected during inverter operation. 3. Cause, check method and remedy (1) Different voltage connection Check the power supply voltage on the power supply terminal block (TB1). (2) INV board failure If the problem recurs, replace the INV board. In the case of 4220: INV board Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 333) 1. Error Code 4220 (THMU-A) Logic error (Detail code 111) 2. Error definition and error detection method H/W error If only the H/W error logic circuit operates, and no identifiable error is detected. 3. Cause, Check method and remedy In the case of 4220 Cause (1) External noise (2) INV board failure Check method and remedy Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]. Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 328) HWE09080 - 251 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4220 (YHMU-A) Logic error (Detail code 111) 2. Error definition and error detection method H/W error If only the H/W error logic circuit operates, and no identifiable error is detected. 3. Cause, Check method and remedy In the case of 4220 Cause (1) External noise (2) INV board failure Check method and remedy Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1].(page 335) Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 333) 1. Error Code 4220 Low bus voltage at startup (Detail code 131) 2. Error definition and error detection method When Vdc 160 V is detected just before the inverter operation. 3. Cause, check method and remedy (1) Inverter main circuit failure Same as detail code 108 of 4220 error Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter. HWE09080 - 252 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4230 (THMU-A) Heatsink overheat protection 2. Error definition and error detection method When the heat sink temperature (THHS) remains at or above TOH is detected. Model TOH P72, P96, P120 models 100°C [212°F] 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause (1) Air passage blockage (2) THHS failure Check method and remedy Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked 1) Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT. (Check for proper installation of the IGBT heatsink.) 2) Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT. ->If an abnormal value appears, replace the INV board. Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 328) 1. Error Code 4230 (YHMU-A) Heatsink overheat protection 2. Error definition and error detection method When the heat sink temperature (THHS) remains at or above 100°C [212°F] is detected. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause (1) Air passage blockage (2) THHS failure Check method and remedy Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked 1) Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT. (Check for proper installation of the IGBT heatsink.) 2) Check the THHS sensor reading on the LED monitor. ->If an abnormal value appears, replace the INV board. Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 333) HWE09080 - 253 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4240 (THMU-A) Overload protection 2. Error definition and error detection method If the output current of "(Iac) >Imax (Arms)" or "THHS > TOL" is continuously detected for 10 minutes or more during inverter operation. Model Imax(Arms) P72, P96, P120 models 35 Model TOL P72, P96, P120 models 95°C [203°F] 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Air passage blockage Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked (2) Power supply environment Power supply voltage is 188 V or above. (3) Inverter failure Refer to IX [4] -6-.(page 328) (4) Compressor failure Check that the compressor has not overheated during operation. -> Check the refrigerant circuit (oil return section). Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 330) Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 328) 1. Error Code 4240 (YHMU-A) Overload protection 2. Error definition and error detection method If the output current of "(Iac) >Imax (Arms)" or "THHS > 95°C [203°F] " is continuously detected for 10 minutes or more during inverter operation. Model Imax(Arms) P72, P96, P120 models 19 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Air passage blockage Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked (2) Power supply environment Power supply voltage is 414 V or above. (3) Inverter failure Refer to IX [4] -6-.(page 333) (4) Compressor failure Check that the compressor has not overheated during operation. -> Check the refrigerant circuit (oil return section). Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 335) Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 333) HWE09080 - 254 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4250 (THMU-A) IPM error (Detail code 101) 2. Error definition and error detection method IPM error signal is detected. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause (1) Inverter output related Check method and remedy Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].(page 330) Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 328) 1. Error Code 4250 (YHMU-A) IPM error (Detail code 101) 2. Error definition and error detection method IPM error signal is detected. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause (1) Inverter output related Check method and remedy Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].(page 335) Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board, if no problems are found. (Refer to the Trouble shooting for IGBT module) Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 333) HWE09080 - 255 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4250 (THMU-A) Instantaneous overcurrent (Detail code 106) Overcurrent (Detail code 107) 2. Error definition and error detection method Overcurrent 123 Apeak or 42 Arms and above is detected by the current sensor. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause (1) Inverter output related Check method and remedy Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].(page 330) Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board if no problems are found. (Refer to "Troubleshooting" for IGBT module related problems) Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 328) 1. Error Code 4250 (YHMU-A) Instantaneous overcurrent (Detail code 106) Overcurrent (Detail code 107) 2. Error definition and error detection method Overcurrent 94 Apeak or 22 Arms and above is detected by the current sensor. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause (1) Inverter output related Check method and remedy Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].(page 335) Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board if no problems are found. (Refer to "Troubleshooting" for IGBT module related problems) Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 333) HWE09080 - 256 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4250 Short-circuited IPM/Ground fault (Detail code 104) 2. Error definition and error detection method When IPM/IGBT short damage or grounding on the load side is detected just before starting the inverter. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Grounding fault compressor Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2]. (2) Inverter output related Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4]. Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter. HWE09080 - 257 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 4250 Overcurrent error due to short-circuited motor (Detail code 105) 2. Error definition and error detection method When a short is detected on the load side just before starting the inverter operation. 3. Cause, Check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Short - circuited compressor Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2]. (2) Output wiring Check for a short circuit. Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter. 1. Error Code 4260 (THMU-A) Heatsink overheat protection at startup 2. Error definition and error detection method The heatsink temperature (THHS) remains at or above TOH for 10 minutes or more at inverter startup. Model TOH P72, P96, P120 models 100°C [212°F] 3. Cause, check method and remedy Same as 4230 error 1. Error Code 4260 (YHMU-A) Heatsink overheat protection at startup 2. Error definition and error detection method The heatsink temperature (THHS) remains at or above 100°C [212°F] for 10 minutes or more at inverter startup. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Same as 4230 error HWE09080 - 258 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 5101 Return air temperature sensor (TH21) fault (Indoor unit) Return air temperature sensor (TH4) fault (OA processing unit) 5102 Pipe temperature sensor (TH22) fault (Indoor unit) Pipe temperature sensor (TH2) fault (OA processing unit) 5103 Gas-side pipe temperature sensor (TH23) fault (Indoor unit) Gas-side pipe temperature sensor (TH3) fault (OA processing unit) 5104 Intake air temperature sensor (TH1) fault (OA processing unit) Intake air temperature sensor (TH24) fault (All-fresh (100% outdoor air) type indoor unit) 2. Error definition and error detection method If a short or an open is detected during thermostat ON, the heat source unit turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes. When the error is not restored after 3 minutes (if restored, the heat source unit runs normally), the heat source unit makes an error stop. Short: detectable at 90°C [194°F] or higher Open: detectable at -40°C [-40°F] or lower Sensor error at gas-side cannot be detected under the following conditions. During heating operation During cooling operation for 3 minutes after the compressor turns on. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause (1) Thermistor failure (2) Connector contact failure (3) Disconnected wire or partial disconnected thermistor wire (4) Unattached thermistor or contact failure (5) Indoor board (detection circuit) failure HWE09080 Check method and remedy Check the thermistor resistor. 0°C [32°F]: 15 kohm 10°C [50°F]: 9.7 kohm 20°C [68°F] : 6.4 kohm 30°C [86°F] : 4.3 kohm 40°C [104°F] : 3.1 kohm Check the connector contact. When no fault is found, the indoor board is a failure. - 259 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 5102 HIC bypass circuit outlet temperature sensor (TH2) fault (Heat source unit) 5103 Heat exchanger outlet temperature sensor (TH3) fault (Heat source unit) 5104 Discharge temperature sensor (TH4) fault (Heat source unit) 5105 Accumulator inlet temperature sensor (TH5) fault (Heat source unit) 5106 HIC circuit outlet temperature sensor (TH6) fault (Heat source unit) 5107 Outside temperature sensor (TH7) fault (Heat source unit) 2. Error definition and error detection method When a short (high temperature intake) or an open (low temperature intake) of the thermistor is detected (the first detection), the heat source unit stops, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts when the detected temperature of the thermistor. When a short or an open is detected again (the second detection) after the first restart of the heat source unit, the heat source unit stops, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts in 3 minutes when the detected temperature is within the normal range. When a short or an open is detected again (the third detection) after the previous restart of the heat source unit, the heat source unit makes an error stop. When a short or an open of the thermistor is detected just before the restart of the heat source unit, the heat source unit makes an error stop, and the error code "5102", "5103", 5104", "5105", "5106"or "5107" will appear. During 3-minute antirestart mode, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display. A short or an open described above is not detected for 10 minutes after the compressor start, during defrost mode, or for 3 minutes after defrost mode. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Thermistor failure Check thermistor resistance. (2) Pinched lead wire Check for pinched lead wire. (3) Torn wire coating Check for wire coating. (4) A pin on the male connector is missing or contact failure Check connector. (5) Disconnected wire Check for wire. (6) Thermistor input circuit failure on the control board Check the intake temperature of the sensor with the LED monitor. When the temperature is far different from the actual temperature, replace the control board. TH2 TH3 TH4 TH5 TH6 TH7 HWE09080 Short detection 70 C [158 F ] and above (0.4 k ) 110 C [230 F ] and above (0.4 k ) 240 C [464 F ] and above (0.57 k ) 70 C [158 F ] and above (0.4 k ) 70 C [158 F ] and above (1.14 k ) 110 C [230 F ] and above (0.4 k ) -40 -40 0 -40 -40 -40 C [ -40 C [ -40 C [ 32 C [ -40 C [ -40 C [ -40 - 260 - Open detection F ] and below (130 k F ] and below (130 k F ] and below (698 k F ] and below (130 k F ] and below (130 k F ] and below (130 k ) ) ) ) ) ) GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 5110 Heatsink temperature sensor (THHS) fault (Detail code 01) 2. Error definition and error detection method When a short or an open of THHS is detected just before or during the inverter operation. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause (1) INV board failure Check method and remedy If the problem recurs when the unit is put into operation, replace the INV board. Refer to section -6- "Inverter " under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter. HWE09080 - 261 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 5201 High-pressure sensor fault (63HS1) 2. Error definition and error detection method If the high pressure sensor detects 0.098MPa [14psi] or less during the operation, the heat source unit stops once, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes when the detected high pressure sensor is 0.098MPa [14psi] or more. If the high pressure sensor detects 0.098MPa [14psi] or less just before the restart, the heat source unit makes an error stop, and the error code "5201" will appear. During 3-minute antirestart mode, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display. A error is not detected for 3 minutes after the compressor start. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) High pressure sensor failure (2) Pressure drop due to refrigerant leak (3) Torn wire coating (4) A pin on the male connector is missing or contact failure (5) Disconnected wire (6) High pressure sensor input circuit failure on the control board HWE09080 Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the high pressure sensor. (IX [4] -1- (page 306)) - 262 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 5301 (THMU-A) ACCT sensor fault (Detail code 115) 2. Error definition and error detection method When the formula "output current < 2 Arms" remains satisfied for 10 seconds while the inverter is in operation. 3. Cause, check method and remedy P72 and P96 models Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inverter open output phase Check the output wiring connections. (2) Compressor failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 330) (3) INV board failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4].(page 330) Refer to section -6-"Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 328) 1. Error Code 5301 (YHMU-A) ACCT sensor fault (Detail code 115) 2. Error definition and error detection method When the formula "output current < 1.5 Arms" remains satisfied for 10 seconds while the inverter is in operation. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inverter open output phase Check the output wiring connections. (2) Compressor failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2]. (3) INV board failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4]. Refer to section -6-"Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.(page 333) 1. Error Code 5301 ACCT sensor circuit fault (Detail code 117) 2. Error definition and error detection method When an error value is detected with the ACCT detection circuit just before the inverter starts 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) INV board failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4]. (2) Compressor failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2]. Refer to section -6-"Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter. HWE09080 - 263 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 5301 Open-circuited IPM/Loose ACCT connector (Detail code 119) 2. Error definition and error detection method Presence of enough current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before inverter startup. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inverter output wiring problem Check output wiring connections. Confirm that the U- and W-phase output cables are put through CT12 and CT22 on the INV board respectively. (2) Inverter failure Refer to IX [4] -6-. (3) Compressor failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2]. Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter. 1. Error Code 5301 Faulty ACCT wiring (Detail code 120) 2. Error definition and error detection method Presence of target current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before startup. (Detection of improperly mounted ACCT sensor) 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inverter output wiring problem Check output wiring connections. Confirm that the U- and W-phase output cables are put through CT12 and CT22 on the INV board respectively. (2) Inverter failure Refer to IX [4] -6-. (3) Compressor failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2]. (4) INV board failure Replace the INV board. Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter. HWE09080 - 264 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 5701 Loose float switch connector 2. Error definition and error detection method Detection of the disconnected float switch (open-phase condition) during operation 3. Cause, check method and remedy (1) CN4F disconnection or contact failure Check for disconnection of the connector (CN4F) on the indoor unit control board. 1. Error Code 6201 Remote controller board fault (nonvolatile memory error) 2. Error definition and error detection method This error is detected when the data cannot be read out from the built-in nonvolatile memory on the remote controller. 3. Cause, check method and remedy (1) Remote controller failure Replace the remote controller. 1. Error Code 6202 Remote controller board fault (clock IC error) 2. Error definition and error detection method This error is detected when the built-in clock on the remote controller is not properly functioning. 3. Cause, check method and remedy (1) Remote controller failure Replace the remote controller. HWE09080 - 265 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6600 Address overlaps 2. Error definition and error detection method An error in which signals from more than one indoor units with the same address are received The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller indicate the controller that detected the error. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy Two or more of the following have the same address: Heat source units, indoor units, LOSSNAY units, controllers such as M-NET remote controllers. 6600 "01" appears on the remote controller Unit #01 detected the error. Two or more units in the system have 01 as their address. Find the unit that has the same address as that of the error source. Once the unit is found, correct the address. Then, turn off the heat source units, indoor units, and LOSSNAY units, keep them all turned off for at least five minutes, and turn them back on. 1. Error Code 6601 Polarity setting error 2. Error definition and error detection method The error detected when transmission processor cannot distinguish the polarities of the M-NET transmission line. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause (1) No voltage is applied to the M-NET transmission line. (2) M-NET transmission line is short-circuited. HWE09080 Check method and remedy Check if power is supplied to the M-NET transmission line and correct any problem found. - 266 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6602 Transmission processor hardware error 2. Error definition and error detection method Although "0" was surely transmitted by the transmission processor, "1" is displayed on the transmission line. The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error occurred. 3. Cause 1) When the wiring work of or the polarity of either the indoor or heat source transmission line is performed or is changed while the power is on, the transmitted data will collide, the wave shape will be changed, and an error will be detected. 2) Grounding fault of the transmission line 3) When grouping the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units, the male power supply connectors on the multiple heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40). 4) When the power supply unit for transmission lines is used in the system connected with MELANS, the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the heat source unit. 5) Controller failure of the source of the error 6) When the transmission data is changed due to the noise on the transmission line 7) Voltage is not applied on the transmission line for centralized control (in case of grouped indoor units connected to different heat source units or in case of the system connected with MELANS) 4. Check method and remedy YES Is the transmission line work performed while the power is on? Turn off the power source of heat sourceindoor units, and turn them on again. NO Check the power source of the indoor unit. NO 198 / 264V? Faulty power source work YES Check the transmission line work is performed and the shielded wire is treated properly. Grounding fault or does the shielded wire contact with the transmission line? YES Improper transmission line work NO System ? Single-heat source-unit system Multiple-heat source-unit system System with the power supply unit for transmission lines Confirm that the power supply connector on the heat source unit is not plugged into CN40. Confirm that the power supply connector on the heat source unit is not plugged into CN40. Is the male power supply connector connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on only one of the heat source unit? YES NO Tightly reconnect the male power supply connector to the female power supply switch connector (CN40). Investigation into the transmission line noise Noise exist? NO Is the male power supply connector connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) ? YES Disconnect the male power supply on CN40 and connect it to CN41 *For the investigation method, follow YES Investigation into the cause of the noise NO Controller failure of the source of the error Correct the error. HWE09080 - 267 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6603 Transmission line bus busy error 2. Error definition and error detection method Generated error when the command cannot be transmitted for 4-10 minutes in a row due to bus-busy Generated error when the command cannot be transmitted to the transmission line for 4-10 minutes in a row due to noise The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error occurred. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) The transmission processor cannot be transmitted as the short-wavelength voltage like noise exists consecutively on the transmission line. (2) Error source controller failure No noise indicates that the error source controller is a failure. If noise exists, investigate the noise. -> No noise indicates that the error source controller is a failure. -> If noise exists, investigate the noise. 1. Error Code 6606 Communication error between device and transmission processors 2. Error definition and error detection method Communication error between the main microcomputer on the indoor unit board and the microcomputer for transmission The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error occurred. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy (1) Data is not properly transmitted due to accidental erroneous operation of the controller of the error source. (2) Error source controller failure HWE09080 - 268 - Turn off the power source of the heat source and the indoor units.(When the power source is turned off separately, the microcomputer will not be reset, and the error will not be corrected.) -> If the same error occurs, the error source controller is a failure. GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6607 No ACK error 2. Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK). 3. System configuration (1) System with one heat source unit Error source address Error display Detection method Heat ME resource mote conunit (OC) troller (RC) MA remote controller (MA) No acknowledgement (ACK) at IC transmission to OC BC controller (BC) Indoor unit (IC) LOSSNAY (LC) ME remote controller (RC) HWE09080 ME remote controller (RC) MA remote controller (MA) No acknowledgement (ACK) at IC transmission to BC ME remote controller (RC) MA remote controller (MA) No acknowledgement (ACK) at RC transmission to IC ME remote controller (RC) MA remote controller (MA) ME remote controller (RC) MA remote controller (MA) No acknowledgement (ACK) at IC transmission to LC No acknowledgement (ACK) at IC transmission to RC Cause (1) Contact failure of transmission line of OC or IC (2) Decrease of transmission line voltage/signal by exceeding acceptable range of transmission wiring. Farthest:200 m [656ft] or less Remote controller wiring: 10m [32ft] or less (3) Erroneous sizing of transmission line (Not within the range below). Wire diameter: 1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more (4) Heat source unit control board failure (1) When BC controller address is changed or modified during operation. (2) Faulty or disconnected transmission wiring of BC controller (3) Disconnected connector of BC controller (CN02) (4) Faulty control board of BC controller (1) When IC unit address is changed or modified during operation. (2) Faulty or disconnected IC transmission wiring (3) Disconnected IC connector (CN2M) (4) Indoor unit controller failure (5) ME remote controller failure (1) The power source of LOSSNAY has been shut off. (2) When the address of LOSSNAY is changed in the middle of the operation (3) Faulty or disconnected transmission wiring of LOSSNAY (4) Disconnected connector (CN1) on LOSSNAY (5) Controller failure of LOSSNAY (1) Faulty transmission wiring at IC unit side. (2) Faulty wiring of the transmission line for ME remote controller (3) When the address of ME remote controller is changed in the middle of the operation (4) ME remote controller failure - 269 - Check method and remedy Turn off the power source of the heat source unit, and turn it on again. If the error is accidental, it will run normally. If not, check the causes (1) (4). Turn off the heat sourceindoor units for 5 or more minutes, and turn them on again. If the error is accidental, they will run normally. If not, check the causes (1) - (4). Turn off the heat sourceindoor units for 5 or more minutes, and turn them on again. If the error is accidental, they will run normally. If not, check the causes (1) - (5). Turn off the power source of LOSSNAY and turn it on again. If the error is accidental, it will run normally. If not, check the causes (1) - (5). Turn off the power source of the heat source unit for 5 minutes or more, and turn it on again. If the error is accidental, it will run normally. If not, check the causes (1) - (4). GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6607 No ACK error 2. Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK). 3. System configuration (2) Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units Error source address Error display Detection method Cause Check method and remedy Heat source unit (OC) ME remote controller (RC) MA remote controller (MA) No acknowledgement (ACK) at IC transmission to OC Same cause as that for system with one heat source unit Same remedy as that for system with one heat source unit BC controller (BC) ME remote controller (RC) MA remote controller (MA) No acknowledgement (ACK) at IC transmission to BC Same cause as that for system with one heat source unit Same remedy as that for system with one heat source unit Indoor unit (IC) ME remote controller (RC) MA remote controller (MA) No acknowledgement (ACK) at RC transmission to IC (1) Same causes as (1) - (5) for system with one heat source unit 1) Turn off the power sources of the heat source and indoor units for 5 or more minutes, and turn them on again. If the error is accidental, the will run normally.If not, check the cause 2). (2) Disconnection or short circuit of the transmission line for the heat source unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection (TB7) 2) Check the causes of (1) - (5). If the cause is found, correct it. If no cause is found, check 3). (3) When multiple heat source units are connected and the power source of one of the heat source units has been shut off. 3) Check the LED displays for troubleshooting on other remote controllers whether an error occurs. (4) The male power supply connector of the heat source unit is not connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40). (5) The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for centralized control. If an error is found, -> If an error is found, check the check code definition, and correct the error. If no error is found, -> Indoor unit board failure If an error occurs, after the unit runs normally once, the following causes may be considered. Total capacity error (7100) Capacity code error (7101) Error in the number of connected units (7102) Address setting error (7105) HWE09080 - 270 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6607 No ACK error 2. Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK). 3. System configuration (2) Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units Error source address LOSSNAY (LC) Error display ME remote controller (RC) MA remote controller (MA) Detection method No acknowledgement (ACK) at IC transmission to LC Cause Check method and remedy (1) Factors (1) through (5) in the 1) "Factors in system with one heat source unit" (When performing an interlocked operation of the LOSSNAY unit and the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units.) Turn off the power source of heat source unit for 5 or more minutes, and turn it on again. If the error is accidental, it will run normally.If not, check the cause 2). (2) Disconnection or short circuit of the transmission line for the heat source unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection (TB7) 2) Check the causes of (1) - (5). If the cause is found, correct it. If no cause is found, check 3). (3) When multiple heat source units are connected and the power source of one of the heat source units has been shut off. 3) Same cause as that for indoor unit described in 3) (4) The male power supply connector of the heat source unit is not connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40). (5) The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for centralized control. If an error occurs, after the unit runs normally once, the following causes may be considered. Total capacity error (7100) Capacity code error (7101) Error in the number of connected units (7102) Address setting error (7105) HWE09080 - 271 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6607 No ACK error 2. Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK). 3. System configuration (2) Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units Error source address Error display ME remote controller (RC) ME remote controller (RC) MA remote controller (MA) Detection method No acknowledgement (ACK) at IC transmission to RC Cause Check method and remedy (1) Same causes as (1) - (4) for system with one heat source unit 1) Turn off the power source of heat source unit for 5 or more minutes, and turn it on again. If the error is accidental, it will run normally.If not, check the cause 2). (2) Disconnection or short circuit of the transmission line for the heat source unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection (TB7) 2) Check the causes of (1) - (5). If the cause is found, correct it. If no cause is found, check 3). (3) When multiple heat source units are connected and the power source of one of the heat source units has been shut off. 3) Same cause as that for indoor unit described in 3) (4) The male power supply connector of the heat source unit is not connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40). (5) The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for centralized control. If the problem recurs after normal operation is restored, the problem is caused by one of the following factors: Total capacity error (7100) Capacity code setting error (7101) Error in the number of connected units (7102) Address setting error (7105) HWE09080 - 272 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6607 No ACK error 2. Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK). 3. System configuration (3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS) Error source address Error display Detection method Cause Check method and remedy Heat source unit (OC) ME remote controller (RC) System controller (SC) MA remote controller (MA) No acknowledgement (ACK) at IC transmission to OC Same cause as that for system with one heat source unit Same remedy as that for system with one heat source unit BC controller (BC) ME remote controller (RC) system controller (SC) MA remote controller (MA) No acknowledgement (ACK) at IC transmission to BC Same cause as that for system with one heat source unit Same remedy as that for system with one heat source unit HWE09080 - 273 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6607 No ACK error 2. Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK). 3. System configuration (3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS) Error source address Indoor unit (IC) Error display ME remote controller (RC) MA remote controller (MA) Detection method Cause No acknowledgement (ACK) at RC transmission to IC System control- No acknowl- 1. ler (SC) edgement (ACK) at SC (1) transmission to IC 2. HWE09080 Check method and remedy Same as grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units Same remedy as that for grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units Error occurrence on some IC Same remedy as that for system with one heat source unit Same cause as that for system with one heat source unit Error occurrence on all IC in the system with one heat source unit 1) Check the LED display for troubleshooting on the heat source unit. If an error is found, check the check code definition, and correct the error. If no error is found, check 2). (1) Total capacity error (7100) (2) Capacity code error (7101) (3) Error in the number of connected units (7102) (4) Address setting error (7105) (5) Disconnection or short circuit of the trans- 2) Check (5) - (7) on the left. mission line for the heat source unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection (TB7) (6) Turn off the power source of the heat source unit (7) Malfunction of electrical system for the heat source unit 3. Error occurrence on all IC (1) Same causes as (1) - (7) described in 2. (2) The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control. (3) Disconnection or shutdown of the power source of the power supply unit for transmission line (4) System controller (MELANS) malfunction - 274 - Check voltage of the transmission line for centralized control. 20V or more: Check (1) and (2) on the left. Less than 20V: Check (3) on the left. GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6607 No ACK error 2. Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK). 3. System configuration (3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS) Error source address ME remote controller (RC) Error display Detection method ME remote controller (RC) System controller (SC) MA remote controller (MA) No acknowledgement (ACK) at IC transmission to RC System controller (SC) No acknowledgement (ACK) at MELANS transmission to RC Cause 1. Check method and remedy Same as grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units Same remedy as that for grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units Error occurrence on some IC Same remedy as that for system with one heat source unit (1) Same cause as that for system with one heat source unit 2. Error occurrence on all IC in the system with one heat source unit 1) (1) An error is found by the heat source unit. Total capacity error (7100) Capacity code error (7101) Error in the number of connected units (7102) Address setting error (7105) (2) Disconnection or short circuit of the 2) transmission line for the heat source unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection (TB7) Check the LED display for troubleshooting on the heat source unit. If an error is found, check the check code definition, and correct the error. If no error is found, check the cause 2). Check (2) - (4) on the left. (3) Turn off the power source of the heat source unit (4) Malfunction of electrical system for the heat source unit 3. Error occurrence on all IC Check (1) - (4) on the left. (1) Same causes as (1) - (4) described in 2. (2) When the power supply unit for transmission lines is used and the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control (3) Disconnection or shutdown of the power source of the power supply unit for transmission line (4) System controller (MELANS) malfunction HWE09080 - 275 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6607 No ACK error 2. Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK). 3. System configuration (3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS) Error source address System controller (SC) HWE09080 Error display ME remote controller (RC) MA remote controller (MA) Detection method No acknowledgement (ACK) at IC transmission to SC Cause 1. Error display on some displays on ME remote controllers (1) Faulty wiring of the transmission line for ME remote controller (2) Disconnection or contact failure of the transmission connector for ME remote controller (3) ME remote controller failure 2. Error occurrence on all IC in the system with one heat source unit (1) An error is found by the heat source unit. Total capacity error (7100) Capacity code error (7101) Error in the number of connected units (7102) Address setting error (7105) (2) Disconnection or short circuit of the transmission line for the heat source unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection (TB7) (3) Turn off the power source of the heat source unit (4) Malfunction of electrical system for the heat source unit 3. Error display on all displays on ME remote controllers (1) Same causes as (1) - (4) described in 2. (2) When the power supply unit for transmission lines is used and the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control (3) Disconnection or shutdown of the power source of the power supply unit for transmission line (4) System controller (MELANS) malfunction - 276 - Check method and remedy Check (1) - (3) on the left. 1) Check the LED display for troubleshooting on the heat source unit. If an error is found, check the check code definition, and correct the error. If no error is found, check the cause 2) 2) Check (2) - (4) on the left. Check (1) - (4) on the left GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6607 No ACK error 2. Error definition and error detection method The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK). 3. System configuration (4) Errors that are not limited to a particular system Error source address Address which should not be existed Error display Detection method - - Cause (1) Although the address of ME remote controller has been changed after the group is set using ME remote controller, the indoor unit is keeping the memory of the previous address. The same symptom will appear for the registration with SC. (2) Although the address of LOSSNAY has been changed after the interlock registration of LOSSNAY is made using ME remote controller, the indoor unit is keeping the memory of the previous address. Check method and remedy Delete unnecessary information of non-existing address which some indoor units have. Use either of the following two methods for deletion. 1) Address deletion by ME remote controller Delete unnecessary address information using the manual setting function of ME remote controller. Refer to this service handbook "IV [2] Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller 1. (3) Address deletion."(page 98) 2) Deletion of connection information of the heat source unit by the deleting switch Note that this switch deletes all the group information set via ME remote controller and all the interlock information of LOSSNAY and the indoor unit. Turn off the power source of the heat source unit, and wait for 5 minutes. Turn on the dip switch (SW22) on the heat source unit control board. Turn on the power source of the heat source unit, and wait for 5 minutes. Turn off the power source of the heat source unit, and wait for 5 minutes. Turn off the dip switch (SW22) on the heat source unit control board. Turn on the power source of the heat source unit. HWE09080 - 277 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6608 No response error 2. Error definition and error detection method When no response command is returned although acknowledgement (ACK) is received after transmission, an error is detected. When the data is transmitted 10 times in a row with 3 seconds interval, an error is detected on the transmission side. The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error occurred. 3. Cause 1) The transmission line work is performed while the power is on, the transmitted data will collide, and the wave shape will be changed. 2) The transmission is sent and received repeatedly due to noise. 3) Decrease of transmission line voltage/signal by exceeding acceptable range of transmission wiring. Farthest:200m [656ft] or less Remote controller wiring:12m [39ft] or less 4) The transmission line voltage/signal is decreased due to erroneous sizing of transmission line. Wire diameter: 1.25mm2[AWG16] or more 4. Check method and remedy 1) When an error occurs during commissioning, turn off the power sources for the heat source unit, indoor unit, BC controller, and LOSSNAY for 5 or more minutes, and then turn them on again. When they return to normal operation, the cause of the error is the transmission line work performed with the power on. If an error occurs again, check the cause 2). 2) Check 3) and 4) above. If the cause is found, correct it. If no cause is found, check 3). 3) Check transmission wave shape/ noise on trans-mission line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/ Noise" (page 303). Noise is the most possible cause of the error "6608". HWE09080 - 278 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6831 MA controller signal reception error (No signal reception) 2. Error definition and error detection method Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly. No proper data has been received for 3 minutes. 3. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Cause Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit. All the remote controllers are set to SUB. Failure to meet wiring regulations Wire length Wire size Number of remote controllers Number of indoor units The remote controller is removed after the installation without turning the power source off. Noise interference on the remote controller transmission lines Faulty circuit that is on the indoor board and performs transmission/ reception of the signal from the remote controller Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller 4. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Check method and remedy Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers. Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line. Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded. Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN. Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual). [OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations) [NG]: Replace the MA remote controller. [6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/ Noise".(page 303) 7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller. The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board. If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on. If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered. HWE09080 - 279 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6832 MA remote controller signal transmission error (Synchronization error) 2. Error definition and error detection method MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly. Failure to detect opening in the transmission path and unable to send signals Indoor unit : 3 minutes Remote controller : 6 seconds 3. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Cause Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit 2 or more remote controllers are set to MAIN Overlapped indoor unit address Noise interference on the remote controller lines Failure to meet wiring regulations Wire length Wire size Number of remote controllers Number of indoor units 6) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller 4. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Check method and remedy Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers. Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line. Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded. Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN. Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual). [OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations) [NG]: Replace the MA remote controller. [6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/ Noise".(page 303) 7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller. The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board. If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on. If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered. HWE09080 - 280 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6833 MA remote controller signal transmission error (Hardware error) 2. Error definition and error detection method Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly. An error occurs when the transmitted data and the received data differ for 30 times in a row. 3. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Cause Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit 2 or more remote controllers are set to MAIN Overlapped indoor unit address Noise interference on the remote controller lines Failure to meet wiring regulations Wire length Wire size Number of remote controllers Number of indoor units 6) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller 4. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Check method and remedy Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers. Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line. Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded. Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN. Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual). [OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations) [NG]: Replace the MA remote controller. [6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/ Noise".(page 303) 7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller. The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board. If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on. If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered. HWE09080 - 281 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 6834 MA controller signal reception error (Start bit detection error) 2. Error definition and error detection method Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly. No proper data has been received for 2 minutes. 3. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Cause Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit. All the remote controllers are set to SUB. Failure to meet wiring regulations Wire length Wire size Number of remote controllers Number of indoor units The remote controller is removed after the installation without turning the power source off. Noise interference on the remote controller transmission lines Faulty circuit that is on the indoor board and performs transmission/ reception of the signal from the remote controller Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller 4. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Check method and remedy Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers. Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line. Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded. Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN. Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual). [OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations) [NG]: Replace the MA remote controller. [6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/ Noise".(page 303) 7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller. The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board. If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered. HWE09080 - 282 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 7100 Total capacity error 2. Error definition and error detection method The model total of indoor units in the system with one heat source unit exceeds limitations. 3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy, Error source Heat source unit Cause (1) Check method and remedy The model total of indoor units in the system with one heat source unit exceeds the following table. Capacity Total Model P72 model 93 P96 model 124 P120 model 156 P144 model 187 P168 model 218 P192 model 249 P216 model 280 P240 model 312 P264 model 343 P288 model 374 P312 model 405 P336 model 436 P360 model 468 1) Check the model total (capacity code total) of units connected. 2) Check the model name (capacity code) of the connected indoor unit set by the switch (SW2 on indoor unit board). When the model name set by the switch is different from that of the unit connected, turn off the power source of the heat source and the indoor units, and change the setting of the model name (capacity code). (2) Model Capacity Total P72 model 108 P96 model 144 P120 model 180 P144 model 216 P168 model 252 P192 model 288 P216 model 324 P240 model 360 The model selection switches (SW5-1 - 54) on the heat source unit are set incorrectly. Model 1 SW5 2 3 ON OFF OFF 96 model ON OFF OFF 120 model OFF OFF ON (3) HWE09080 4 72 model OFF ON Check the setting for the model selection switch on the heat source unit (Dipswitches SW5-1 - 54 on the heat source unit control board). OFF The heat source unit and the auxiliary unit (OS) that is connected to the same system are not properly connected. - 283 - Confirm that the TB3 on the OC and OS are properly connected. GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 7101 Capacity code setting error 2. Error definition and error detection method Connection of incompatible (wrong capacity code) indoor unit or heat source unit 3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy Error source Cause Heat source unit Indoor unit (1) Heat source unit (2) Check method and remedy The model name (capacity code) set by the switch (SW2) is wrong. *The capacity of the indoor unit can be confirmed by the self-diagnosis function (SW1 operation) of the heat source unit. The model selection switches (SW5-1 5-4) on the heat source unit are set incorrectly. Model 1 SW5 2 3 ON OFF OFF 96 model ON OFF OFF ON HWE09080 Check the model name (capacity code) of the indoor unit which has the error source address set by the switch (SW2 on indoor unit board). When the model name set by the switch is different from that of the unit connected, turn off the power source of the heat source and the indoor units, and change the setting of the capacity code. Check the setting for the model selection switch on the heat source unit (Dipswitches SW5-1 - 5-4 on the heat source unit control board). 4 72 model OFF 120 model OFF OFF ON 1) OFF - 284 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 7102 Wrong number of connected units 2. Error definition and error detection method The number of connected indoor units is "0" or exceeds the allowable value. 3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy Error source Heat source unit Cause (1) Check method and remedy Number of indoor units connected to the heat source terminal block (TB3) for indoor-heat source transmission lines exceeds limitations described below. Number of units Total number of indoor units Number of BC controllers Number of Main BC controllers Number of Sub BC controllers Total number of LOSSNAY units (During auto address start-up only) Total number of heat source units Restriction on the number of units 1 - 15 : P72 model 1 - 20 : P96 model 1 - 26 : P120 model 1 - 31 : P144 model 1 - 36 : P168 model 1 - 41 : P192 model 2 - 46 : P216 model 2 - 50 : P240 - P360 models 1 - 18 : P72 model 1 - 24 : P96 model 1 - 30 : P120 model 1 - 36 : P144 model 1 - 42 : P168 model 1 - 48 : P192 model 2 - 50 : P216 - P240 models 1) Check whether the number of units connected to the heat source terminal block (TB3) for indoor-heat source transmission lines does not exceed the limitation. (See (1) and (2) on the left.) 2) Check (2) - (3) on the left. 3) Check whether the transmission line for the terminal block for centralized control (TB7) is not connected to the terminal block for the indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3). 4) Check the setting for the model selection switch on the heat source unit (Dipswitches SW5-7 on the heat source unit control board). 1 (P72 - P120 models only) 0 or 1 0,1 or 2 0 or 1 1 : P72 - P120 models 2 : P144 - P240 models 3 : P264 - P360 models(PQHY only) (2) Disconnected transmission line from the heat source unit or BC controller (3) Short-circuited transmission line When (2) and (3) apply, the following display will appear. M-NET remote controller Nothing appears on the remote controller because it is not powered. MA remote controller "HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" blinks. HWE09080 (4) The model selection switch (SW5-7) on the heat source unit is set to OFF. (Normally set to ON) (5) Heat source unit address setting error The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit do not have sequential address numbers. (6) A type-G BC controller is connected to a unit P144 model or above. - 285 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 7105 Address setting error 2. Error definition and error detection method Erroneous setting of OC unit address Erroneous setting of BC controller address 3. Cause, check method and remedy Error source Heat source unit BC controller Cause Check method and remedy Erroneous setting of OC unit address The address of heat source unit is not being set to 51 - 100. The address of BC controller is not set to 51 - 100. Check that the heat source unit and BC controller addresses are set to 00 or a number between 51 and 100. If the heat source unit address is out of the valid range, reset the address with the power to the heat source unit turned off. If the BC controller address is out of the valid range, reset the address with the power to both the heat source unit and BC controller turned off. 1. Error Code 7106 Attribute setting error 2. Error definition and error detection method Error source - HWE09080 Cause Check method and remedy A remote controller for use with indoor units, such as the MA remote controller, is connected to the OA processing unit whose attribute is FU. - 286 - To operate the OA processing unit directly via a remote controller for use with indoor units, such as the MA remote controller, set the DIP SW 3-1 on the OA processing unit to ON. Operation Method SW3-1 Interlocked operation with the indoor unit OFF Direct operation via the MA remote controller ON GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 7107 Port setting error 2. Error definition and error detection method The port with wrong number is connected to the indoor unit.The model total connected to the port is greater than the specification. 3. Cause, check method and remedy Error source BC controller Cause (1) Check method and remedy Model total of indoor units per each port or per each port merge is greater than the specification. Total port number Model total Single branching 54 2 branches merge 96 (2) 4 or more indoor units are connected to the same port. (3) When two ports are used, the port with the smaller number is not connected to the indoor unit. (4) For the address of the BC controller (Sub 1 or 2), 50 is not added to the smallest indoor unit address, which is connected to the BC controller (Sub1 or 2). (5) In the system to which multiple BC controllers are connected, the indoor unit address connected to the BC controller is not set as shown below. (i) The indoor unit address which is connected to the BC controller (main) (ii) The indoor unit address which is connected to the BC controller (Sub1) (iii) he indoor unit address which is connected to the BC controller (Sub2) Address setting (i)<(ii)<(iii) *(ii) and (iii) can be reversed. Is there a BC controller (Sub)? For the address of the BC controller (Sub), is 50 added to the smallest indoor unit address, which is connected to the BC controller (Sub)? YES NO Are 4 or more indoor units connected to the same port? YES Port No. setting error? YES NO NO YES Is the address of the indoor unit, which is connected to the the BC controller (Main) ,smaller than that of the indoor, which is connected to the BC controller (Sub 1 or 2)? Adjust the piping connection to the port. Port No. setting error? YES YES NO HWE09080 NO Change the indoor unit address or change the BC controller address YES Change the port No. NO The wrong model (capacity code) is set. Change the port No. Change the BC controller (Sub) address. Change the port No. NO When two ports are used, is the port with the smallest number connected to the indoor unit? NO YES NO Is the model total of indoor units connected to the same port greater than the item (1)? Before resetting the port number using the port number setting switch or the model using the model (capacity code) setting switch, turn off the power of the heat source unit, the BC controller and the indoor unit. Adjust the piping connection to the port. - 287 - Change the set indoor unit model (capacity code). Is the address of the indoor unit, which is connected to the the BC controller (Main), smaller than that of the indoor, which is connected to the BC controller (Sub 1 or 2)? NO YES GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 7110 Connection information signal transmission/reception error 2. Error definition and error detection method The given indoor unit is inoperable because it is not properly connected to the heat source unit in the same system. 3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy Error source Heat source unit Cause Check method and remedy (1) Power to the transmission booster is cut off. 1) Confirm that the power to the transmission booster is not cut off by the booster being connected to the switch on the indoor unit. (The unit will not function properly unless the transmission booster is turned on.) (2) Power resetting of the transmission booster and heat source unit. (3) Wiring failure between OC and OS 2) Confirm that the TB3 on the OC and OS are properly connected. (4) Broken wire between OC and OS. 3) (5) The model selection switch (SW5-7) on the heat source unit is set to OFF. (Normally set to ON) Check the model selection switch on the heat source unit (Dipswitch SW5-7 on the control board.). ->Reset the power to the heat source unit. 1. Error Code 7111 Remote controller sensor fault 2. Error definition and error detection method This error occurs when the temperature data is not sent although the remote controller sensor is specified. 3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy Error source Indoor unit OA processing unit HWE09080 Cause Check method and remedy The remote controller without the temperature sensor (the wireless remote controller or the ME compact remote controller (mounted type)) is used and the remote controller sensor for the indoor unit is specified. (SW1-1 is ON.) - 288 - Replace the remote controller with the one with built-in temperature sensor. GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Error Code 7113 Function setting error 2. Error source, cause, check method and remedy Error source Heat source unit Cause Check method and remedy (1) Wiring failure 1) Control board connector Check the CNTYP2,4,5 connector connection. Inverter board connector Check the CNTYP connector connection. (2) Disconnected connector, short circuit, contact failure 2) Check the compatibility of the circuit board, and replace it with a correct one if necessary. (3) Incompatibility between the control board and inverter board (Replacement of the circuit board with the wrong one) 3) Check the model selection switch on the heat source unit (Dipswitch SW5-7 on the control board.). 1. Error Code 7117 Model setting error 2. Error source, cause, check method and remedy Error source Heat source unit Cause Check method and remedy (1) Wiring failure 1) (2) Disconnected connector, short circuit, contact failure Control board connector Check the CNTYP2,4,5 connector connection. Inverter board connection Check the CNTYP connector connection 1. Error Code 7130 Incompatible unit combination 2. Error definition and error detection method The check code will appear when the indoor units with different refrigerant systems are connected. 3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy Error source Heat source unit HWE09080 Cause Check method and remedy The connected indoor unit or BC controller is exclusively for use with R22 or R407C. An incompatible indoor unit or BC controller is connected. The M-NET connection adapter is connected to the indoor unit system in a system in which the Slim Model (A control) of units are connected to the M-NET. - 289 - Check the model names of the connected indoor unit and the BC controller. Check whether the connecting adapter for M-NET is not connected to the indoor unit. (Connect the connecting adapter for M-NET to the heat source unit.) GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] -1- Troubleshooting according to the remote controller malfunction or the external input error In the case of MA remote controller 1. Phenomena Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the display remains unlit and the unit does not start running.(Power indicator does not appear on the screen.) (1) Cause 1) The power is not supplied to the indoor unit. The main power of the indoor unit is not on. The connector on the indoor unit board has come off. The fuse on the indoor unit board has melted. Transformer failure and disconnected wire of the indoor unit. 2) Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block. Short-circuited MA remote controller wiring Incorrect wiring of the MA remote controller cables Incorrect connection of the MA remote wiring to the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) on the indoor unit Wiring mixup between the MA remote controller cable and 220 - 240 VAC power supply cable Reversed connection of the wire for the MA remote controller and the M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit 3) The number of the MA remote controllers that are connected to an indoor unit exceeds the allowable range (2 units). 4) The length or the diameter of the wire for the MA remote controller are out of specification. 5) Short circuit of the wire for the remote display output of the heat source unit or reversed polarity connection of the relay. 6) The indoor unit board failure 7) MA remote controller failure (2) Check method and remedy 1) Measure voltages of the MA remote controller terminal (among 1 to 3). If the voltage is between DC 9 and 12V, the remote controller is a failure. If no voltage is applied, check the causes 1) and 3) and if the cause is found, correct it. If no cause is found, refer to 2). 2) Remove the wire for the remote controller from the terminal block (TB13) on the MA remote controller for the indoor unit, and check voltage among 1 to 3. If the voltage is between DC 9 and 12 V, check the causes 2) and 4) and if the cause is found, correct it. If no voltage is applied, check the cause 1) and if the cause is found, correct it. If no cause is found, check the wire for the remote display output (relay polarity). If no further cause is found, replace the indoor unit board. HWE09080 - 290 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] In the case of MA remote controller 2. Phenomena When the remote controller operation SW is turned on, the operation status briefly appears on the display, then it goes off, and the display lights out immediately, and the unit stops. (1) 1) 2) 3) Cause The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the heat source unit. Short circuit of the transmission line. Incorrect wiring of the M-NETtransmission line on the heat source unit. Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block. The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7). The male power supply connectors on the multiple heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40). In the system to which the power supply unit for transmission lines is connected, the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the heat source unit. 4) Disconnected M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit side. 5) Disconnected wire between the terminal block for M-NET line (TB5) of the indoor unit and the indoor unit board (CN2M) or disconnected connector. (2) Check method and remedy 1) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED on the heat source unit. Same symptom for all units in a system with one heat source unit? NO Measure voltages of the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) on the indoor unit. YES Check the self-diagnosis LED NO Check 4. Is the error code 7102 displayed? YES Check for 2 and 3. 17 - 30V? YES Check 5. NO Check 1). YES Correct the error. Error found? NO Indoor unit board or MA remote controller failure Correct the error. Refer to IX [4] -7- (2) "Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit" for how to check item 1 in the flow chart above. HWE09080 - 291 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] In the case of MA remote controller 3. Phenomena "HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" display on the remote controller does not disappear, and no operation is performed even if the button is pressed. ("HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" display will normally turn off 5 minutes later after the power on.) (1) 1) 2) 3) Cause The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the heat source unit. Short-circuited transmission line Incorrect wiring of the M-NET transmission line on the heat source unit. Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block. The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7). The male power supply connectors on the multiple heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40). In the system to which the power supply unit for transmission lines is connected, the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the heat source unit 4) Disconnected M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit. 5) Disconnected wire between the terminal block for M-NET line (TB5) of the indoor unit and the indoor unit board (CN2M) or disconnected connector. 6) Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller Short-circuited wire for the MA remote controller Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller (No.2) and disconnected line to the terminal block. Reversed daisy-chain connection between groups Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller to the terminal block for transmission line connection (TB5) on the indoor unit The M-NET transmission line is connected incorrectly to the terminal block (TB13) for the MA remote controller. 7) The sub/main setting of the MA remote controller is set to sub. 8) 2 or more main MA remote controllers are connected. 9) Indoor unit board failure (MA remote controller communication circuit) 10) Remote controller failure 11) Heat source unit failure (Refer to IX [8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display.)(page 356) (2) Check method and remedy 1) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED on the heat source unit. Same symptom for all units in a system with one heat source unit? NO Measure voltages of the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) on the indoor unit. YES Check the self-diagnosis LED Check 4. Is the error code 7102 displayed? YES NO Check 2 and 3. YES Check for 5 and 6. NO YES Error found? 17 - 30V? YES Correct the error. Replace the ME remote controller with the MA remote controller Error found? NO Indoor unit board or MA remote controller failure NO Check (1). Correct the error. Refer to IX [4] -7- (2) "Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit" for how to check item 1 in the flow chart above. HWE09080 - 292 - GB HWE09080 YES YES YES - 293 - MA remote controller →To "1. Phenomenon" NO All the indoor unit power failure? NO Is LED1 on the indoor unit control board lit? YES NO NO Power on YES NO Is "Centralized" displayed? NO Error display? NO When the unit is operated with the remote controller, will "ON" appear on the display? MA remote controller →To "1. Phenomenon" To "2. Phenomenon" NO Check the voltage between the MA remote controller terminals (A and B). 9-13VDC if the voltage is applied and 0V if no voltage is applied. NO Blinking? (Turns on momentarily approximately every 20 seconds) Replace the MA remote controller. NO NO Check the wire for the remote controller. Check the power supply. NO Power supply voltage AC198~264V? YES Use the wire that meets the specification. YES YES YES Keep the operation. NO Does an error occur when the power is reset? YES Replace the indoor unit control board. Check the equipment package indoor unit. YES Normal (Is the thermo OFF signal input?) Normal Replace the remote controller or the indoor control board. YES When no error occurs YES Check for the wire for the remote controller. Replace the indoor unit control board. NO NO No fault with the equipment package indoor unit? MA remote controller →To "1. Phenomenon" To "3. Phenomenon" Check No. 1 refrigerant circuit. To "2. Phenomenon" MA remote controller →To "1. Phenomenon" NO Is only the power source of the indoor unit turn turned on again? NO If operated afterwards, error 6602 or 6607 occurs. NO Is operation possible? YES Check for the M-NET transmission line. NO Although No.1 refrigerant circuit is normal, No.2 or No.3 refrigerant circuit remain stopped. Refer to the error code list. YES Normal "Centralized" is displayed. YES Turns off within approximately 5 minutes. After the main power on, start the MA remote controller. "HO" display will appear. Keep displaying for 5 or more minutes. "HO"/"PLEASE WAIT" keeps blinking on the MA remote controller. Refer to the self-diagnosis list for the displayed error code. Normal Set the SWA to "1". YES YES YES YES Replace the indoor unit control board. NO Is the compulsory thermo OFF (SWA) switch set to "2" or "3"? NO External thermo input setting? (SW3-3=ON) NO DEMAND by MELANS? NO Error display? NO Thermo is OFF? Check that no error occurs in other indoor units. Short circuit of the remote controller? Connect 2 remote controllers or less. YES Replace the wire for the MA remote controller. NO Are the length or the diameter of the wire for MA remote controller out of specification? NO Disconnected wire for the remote controller? Disconnected wire to the terminal block? Disconnected relay connector? NO Check the voltage between the MA remote controller terminal blocks (TB15) (A and B). 9-13VDC if the voltage is applied and 0V if no voltage is applied. YES Replace the indoor unit control board. NO Is LED1 on the indoor unit control board lit? (Blinks for 2 or 3 seconds approximately every 20 seconds) NO YES Replace the remote controller or the indoor control board. YES Normal (Operate the unit with external control equipment) Is the unit grouped with the equipment package indoor unit? Replace the remote controller or the indoor control board. YES YES Keep the operation. NO Does an error occur when the power is reset? NO YES Refer to the self-diagnosis list for the displayed error code. Is the operation by MELANS forbidden or the input from external control equipment allowed (SWC=ON)? YES YES YES Replace the indoor unit control board where an error occurs. Keep the operation. NO Does the number of the MA remote controllers that are connected to an indoor unit exceed the allowable range (2 units)? YES YES YES Does an error occur when the power is reset? MA remote controller Running group operation with →To "1. Phenomenon" the MA remote controller? Restore the original MA remote controller wiring connections after repairs. NO YES Check the wiring YES Power on Does the MA remote controller work properly when it is connected to the specified indoor unit? Check the power supply. Check whether the screw on the wire is not loose. Does the indoor unit make an instantaneous stop? YES Does the unit work properly when the wire for the MA remote controller is daisy-chained again? NO Is there an indoor unit on which LED2 is turned off? NO YES YES When all wires used for grouping are disconnected, is at least one of the LED2 on the grouped indoor units lit? NO All the indoor unit power failure? NO Is LED2 on the indoor unit control board blinking? Replace the indoor unit control board. YES After more than 20 seconds since turning the power on, is LED2 check of the indoor control board still displayed? NO YES Check the indoor unit on which LED2 is lit. NO Running group operation with the MA remote controller? NO Is " " displayed on the remote controller? NO Blinking? After turning the power on, check whether "HO"/ "PLEASE WAIT" is displayed on the remote controller. MA remote controller →To "1. Phenomenon" Check the refrigerant circuit. To "2. Phenomenon" YES [ IX Troubleshooting ] Flow chart Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the indoor and the heat source units do not start running. GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] In case of ME remote controller 1. Phenomena Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the display remains unlit and the unit does not start running. (Power indicator does not appear on the screen.) (1) 1) 2) 3) Cause The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the indoor unit. Short circuit of the transmission line. Incorrect wiring of the M-NET transmission line on the heat source unit. Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block. The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7). 4) Disconnected transmission line on the remote controller. 5) Remote controller failure 6) Heat source unit failure (Refer to IX [8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display.)(page 356) (2) Check method and remedy 1) Check voltage of the transmission terminal block for of the ME remote controller. If voltage between is 17V and 30V -> ME remote controller failure When voltage is 17V or less -> Refer to IX [4] -7- (2) "Troubleshooting transmission power curcuit of heat source unit". 2) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED on the heat source unit. HWE09080 - 294 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] In case of ME remote controller 2. Phenomena When the remote controller operation SW is turned on, a temporary operation display is indicated, and the display lights out immediately. (1) Cause 1) The power is not supplied to the indoor unit. The main power of the indoor unit (AC208/230V) is not on. The connector on the indoor unit board has come off. The fuse on the indoor unit board has melted. Transformer failure and disconnected wire of the indoor unit The indoor unit board failure 2) The heat source control board failure As the indoor unit does not interact with the heat source unit, the heat source unit model cannot be recognized. (2) Check method and remedy Check voltage of the power supply terminal on the indoor unit. Check LED1 on the indoor unit control board. NO AC208/230V? Is it lit? When it is lit Check the main power of the power supply wire YES Turn on the power again. When it is off Check the fuse on or cannot be checked the circuit board. YES Melted? Check 200V circuit for short circuit and ground fault NO Check the connection of the connector. YES Disconnected? NO *1 *1 Check the resistance value of the transformer NO Within specification? YES Check for the change of LED display by operating dip switch SW1 for self-diagnosis. Connector contact failure Check the cause of the disconnected transformer. Ground fault on the circuit board Ground fault of the sensor and the LEV Check self-diagnosis function of heat source unit NO Changed? YES Check self-diagnosis function of heat source unit after the power on. Changed? NO YES Heat source unit control Accidental error Heat source unit board failure board failure Correct the error. *1. Refer to the parts catalog “transformer check”. HWE09080 - 295 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] In case of ME remote controller 3. Phenomena "HO" display on the remote controller does not disappear, and no operation is performed even if the button is pressed. (1) Cause Without using MELANS 1) Heat source unit address is set to "00" 2) A wrong address is set. The address of the indoor unit that is connected to the remote controller is incorrect. (It should equal the ME remote controller address plus 100.) A wrong address is set to the ME remote controller. (100 must be added to the address of the indoor unit.) 3) Faulty wiring of the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) of the indoor unit in the same group with the remote controller. 4) The centralized control switch (SW2-1) on the heat source unit is set to ON. 5) Disconnection or faulty wiring of indoor unit transmission line. 6) Disconnection between the terminal block for M-NET line connection (TB5) of the indoor unit and the male connector (CN2M) 7) The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control. 8) Heat source unit control board failure 9) Indoor unit control board failure 10) Remote controller failure Interlocking control with MELANS 1) No group registration is made using MELANS. (The indoor unit and the ME remote controller are not grouped.) 2) Disconnected transmission line for centralized control (TB7) of the heat source unit 3) The male power supply connector is connected to CN40 on more than one heat source unit, or the connector is connected to CN40 on the heat source unit in the system to which a power supply unit for transmission line is connected. Using MELANS 1) When MELANS is used, "HO" display on the remote controller will disappear when the indoor unit and the local remote controller (ME remote controller) are grouped. If "HO" does not disappear after the registration, check the causes (2) 1) - 3). (2) Check method and remedy Without using MELANS NO Are all the units in the system experiencing the same problem? YES Check the address of the ME remote controller on which "HO" is displayed. Check the address of the heat source unit. A wrong address is set to the ME remote controller. *1 51 - 100? NO A wrong address is set to the heat source unit. NO YES YES Check the address of the indoor unit to be coupled. Check the centralized centralized switch (SW2-1) on the heat source unit. NO ON? NO Indoor unit + 100? YES A wrong address is set to the indoor unit. Wrong switch setting Change it from ON to OFF. ME remote controller - 100? YES Measure voltages of the terminal block for M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit. Heat source unit control board failure Wrong wiring of the M-NET transmission line of the indoor unit NO 17 - 30V? YES Check connection between indoor M-NET transmission terminal block (TB5) and the male connector (CN2M) Disconnected connector (CN2M) YES Disconnected? NO Indoor unit board or remote controller failure Correct the error. *1. When the heat source unit address is set to 1 - 50, the address will be forcibly set to 100. HWE09080 - 296 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] In case of ME remote controller 4. Phenomena "88" appears on the remote controller when the address is registered or confirmed. (1) Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy An error occurs when the address is registered or confirmed. (common) 1. A wrong address is set to the unit to be coupled. (1) Confirm the address of unit to be coupled. 2. The transmission line of the unit to be coupled is dis- (2) connected or is not connected. Check the connection of transmission line. 3. Circuit board failure of the unit to be coupled (3) Check voltage of the terminal block for transmission line of the unit to be coupled. 1) Normal if voltage is between DC17 and 30V. 2) Check (4) in case other than 1). (4) Check for the main power of LOSSNAY. 4. Improper transmission line work Generates at interlocking registration between LOSSNAY and the indoor unit 5. The power of LOSSNAY is OFF. Generates at confirmation of controllers used in the system in which the indoor units connected to different heat source units are grouped 6. The power of the heat source unit to be confirmed has been cut off. (5) Check the power supply of the heat source unit which is coupled with the unit to be confirmed. 7. The power of the heat source unit to be confirmed has been cut off. (6) Check that the transmission line for centralized control (TB7) of the heat source unit is not disconnected. 8. When the indoor units connected to different heat source units are grouped without MELANS, the male power supply connector is not connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control. (7) Check voltage of the transmission line for centralized control. 9. The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat 1) source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control. Normal when voltage is between 10V and 30V 10. In the system to which MELANS is connected, the 2) male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control. Check 8 - 11 described on the left in case other than 1). 11. Short circuit of the transmission line for centralized control HWE09080 - 297 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] Both for MA remote controller and ME remote controller 1. Phenomena Although cooling operation starts with the normal remote controller display, the capacity is not enough (1) Cause, check method and remedy Cause 1. Check method and remedy Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently. Faulty detection of pressure sensor. Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high discharge temperature Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high pressure Pressure drops excessively. (1) Check pressure difference between the detected pressure by the pressure sensor and the actual pressure with self-diagnosis LED. -> If the accurate pressure is not detected, check the pressure sensor. (Refer to the page on Troubleshooting of Pressure Sensor). Note: Lower inlet pressure by the low pressure sensor than the actual pressure causes insufficient capacity. SW1 setting High pressure sensor SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Low pressure sensor SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON (2) Check temperature difference between the evaporating temperature (Te) and the target evaporating temperature (Tem) with self-diagnosis LED. Note: Higher Te than Tem causes insufficient capacity. SW1 setting Evaporating temperature Te SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Target evaporating temperature Tem SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Note: 2. Indoor unit LEV malfunction Insufficient refrigerant flows due to LEV malfunction (not enough opening) or protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to pressure drop. Refrigerant leak from LEV on the stopping unit causes refrigerant shortage on the running unit. HWE09080 - 298 - Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise even at higher Te than Tem due to high discharge temperature and high pressure. At high discharge temperature: Refer to 1102.(page 231) At high pressure: Refer to 1302.(page 233) Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting ([4] -4).(page 310) GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] Cause Check method and remedy 3. Long piping length The cooling capacity varies greatly depending on the pressure loss. (When the pressure loss is large, the cooling capacity drops.) 4. Piping size is not proper (thin) 5. Insufficient refrigerant amount Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high discharge temperature. Refer to 1-1. (Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently.)(page 298) Refer to the page on refrigerant amount adjustment(page 177) 6. Clogging by foreign object Check the temperature difference between in front of and behind the place where the foreign object is clogging the pipe (upstream side and downstream side). When the temperature drops significantly, the foreign object may clog the pipe. -> Remove the foreign object inside the pipe. 7. The indoor unit inlet temperature is excessively. (Less than 15°C [59°F] WB) Check the inlet air temperature and for short cycling. Change the environment where the indoor unit is used. 8. Compressor failure The amount of circulating refrigerant decreases due to refrigerant leak in the compressor. Check the discharge temperature to determine if the refrigerant leaks, as it rises if there is a leak. 9. LEV3 malfunction Sufficient liquid refrigerant is not be supplied to the indoor unit as sufficient sub cool cannot be secured due to LEV3 malfunction. Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting ( [4] -4- ).(page 310) It most likely happens when there is little difference or no difference between TH12 and TH15. 10. TH12, TH15 and 63HS1 sensor failure or faulty wiring LEV3 is not controlled normally. HWE09080 - 299 - Check the piping length to determine if it is contributing to performance loss. Piping pressure loss can be estimated from the temperature difference between the indoor unit heat exchanger outlet temperature and the saturation temperature (Te) of 63LS. ->Correct the piping. Check the thermistor. Check wiring. GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 2. Phenomena Although heating operation starts with the normal remote controller display, the capacity is not enough. (1) Cause, check method and remedy Cause 1. Check method and remedy Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently. Faulty detection of pressure sensor. Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high discharge temperature Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high pressure. (1) Check pressure difference between the detected pressure by the pressure sensor and the actual pressure with self-diagnosis LED. -> If the accurate pressure is not detected, check the pressure sensor.(Refer to the page on Troubleshooting of Pressure Sensor) Note: Higher inlet pressure by the high pressure sensor than the actual pressure causes insufficient capacity. SW1 setting High pressure sensor SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Low pressure sensor SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON (2) Check the difference between the condensing temperature (Tc) and the target condensing temperature (Tcm) with self-diagnosis LED. Note: Higher Tc than Tcm causes insufficient capacity. SW1 setting Condensing temperature Tc SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Target condensing temperature Tcm SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Note: HWE09080 - 300 - Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise even at lower Tc than Tcm due to high discharge temperature and high pressure. At high discharge temperature: Refer to 1102.(page 231) At high pressure: Refer to 1302.(page 233) GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] Cause Check method and remedy 2. Indoor unit LEV malfunction Insufficient refrigerant flows due to LEV malfunction (not enough opening). Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting ( [4] -4- ).(page 310) 3. Temperature reading error on the indoor unit piping temperature sensor If the temperature reading on the sensor is higher than the actual temperature, it makes the subcool seem smaller than it is, and the LEV opening decreases too much. Check the thermistor. 4. Insulation failure of the refrigerant piping 5. Long piping length Excessively long piping on the high pressure side causes pressure loss leading to increase in the high pressure. 6. Piping size is not proper (thin) 7. Clogging by foreign object Check the temperature difference between the upstream and the downstream of the pipe section that is blocked. Since blockage in the extended section is difficult to locate, operate the unit in the cooling cycle, and follow the same procedures that are used to locate the blockage of pipe during cooling operation. ->Remove the blockage in the pipe. 8. The indoor unit inlet temperature is excessively high.(exceeding 28°C [82°F]) Check the inlet air temperature and for short cycling. Change the environment where the indoor unit is used. 9. Insufficient refrigerant amount Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to low discharge temperature Refrigerant recovery operation is likely to start. Refer to 2 - 1. (Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently.)(page 300) Refer to the page on refrigerant amount adjustment.(page 177) 10. Compressor failure (same as in case of cooling) Check the discharge temperature. 11. LEV3 actuation failure A drop in the low pressure that is caused either by a blockage of liquid pipe or by a pressure loss and the resultant slowing of refrigerant flow causes a tendency for the discharge temperature to rise. Refer to the page on troubleshooting the LEV ([4] 4-).(page 310) HWE09080 - 301 - Confirm that the characteristic of capacity drop due to piping length. -> Change the pipe GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 3. Phenomena Heat source unit stops at times during operation. (1) Cause, check method and remedy Cause Check method and remedy The first stop is not considered as an error, as the (1) unit turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes as a preliminary error. Check the mode operated in the past by displaying preliminary error history on LED display with SW1. Error mode 1 Abnormal high pressure 2 Abnormal discharge air temperature 3 Heatsink thermistor failure 4 Thermistor failure 5 Pressure sensor failure 6 Over-current break 7 Refrigerant overcharge Note1: Frost prevention tripping only under cooling mode may be considered in addition to the above. (Freeze protection is detected by one or all indoor units.) Note2: Even the second stop is not considered as an error when some specified errors occur. (eg. The third stop is considered as an error when the thermistor error occurs.) HWE09080 (2) Reoperate the unit to find the mode that stops the unit by displaying preliminary error history on LED display with SW1. -> Refer to the reference page for each error mode. *Display the indoor piping temperature table with SW1 to check whether the freeze proof operation runs properly, and check the temperature. - 302 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise 1. M-NET transmission Control is performed by exchanging signals between the heat source unit and the indoor unit (ME remote controller) through M-NET transmission. Noise interference on the transmission line will interrupt the normal transmission, leading to erroneous operation. (1) Symptoms caused by noise interference on the transmission line Cause Noise interference on the transmission line Erroneous operation Error code Error code definition Signal is transformed and will be misjudged as the signal of another address. 6600 Address overlap Transmission wave pattern is transformed due to the noise creating a new signal 6602 Transmission processor hardware error Transmission wave pattern is transformed due to the noise, and will not be received normally leading to no acknowledgement (ACK). 6607 No ACK error Transmission cannot be performed due to the fine noise. 6603 Transmission line bus busy error Transmission is successful; however, the acknowledgement (ACK) or the response cannot be received normally due to the noise. 6607 6608 No ACK error No response error (2) Wave shape check No fine noise allowed VHL VBN 52 [With transmission] 52 Logic "0" 52 52 52 Logic "1" No fine noise allowed [Without transmission] Wave shape check Check the wave pattern of the transmission line with an oscilloscope. The following conditions must be met. 1) Small wave pattern (noise) must not exist on the transmission signal. (Minute noise (approximately 1V) can be generated by DC-DC converter or the inverter operation; however, such noise is not a problem when the shield of the transmission line is grounded.) 2) The sectional voltage level of transmission signal should be as follows. HWE09080 Logic Voltage level of the transmission line 0 VHL = 2.5V or higher 1 VBN = 1.3V or below - 303 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] (3) Check method and remedy 1) Measures against noise Check the followings when noise exists on the wave or the errors described in (1) occur. Error code definition Remedy Check that the wiring 1. The transmission line and work is performed acthe power line are not cording to wiring wired too closely. specifications. 2. The transmission line is not bundled with that for another systems. Isolate the transmission line from the power line (5cm [1-31/32"] or more). Do not insert them in the same conduit. 3. The specified wire is used for the transmission line. Use the specified transmission line. Type: Shielded wire CVVS/CPEVS/MVVS (For ME remote controller) Diameter: 1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more (Remote controller wire: 0.3 - 1.25mm2 [AWG22-16]) 4. When the transmission line is daisy-chained on the indoor unit terminals, are the shields daisychained on the terminals, too? The transmission is two-wire daisy-chained. The shielded wire must be also daisy-chained. When the shielded cable is not daisy-chained, the noise cannot be reduced enough. 5. Is the shield of the indoorheat source transmission cable grounded to the earth terminal on the heat source unit? Connect the shield of the indoor-heat source transmission cable to the earth terminal ( ) on the heat source unit. If no grounding is provided, the noise on the transmission line cannot escape leading to change of the transmission signal. 6. Check the treatment method of the shield of the transmission line (for centralized control). The transmission cable for centralized control is less subject to noise interference if it is grounded to the heat source unit whose power jumper cable was moved from CN41 to CN40 or to the power supply unit. The environment against noise varies depending on the distance of the transmission lines, the number of the connected units, the type of the controllers to be connected, or the environment of the installation site. Therefore, the transmission line work for centralized control must be performed as follows. Check that the grounding work is performed according to grounding specifications. The transmission line must be isolated from another transmission line. When they are bundled, erroneous operation may be caused. (1) When no grounding is provided: Ground the shield of the transmission cable by connecting to the heat source unit whose power jumper connector was moved from CN41 to CN40 or to the power supply unit. (2) When an error occurs even though one point grounding is provided: Ground the shield on all heat source units. 2) Check the followings when the error "6607" occurs, or "HO" appears on the display on the remote controller. Error code definition Remedy 7. The farthest distance of transmission line is 200m [656ft] or longer. Check that the farthest distance from the heat source unit to the indoor unit and to the remote controller is within 200m [656ft]. 8. The types of transmission lines are different. Use the specified transmission line. Type: Shielded wire CVVS/CPEVS/MVVS (For ME remote controller) Diameter: 1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more (Remote controller wire: 0.3-1.25mm2 [AWG22-16]) 9. Heat source unit circuit board failure Replace the heat source unit control board or the power supply board for the transmission line. 10. Indoor unit circuit board failure or remote controller failure Replace the indoor unit circuit board or the remote controller. 11. The MA remote controller is connected to the M- Connect the MA remote controller to the terminal block for MA reNET transmission line. mote controller (TB15). HWE09080 - 304 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 2. MA remote controller transmission The communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is performed with current tone burst. (1) Symptoms caused by noise interference on the transmission line If noise is generated on the transmission line, and the communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is interrupted for 3 minutes in a row, MA transmission error (6831) will occur. (2) Confirmation of transmission specifications and wave pattern TB15 A B 1 2 A, B : No polarity Across terminal No. 1-2 Indoor unit MA remote controller : Power supply (9V to 12VDC) Transmission waveform (Across terminal No.1 - 2) Satisfies the formula DC9~12V 12 msec/bit 5% Voltage among terminals must HWE09080 Logic 1 Logic 0 Logic 1 Logic 1 12msec 12msec 12msec 12msec - 305 - be between DC9 and 12 V. GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts -1- High-Pressure Sensor (63HS1, PS1, PS3) 1. Compare the pressure that is detected by the high pressure sensor, and the high-pressure gauge pressure to check for failure. By configuring the digital display setting switch (SW1) as shown in the figure below, the pressure as measured by the highpressure sensor appears on the LED1 on the control board. SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON (1) While the sensor is stopped, compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1. 1) When the gauge pressure is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], internal pressure is caused due to gas leak. 2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the connector may be defective or be disconnected. Check the connector and go to (4). 3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 4.15MPa [601psi], go to (3). 4) If other than 1), 2) or 3), compare the pressures while the sensor is running. Go to (2). (2) Compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 while the sensor is running. (Compare them by MPa [psi] unit.) 1) When the difference between both pressures is within 0.098MPa [14psi], both the high pressure sensor and the control board are normal. 2) When the difference between both pressures exceeds 0.098MPa [14psi], the high pressure sensor has a problem. (performance deterioration) 3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 does not change, the high pressure sensor has a problem. (3) Remove the high pressure sensor from the control board to check the pressure on the self-diagnosis LED1. 1) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the high pressure sensor has a problem. 2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is approximately 4.15MPa [601psi], the control board has a problem. (4) Remove the high pressure sensor from the control board, and short-circuit between the No.2 and 3 connectors (63HS1, PS1, PS3) to check the pressure with self-diagnosis LED1. 1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 4.15MPa [601psi], the high pressure sensor has a problem. 2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem. 2. Pressure sensor configuration The high pressure sensor consists of the circuit shown in the figure below. If DC 5V is applied between the red and the black wires, voltage corresponding to the pressure between the white and the black wires will be output, and the value of this voltage will be converted by the microcomputer. The output voltage is 0.071V per 0.098MPa [14psi]. The pressure sensor on the body side is designed to connect to the connector. The connector pin number on the body side is different from that on the control board side. Body side Control board side Vcc Pin 1 Pin 3 Vout Pin 2 Pin 2 GND Pin 3 Pin 1 Pressure 0 ~ 4.15 MPa [601psi] Vout 0.5 ~ 3.5 V 0.071 V / 0.098 MPa [14 psi] Connector Pressure (MPa [psi]) 4.5 [653] 63HS1 123 4.0 [580] 3.5 [508] 3.0 [435] 2.5 [363] 2.0 [290] 1.5 [218] 1 2 3 GND (Black) 1.0 [145] Vout (White) 0.5 [73] 0 Vcc (DC 5 V)(Red) 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 Output voltage (V) HWE09080 - 306 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] -2- Low-Pressure Sensor (63LS) 1. Compare the pressure that is detected by the low pressure sensor, and the low pressure gauge pressure to check for failure. By configuring the digital display setting switch (SW1) as shown in the figure below, the pressure as measured by the lowpressure sensor appears on the LED1 on the control board. SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON (1) While the sensor is stopped, compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1. 1) When the gauge pressure is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], internal pressure is caused due to gas leak. 2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the connector may be defective or be disconnected. Check the connector and go to (4). 3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], go to (3). 4) If other than 1), 2) or 3), compare the pressures while the sensor is running. Go to (2). (2) Compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 while the sensor is running.(Compare them by MPa [psi] unit.) 1) When the difference between both pressures is within 0.03MPa [4psi], both the low pressure sensor and the control board are normal. 2) When the difference between both pressures exceeds 0.03MPa [4psi], the low pressure sensor has a problem. (performance deterioration) 3) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 does not change, the low pressure sensor has a problem. (3) Remove the low pressure sensor from the control board to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1 display. 1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the low pressure sensor has a problem. 2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is approximately 1.7MPa [247psi], the control board has a problem. When the heat source temperature is 30°C [86°F] or less, the control board has a problem. When the heat source temperature exceeds 30°C [86°F], go to (5). (4) Remove the low pressure sensor from the control board, and short-circuit between the No.2 and 3 connectors (63LS:CN202) to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1. 1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], the low pressure sensor has a problem. 2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem. (5) Remove the high pressure sensor (63HS1) from the control board, and insert it into the connector for the low pressure sensor (63LS) to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1. 1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], the control board has a problem. 2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem. 2. Low-pressure sensor configuration The low pressure sensor consists of the circuit shown in the figure below. If DC5V is applied between the red and the black wires, voltage corresponding to the pressure between the white and the black wires will be output, and the value of this voltage will be converted by the microcomputer. The output voltage is 0.173V per 0.098MPa [14psi]. The pressure sensor on the body side is designed to connect to the connector. The connector pin number on the body side is different from that on the control board side. Body side Control board side Vcc Pin 1 Pin 3 Vout Pin 2 Pin 2 GND Pin 3 Pin 1 63LS 123 Pressure 0 ~ 1.7 MPa [247psi] Vout 0.5 ~ 3.5 V 0.173 V / 0.098 MPa [14 psi] Pressure (MPa [psi]) 1.8 [261] 1.6 [232] 1.4 [203] 1.2 [174] 1.0 [145] 0.8 [116] Connector 0.6 [87] 1 2 3 0.4 [58] GND (Black) 0.2 [29] Vout (White) 0 0 Vcc (DC 5 V)(Red) 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 Output voltage (V) HWE09080 - 307 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] -3- Solenoid Valve Check whether the output signal from the control board and the operation of the solenoid valve match. Setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) as shown in the figure below causes the ON signal of each relay to be output to the LED's. Each LED shows whether the relays for the following parts are ON or OFF. LEDs light up when relays are on. The circuits on some parts are closed when the relays are ON. Refer to the following instructions. Display SW1 LD1 Upper LD2 21S4a LD3 CH11 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 SV4d SV9 LD8 SV1a SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Lower Upper SV4a SV4b Lower SV7a SV7b SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON When a valve malfunctions, check if the wrong solenoid valve coil is not attached the lead wire of the coil is not disconnected, the connector on the board is not inserted wrongly, or the wire for the connector is not disconnected. (1) In case of 21S4a (4-way switching valve) About this 4-way valve When not powered: Conducts electricity between the oil separator outlet and heat exchanger AND the gas ball valve (BV1) and the accumulator to complete the circuit for the cooling cycle. When powered: The electricity runs between the oil separator and the gas ball valve, and between the heat exchanger and the accumulator. This circulation is for heating. Check the LED display and the intake and the discharge temperature for the 4-way valve to check whether the valve has no faults and the electricity runs between where and where.Do not touch the pipe when checking the temperature, as the pipe on the oil separator side will be hot. Do not give an impact from outside, as the outer hull will be deformed leading to the malfunction of the inner valve. (2) In case of SV1a (Bypass valve) This solenoid valve opens when powered (Relay ON). 1) At compressor start-up, the SV1a turns on for 4 minutes, and the operation can be checked by the self-diagnosis LED display and the closing sound. 2) To check whether the valve is open or closed, check the change of the SV1a downstream piping temperature while the valve is being powered.Even when the valve is closed, high-temperature refrigerant flows inside the capillary next to the valve. (Therefore, temperature of the downstream piping will not be low with the valve closed.) (3) SV4a - 4d, SV7a, 7b(Controls heat exchanger capacity) 1) At least one of the solenoid valves among SV4a through 4d,SV7a, and SV7b turns on. Check for proper operation on the LED and by listening for the operation sound of the solenoid valve. 2) This diagram shows the flow of the high-temperature (high-pressure) gas refrigerant in the Cooling-only and Cooling-main modes and the flow of the low-temperature gas/liquid refrigerant in the Heating-only and Heating-main modes. Refer to the refrigerant circuit diagram. Solenoid valves turns on and off according to such factors as the capacity of the indoor units in operation and water inlet temperature. Check the LED. Remove the SV coil, open the lid, and check the plunger. The type of pin face wrench that is listed in the service parts list is required to perform this task. HWE09080 - 308 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] Refrigerant Circuit diagram ST1 BV1 1 Solenoid valve block CV7a SV4a SV4b 2 3 SV4d 4 5 TH8 SV7a SV7b Water circuit TH7 THINV LEVINV ST13 Component cooler CV8 heat exchanger CV4a CV3a CV6a TH3 LEV2b BV2 TH6 ST2 TH2 LEV2a HIC LEV1 Solenoid valve block(three compartments) 4 4 5 2 5 1 2 3 3 1 is located behind 3 HWE09080 - 309 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] Refrigerant Circuit diagram 1 Solenoid valve block CV7a SV4a SV4b 2 3 SV4d 4 5 TH8 SV7a SV7b TH7 THINV Water circuit LEVINV ST13 Component cooler CV8 heat exchanger CV3a CV2a CV5a BV1 CV4a ST1 CV6a SV9 BV2 Solenoid valve block(three compartments) 4 4 5 2 5 1 2 3 3 1 is located behind 3 (4) In the case of SV9 (Bypass valve) This solenoid valve opens when energized (when the relay is on) This valve turns on when the value of 63HS1 is greater than 3.5 MPa [507psi] during Heating-only or Heating-main operation at the minimum frequency. The valve position can be determined by measuring and monitoring the changes in the pipe temperature on the downstream of SV9 while the unit is energized. When the valve is open, high-temperature gas refrigerant passes through the pipe. Do not attempt to check the pipe temperature by touching the pipe. -4- LEV LEV operation LEV (Indoor unit: Linear expansion valve), LEV2a, and LEV2b (Heat source unit: Linear expansion valve) are stepping-motordriven valves that operate by receiving the pulse signals from the indoor and heat source unit control boards. (1) Indoor LEV and Heat source LEV (LEV2a, LEV2b) The valve opening changes according to the number of pulses. 1) Indoor and heat source unit control boards and the LEV (Indoor unit: Linear expansion valve) HWE09080 - 310 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] Heat source control board Intermediate connector LEV 4 M 6 5 2 3 1 Blue DC12V 2 Brown 6 5 Red 5 Drive circuit 4 4 Brown 4 1 Blue Yellow 3 3 Orange 3 3 2 4 Yellow 2 2 1 6 White 1 1 White Red Orange Note. The connector numbers on the intermediate connector and the connector on the control board differ. Check the color of the lead wire to judge the number. 2) Pulse signal output and valve operation Output (phase) number Output state 1 1 ON 2 OFF 3 OFF 4 ON 2 3 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON ON Output pulses change in the following orders when the Valve is closed; 1 2 3 4 1 Valve is open; 4 3 2 1 4 *1. When the LEV opening angle does not change, all the output phases will be off. *2. When the output is open phase or remains ON, the motor cannot run smoothly, and rattles and vibrates. 3) LEV valve closing and opening operation Valve opening (refrigerant flow rate) D C *When the power is turned on, the valve closing signal of 2200 pulses will be output from the indoor board to LEV to fix the valve position. It must be fixed at point A. When the valve operates smoothly, no sound from LEV or no vibration occurs, however, when the pulses change from E to A in the chart or the valve is locked, a big sound occurs. *Whether a sound is generated or not can be determined by holding a screwdriver against it, then placing your ear against the handle. Valve closed Valve open A Fully open: 1400 pulses E B Pulses 80 - 100 pulses HWE09080 - 311 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] (2) Heat source LEV (LEV1,LEVINV) The valve opening changes according to the number of pulses. 1) Connections between the heat source control board and LEV Heat source control board DC 12V LEV 6 Red 6 5 Brown 5 4 Blue 4 4 3 Orange 3 3 2 Yellow 2 2 1 White 1 1 Drive circuit 4 6 M 5 1 2 3 2) Pulse signal output and valve operation Output state Output (phase) number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 2 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 3 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF Output pulses change in the following orders when the Valve is open; 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Valve is closed; 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 8 *1. When the LEV opening angle does not change, all the output phases will be off. *2. When the output is open phase or remains ON, the motor cannot run smoothly, and rattles and vibrates. 3) LEV valve closing and opening operation Valve opening (refrigerant flow rate) B *When the power is turned on, the valve closing signal of 520 pulses will be output from the indoor board to LEV to fix the valve position. It must be fixed at point A. (Pulse signal is output for approximately 17 seconds.) When the valve operates smoothly, there is no sound from the LEV and no vibration occurs, but when the valve is locked, noise is generated. *Whether a sound is generated or not can be determined by holding a screwdriver against it, then placing your ear against the handle. Valve closed *If liquid refrigerant flows inside the LEV, the sound may become smaller. Valve open Fully open: 480 pulses A Pulses HWE09080 - 312 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] (3) Judgment methods and possible failure mode The specifications of the heat source unit (heat source LEV), indoor unit (indoor LEV),and BC controller (BC controller LEV) differ.Therefore, remedies for each failure may vary. Check the remedy specified for the appropriate LEV as indicated in the right column. Malfunction mode Microcomputer driver circuit failure Judgment method Remedy Disconnect the control board connector and connect the check LED as shown in the figure below. 6 Target LEV When the drive circuit has a problem, replace the control board. Indoor Heat source 5 4 3 2 1k LED 1 resistance : 0.25W 1k LED : DC15V 20mA or more When the main power is turned on, the indoor unit circuit board outputs pulse signals to the indoor unit LEV for 10 seconds, and the heat source unit circuit board outputs pulse signals to the heat source unit LEV for 17 seconds. If any of the LED remains lit or unlit, the drive circuit is faulty. LEV mechanism is locked If the LEV is locked, the drive motor runs idle, and makes a small clicking sound. When the valve makes a closing and opening sound, the valve has a problem. Replace the LEV. Indoor Heat source BC controller Disconnected or short-circuited LEV motor coil Measure resistance between the coils (red - white, red -orange, brown - yellow, brown - blue) using a tester. They are normal if resistance is 150ohm 10%. Replace the LEV coils. Indoor Heat source (LEV2a,LEV2b) BC controller Measure resistance between the coils (red - white, red -orange, brown - yellow, brown - blue) using a tester. They are normal if resistance is 46ohm 3%. Replace the LEV coils. Heat source (LEV1,LEVINV) If there is a large Incomple sealing When checking the refrigerant leak from the indoor (leak from the LEV, run the target indoor unit in the fan mode, and the amount of leakage, revalve) other indoor units in the cooling mode. Then, check the place the LEV. liquid temperature (TH22) with the self-diagnosis LED. When the unit is running in the fan mode, the LEV is fully closed, and the temperature detected by the thermistor is not low. If there is a leak, however, the temperature will be low. If the temperature is extremely low compared with the inlet temperature displayed on the remote controller, the LEV is not properly sealed, however, if there is a little leak, it is not necessary to replace the LEV when there are no effects to other parts. Indoor BC controller Thermistor (liquid piping temperature detection) Linear Expansion Valve Faulty wire connections in the connector or faulty contact HWE09080 1. Check for loose pins on the connector and check the colors of the lead wires visually 2. Disconnect the control board's connector and conduct a continuity check using a tester. - 313 - Check the continuity at Indoor the points where an er- Heat source ror occurs. BC controller GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] (4) Heat source unit LEV (LEV1,LEVINV) coil removal procedure 1) LEV component As shown in the figure, the heat source LEV is made in such a way that the coils and the body can be separated. Body Coils Stopper Lead wire 2) Removing the coils Fasten the body tightly at the bottom (Part A in the figure) so that the body will not move, then pull out the coils toward the top.If the coils are pulled out without the body gripped, undue force will be applied and the pipe will be bent. Part A 3) Installing the coils Fix the body tightly at the bottom (Part A in the figure) so that the body will not move, then insert the coils from the top, and insert the coil stopper securely in the pipe on the body. Hold the body when pulling out the coils to prevent so that the pipe will not be bent. If the coils are pushed without the body gripped, undue force will be applied and the pipe will be bent. Hold the body when pulling out the coils to prevent so that the pipe will not be bent. Part A HWE09080 - 314 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] (5) Heat source unit LEV (LEV2a,2b) coil removal procedure Motor Driver Locknut Bellows Valve assembling Refrigerant Circuit Valve body side Orifice Notes on the procedure 1) Do not put undue pressure on the motor. 2) Do not use motors if dropped. 3) Do not remove the cap until immediately before the procedure. 4) Do not wipe off any molybdenum. 5) Do not remove the packing. 6) Do not apply any other than specified liquid such as screw lock agent, grease and etc. Molybdenum Motor Packing HWE09080 Cap - 315 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] Replacement procedure 1) Stop the air conditioner. After checking that the air conditioner is stopped, turn off the power of the heat source unit. 2) Prepare two spanners. Hold the valve body with one spanner and loosen the locknut with another one. Turning the locknut counter-clockwise from motor side view can loosen it. Two spanners must be used. Do not hold the motor with one hand and loosen the locknut with only one spanner. 3) Turning the locknut several times. The locknut will come off and then the motor can be removed. 4) Prepare a motor replacement. Use only factory settings, which the head part of the driver does not come out.Use of other than factory settings may result in malfunction and failure of valve flow rate control. 5) Keep dust, contaminants, and water out of the space between the motor and the valve body during replacement. (The space is the mechanical section of the valve.) Do not damage the junction with tools. After removing the motor, blow N2 gas or etc. into bellows in order to blow off water from inside. 6) Remove the cap of the motor replacement. Joint the axis of the motor and the one of the valve body with the locknut to stick precisely. Apply screw lock agent to whole part of the screw. Do not introduce screw lock agent into the motor.Use new motors if problems are found on the motor during the replacement. 7) After rotating the locknut 2~3 times by hands, hold the valve body with the spanner, and tighten the locknut with the specified torque with a torque wrench. Apply the tightening torque of 15N m (150kgf cm) (administration value 15 1 N m (150 10kgf cm)). Note that undue tightening may cause breaking a flare nut. 8) When tightening the locknut, hold the motor with hands so that undue rotary torque and load can not be applied. 9) The differences of relative position after assembling the motor and the valve body do not affect the valve control and the switching function. Do not relocate the motor and the valve body after tightening the locknut. Even the relative position is different from before and after assembling. Difference in rotational direction is acceptable. The motor may not be fixed with clamp because of the changing of the motor configuration. However, the fixing is not necessary due to the pipe fixing. 10) Connect the connector. Do not pull hard on the lead wire. Make sure that the connector is securely inserted into the specified position, and check that the connector does not come off easily. 11) Turn on the indoor unit, and operate the air conditioner. Check that no problems are found. HWE09080 - 316 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] -5- Troubleshooting Principal Parts of BC Controller 1. Pressure sensor Troubleshooting flow chart for pressure sensor START Note 1 Check whether the pressure sensor or the connectors of P1 and P3 are connected, properly NO Repair the fault. OK? Operating at the moment? YES Note 2 On the self-diagnosis monitor, measure Heat source high-pressure 63HS1 Heat source low-pressure 63LS BC controller pressure P1 (liquid side) and P3 (intermediate part) Check whether the result is 63HS1 P1 P3 63LS NO OK? Check whether the refrigerant pipe and the transmission line are connected correctly between the heat source unit and the BC controller. YES All the compressors of the heat source units to which the BC controller is connected are stopped. NO OK? YES 10 minutes or longer after the operation stops? Fix the relation between the refrigerant piping and the transmission line. NO Check P1 and P3 on the self-diagnosis LED, and check that the detected pressure is 0.098MPa [14psi] or less. Note 3 NO OK? Check whether the contact of the pressure sensor connector in trouble is not faulty. Check that the difference between each detected pressure is 0.098MPa [14psi] or less. YES NO OK? YES NO OK? NO Is Pd P1 P3 Ps? Note 4 Restore contact failure. Remove the pressure sensor connector from the board, and check the pressure. YES Both the board and the pressure sensor are normal. Pressure 0MPa [0psi] NO YES Short-circuit between connecter pins #2 and #3 on the circuit board, and check the pressure. Check whether the refrigerant pipe and the transmission line are connected correctly between the heat source unit and the BC controller. NO OK? Fix the relation between the refrigerant piping and the transmission line. YES 6MPa [870psi] pressure or more is displayed. NO YES Replace the pressure sensor, which detects less than 6MPa [870psi] pressure, with the pressure sensor, which detects 6MPa [870psi] or more pressure, check the pressure, and check whether the detected pressure is displayed normally. OK? NO YES Replace the pressure sensor. HWE09080 - 317 - Replace the board. GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1) BC controller: Phenomena when the pressure sensor is connected wrongly (reverse connection of P1 and P3) to the board. Symptoms Cooling-only Normal Cooling-main Non-cooling SC11 large SC16 small PHM large Heating only Indoor heating SC small Heating indoor Thermo ON Especially noise is large. SC11 large SC16 small PHM large Heating main Non-cooling Indoor heating SC small Heating indoor Thermo ON Especially noise is large. SC11 large SC16 small PHM large 2) Check the self-diagnosis switch (Heat source control board SW1). Measurement data SW1 setting value Symbol 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Heat source high pressure 63HS1 ON Heat source low pressure 63LS ON BC controller pressure (liquid side) PS1 ON BC controller pressure (intermediate part) PS3 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3) Check whether CNP1 (liquid side) connector on the BC controller control board and the connector CNP2 (intermediate part) are not disconnected or not loose. 4) Check the pressure value on the self-diagnosis switch (same as note 2) with the connector of the applied pressure sensor is disconnected from the board. HWE09080 - 318 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 2. Temperature sensor Troubleshooting instructions for thermistor START Note 1 Pull out the thermistor connector in trouble from the board. Note 2 Measure the temperature of the thermistor in trouble. (actual measurement value) Note 2 Check the thermistor resistor. Compare the temperature corresponding to the resistance measured by the thermistor and the temperature measured by a commercially available thermometer, and check whether there is no difference between them. Temperature difference NO YES Replace the thermistor Note 3 Insert the connector of the thermistor in trouble into the board, check the sensor inlet temperature on the LED monitor, and check the temperature difference. Temperature difference YES Check for contact failure. NO Replace the control board. Normal HWE09080 - 319 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1) For the connectors on the board, TH11 and TH12 are connected to CN10, and TH15 and TH16 are connected to CN11. Disconnect the connector in trouble, and check the sensor of each number. 2) Pull out the sensor connector from the I/O board, Do not pull the sensor by holding the lead wire. Measure the resistance with such as a tester. Compare the measured value with that of shown in the figure below. When the result is 10%, it is normal. 3) Check the self-diagnosis switch (Heat source control board SW1). Measurement data Symbol Liquid inlet temperature TH11 SW1 setting value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 G, GA Bypass outlet temperature (Standard / main) TH12 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Bypass inlet temperature TH15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON Bypass inlet temperature TH16 Bypass outlet temperature TH12 Bypass inlet temperature TH15 Bypass outlet temperature TH12 Bypass inlet temperature TH15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON GB, HB (Sub 1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON GB, HB (Sub 2) HWE09080 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 - 320 - ON GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 3. Troubleshooting flow chart for LEV Solenoid valve (1) LEV No cooling capacity No heating capacity Note 1 Check whether the electric expansion valve and the solenoid valve connector are not disconnected or not loose. NO Fault is found. Repair the fault. Run the cooling operation or the heating operation in the system in trouble (only in one system). Heating operation Cooling or heating operation Cooling operation Note 2 Note 2 Check that LEV1 is fully open. Check that LEV1 is fully open. NO NO LEV1 is fully open. YES LEV1 is fully open. Note 3 YES Check LEV1. Note 3 Check whether LEV 3 is controlled by the value of the differential pressure. Check whether LEV3 is controlling superheat. NO NO Superheat control OK Differential pressure OK YES YES Check LEV3. Check that SVA and SVC are OFF. Check that SVA and SVC are ON. NO NO SVA, SVC ON SVA, SVC OFF YES YES Check SVA and SVC. Check that SVB is OFF. Check that SVB is ON. NO NO SVB OFF SVB ON YES Check SVB. YES Completed HWE09080 - 321 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1) BC controller: Phenomena when LEV is connected wrongly (reverse connection of LEV1 and LEV3) to the board. Phenomena Cooling-only Cooling-main Heating only Non-cooling SH12 small, SC11 small SH16 small, branch pipe SC small BC controller sound Non-cooling and non-heating SH12 small, SC11 small SH16 large, but branch pipe SC small BC controller sound PHM large Indoor heating SC small PHM large Heating main Non-cooling Indoor heating SC small PHM large 2) Check method of fully open state or fully closed state of LEV Check LEV opening (pulse) on the self-diagnosis LED (Heat source control board SW1). Full open: 2000 pulses Fully closed: 110 pulses (In the case of heating-only mode, however, the pulse may become 110 or more.) When LEV is fully open, measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes of LEV, and make sure that there is no temperature difference. When LEV is fully closed, check that there is no refrigerant flowing sound. 3) Refer to the chart below to judge LEV opening controlled by the values of the differential pressure and of the superheat. (BC controller LEV basic operation characteristic) Part Malfunction mode Inclined to close LEV1 Inclined to open Inclined to close LEV3 Inclined to open HWE09080 Content Difference between high Heating only pressure (P1) and intermediate pressure (P3) is large. Heatingmain Difference between high Coolingpressure (P1) and intermemain diate pressure (P3) is small. Cooling-only CoolingSH12 is large. main G, GA type GB, HB type Operation mode Standards of judgment on unit stable operation 0.3 to 0.4MPa [44 to 58psi] SH12 < 20°C [36°F] Difference between high Heating only pressure (P1) and intermeHeatingdiate pressure (P3) is main small. 0.3 to 0.4MPa [44 to 58psi] Cooling-only CoolingSC16 and SH12 are small. main SC16 > 3°C [5.4°F] SH12 > 3°C [5.4°F] Heating only Difference between high pressure (P1) and intermeHeatingdiate pressure (P3) is large. main 0.3 to 0.4MPa [44 to 58psi] Inclined to close Cooling-only SH22 is large. Coolingmain SH22 < 20°C [36°F] Inclined to open Cooling-only CoolingSH22 is small. main SH22 > 3°C [5.4°F] LEV3 - 322 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] Self-diagnosis LED Measurement data Symbol SW1 setting value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LEV1 opening ON LEV2 opening ON LEV3 opening ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 G, GA (Standard / main) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BC controller bypass outlet superheat SH12 ON BC controller intermediate part subcool SC16 ON BC controller liquid-side subcool SC11 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 HWE09080 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 GB, HB (Sub 1) LEV3 opening ON GB, HB (Sub 2) LEV3 opening ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 - 323 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] Troubleshooting flow chart for solenoid valve body Start Check for pins not fully inserted on the connector and check the colors of the lead wires visually. Intermediate connector To LEV Control board 2 Brown 5 Red 1 Blue 3 Orange 4 Yellow 6 White Brown Red Blue Orange Yellow White OK? When LEV is fully closed : tick sound When LEV is fully open : no sound Check the above. 6 5 4 3 2 1 OK? YES Repair the fault. OK? Pull out the connector from the board, and check that the electricity runs with a tester. The wiring side of CN05 and 07: Among 1, 3 and 5, and among 2, 4 and 6 OK? Repair the fault. Check the resistance between each coil with a tester (between red and white, red and orange, brown and yellow and brown and blue), and check that the resistance is 150 within 10%. YES NO YES NO YES OK? Replace LEV. Check that no refrigerant leaks from LEV. NO YES NO Replace LEV. 6 5 4 3 2 1 Connect the LED for check, which is as shown in the right figure, to the board connector, and check that the LED keeps lighting for 10 seconds. 10 k NO OK? Replace LEV. YES LED NO Replace the board in trouble. Completed HWE09080 - 324 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] (2) Solenoid valve (SVA, SVB, SVC) Faulty judgment of solenoid valve Stop the operation of the applied BC remote controller system. NO Stop the operation YES Check whether the wire to the solenoid valve is not connected wrongly, or the connector is not loose. NO No fault Repair the fault. YES Run the cooling or heating operation of the refrigerant system of the solenoid valve in trouble. Note 1 Check the operation sound of the solenoid valve to be magnetized at the time of turning on the remote controller. NO Makes a tick sound. YES Remove the solenoid valve coil, and check that there is a suction force. NO There is a suction force. YES Note 2 Note 2 Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes of the solenoid valve, and compare them. There is no temperature difference. : OK There is a temperature difference. : NO Check the relay output with the self-diagnosis LED, and check whether the operation corresponds with the operation mode. Stop the unit with the remote controller. Remove the solenoid valve connector, and check that the electricity runs through the solenoid valve coil. NO OK The electricity runs. YES YES YES Turn on the remote controller with the connector of the solenoid valve in trouble disconnected, and check that the control board outputs 230V. Replace the control board. Corresponds NO Note 2 Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes of the solenoid valve. When the solenoid valve is ON : There is no temperature difference. When the solenoid valve is OFF : There is a temperature difference. Output 230V YES NO Replace the control board. OK Replace the solenoid valve coil. YES Faulty judgment of solenoid valve HWE09080 Solenoid valve failure - 325 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] Check whether the BC board output signal corresponds with the solenoid valve operation correspond. 1) SVA, SVB, SVC SVA, SVB, and SVC turn on or off according to the indoor unit operation mode. Mode Port Cooling Heating Stopped Defrost Fan SVA ON OFF OFF OFF OFF SVB OFF ON OFF OFF OFF SVC ON OFF OFF OFF ON SVM1, SVM1b, SVM2, SVM2b SVM1, SVM1b, SVM2, and SVM2b turn on or off according to the indoor unit operation mode. Operation mode SVM1,SVM1b SVM2, SVM2b Cooling only Cooling main Heating only Heating main Defrost Stopped ON Pressure differential control OFF or ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF Pressure differential control OFF or ON Pressure differential control OFF or ON OFF OFF OFF 2) SVA, SVB, SVC Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes and Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes and HWE09080 - 326 - of SVA. of SVB. GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 4. BC controller transformer BC controller control board CNTR CN03 Red White Red Normal CNTR(1)-(3) about 58 ohm. CN03(1)-(3) about 1.6 ohm. Red Abnormal Open-phase or shorting * Before measuring the resistance, pull out the connector. HWE09080 - 327 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A] -6- Inverter (THMU-A) Replace only the compressor if only the compressor is found to be defective. (Overcurrent will flow through the inverter if the compressor is damaged, however, the power supply is automatically cut when overcurrent is detected, protecting the inverter from damage.) Replace the defective components if the inverter is found to be defective. If both the compressor and the inverter are found to be defective, replace the defective component(s) of both devices. (1) Inverter-related problems: Troubleshooting and remedies 1) The INV board has a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor, in which residual voltage remains even after the main power is turned off, posing a risk of electric shock. Before inspecting the inverter-related items, turn off the main power, wait for 5 to 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage at both ends of the electrolytic capacitor has dropped to a sufficiently low level. 2) The IPM on the inverter becomes damaged if there are loose screws are connectors. If a problem occurs after replacing some of the parts, mixed up wiring is often the cause of the problem. Check for proper connection of the wiring, screws, connectors, and Faston terminals. 3) To avoid damage to the circuit board, do not connect or disconnect the inverter-related connectors with the main power turned on. 4) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them. 5) When the IPM, diode stack, or IGBT is replaced, apply a thin layer of heat radiation grease that is supplied evenly to these parts. Wipe off any grease that may get on the wiring terminal to avoid terminal contact failure. 6) Faulty wiring to the compressor damages the compressor. Connect the wiring in the correct phase sequence. HWE09080 - 328 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A] Error display/failure condition [1] Inverter related errors 4250, 4220, 4230, 4240,4260, 5301, 0403 [2] Main power breaker trip Measure/inspection item Check the details of the inverter error in the error log in X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board. Take appropriate measures to the error code and the error details in accordance with IX. [2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller. <1> Check the breaker capacity. <2> Check whether the electrical system is short-circuited or groundfaulted. <3> If items cause is not <1>or <2> are not the causes of the problem, see (3)-[1]. [3] Main power earth leakage breaker trip <1> Check the earth leakage breaker capacity and the sensitivity current. <2> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter <3> If the cause is not <1>or <2>, see (3)-[1] [4] Only the compressor does not operate. Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to (2) [4] if the compressor is in operation. [5] The compressor vibrates violently at all times or makes an abnormal sound. See (2)-[4]. [6] Noise is picked up by the peripheral device <1> Check that power supply wiring of the peripheral device does not run close to the power supply wiring of the heat source unit. <2> Check that the inverter output wiring is not in close contact with the power supply wiring and the transmission lines. <3> Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire. <4> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter <5> Attach a ferrite core to the inverter output wiring. (Contact the factory for details of the service part settings.) <6> Provide separate power supply to the air conditioner and other electric appliances. <7> If the error occurred suddenly, a ground fault of the inverter output can be considered. See (2)-[4]. *Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above. [7] Sudden malfunction (as a result of external noise.) <1> Check that the grounding work is performed properly. <2>Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire. <3>Check that neither the transmission line nor the external connection wiring does not run close to another power supply system or does not run through the same conduit pipe. * Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above. HWE09080 - 329 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A] (2) Inverter output related troubles Items to be checked [1] Check the INV board error detection circuit. Phenomena Remedy (1) Disconnect the invert- 1) er output wire from the terminals of the INV board (SC-U, SC-V, SC-W). IPM/overcurrent breaker trip Error code: 4250 Detail code: No. 101, 104, 105, 106, and 107 Replace the INV board. (2) Put the heat source unit into operation. 2) Logic error Error code: 4220 Detail code: No. 111 Replace the INV board. 3) ACCT sensor circuit failure Error code: 5301 Detail code: No.117 Replace the INV board. 4) IPM open Error code: 5301 Detail code: No.119 Normal 1) Compressor Meg failure Error if less than 1 Mohm. When no liquid refrigerant in the compressor Check that no liquid refrigerant is present in the compressor, and replace the compressor. 2) Compressor coil resistance failure Coil resistance value of 0.3 ohm (20°C [68°F]) Replace the compressor. [2] Check for compressor ground fault or coil error. Disconnect the compressor wiring, and check the compressor Meg, and coil resistance. [3] Check whether the inverter is damaged. (No load) (1) Disconnect the invert- 1) er output wire from the terminals of the INV board (SC-U, SC-V, SC-W). Inverter-related problems are detected. Connect the short-circuit connector to CN6, and go to section [1]. (2) Disconnect the short- 2) circuit connector from CN6 on the INV board. Inverter voltage is not output. Replace the INV board. [4] Check whether the inverter is damaged. (During compressor operation) HWE09080 (3) Put the heat source unit into operation. Check the inverter output voltage after the inverter output frequency has stabilized. 3) There is an voltage imbalance between the wires. Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V Replace the INV board. 4) There is no voltage imbalance between the wires. Normal *Reconnect the short-circuit connector to CN6 after checking the voltage. Put the heat source unit into operation. Check the inverter output voltage after the inverter output frequency has stabilized. 1) There is an voltage imbalance between the wires. Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V If the problem persists, replace the INV board. If the problem persists after replacing the above parts, go to section [2]. - 330 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A] (3) Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is tripped. Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy [1] Perform Meg check between the terminals on the power terminal block TB1. [2] Turn on the power again and check again. 1) Turn on the heat source unit and check that it operates normally. 1) Operates normally without tripping the main breaker. 2) Main power breaker trip [3] 2) Zero to several ohm, or Meg failure Check each part in the main inverter circuit. *Refer to "Simple checking procedures for individual components of main inMain power breaker trip verter circuit". IGBT module No remote control display IPM Rush current protection resistor Electromagnetic relay DC reactor a) The wiring may have been shortcircuited. Search for the wire that short-circuited, and repair it. b) If item a) above is not the cause of the problem, the compressor may have a problem. A compressor ground fault can be considered. Go to (2)-[2]. (4) Trouble treatment when the main power earth leakage breaker is tripped Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy [1] Check the earth leakage breaker capacity and the sensitivity current. Use of a non-specified earth leakage breaker Replace with a regulation earth leakage breaker. [2] Check the resistance at the power supply terminal block with a megger. Failure resistance value Check each part and wiring. *Refer to (5) "Simple checking procedures for individual components of main inverter circuit". IGBT module Rush current protection resistor Electromagnetic relay DC reactor [3] Disconnect the compressor wirings and check the resistance of the compressor with a megger. Failure compressor if the insu- Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in lating resistance value is not in the compressor. If there is none, replace the compressor. specified range. Failure when the insulating resistance value is 1 Mohm or less. The insulation resistance could go down to close to 1Mohm after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor. If the earth leakage breaker is triggered, please use the following procedure to take care of this. Disconnect the wires from the compressor's terminal block. If the resistance is less than 1 Mohm, switch on the power for the heat source unit with the wires still disconnected. Leave the power on for at least 12 hours. Check that the resistance has recovered to 1 Mohm or greater. Earth leakage current measurement method For easy on-site measurement of the earth leakage current, enable the filter with a measurement instrument that has filter functions as below, clamp all the power supply wires, and measure. Recommended measurement instrument: CLAMP ON LEAK HiTESTER 3283 made by HIOKI E.E. CORPORATION When measuring one device alone, measure near the device's power supply terminal block. HWE09080 - 331 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A] (5) Simple checking procedure for individual components of main inverter circuit Before checking, turn the power off and remove the parts to be checked from the control box. Part name Rush current protection resistor R1(R2) Electromagnetic relay 72C Judgment method Measure the resistance between terminals: 22 ohm 10% This electromagnetic relay is rated at 200VAC and is driven by a coil. The resistance between the coils in row A cannot be measured with a tester.Check only for shorting. Installation direction Row Row Row Row Row A B C D E A2 44 34 Check point Coil Row A 24 14 Checking criteria Not to be short-circuited With the test button turned off : Contact Row B to Row E With the test button turned on : 0 A1 43 33 23 13 Test button DC reactor DCL HWE09080 Measure the resistance between terminals: 1ohm or lower (almost 0 ohm) Measure the resistance between terminals and the chassis: - 332 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A] -6- Inverter (YHMU-A) Replace only the compressor if only the compressor is found to be defective. Replace the defective components if the inverter is found to be defective. If both the compressor and the inverter are found to be defective, replace the defective component(s) of both devices. (1) Inverter-related problems: Troubleshooting and remedies 1) The INV board has a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor, in which residual voltage remains even after the main power is turned off, posing a risk of electric shock. Turn off the unit, leave it turned off for at least 10 minutes, and check that the voltage across FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board or the terminals at both ends of the electrolytic capacitor is 20V or below before checking inside the control box. (It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turn off.) 2) The IPM on the inverter becomes damaged if there are loose screws are connectors. If a problem occurs after replacing some of the parts, mixed up wiring is often the cause of the problem. Check for proper connection of the wiring, screws, connectors, and Faston terminals. 3) To avoid damage to the circuit board, do not connect or disconnect the inverter-related connectors with the main power turned on. 4) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them. 5) When the IPM or IGBT is replaced, apply a thin layer of heat radiation grease that is supplied evenly to these parts. Wipe off any grease that may get on the wiring terminal to avoid terminal contact failure. 6) Faulty wiring to the compressor damages the compressor. Connect the wiring in the correct phase sequence. HWE09080 - 333 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A] Error display/failure condition Measure/inspection item [1] Inverter related errors 4250, 4220, 4230, 4240,4260, 5301, 0403 Check the details of the inverter error in the error log in X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board. Take appropriate measures to the error code and the error details in accordance with IX. [2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller. [2] Main power breaker trip Refer to "(3) Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is tripped". [3] Main power earth leakage breaker trip Refer to "(4) Trouble treatment when the main power earth leakage breaker is tripped". [4] Only the compressor does not operate. Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to (2) [4] if the compressor is in operation. [5] The compressor vibrates violently at all times or makes an abnormal sound. See (2)-[4]. [6] Noise is picked up by the peripheral device <1> Check that power supply wiring of the peripheral device does not run close to the power supply wiring of the heat source unit. <2> Check if the inverter output wiring is not running parallel to the power supply wiring and the transmission lines. <3> Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire. <4> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter <5> Attach a ferrite core to the inverter output wiring. (Contact the factory for details of the service part settings.) <6> Provide separate power supply to the air conditioner and other electric appliances. <7> If the error occurred suddenly, a ground fault of the inverter output can be considered. See (2)-[4]. *Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above. [7] Sudden malfunction (as a result of external noise.) <1> Check that the grounding work is performed properly. <2>Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire. <3>Check that neither the transmission line nor the external connection wiring does not run close to another power supply system or does not run through the same conduit pipe. * Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above. HWE09080 - 334 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A] (2) Inverter output related troubles Items to be checked [1] Check the INV board error detection circuit. Phenomena Remedy (1) Disconnect the invert- 1) er output wire from the terminals of the INV board (SC-U, SC-V, SC-W). Overcurrent error Error code: 4250 Detail code: No. 101, 104, 105, 106, and 107 Replace the INV board. (2) Put the heat source unit into operation. 2) Logic error Error code: 4220 Detail code: No. 111 Replace the INV board. 3) ACCT sensor circuit failure Error code: 5301 Detail code: No.117 Replace the INV board. 4) IPM open Error code: 5301 Detail code: No.119 Normal 1) Compressor Meg failure Error if less than 1 Mohm. Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in the compressor. If there is none, replace the compressor. 2) Compressor coil resistance failure Coil resistance value of 1 ohm (20°C [68°F]) Replace the compressor. Connect the short-circuit connector to CN6, and go to section [1]. [2] Check for compressor ground fault or coil error. Disconnect the compressor wiring, and check the compressor Meg, and coil resistance. [3] Check whether the inverter is damaged. (No load) (1) Disconnect the invert- 1) er output wire from the terminals of the INV board (SC-U, SC-V, SC-W). Inverter-related problems are detected. (2) Disconnect the shortcircuit connector from CN6 on the INV board. 2) Inverter voltage is not output at the Replace the INV board. terminals (SC-U, SC-V, and SC-W) (3) Put the heat source unit into operation. Check the inverter output voltage after the inverter output frequency has stabilized. 3) There is an voltage imbalance between the wires. Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V Replace the INV board. 4) There is no voltage imbalance between the wires. Normal *Reconnect the short-circuit connector to CN6 after checking the voltage. 1) There is an voltage imbalance between the wires. Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V Replace the INV board. [4] Check whether the inverter is damaged. (During compressor operation) HWE09080 Put the heat source unit into operation. Check the inverter output voltage after the inverter output frequency has stabilized. - 335 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A] (3) Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is tripped Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy [1] Check the breaker capacity. Use of a non-specified breaker Replace it with a specified breaker. [2] Perform Meg check between the terminals on the power terminal block TB1. Zero to several ohm, or Meg failure [3] Turn on the power again and check again. 1) Main power breaker trip Check each part and wiring. *Refer to (5) "Simple checking procedures for individual components of main inverter circuit". IGBT module Rush current protection resistor Electromagnetic relay DC reactor Turn on the heat source unit and check that it operates normally. 1) Operates normally without tripping the main breaker. [4] 2) No remote control display 2) Main power breaker trip a) The wiring may have been short-circuited. Search for the wire that short-circuited, and repair it. b) If item a) above is not the cause of the problem, refer to (2)-[1]-[6]. (4) Trouble treatment when the main power earth leakage breaker is tripped Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy [1] Check the earth leakage breaker capacity and the sensitivity current. Use of a non-specified earth leakage breaker Replace with a regulation earth leakage breaker. [2] Check the resistance at the power supply terminal block with a megger. Failure resistance value Check each part and wiring. *Refer to (5) "Simple checking procedures for individual components of main inverter circuit". IGBT module Rush current protection resistor Electromagnetic relay DC reactor [3] Disconnect the compressor wirings and check the resistance of the compressor with a megger. Failure compressor if the insu- Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in lating resistance value is not in the compressor. If there is none, replace the compressor. specified range. Failure when the insulating resistance value is 1 Mohm or less. The insulation resistance could go down to close to 1Mohm after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor. If the earth leakage breaker is triggered, please use the following procedure to take care of this. Disconnect the wires from the compressor's terminal block. If the resistance is less than 1 Mohm, switch on the power for the heat source unit with the wires still disconnected. Leave the power on for at least 12 hours. Check that the resistance has recovered to 1 Mohm or greater. Earth leakage current measurement method For easy on-site measurement of the earth leakage current, enable the filter with a measurement instrument that has filter functions as below, clamp all the power supply wires, and measure. Recommended measurement instrument: CLAMP ON LEAK HiTESTER 3283 made by HIOKI E.E. CORPORATION When measuring one device alone, measure near the device's power supply terminal block. HWE09080 - 336 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A] (5) Simple checking procedure for individual components of main inverter circuit Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less. Part name IGBT module Judgment method See "Troubleshooting for IGBT Module ". ( 9 [4] - 6 - (6) ) Rush current pro- Measure the resistance between terminals R1 and R5: 22 ohm tection resistor R1, R5 Electromagnetic relay 72C 10% This electromagnetic relay is rated at DC12V and is driven by a coil. Check the resistance between terminals Upper 1 2 3 4 Installation direction Contact 6 DC reactor DCL Check point Coil Between Terminals 5 and 6 Checking criteria(W) Not to be short-circuited (Center value 75 ohm) Between Terminals 1 and 2 Between Terminals 3 and 4 5 Measure the resistance between terminals: 1ohm or lower (almost 0 ohm) Measure the resistance between terminals and the chassis: (6) Troubleshooting for IGBT Module Measure the resistances between each pair of terminals on the IGBT with a tester, and use the results for troubleshooting. The terminals on the INV board are used for the measurement. 1) Notes on measurement Check the polarity before measuring. (On the tester, black normally indicates plus.) Check that the resistance is not open ( ohm) or not shorted (to 0 ohm). The values are for reference, and the margin of errors is allowed. The result that is more than double or half of the result that is measured at the same measurement point is not allowed. Disconnect all the wiring connected the INV board, and make the measurement. 2) Tester restriction Use the tester whose internal electrical power source is 1.5V or greater Use the dry-battery-powered tester. (The accurate diode-specific resistance cannot be measured with the button-battery-powered card tester, as the applied voltage is low.) Use a low-range tester if possible. A more accurate resistance can be measured. HWE09080 - 337 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A] Judgment value (reference) Black Red SC-P1 FT-N SC-P1 - - FT-N - - SC-L1 SC-L2 SC-L3 5 - 200 ohm 5 - 200 ohm 5 - 200 ohm SC-L1 5 - 200 ohm - - - SC-L2 5 - 200 ohm - - - SC-L3 5 - 200 ohm - - - SC-V SC-W Black Red SC-P2 FT-N SC-P2 - - FT-N - - SC-U 5 - 200 ohm 5 - 200 ohm 5 - 200 ohm SC-U 5 - 200 ohm - - - SC-V 5 - 200 ohm - - - SC-W 5 - 200 ohm - - - INV board external diagram SC-P2 SC-P1 FT-N SC-V SC-L1 SC-L2 SC-W SC-L3 SC-U HWE09080 - 338 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A] -7- Control Circuit (THMU-A) (1) Control power source function block Power source system (AC 208 / 230 V) Control system (DC 5 ~ 30 V) Noise filter Noise filter TB1 AC 208 / 230 V Terminal block for power source INV board Rectifier Fuse 72C Smoothing capacitor DCL Inverter Compressor Inverter drive circuit 17V Power supply Surge protection Microcomputer 5 V Power supply Control board Relay, LEV Drive circuit LEV 12V Power supply Smoothing capacitor Inverter reset circuit Microcomputer 63H1 Heat source unit Fuse 72C Solenoid valve 4-way valve CH11 18 V Power supply 5 V Power supply DC / DC converter M-NET board Fuse Detection circuit for the power supply to the transmission line TB7 Terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (DC 24 ~ 30 V) Relay drive circuit CN40 30 V Power supply TB3 Indoor/heat source transmission block (DC 24 ~ 30 V) M-NET transmission line (Non-polar 2 wire) AC Power source AC 208 / 230 V Relay TB2 Terminal block for power source TB15 Indoor unit Terminal block for MA remote TB5 controller To next unit (Indoor unit) DC / DC converter MA remote controller wiring (Non-polar 2 wire) Terminal block for transmission line connection DC 17 ~ 30 V A, B DC 17 ~ 30 V M-NET remote controller A, B DC 9 ~ 12 V MA remote controller * MA remote controllers and M-NET remote controllers cannot be used together. (Both the M-NET and MA remote controller can be connected to a system with a system controller.) HWE09080 - 339 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A] (2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit Check the voltage at the indoor/heat source transmission terminal block (TB3) of heat source unit. DC 24 ~ 30 V YES Check whether the transmission line is disconnected, check for contact failure, and repair the problem. NO Check the voltage at TB3 after removing transmission line from TB3. DC 24 ~ 30 V YES NO Check if the indoor/heat source transmission line is not short-circuited, and repair the problem. Check whether the male connector is connected to the female power supply connector (CN40). NO Connected YES Check voltage of terminal block for centralized control (TB7). DC24 ~ 30V YES Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the transmission line (CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors. NO NO Check voltage of TB7 by removing transmission line from TB7. DC24 ~ 30V YES Fix the wiring and connector Is there a wiring error or a connector disconnection? disconnection. YES Check for shorted transmission line for centralized control. NO Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the CNS2 on the control board. DC24 ~ 30V YES Replace the control board. NO Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the CN102 on the power supply board for the transmission line. DC24 ~ 30V YES Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the transmission line (CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors. NO Is there a connector disconnection? YES Fix the connector disconnection. NO Check the voltage between No.5 and No.2 pins of the CNIT on the control board. Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of the CNDC on the INV board. DC265 ~ 357V NO YES Is the voltage measurement between 4.5 and 5.2 VDC? YES Replace the M-NET board Replace the M-NET board NO Check the voltage between SC-P1 and TB-N on the INV board. DC265 ~ 357V YES Check the inrush current resistance (R1). NO NO Check the voltages among SC-R, SC-S, and SC-T on the INV board. 22 10% YES AC188 ~ 253V Replace the inrush current limiting resistor. Replace the INV board. YES Replace the INV board. NO Check the voltages among TB21, TB22, and TB23 on the noise filter. YES AC188 ~ 253V NO Check the wiring between the noise filter and the INV board as well as screw tightness, and fix any problems found. Check the voltage at the power supply terminal block TB1. YES AC188 ~ 253V Replace the noise filter. NO Check and fix any power supply wiring and main power supply problems found. Turn on the power again. HWE09080 - 340 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A] -7- Control Circuit (YHMU-A) (1) Control power source function block Power source system (AC 230 / 460 V) Control system (DC 5 ~ 30 V) INV board Rectifier Noise filter Noise filter TB1 AC 460V Terminal block for power source 72C DCL Smoothing capacitor Fuse Compressor Inverter drive circuit 17V Power supply Rectifier Surge protection Transformer Microcomputer 5 V Power supply Fuse AC460V Inverter AC230V AC230V Fuse Solenoid valve 4-way valve CH11 Relay, LEV Drive circuit 72C, LEV 12V Power supply Inverter reset circuit Microcomputer Heat source unit Control board 63H1 18 V Power supply 5 V Power supply DC / DC converter M-NET board Detection circuit for the power supply to the transmission line TB7 Terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (DC 24 ~ 30 V) Relay drive circuit CN40 TB3 Indoor/heat source transmission block (DC 24 ~ 30 V) M-NET transmission line (Non-polar 2 wire) AC Power source AC 220 / 240 V 30 V Power supply Relay TB2 Terminal block for power source TB15 Indoor unit Terminal block for MA remote TB5 controller To next unit (Indoor unit) DC / DC converter MA remote controller wiring (Non-polar 2 wire) Terminal block for transmission line connection DC 17 ~ 30 V A, B DC 17 ~ 30 V M-NET remote controller A, B DC 9 ~ 12 V MA remote controller * MA remote controllers and M-NET remote controllers cannot be used together. (Both the M-NET and MA remote controller can be connected to a system with a system controller.) HWE09080 - 341 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A] (2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit Check the voltage at the indoor/heat source transmission terminal block (TB3) of heat source unit. YES DC 24 ~ 30 V NO Check whether the transmission line is disconnected, check for contact failure, and repair the problem. Check the voltage at TB3 after removing transmission line from TB3. YES DC 24 ~ 30 V NO Check if the indoor/heat source transmission line is not short-circuited, and repair the problem. Check whether the male connector is connected to the female power supply connector (CN40). NO Connected YES Check voltage of terminal block for centralized control (TB7). DC 24 ~ 30 V YES Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the transmission line (CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors. NO NO Check voltage of TB7 by removing transmission line from TB7. DC 24 ~ 30 V YES Is there a wiring error or a connector disconnection? Fix the wiring and connector disconnection. YES Check for shorted transmission line or power feed collision for centralized control. NO Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the CNS2 on the control board. DC 24 ~ 30 V YES Replace the control board. NO Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the CN102 on the power supply board for the transmission line. DC 24 ~ 30 V YES Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the transmission line (CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors. NO YES Is there a connector disconnection? Fix the connector disconnection. NO Check the voltage between No.5 and No.2 pins of the CNIT on the control board. NO Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of the noise filter CN4. YES Is the voltage measurement between 4.5 and 5.2 VDC? Replace the M-NET board YES DC270 ~ 356V Replace the control board. NO Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of the noise filter CN5. DC270 ~ 356V YES Replace the M-NET board NO Check the noise filter fuse F4 . Fuse F4 on the noise filter board is blown. YES NO Disconnect the noise filters CN4 and CN5, and then replace fuse F4 on the noise filter board, then turn the power on. Fuse F4 on the noise filter board is blown. YES Replace the noise filter. NO Connect the noise filter CN4, and then turn the power on. Fuse F4 on the noise filter board is blown. YES Replace the control board. NO Check fuse F5. Replace the M-NET board YES Fuse F5 is blown. Pull out CN4 and CN5 on the noise filter, replace fuse F5, and turn on the power. YES NO Replace the noise filter. Fuse F5 is blown. Check the voltages among TB22 and TB23 on the noise filter NO Connect the noise filter CN4, and then turn the power on. YES Fuse F5 is blown. Replace the control board. NO Replace the M-NET board YES AC414 ~ 506V Replace the noise filter. NO Check the voltage between L2 and L3 at the power supply terminal block TB1. AC414 ~ 506V NO YES Replace the noise filter. Check and fix any power supply wiring and main power supply problems found. Turn on the power again. HWE09080 - 342 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [5] Refrigerant Leak 1. Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Cooling season) 1) Mount a pressure gauge on the service check joint (CJ2) on the low-pressure side. 2) Stop all the indoor units, and close the liquid service valve (BV2) inside the heat source unit while the compressor is being stopped. 3) Stop all the indoor units; turn on SW2-4 on the heat source unit control board while the compressor is being stopped.(Pump down mode will start, and all the indoor units will run in cooling test run mode.) 4) In the pump down mode (SW2-4 is ON), all the indoor units will automatically stop when the low pressure (63LS) reaches 0.383MPa [55psi] or less or 15 minutes have passed after the pump mode started. Stop all the indoor units and compressors when the pressure indicated by the pressure gauge, which is on the check joint (CJ2) for low-pressure service, reaches 0.383MPa [55psi] or 20 minutes pass after the pump down operation is started. 5) Close the gas service valve (BV1) inside the heat source unit. 6) Collect the refrigerant that remains in the extended pipe for the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere when it is collected. 7) Repair the leak. 8) After repairing the leak, vacuum*1 the extension pipe and the indoor unit. 9) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the service valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the heat source unit and turn off SW2-4. 2. (1) 1) 2) 3) Leak spot: In the case of heat source unit (Cooling season) Run all the indoor units in the cooling test run mode. To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON. Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the cooling mode. Check that all the indoor units are performing a cooling operation. (2) Check the values of Tc and TH6. (To display the values on the LED screen, use the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the heat source unit control board.) 1) When Tc-TH6 is 10°C [18°F] or more : See the next item (3). 2) When Tc-TH6 is less than 10°C [18°F] : After the compressor stops, collect the refrigerant inside the system, repair the leak, perform evacuation, and recharge new refrigerant. (Leak spot: 4. In the case of heat source unit, handle in the same way as heating season.) Tc self-diagnosis switch TH6 self-diagnosis switch SW1 SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON ON (3) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor. 1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON. 2) Check that all the indoor units are being stopped. (4) Close the service valves (BV1 and BV2). (5) To prevent the liquid seal, extract small amount of refrigerant from the check joint of the liquid service valve (BV2), as the liquid seal may cause a malfunction of the unit. (6) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the heat source unit.Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere when it is collected. (7) Repair the leak. (8) After repairing the leak, replace the dryer with the new one, and perform evacuation inside the heat source unit. (9) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the service valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the heat source unit. When the power to the heat source-indoor unit must be turned off to repair the leak after closing the service valves specified in the item 4, turn the power off in approximately one hour after the heat source-indoor units stop. 1) When 30 minutes have passed after the item 4 above, the indoor unit lev turns from fully closed to slightly open to prevent the refrigerant seal. LEV2a and LEV2b open when the heat source unit remains stopped for 15 minutes to allow for the collection of refrigerant in the heat source unit heat exchanger and to enable the evacuation of the heat source unit heat exchanger. If the power is turned off in less than 5 minutes, LEV2a and LEV2b may close, trapping high-pressure refrigerant in the heat source unit heat exchanger and creating a highly dangerous situation. *1. Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure. HWE09080 - 343 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 2) Therefore, if the power source is turned off within 30 minutes, the lev remains fully closed and the refrigerant remains sealed. When only the power for the indoor unit is turned off, the indoor unit LEV turns from faintly open to fully closed. 3) In the cooling cycle, the section between "21S4b, c" and "LEV 2a, b" will form a closed circuit. To recover the refrigerant or evacuate the system, "LEV1" and "SV5b, c" will be open by setting SW5-8 to ON in the stop mode. Set SW5-8 to OFF upon completion of all work. 3. (1) 1) 2) 3) Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Heating season) Run all the indoor units in heating test run mode. To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON. Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the heating mode. Check that all the indoor units are performing a heating operation. (2) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor. 1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON. 2) Check that all the indoor units are stopped. (3) Close the service valves (BV1 and BV2). (4) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere when it is collected. (5) Repair the leak. (6) After repairing the leak, perform evacuation*1 of the extension pipe for the indoor unit, and open the service valves (BV1 and BV2) to adjust refrigerant. 4. Leak spot: In the case of heat source unit (Heating season) 1) Collect the refrigerant in the entire system (heat source unit, extended pipe and indoor unit).Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere when it is collected. 2) Repair the leak. 3) After repairing the leak, replace the dryer with the new one, and perform evacuation of the entire system, and calculate the standard amount of refrigerant to be added (for heat source unit, extended pipe and indoor unit), and charge the refrigerant. Refer to "VIII [4] 3. " If the indoor or heat source units need to be turned off for repairing leaks during Step 1) above, turn off the power approximately 1 hour after the units came to a stop. If the power is turned off in less than 15 minutes, LEV2a and LEV2b may close, trapping high-pressure refrigerant in the heat source unit heat exchanger and creating a highly dangerous situation. In the cooling cycle, the section between "21S4b, c" and "LEV 2a, b" will form a closed circuit. To recover the refrigerant or evacuate the system, "LEV1" and "SV5b, c" will be open by setting SW5-8 to ON in the stop mode. Set SW5-8 to OFF upon completion of all work. *1. Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure. HWE09080 - 344 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 5. Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Cooling season) 1) Mount a pressure gauge on the service check joint (CJ2) on the low-pressure side. 2) Stop all the indoor units, and close the high-pressure side refrigerant service valve (BV2) on the heat source unit while the compressor is being stopped. 3) Stop all the indoor units; turn on SW2-4 on the heat source unit control board while the compressor is being stopped.(Pump down mode will start, and all the indoor units will run in cooling test run mode.) 4) In the pump down mode (SW2-4 is ON), all the indoor units will automatically stop when the low pressure (63LS) reaches 0.383MPa [55psi] or less or 15 minutes have passed after the pump mode started. Stop all the indoor units and compressors when the pressure indicated by the pressure gauge, which is on the check joint (CJ2) for low-pressure service, reaches 0.383MPa [55psi] or 20 minutes pass after the pump down operation is started. 5) Close the service ball valve (BV1) on the low-pressure pipe on the heat source unit. 6) Collect the refrigerant that remains in the extended pipe for the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere when it is collected. 7) Repair the leak. 8) After repairing the leak, vacuum*1 the extension pipe and the indoor unit. 9) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the ball valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the heat source unit and turn off SW2-4. 6. (1) 1) 2) 3) Leak spot: In the case of heat source unit (Cooling season) Run all the indoor units in the cooling test run mode. To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON. Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the cooling mode. Check that all the indoor units are performing a cooling operation. (2) Check the SC16 value. (This valve can be displayed on the LED by setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the heat source unit control board.) 1) When SC16 is 10°C [18°F] or above: Go to the next item (3). 2) When the SC16 value is below 10°C [18°F] : After the compressor has stopped, extract the refrigerant in the system, repair the leak, evacuate the air from the system *1, and charge the system with refrigerant. (If the leak is in the heat source unit, follow the same procedure as listed under "heating season.") SC16 self-diagnosis switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON (3) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor. 1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON. 2) Check that all the indoor units are being stopped. (4) Close the ball valves (BV1 and BV2). (5) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the heat source unit.Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere when it is collected. (6) Repair the leak. (7) After repairing the leak, replace the dryer with the new one, and perform evacuation *1 inside the heat source unit. (8) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the ball valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the heat source unit. *1. Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure. HWE09080 - 345 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 7. (1) 1) 2) 3) Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Heating season) Run all the indoor units in heating test run mode. To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON. Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the heating mode. Check that all the indoor units are performing a heating operation. (2) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor. 1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON. 2) Check that all the indoor units are stopped. (3) Close the ball valves (BV1 and BV2). (4) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere when it is collected. (5) Repair the leak. (6) After repairing the leak, perform evacuation of the extension pipe*1 for the indoor unit, and open the ball valves (BV1 and BV2) to adjust refrigerant. 8. Leak spot: In the case of heat source unit (Heating season) 1) Collect the refrigerant in the entire system (heat source unit, extended pipe and indoor unit).Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere when it is collected. 2) Repair the leak. 3) Repair the leak, and evacuate the air from the entire system *1 . Then, calculate the proper amount of refrigerant to be added (heat source unit + extension pipe + indoor unit), and charge the system with that amount. Refer to Chapter VIII [4] 3. for the proper amount of refrigerant charge. *1. Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure. HWE09080 - 346 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [6] Compressor Replacement Instructions 1. Compressor Replacement Instructions Follow the procedures below (Steps 1 through 5) to remove the compressor components and replace the compressor. Reassemble them in the reverse order after replacing the compressor. Service panel Control box 2. Remove the control box. 1. Remove the service panel (front panels). Electric wiring Frame 3. Remove the wires that are secured to the frame, and remove the frame. HWE09080 - 347 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] Acoustic insulation on the compressor Belt heater 4. Remove the insulation material and the belt heater from the compressor. HWE09080 Pipe cover on the water heat exchanger Wiring adjacent to the compressor Thermal insulation on the accumulator 5. First, move the nearby wiring, insulation material on the accumulator, and pipe covers on the pipe and water heat exchanger out of the way or protect them from the brazing flame; then debraze the pipe, and replace the compressor. - 348 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 1. Water heat exchanger assembly and check valve (CV8) replacement instructions * The following describes the procedures for replacing the water heat exchanger assembly and check valve (CV8). 1. Applicable models • PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A • PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A 2. Parts to be serviced, Set-contents No. 1 Water-cooled heat exchanger assembly 2 Required materials Parts to be replaced Check valve (CV8) Qty. Water-cooled heat exchanger service parts kit [Kit contents] Instructions sheet Water-cooled heat exchanger assembly 1 kit Check valve service parts kit [Kit contents] Instructions sheet Check valve assmbly Connecting pipe 1 kit 1 1 1 1 1 3. Procedures * Precautions for starting replacement • Check that the main power supply is OFF. • Check that no refrigerant is in the heat source unit. Remove each part according to the 1)-3) procedures on the next page before replacing service parts. Mount the removed parts back in place in a reversed procedures of 1)-3) on the next page after replacing service parts. (1) Water-cooled heat exchanger assembly replacement procedures Removal procedures 1 Remove the duct, solenoid valve block support, and INV heat exchanger support. 2 Hand the solenoid valve block support with wire from the beam so that it will not fall. 3 Remove the fastening plate and the screws holding the water-cooled heat exchanger, and remove the braze 4 Pull the water-cooled heat exchanger forward toward the front of the unit. Installation procedures 6 Install the water-cooled heat exchanger included in the replacement parts kit 7 Reinstall the fastening plate, fixing screws, INV heat exchanger support, solenoid valve block support, and the duct. * Precautions for replacing water-cooled heat exchanger assembly • Be sure to perform no-oxidation brazing when brazing. • After brazing, check the condition around the brazing. After confirming no leakage, evacuate the air inside. (*1) • Perform brazing with care of the flame direction so that it does not burn cables and plates etc. in the unit. *1: Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure. HWE09080 - 349 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 2) Disconnect all wires inside the control box, and remove the control box. 1) Remove the service panel and the water pipe inlet/outlet panel. 3) Remove Frame M under the control box. If the compressor is accessible by removing the rear service panel, it may facilitate compressor replacement. Remove the duct, solenoid valve block support, and INV heat exchanger support. Suspend the solenoid valve block from the beam with wire so it will not fall. (Refer to the figure below at right. ) INV heat exchanger support Suspend the solenoid valve block from the beam with wire. Duct Solenoid valve block Solenoid valve block Beam Solenoid valve block support Remove the water heat exchanger mounting bracket and the fixing screws (figure below at left), and debraze the sections indicated with arrows in the figure below at right. Pull the water heat exchanger out forward. Debraze the sections here. Water heat exchanger mounting bracket (2 screws) 2 fixing screws Debraze the sections here. Install the replacement water heat exchanger. Reinstall the mounting bracket, fixing screws, INV heat exchanger support, solenoid valve block support, and duct as they were. HWE09080 - 350 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] (2) Replacement procedures for check valve assembly ● Removing the check valve assembly Remove the check valve (CV8), elbow, and the pipe shown in the figure below at left by removing the brazing flux from the sections that are indicated with arrows. Check the shape of the water heat exchanger pipe end. Depending on its shape, the pipe end needs to be cut. When cutting the pipe end, keep burrs from entering the refrigerant circuit. ● Installing the check valve assembly Install the replacement check valve assembly on the unit. Depending on the shape of the pipe end, the connecting pipe needs to be brazed to the pipe. Screw the screws back on. Notes on replacing the check valve assembly Braze the pipes under a nitrogen purge to prevent oxidation. Before heating the pipes, place a wet towel on the check valve to keep its temperature below 120°C [248°F]. After brazing the pipes, check for leaks, and evacuate the air from the pipes. (*1) Direct the flame away from the cables and sheet metals inside the unit so as not to burn them. *1 Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for details. Remove the check valve (CV8), elbow, and the pipe shown in the figure below at left by removing the brazing flux from the sections that are indicated with arrows. Remove the brazing flux. (2 places) Check valve (CV8) Section of the pipe to be removed Elbow Before removal After removal The figures above are the views from behind to present a better view of the section to be removed. HWE09080 - 351 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 2 Depending on the manufacturing period, the section of the pipe that is circled in the figure below at left (after the brazing flux is removed) comes in two types. If the pipe end looks like the one in the figure below in the middle (Pipe type A), cut off 36 mm of the pipe at the end. If the pipe end looks like the one in the figure below at right (Pipe type B), the pipe end needs not be cut off. When cutting the pipe end, keep burrs from entering the refrigerant circuit. 36mm Cut the pipe here. Pipe type A Pipe type B 3 Install the replacement check valve assembly on the unit. When connecting the check valve assembly to the type of pipe shown in the figure above in the middle, braze the connecting pipe that is included in the service parts kit to the check valve assembly. Connecting pipe Check valve assembly *A connecting pipe is required only when the pipe section that is circled in the figure above looks like the one shown in the figure above in the middle entitled "Pipe type A." 4 Screw the screws back on. HWE09080 - 352 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [7] Servicing the BC controller 1. Service panel *Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts. Work procedure Explanatory figure 1) Remove the two lock nuts on the control box, loosen the other two, and remove the control box. 2) Remove the three fixing screws on the service panel, and remove the service panel. 3) Remove the nine machine screws on the ceiling panel, and remove the ceiling panel. Service panel Loosen Ceiling panel Control Box 2. Control box Work procedure Explanatory figure (1) To check the inside of the control box, remove the two lock nuts on the control box cover. 1) Check the terminal connection of the power wire or of the transmission line. 2) Check the transformer. 3) Check the address switch. (2) When the control board is replaced, the followings must be noted. (1) Check that the board type is G,GA, or GB(HB). (2) Check that the wire and the connector are properly connected. It is not required to remove the two fixing screws on the control box when checking the inside. HWE09080 - 353 - CMB-1016NU-G, GA GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 3. Thermistor (liquid pipe/gas pipe temperature detection) *Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts. Work procedure (1) 1) 2) (2) 1) 2) (3) (4) Explanatory figure Remove the service panel. For TH11, TH12, and TH15, refer to 1. 1) - 2). For TH16, refer to 1. 1) - 3) (GA type only) Remove the lead wire of the piping sensor from the control board. TH11,TH12 (CN10) TH15,TH16 (CN11) Pull out the temperature sensor from the temperature sensor housing, and replace the temperature sensor with the new one. Connect the lead wire of the temperature sensor securely on the control board. TH16 TH11 TH15 TH12 CMB-1016NU-GA 4. Pressure sensor Work procedure Explanatory figure (1) Remove the service panel. 1) For the pressure sensors PS1 and PS3, refer to 1. 1) - 2) (2) Remove the pressure sensor connector in trouble from the control board, and insulate the connector. 1) Liquid-side pressure sensor (CNP1) 2) Intermediate-part pressure sensor (CNP3) (3) Attach a new pressure sensor to the place which is shown in the figure, and insert the connector to the control board. PS1 PS3 When gas leaks from the pressure sensor, repair the leak, and follow the instructions above if required. SVM1 HWE09080 - 354 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] 5. LEV Work procedure Explanatory figure (1) Remove the service panel.(Refer to 1. 1) - 3) (2) Replace the LEV in trouble. LEV3 Secure enough service space in the ceiling for welding operation, and conduct the work carefully.If required, dismount the unit from the ceiling, and conduct the work. LEV1 LEV2 SVM2 SVM2b 6. Solenoid valve *Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts. Work procedure Explanatory figure (1) Remove the service panel.(Refer to 1. 1) - 3) (2) Remove the connector of the solenoid valve in trouble. (3) Remove the solenoid valve coil. 1) The coils on the solenoid valves SVA, SVB, SVM1 and SVM2 can be serviced through the inspection door. SVC is accessible for replacement by removing the four mounting screws on the rear panel and removing the panel (if enough space is available on the back). (SVM1 is present only on the G and GA types, SVM2 on the GA type.) Double-pipe heat exchanger CMB-1016NU-G Solenoid valve CMB-1016NU-GA HWE09080 - 355 - GB [ IX Troubleshooting ] [8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display If the LED error display appear as follows while all the SW1 switches are set to OFF, check the items under the applicable item numbers below. 1. Error code appears on the LED display. Refer to IX [2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller.(page 230) 2. LED is blank. Take the following troubleshooting steps. (1) If the voltage between pins 1 and 3 of CNDC on the control board is outside the range between 220 VDC and 380 VDC, refer to IX [4] -7- (2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit. (2) If the LED error display becomes lit when the power is turned on with all the connectors on the control board except CNDC disconnected, there is a problem with the wiring to those connectors or with the connectors themselves. (3) If nothing appears on the display under item (2) above AND the voltage between pins 1 and 3 of CNDC is within the range between 220 VDC and 380 VDC, control board failure is suspected. 3. (1) 1) 2) 3) Only the software version appears on the LED display. Only the software version appears while the transmission cables to TB3 and TB7 are disconnected. Wiring failure between the control board and the transmission line power supply board.(CNIT, CNS2, CN102) If item 1) checks out OK, the transmission line power supply board failure is suspected. If items 1) and 2) check out OK, control board failure is suspected. (2) If the LED display appears as noted in "X [1] 2. LED display at Initial setting" (page 359)while the transmission cables to TB3 and TB7 are disconnected, failure with the transmission cable or the connected equipment is suspected. HWE09080 - 356 - GB X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board [1] How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor ............................................................... 359 HWE09080 - 357 - GB - 358 - [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board [1] How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor 1. How to read the LED By setting the DIP SW 1-1 through 1-10 (Switch number 10 is represented by 0), the operating condition of the unit can be monitored on the service monitor. (Refer to the table on the following pages for DIP SW settings.) The service monitor uses 4-digit 7-segment LED to display numerical values and other types of information. 7SEG LED SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON SW1-10 is represented as “0” in the table. Pressure and temperature are examples of numerical values, and operating conditions and the on-off status of solenoid valve are examples of flag display. 1) Display of numerical values Example: When the pressure data sensor reads 18.8kg/cm2 (Item No. 58) The unit of pressure is in kg/cm2 Use the following conversion formula to convert the displayed value into a value in SI unit. Value in SI unit (MPa) = Displayed value (kg/cm2) x 0.098 2) Flag display Example: When 21S4a, 21S4b, SV1a are ON. (Item No. 3) Upper Lower LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 Example: 3-minutes restart mode (Item No. 14) LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 2. LED display at initial setting From power on until the completion of initial settings, the following information will be displayed on the monitor screen. (Displays No. 1 through No. 4 in order repeatedly.) No Item Display Remarks Software version 1 [0103] : Version 1.03 Refrigerant type 2 [ 410] : R410A Model and capacity [H-20] : Cooling/Heating 20 HP For the first few minutes after power on, the capacity of each heat source unit is displayed. Thereafter, the combined capacity is displayed. 3 Communication address 4 [ 51] : Address 51 After the initial settings have been completed, the information on these items can be checked by making the switch setting that corresponds to No. 517 in the LED display table. Only item No. 1 "Software Version" appears on the display if there is a wiring failure between the control board and the transmission line power supply board or if the circuit board has failed. HWE09080 - 359 - GB [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] 3. Time data storage function The heat source unit has a simple clock function that enables the unit to calculate the current time with an internal timer by receiving the time set by the system controller, such as G(B)-50A. If an error (including a preliminary error) occurs, the error history data and the error detection time are stored into the service memory. The error detection time stored in the service memory and the current time can be seen on the service LED. 1) Use the time displayed on the service LED as a reference. 2) The date and the time are set to "00" by default. If a system controller that sets the time, such as G(B)-50A is not connected, the elapsed time and days since the first power on will be displayed. If the time set on a system controller is received, the count will start from the set date and the time. 3) The time is not updated while the power of the heat source unit is turned off. When the power is turned off and then on again, the count will resume from the time before the power was turned off. Thus, the time that differs the actual time will be displayed. (This also applies when a power failure occurs.) The system controller, such as G(B)-50A, adjusts the time once a day. When the system controller is connected, the time will be automatically updated to the correct current time after the time set by the system controller is received. (The data stored into the memory before the set time is received will not be updated.) (1) Reading the time data: 1) Time display Example: 12 past 9 * Disappears if the time data is deviated due to a power failure, or if a system controller that sets the time is not connected. 2) Date display When the main controller that can set the time is connected Example: May 10, 2003 Alternate display Alternate display of year and month, and date * Appears between the year and the month, and nothing appears when the date is displayed. When the main controller that can set the time is not connected Example: 52 days after power was turned on Alternate display Day count * Appears between the year and the month, and nothing appears when the date is displayed. HWE09080 - 360 - GB HWE09080 - 361 - 0110000000 1110000000 0001000000 1001000000 0101000000 6 7 8 9 10 Bottom Top Bottom Top LD4 72C LD5 LD6 SV1a 0000 to 9999 CH11 SV4d 0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted) 0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted) 0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted) LD3 Contact point demand capacity Emergency operation SV7b SV4b LD2 0000 to 9999 Retry operation SV7a SV4a 21S4a Comp in operation LD1 Display Communication demand capacity Special control Relay output display 3 Relay output display 2 Check (error) display 3 (Including IC and BC) Check (error) display 2 OC/OS error Check (error) display 1 OC/OS error Relay output display 1 Lighting Item *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1010000000 1100000000 3 5 0100000000 2 0010000000 1000000000 1 4 0000000000 1234567890 SW1 0 No. Current data LED monitor display XLED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board Communication error between the OC and OS SV9 OC LD7 Communication error 3-minute restart delay mode Power supply for indoor transmission line CPU in operation LD8 B B B A A B A B A OC B A A A B A OS Unit (A, B) *1 If not demanded controlled, "----" [ % ] appears on the display. If not demanded controlled, "----" [ % ] appears on the display. If no errors are detected, "----" appears on the display. Display of the latest preliminary error If no preliminary errors are detected, "----" appears on the display. Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 362 - 0011000000 1011000000 0111000000 1111000000 0000100000 1000100000 0100100000 1100100000 0010100000 1010100000 0110100000 1110100000 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Indoor unit Operation mode Indoor unit check Unit No. 49 Top Bottom Unit No. 41 Bottom Unit No. 33 Top Unit No. 17 Unit No. 25 Top Bottom Unit No. 9 Unit No. 1 Bottom Top Bottom Unit No. 49 Top Unit No. 33 Unit No. 41 Top Bottom Unit No. 25 Bottom Unit No. 9 Unit No. 17 Top Unit No. 1 BC operation signal Contact point demand LD1 Bottom Top OC/OS identification Heat source unit operation status External signal (Open input contact point) External signal (Open input contact point) Item Unit No. 50 Unit No. 42 Unit No. 34 Unit No. 26 Unit No. 18 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 50 Unit No. 42 Unit No. 34 Unit No. 26 Unit No. 18 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 2 Low-noise mode (Capacity priority ) LD2 Unit No.43 Unit No. 35 Unit No. 27 Unit No. 19 Unit No. 11 Unit No. 3 Unit No.43 Unit No. 35 Unit No. 27 Unit No. 19 Unit No. 11 Unit No. 3 3-minutes restart mode LD3 Unit No. 44 Unit No. 36 Unit No. 28 Unit No. 20 Unit No. 12 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 44 Unit No. 36 Unit No. 28 Unit No. 20 Unit No. 12 Unit No. 4 LD5 Preliminary error Coolingheating changeover (Heating) Unit No. 45 Unit No. 37 Unit No. 29 Unit No. 21 Unit No. 13 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 45 Unit No. 37 Unit No. 29 Unit No. 21 Unit No. 13 Unit No. 5 OC/OS Compressor in operation Coolingheating changeover (Cooling) LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1101000000 1234567890 SW1 11 No. Current data Unit No. 46 Unit No. 38 Unit No. 30 Unit No. 22 Unit No. 14 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 46 Unit No. 38 Unit No. 30 Unit No. 22 Unit No. 14 Unit No. 6 Error LD6 Unit No47 Unit No. 39 Unit No. 31 Unit No. 23 Unit No. 15 Unit No. 7 Unit No47 Unit No. 39 Unit No. 31 Unit No. 23 Unit No. 15 Unit No. 7 3-minutes restart after instantaneous power failure Pump interlock (Contact: open) LD7 Unit No. 48 Unit No. 40 Unit No. 32 Unit No. 24 Unit No. 16 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 48 Unit No. 40 Unit No. 32 Unit No. 24 Unit No. 16 Unit No. 8 Preliminary low pressure error Low-noise mode (Quiet priority) LD8 B B A A A A OC A A A A OS Unit (A, B) *1 Lit during cooling Lit during heating Unlit while the unit is stopped or in the fan mode The lamp that corresponds to the unit that came to an abnormal stop lights. The lamp goes off when the error is reset. Each unit that comes to an abnormal unit will be given a sequential number in ascending order starting with 1. Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 363 - 0010010000 1010010000 0110010000 1110010000 0001010000 1001010000 0101010000 1101010000 0011010000 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Bottom Heat source unit control mode Heat source unit Operation mode Stop Permissible stop Cooling-only ON Unit No. 49 Top Unit No. 33 Unit No. 41 Top Bottom Unit No. 25 Bottom Unit No. 9 Unit No. 17 Top Unit No. 1 LD1 Bottom Top BC operation mode Indoor unit thermostat Item Refrigerant recovery Thermo OFF Standby Cooling-only OFF Unit No. 50 Unit No. 42 Unit No. 34 Unit No. 26 Unit No. 18 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 2 LD2 Abnormal stop Cooling Heating-only ON Unit No.43 Unit No. 35 Unit No. 27 Unit No. 19 Unit No. 11 Unit No. 3 LD3 Scheduled control Coolingmain Heating-only OFF Unit No. 44 Unit No. 36 Unit No. 28 Unit No. 20 Unit No. 12 Unit No. 4 LD4 LD5 Initial start up Heating Mixed-mode ON Unit No. 45 Unit No. 37 Unit No. 29 Unit No. 21 Unit No. 13 Unit No. 5 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1100010000 1111100000 31 35 0111100000 30 0100010000 1011100000 29 1000010000 0011100000 28 34 1101100000 27 33 0101100000 26 0000010000 1001100000 25 32 0001100000 1234567890 SW1 24 No. Current data Defrost Heatingmain Mixed-mode OFF Unit No. 46 Unit No. 38 Unit No. 30 Unit No. 22 Unit No. 14 Unit No. 6 LD6 Oil balance Fan Unit No47 Unit No. 39 Unit No. 31 Unit No. 23 Unit No. 15 Unit No. 7 LD7 Low frequency oil recovery Stop Unit No. 48 Unit No. 40 Unit No. 32 Unit No. 24 Unit No. 16 Unit No. 8 LD8 A A A B B OC A A A OS Unit (A, B) *1 Lit when thermostat is on Unlit when thermostat is off Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 364 - 1111110000 0000001000 1000001000 0100001000 1100001000 0010001000 1010001000 0110001000 1110001000 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 Low-pressure sensor data -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 -99.9 to 999.9 LD3 High-pressure sensor data LD2 -99.9 to 999.9 LD1 Display THBOX THHS1 THINV TH8 TH5 TH2 TH6 TH7 TH3 TH4 Item *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0111110000 56 62 1110110000 0001110000 55 1011110000 0110110000 54 0011110000 1010110000 53 61 0010110000 52 60 1100110000 51 1101110000 0100110000 50 59 1000110000 49 0101110000 0000110000 48 58 1111010000 47 1001110000 0111010000 46 57 1011010000 1234567890 SW1 45 No. Current data LD6 LD7 LD8 A A A A A A A A A A A A OC A A A A A A A A A A A A OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [kgf/cm2] The unit is [°C] Unit in [°C] The unit is [°C] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 365 - 0101101000 1101101000 0011101000 1011101000 0111101000 1111101000 90 91 92 93 94 95 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD4 AK All AK (OC+OS) Comp operating frequency COMP frequency 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD3 Total frequency of each unit LD2 0000 to 9999 LD1 Display Total frequencies (OC+OS) Te Tc Target Te Target Tc Qjh Qjc Qj Item *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1001101000 1100101000 83 89 0100101000 82 0001101000 1000101000 81 88 0000101000 80 1110101000 1111001000 79 87 0111001000 78 0110101000 1011001000 77 86 0011001000 76 1010101000 1101001000 75 85 0101001000 74 0010101000 1001001000 73 84 0001001000 1234567890 SW1 72 No. Current data LD6 LD7 LD8 A B A A A B A A B B B B B OC A A A A A A B B B OS Unit (A, B) *1 Unit in [rsp] The inverter output current (voltage) frequency will equal the integer multiples of the operating frequency of the compressor. Control data [ Hz ] The unit is [°C] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 366 - 1000011000 0100011000 1100011000 0010011000 1010011000 0110011000 1110011000 0001011000 1001011000 0101011000 1101011000 0011011000 1011011000 0111011000 1111011000 0000111000 1000111000 0100111000 1100111000 0010111000 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 Number of times the unit went into the mode to remedy wet vapor suction COMP bus voltage COMP operating current (DC) LEV2 LEV1 LEVINV Item LD1 LD2 LD3 60 to 1400 0 to 480 0 to 480 LD5 0000 to 9999 00.0 to 999.9 00.0 to 999.9 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0000011000 1234567890 SW1 96 No. Current data LD6 LD7 LD8 B A A A A A OC A A A A A OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [V] Peak value[A] Heat source unit LEV opening (Fully open: 1400) Heat source unit LEV opening (Fully open: 480) Heat source unit LEV opening (Fully open: 480) Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 367 - 1000000100 0100000100 1100000100 129 130 131 Integrated operation time of compressor (for rotation purpose) 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 Abnormal Td rise COMP number of startstop events Lower 4 digits Low-pressure drop 0000 to 9999 High-pressure drop LD5 COMP number of startstop events Upper 4 digits Backup mode Abnormal pressure rise LD4 0000 to 9999 LD3 COMP Operation time Lower 4 digits LD2 0000 to 9999 LD1 Display COMP Operation time Upper 4 digits Item *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0000000100 0011111000 124 128 1101111000 123 1111111000 0101111000 122 127 1001111000 121 0111111000 0001111000 120 126 1110111000 119 1011111000 0110111000 118 125 1010111000 1234567890 SW1 117 No. Current data Control box temperature rise LD6 LD7 LD8 B A A A A A OC A A A A A OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [ h ] Count-up at start-up The unit is [Time] Stays lit for 90 seconds after the completion of backup control The unit is [h] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 368 - 1010000100 0110000100 1110000100 0001000100 1001000100 0101000100 1101000100 0011000100 1011000100 0111000100 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 Relay output display BC(Sub1) Relay output display BC(Main) SVA15 SVA13 Top Bottom SVA11 SVA9 Top Bottom SVA7 SVA5 Top Bottom SVA3 SVA1 Bottom Top SVA15 SVA13 Top Bottom SVA11 SVA9 Top Bottom SVA7 SVA5 Top Bottom SVA3 SVA1 SVM1 LD1 Bottom Top Bottom Top Item SVB15 SVB13 SVB11 SVB9 SVB7 SVB5 SVB3 SVB1 SVB15 SVB13 SVB11 SVB9 SVB7 SVB5 SVB3 SVB1 SVM2 LD2 SVC15 SVC13 SVC11 SVC9 SVC7 SVC5 SVC3 SVC1 SVC15 SVC13 SVC11 SVC9 SVC7 SVC5 SVC3 SVC1 SVM1b LD3 SVA16 SVA14 SVA12 SVA10 SVA8 SVA6 SVA4 SVA2 SVA16 SVA14 SVA12 SVA10 SVA8 SVA6 SVA4 SVA2 SVM2b LD4 Display SVB16 SVB14 SVB12 SVB10 SVB8 SVB6 SVB4 SVB2 SVB16 SVB14 SVB12 SVB10 SVB8 SVB6 SVB4 SVB2 LD5 *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0010000100 1234567890 SW1 132 No. Current data SVC16 SVC14 SVC12 SVC10 SVC8 SVC6 SVC4 SVC2 SVC16 SVC14 SVC12 SVC10 SVC8 SVC6 SVC4 SVC2 LD6 LD7 LD8 B B B B B B B B B OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 369 - 0011100100 1011100100 0111100100 1111100100 0000010100 1000010100 0100010100 1100010100 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 SVB16 SVB14 SVB12 SVB10 SVB8 SVB6 SVB4 SVB2 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 BC(Main)SH13 BC(Main)SC16 0000 to 2000 -99.9 to 999.9 BC(Sub1)LEV3 -99.9 to 999.9 BC(Sub1)TH15 0000 to 2000 BC(Sub1)TH12 BC(Main)LEV3 0000 to 2000 -99.9 to 999.9 BC(Main)SH12 BC(Main)LEV1 -99.9 to 999.9 BC(Main)SC11 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 SVA16 SVA14 SVA12 SVA10 SVA8 SVA6 SVA4 SVA2 LD4 BC(Main)PS3 SVC15 SVC13 SVC11 SVC9 SVC7 SVC5 SVC3 SVC1 LD3 -99.9 to 999.9 SVB15 SVB13 SVB11 SVB9 SVB7 SVB5 SVB3 SVB1 LD2 Display BC(Main)PS1 BC(Main)TH16 BC(Main)TH15 BC(Main)TH12 SVA15 SVA13 Top Bottom SVA11 SVA9 Top Bottom SVA7 SVA5 Top Bottom SVA3 SVA1 LD1 Bottom Top BC(Main or standard) TH11 Relay output display BC(Sub2) Item *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1101100100 1110100100 151 156 0110100100 150 155 1010100100 149 0101100100 0010100100 148 154 1100100100 147 0001100100 0100100100 146 1001100100 1000100100 145 153 0000100100 144 152 1111000100 1234567890 SW1 143 No. Current data SVC16 SVC14 SVC12 SVC10 SVC8 SVC6 SVC4 SVC2 LD6 LD7 LD8 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 LEV3a opening (Fully open:2000) LEV3 opening (Fully open:2000) LEV1 opening (Fully open:2000) Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 0101010100 1101010100 0011010100 1011010100 0111010100 170 171 172 173 174 - 370 - LD4 LD5 BC(Main)LEV2 BC(Sub2)LEV3 0000 to 2000 0000 to 2000 -99.9 to 999.9 LD3 BC(Sub2)TH25 LD2 -99.9 to 999.9 LD1 Display BC(Sub2)TH12 Item *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1000110100 1001010100 169 0000110100 0001010100 168 177 1110010100 167 176 0110010100 166 1111010100 1010010100 165 175 0010010100 1234567890 SW1 164 No. Current data LD6 LD7 LD8 B B B B OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 LEV2 opening (Fully open:2000) LEV3a opening (Fully open:2000) Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 371 - 0100001100 1100001100 0010001100 1010001100 0110001100 1110001100 0001001100 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 LD5 0000 to 9999 Error details of inverter (0001-0120) 0000 to 9999 Error details of inverter (0001-0120) 0000 to 9999 Error details of inverter (0001-0120) 0000 to 9999 Error details of inverter (0001-0120) 0000 to 9999 Error details of inverter (0001-0120) 0000 to 9999 Error details of inverter (0001-0120) 0000 to 9999 Error details of inverter (0001-0120) 0000 to 9999 Error details of inverter (0001-0120) 0000 to 9999 Error details of inverter (0001-0120) 0000 to 9999 LD4 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120) 0000 to 9999 LD3 Error history of inverter (At the time of last data backup before error) LD2 Error details of inverter (0001-0120) LD1 Display Error details of inverter Error history 10 Error details of inverter Error history 9 Error details of inverter Error history 8 Error details of inverter Error history 7 Error details of inverter Error history 6 Error details of inverter Error history 5 Error details of inverter Error history 4 Error details of inverter Error history 3 Error details of inverter Error history 2 Error details of inverter Error history 1 Item *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1000001100 193 189 0000001100 0011110100 1011110100 188 1111110100 1101110100 187 192 0101110100 186 191 1001110100 185 0111110100 0001110100 184 190 0110110100 1010110100 181 1110110100 0010110100 180 183 1100110100 179 182 0100110100 1234567890 SW1 178 No. Current data LD6 LD7 LD8 A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B OC A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B OS Unit (A, B) *1 Address and error codes highlighted If no errors are detected, "---- " appears on the display. Preliminary error information of the OS does not appear on the OC. Neither preliminary error information of the OC nor error information of the IC appears on the OS. Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 372 - 0010101100 1010101100 0110101100 1110101100 212 213 214 215 Relay output display 3 Lighting Relay output display 2 Lighting Bottom Top Bottom Top Relay output display 1 Lighting Heat source unit control mode Heat source unit Operation mode BC operation mode OC/OS identification Heat source unit operation status Item SV7a SV4a 21S4a Comp in operation Stop Permissible stop Cooling-only ON BC operation signal LD1 SV7b SV4b Refrigerant recovery Thermo OFF Standby Cooling-only OFF LD2 CH11 Abnormal stop Cooling Heating-only ON 3-minutes restart mode LD3 Preliminary error LD5 Scheduled control Coolingmain Heating-only OFF SV1a 72C Initial start up Heating Mixed-mode ON OC/OS-1/OS-2 Compressor in operation LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1100101100 211 1111001100 207 0100101100 0111001100 206 210 1011001100 205 1000101100 0011001100 204 209 1101001100 203 0000101100 0101001100 202 208 1001001100 1234567890 SW1 201 No. Error history SV4d Heatingmain Mixed-mode OFF Error LD6 SV9 OC Oil balance Fan 3-minutes restart after instantaneous power failure LD7 Lit while power to the indoor units is being supplied Always lit Low frequency oil recovery Stop Preliminary low pressure error LD8 A A A A A A A A A OC A A A A A A A A A OS Unit (A, B) *1 Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 373 - 0101011100 1101011100 0011011100 1011011100 0111011100 1111011100 0000111100 1000111100 0100111100 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 Low-pressure sensor data -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 -99.9 to 999.9 LD3 High-pressure sensor data LD2 -99.9 to 999.9 LD1 Display THBOX THHS1 THINV TH8 TH5 TH2 TH6 TH7 TH3 TH4 Item *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1001011100 1100011100 227 233 0100011100 226 0001011100 1000011100 225 1110011100 0000011100 224 232 1111101100 223 231 0111101100 222 0110011100 1011101100 221 230 0011101100 220 1010011100 1101101100 219 229 0101101100 218 0010011100 1001101100 217 228 0001101100 1234567890 SW1 216 No. Error history LD6 LD7 LD8 A A A A A A A A A A A A OC A A A A A A A A A A A A OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [kgf/cm2] The unit is [°C] Unit in [°C] The unit is [°C] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 374 - 1010000010 0110000010 1110000010 0001000010 1001000010 0101000010 1101000010 0011000010 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD4 AK All AK (OC+OS) Comp operating frequency COMP frequency 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD3 Total frequency of each unit LD2 0000 to 9999 LD1 Display Total frequencies (OC+OS) Te Tc Target Te Target Tc Qjh Qjc Qj Item *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0010000010 0111111100 254 260 1011111100 253 1100000010 0011111100 252 259 1101111100 251 0100000010 0101111100 250 258 1001111100 249 1000000010 0001111100 248 257 1110111100 247 0000000010 0110111100 246 256 1010111100 245 1111111100 0010111100 244 255 1100111100 1234567890 SW1 243 No. Error history LD6 LD7 LD8 A B A A A B A A B B B B B OC A A A A A A B B B OS Unit (A, B) *1 Unit in [rps] Control data [ Hz ] The unit is [°C] The unit is [°C] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 375 - 0111000010 1111000010 0000100010 1000100010 0100100010 1100100010 0010100010 1010100010 0110100010 1110100010 0001100010 1001100010 0101100010 1101100010 0011100010 1011100010 0111100010 1111100010 0000010010 1000010010 0100010010 1100010010 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 60 to 1400 0 to 480 0 to 480 LD5 00.0 to 999.9 00.0 to 999.9 LD4 0000 to 9999 LD3 COMP Operation time Lower 4 digits LD2 0000 to 9999 LD1 Display COMP Operation time Upper 4 digits COMP bus voltage COMP operating current (DC) LEV2 LEV1 LEVINV Item *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1011000010 1234567890 SW1 269 No. Error history LD6 LD7 LD8 A A A A A A A OC A A A A A A A OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [ h ] The unit is [ V ] Peak value[A] Heat source unit LEV opening (Fully open: 1400) Heat source unit LEV opening (Fully open: 480) Heat source unit LEV opening (Fully open: 480) Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 1010010010 0110010010 1110010010 0001010010 1001010010 0101010010 1101010010 0011010010 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 LD4 LD5 Integrated operation time of compressor (for rotation purpose) 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD3 COMP number of startstop events Lower 4 digits LD2 0000 to 9999 LD1 Display COMP number of startstop events Upper 4 digits Item *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0010010010 1234567890 SW1 292 No. Error history LD6 LD7 LD8 B A A OC A A OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [ h ] Count-up at start-up The unit is [Time] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] - 376 - HWE09080 - 377 - 1110110010 0001110010 1001110010 0101110010 1101110010 0011110010 1011110010 0111110010 1111110010 0000001010 1000001010 0100001010 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 BC(Main)PS3 BC(Main)PS1 BC(Main)TH16 BC(Main)TH15 BC(Main)TH12 BC(Main)TH11 Start-up unit Power supply unit Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 OC/OS-1/OS-2 <-> Address OC/OS-1/OS-2 <-> Address LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1110001010 0110110010 310 0110001010 1010110010 309 327 0010110010 308 326 1100110010 307 1010001010 0100110010 306 325 1000110010 305 1100001010 0000110010 304 0010001010 1111010010 303 324 0111010010 323 1011010010 302 1234567890 SW1 301 No. Current data LD6 LD7 LD8 B B B B B B B B OC OS Unit (A, B)*1 Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 378 - 0101101010 1101101010 0011101010 1011101010 0111101010 346 347 348 349 350 BC(Main)LEV2 BC(Sub2)LEV3 BC(Sub2)TH25 BC(Sub2)TH12 BC(Sub1)LEV3 BC(Sub1)TH15 BC(Sub1)TH12 BC(Main)LEV3 BC(Main)LEV1 Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 0000 to 2000 0000 to 2000 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 0000 to 2000 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 0000 to 2000 0000 to 2000 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1001101010 345 339 0001101010 1100101010 338 344 0100101010 337 1110101010 1000101010 336 343 0000101010 335 0110101010 1111001010 334 1010101010 0111001010 333 342 1011001010 332 341 0011001010 331 0010101010 1101001010 330 340 1001001010 0101001010 329 0001001010 1234567890 SW1 328 No. Current data LD6 LD7 LD8 B B B B B B B B B OC OS Unit (A, B)*1 Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 379 - 0000011010 1000011010 0100011010 1100011010 0010011010 1010011010 0110011010 1110011010 0001011010 1001011010 0101011010 1101011010 0011011010 1011011010 0111011010 1111011010 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 IC17 Address/capacity code IC16 Address/capacity code IC15 Address/capacity code IC14 Address/capacity code IC13 Address/capacity code IC12 Address/capacity code IC11 Address/capacity code IC10 Address/capacity code IC9 Address/capacity code IC8 Address/capacity code IC7 Address/capacity code IC6 Address/capacity code IC5 Address/capacity code IC4 Address/capacity code IC3 Address/capacity code IC2 Address/capacity code IC1 Address/capacity code Item LD1 LD3 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD2 LD4 Display LD5 *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1111101010 352 1234567890 SW1 351 No. Data on indoor unit system LD7 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD6 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 Displayed alternately every 5 seconds Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 380 - 0100000110 1100000110 0010000110 1010000110 0110000110 1110000110 0001000110 1001000110 0101000110 1101000110 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 IC45 Address/capacity code IC44 Address/capacity code IC43 Address/capacity code IC42 Address/capacity code IC41 Address/capacity code IC40 Address/capacity code IC39 Address/capacity code IC38 Address/capacity code IC37 Address/capacity code IC36 Address/capacity code IC35 Address/capacity code IC34 Address/capacity code IC33 Address/capacity code IC32 Address/capacity code IC31 Address/capacity code IC30 Address/capacity code IC29 Address/capacity code IC28 Address/capacity code IC27 Address/capacity code IC26 Address/capacity code IC25 Address/capacity code IC24 Address/capacity code IC23 Address/capacity code IC22 Address/capacity code IC21 Address/capacity code IC20 Address/capacity code IC19 Address/capacity code IC18 Address/capacity code Item LD1 LD3 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD2 LD4 Display LD5 *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1000000110 386 1101111010 379 385 0101111010 378 0000000110 1001111010 377 384 0001111010 376 1111111010 1110111010 375 383 0110111010 374 0111111010 1010111010 373 1011111010 0010111010 372 382 1100111010 371 381 0100111010 370 0011111010 1000111010 369 380 0000111010 1234567890 SW1 368 No. Data on indoor unit system LD7 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD6 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 Displayed alternately every 5 seconds Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 0010100110 1010100110 0110100110 1110100110 404 405 406 407 - 381 - IC4 Suction temperature IC3 Suction temperature IC2 Suction temperature IC1 Suction temperature IC50 Address/capacity code IC49 Address/capacity code IC48 Address/capacity code IC47 Address/capacity code IC46 Address/capacity code Item LD1 LD3 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD2 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1101100110 1100100110 403 411 0100100110 402 0101100110 1000100110 401 1001100110 0000100110 400 410 1111000110 399 409 0111000110 398 0001100110 1011000110 397 408 0011000110 1234567890 SW1 396 No. Data on indoor unit system LD7 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD6 LD8 B B OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [°C] Displayed alternately every 5 seconds Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 382 - 0011010110 1011010110 0111010110 1111010110 0000110110 1000110110 0100110110 1100110110 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 IC28 Suction temperature IC27 Suction temperature IC26 Suction temperature IC25 Suction temperature IC24 Suction temperature IC23 Suction temperature IC22 Suction temperature IC21 Suction temperature IC20 Suction temperature IC19 Suction temperature IC18 Suction temperature IC17 Suction temperature IC16 Suction temperature IC15 Suction temperature IC14 Suction temperature IC13 Suction temperature IC12 Suction temperature IC11 Suction temperature IC10 Suction temperature IC9 Suction temperature IC8 Suction temperature IC7 Suction temperature IC6 Suction temperature IC5 Suction temperature Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1101010110 427 1110010110 423 0101010110 0110010110 422 1001010110 1010010110 421 426 0010010110 420 425 1100010110 419 0001010110 0100010110 418 424 0000010110 1111100110 415 1000010110 0111100110 414 417 1011100110 413 416 0011100110 1234567890 SW1 412 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [°C] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 383 - 0110001110 1110001110 0001001110 1001001110 0101001110 1101001110 0011001110 1011001110 0111001110 1111001110 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 IC6 Liquid pipe temperature IC5 Liquid pipe temperature IC4 Liquid pipe temperature IC3 Liquid pipe temperature IC2 Liquid pipe temperature IC1 Liquid pipe temperature IC50 Suction temperature IC49 Suction temperature IC48 Suction temperature IC47 Suction temperature IC46 Suction temperature IC45 Suction temperature IC44 Suction temperature IC43 Suction temperature IC42 Suction temperature IC41 Suction temperature IC40 Suction temperature IC39 Suction temperature IC38 Suction temperature IC37 Suction temperature IC36 Suction temperature IC35 Suction temperature IC34 Suction temperature IC33 Suction temperature IC32 Suction temperature IC31 Suction temperature IC30 Suction temperature IC29 Suction temperature Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1010001110 454 1111110110 447 453 0111110110 446 0010001110 1011110110 445 452 0011110110 444 1100001110 1101110110 443 451 0101110110 442 0100001110 1001110110 441 1000001110 0001110110 440 450 1110110110 439 449 0110110110 438 0000001110 1010110110 437 448 0010110110 1234567890 SW1 436 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B B OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [°C] The unit is [°C] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 384 - 0100011110 1100011110 0010011110 1010011110 0110011110 1110011110 0001011110 1001011110 0101011110 1101011110 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 IC34 Liquid pipe temperature IC33 Liquid pipe temperature IC32 Liquid pipe temperature IC31 Liquid pipe temperature IC30 Liquid pipe temperature IC29 Liquid pipe temperature IC28 Liquid pipe temperature IC27 Liquid pipe temperature IC26 Liquid pipe temperature IC25 Liquid pipe temperature IC24 Liquid pipe temperature IC23 Liquid pipe temperature IC22 Liquid pipe temperature IC21 Liquid pipe temperature IC20 Liquid pipe temperature IC19 Liquid pipe temperature IC18 Liquid pipe temperature IC17 Liquid pipe temperature IC16 Liquid pipe temperature IC15 Liquid pipe temperature IC14 Liquid pipe temperature IC13 Liquid pipe temperature IC12 Liquid pipe temperature IC11 Liquid pipe temperature IC10 Liquid pipe temperature IC9 Liquid pipe temperature IC8 Liquid pipe temperature IC7 Liquid pipe temperature Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1000011110 482 1101101110 475 481 0101101110 474 0000011110 1001101110 473 480 0001101110 472 1111101110 1110101110 471 479 0110101110 470 0111101110 1010101110 469 1011101110 0010101110 468 478 1100101110 467 477 0100101110 466 0011101110 1000101110 465 476 0000101110 1234567890 SW1 464 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [°C] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 385 - 0111111110 1111111110 511 IC50 Liquid pipe temperature IC49 Liquid pipe temperature IC48 Liquid pipe temperature IC47 Liquid pipe temperature IC46 Liquid pipe temperature IC45 Liquid pipe temperature IC44 Liquid pipe temperature IC43 Liquid pipe temperature IC42 Liquid pipe temperature IC41 Liquid pipe temperature IC40 Liquid pipe temperature IC39 Liquid pipe temperature IC38 Liquid pipe temperature IC37 Liquid pipe temperature IC36 Liquid pipe temperature IC35 Liquid pipe temperature Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1011111110 510 1110111110 503 509 0110111110 502 0011111110 1010111110 501 508 0010111110 500 1101111110 1100111110 499 507 0100111110 498 0101111110 1000111110 497 1001111110 0000111110 496 506 1111011110 495 505 0111011110 494 0001111110 1011011110 493 504 0011011110 1234567890 SW1 492 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [°C] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 0001000001 1001000001 0101000001 520 521 522 OC address Version/Capacity OS address BC/BS/TU address RC address IC/FU address Self-address Item LD1 LD4 LD5 LD6 Count-up display of number of connected units Count-up display of number of connected units Count-up display of number of connected units Count-up display of number of connected units Alternate display of self address and unit model LD3 LD7 OC address display S/W version -> Refrigerant type -> Model and capacity -> Communication address LD2 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0110000001 1110000001 519 1010000001 517 518 1100000001 0010000001 0100000001 514 516 1000000001 515 0000000001 513 1234567890 SW1 512 No. Setting data LD8 A B B B B A OC B A A OS Unit (A, B)*1 Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] - 386 - HWE09080 - 387 - 0011000001 1011000001 0111000001 1111000001 0000100001 1000100001 0100100001 1100100001 0010100001 1010100001 0110100001 1110100001 0001100001 1001100001 0101100001 1101100001 0011100001 1011100001 0111100001 1111100001 0000010001 1000010001 0100010001 1100010001 0010010001 1010010001 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 IC27 Gas pipe temperature IC26 Gas pipe temperature IC25 Gas pipe temperature IC24 Gas pipe temperature IC23 Gas pipe temperature IC22 Gas pipe temperature IC21 Gas pipe temperature IC20 Gas pipe temperature IC19 Gas pipe temperature IC18 Gas pipe temperature IC17 Gas pipe temperature IC16 Gas pipe temperature IC15 Gas pipe temperature IC14 Gas pipe temperature IC13 Gas pipe temperature IC12 Gas pipe temperature IC11 Gas pipe temperature IC10 Gas pipe temperature IC9 Gas pipe temperature IC8 Gas pipe temperature IC7 Gas pipe temperature IC6 Gas pipe temperature IC5 Gas pipe temperature IC4 Gas pipe temperature IC3 Gas pipe temperature IC2 Gas pipe temperature IC1 Gas pipe temperature Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1101000001 524 1234567890 SW1 523 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [°C] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 388 - 0010110001 1010110001 564 565 IC50 Gas pipe temperature IC49 Gas pipe temperature IC48 Gas pipe temperature IC47 Gas pipe temperature IC46 Gas pipe temperature IC45 Gas pipe temperature IC44 Gas pipe temperature IC43 Gas pipe temperature IC42 Gas pipe temperature IC41 Gas pipe temperature IC40 Gas pipe temperature IC39 Gas pipe temperature IC38 Gas pipe temperature IC37 Gas pipe temperature IC36 Gas pipe temperature IC35 Gas pipe temperature IC34 Gas pipe temperature IC33 Gas pipe temperature IC32 Gas pipe temperature IC31 Gas pipe temperature IC30 Gas pipe temperature IC29 Gas pipe temperature IC28 Gas pipe temperature Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0011110001 1100110001 563 572 0100110001 562 1101110001 1000110001 561 571 0000110001 560 0101110001 1111010001 559 1001110001 0111010001 558 570 1011010001 557 569 0011010001 556 0001110001 1101010001 555 568 0101010001 554 0110110001 1001010001 553 1110110001 0001010001 552 567 1110010001 551 566 0110010001 1234567890 SW1 550 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [°C] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 389 - 0111110001 1111110001 0000001001 1000001001 0100001001 1100001001 0010001001 1010001001 0110001001 1110001001 0001001001 1001001001 0101001001 1101001001 0011001001 1011001001 0111001001 1111001001 0000101001 1000101001 0100101001 1100101001 0010101001 1010101001 0110101001 1110101001 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 IC27SH IC26SH IC25SH IC24SH IC23SH IC22SH IC21SH IC20SH IC19SH IC18SH IC17SH IC16SH IC15SH IC14SH IC13SH IC12SH IC11SH IC10SH IC9SH IC8SH IC7SH IC6SH IC5SH IC4SH IC3SH IC2SH IC1SH Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1011110001 574 1234567890 SW1 573 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B)*1 The unit is [ °C ] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 390 - 0101011001 1101011001 0011011001 1011011001 0111011001 619 620 621 622 IC50SH IC49SH IC48SH IC47SH IC46SH IC45SH IC44SH IC43SH IC42SH IC41SH IC40SH IC39SH IC38SH IC37SH IC36SH IC35SH IC34SH IC33SH IC32SH IC31SH IC30SH IC29SH IC28SH Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1001011001 618 1100011001 611 617 0100011001 610 0001011001 1000011001 609 616 0000011001 608 1110011001 1111101001 607 615 0111101001 606 0110011001 1011101001 605 1010011001 0011101001 604 614 1101101001 603 613 0101101001 602 0010011001 1001101001 601 612 0001101001 1234567890 SW1 600 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B)*1 The unit is [ °C ] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 391 - 0000111001 1000111001 0100111001 1100111001 0010111001 1010111001 0110111001 1110111001 0001111001 1001111001 0101111001 1101111001 0011111001 1011111001 0111111001 1111111001 0000000101 1000000101 0100000101 1100000101 0010000101 1010000101 0110000101 1110000101 0001000101 1001000101 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 IC27SC IC26SC IC25SC IC24SC IC23SC IC22SC IC21SC IC20SC IC19SC IC18SC IC17SC IC16SC IC15SC IC14SC IC13SC IC12SC IC11SC IC10SC IC9SC IC8SC IC7SC IC6SC IC5SC IC4SC IC3SC IC2SC IC1SC Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1111011001 624 1234567890 SW1 623 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B)*1 The unit is [ °C ] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 392 - 0011100101 1011100101 0111100101 1111100101 0000010101 1000010101 0100010101 1100010101 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 IC50SC IC49SC IC48SC IC47SC IC46SC IC45SC IC44SC IC43SC IC42SC IC41SC IC40SC IC39SC IC38SC IC37SC IC36SC IC35SC IC34SC IC33SC IC32SC IC31SC IC30SC IC29SC IC28SC Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 -99.9 to 999.9 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1101100101 668 1010100101 661 667 0010100101 660 0101100101 1100100101 659 666 0100100101 658 1001100101 1000100101 657 665 0000100101 656 0001100101 1111000101 655 1110100101 0111000101 654 664 1011000101 653 663 0011000101 652 0110100101 1101000101 651 662 0101000101 1234567890 SW1 650 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B)*1 The unit is [ °C ] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 0110010101 1110010101 0001010101 1001010101 0101010101 1101010101 0011010101 1011010101 0111010101 1111010101 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 INV board S/W version Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 0.00 to 99.99 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0010010101 1010010101 677 1234567890 SW1 676 No. Setting data LD6 LD7 LD8 A OC A OS Unit (A, B)* 1 Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] - 393 - HWE09080 - 394 - Time of error detection 6-2 Time of error detection 6 Time of error detection 5-2 Time of error detection 5 Time of error detection 4-2 Time of error detection 4 Time of error detection 3-2 Time of error detection 3 Time of error detection 2-2 Time of error detection 2 Time of error detection 1-2 Time of error detection 1 Current time -2 Current time Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1011110101 701 0001110101 696 0011110101 1110110101 695 700 0110110101 694 1101110101 1010110101 693 699 0010110101 692 0101110101 1100110101 691 698 0100110101 690 1001110101 1000110101 689 697 0000110101 1234567890 SW1 688 No. Setting data LD6 LD7 LD8 A OC A OS Unit (A, B)* 1 Year and month, and date alternate display Hour: minute Year and month, and date alternate display Hour: minute Year and month, and date alternate display Hour: minute Year and month, and date alternate display Hour: minute Year and month, and date alternate display Hour: minute Year and month, and date alternate display Hour: minute Year and month, and date alternate display Hour: minute Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 0010001101 1010001101 0110001101 708 709 710 - 395 - Time of last data backup before error -2 Time of last data backup before error Time of error detection 10-2 Time of error detection 10 Time of error detection 9-2 Time of error detection 9 Time of error detection 8-2 Time of error detection 8 Time of error detection 7-2 Time of error detection 7 Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1001001101 1100001101 707 713 0100001101 706 0001001101 1000001101 705 712 0000001101 704 1110001101 1111110101 703 711 0111110101 1234567890 SW1 702 No. Setting data LD6 LD7 LD8 A OC A OS Unit (A, B)* 1 Year and month, and date alternate display Hour: minute Year and month, and date alternate display Hour: minute Year and month, and date alternate display Hour: minute Year and month, and date alternate display Hour: minute Year and month, and date alternate display Hour: minute Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 396 - 1101001101 0011001101 1011001101 0111001101 1111001101 0000101101 1000101101 0100101101 1100101101 0010101101 1010101101 0110101101 1110101101 0001101101 1001101101 0101101101 1101101101 0011101101 1011101101 0111101101 1111101101 0000011101 1000011101 0100011101 1100011101 0010011101 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 IC27 LEV opening IC26 LEV opening IC25 LEV opening IC24 LEV opening IC23 LEV opening IC22 LEV opening IC21 LEV opening IC20 LEV opening IC19 LEV opening IC18 LEV opening IC17 LEV opening IC16 LEV opening IC15 LEV opening IC14 LEV opening IC13 LEV opening IC12 LEV opening IC11 LEV opening IC10 LEV opening IC9 LEV opening IC8 LEV opening IC7 LEV opening IC6 LEV opening IC5 LEV opening IC4 LEV opening IC3 LEV opening IC2 LEV opening IC1 LEV opening Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0101001101 715 1234567890 SW1 714 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B)* 1 Fully open: 2000 Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 397 - 1110111101 0001111101 1001111101 0101111101 1101111101 760 761 762 763 IC50 LEV opening IC49 LEV opening IC48 LEV opening IC47 LEV opening IC46 LEV opening IC45 LEV opening IC44 LEV opening IC43 LEV opening IC42 LEV opening IC41 LEV opening IC40 LEV opening IC39 LEV opening IC38 LEV opening IC37 LEV opening IC36 LEV opening IC35 LEV opening IC34 LEV opening IC33 LEV opening IC32 LEV opening IC31 LEV opening IC30 LEV opening IC29 LEV opening IC28 LEV opening Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0110111101 759 0000111101 752 758 1111011101 751 1010111101 0111011101 750 757 1011011101 749 0010111101 0011011101 748 756 1101011101 747 1100111101 0101011101 746 0100111101 1001011101 745 755 0001011101 744 754 1110011101 743 1000111101 0110011101 742 753 1010011101 1234567890 SW1 741 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B)* 1 Fully open: 2000 Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 1111111101 0000000011 766 767 768 IC5 Operation mode IC4 Operation mode IC3Operation mode IC2 Operation mode IC1 Operation mode Item LD1 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry LD2 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1011111101 0111111101 765 0011111101 1234567890 SW1 764 No. Data on indoor unit system LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B)* 1 When WR2 is used, the four LDs on the left (LD14) display operation mode, and the four LDs on the right (LD5-LD8) display port address. (Displayed alternately every five seconds) Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] - 398 - HWE09080 - 399 - 1100100011 0010100011 1010100011 0110100011 1110100011 0001100011 1001100011 0101100011 1101100011 0011100011 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 IC33 Operation mode IC32 Operation mode IC31 Operation mode IC30 Operation mode IC29 Operation mode IC28 Operation mode IC27 Operation mode IC26 Operation mode IC25 Operation mode IC24 Operation mode IC23 Operation mode IC22 Operation mode IC21 Operation mode IC20 Operation mode IC19 Operation mode IC18 Operation mode IC17 Operation mode IC16 Operation mode IC15 Operation mode IC14 Operation mode IC13 Operation mode IC12 Operation mode IC11 Operation mode IC10 Operation mode IC9 Operation mode IC8 Operation mode IC7 Operation mode IC6 Operation mode Item LD1 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry LD2 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0100100011 787 0011000011 780 786 1101000011 779 1000100011 0101000011 778 785 1001000011 777 0000100011 0001000011 776 784 1110000011 775 1111000011 0110000011 774 0111000011 1010000011 773 783 0010000011 772 782 1100000011 771 1011000011 0100000011 770 781 1000000011 1234567890 SW1 769 No. Data on indoor unit system LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B)* 1 When WR2 is used, the four LDs on the left (LD1-4) display operation mode, and the four LDs on the right (LD5LD8) display port address. (Displayed alternately every five seconds) Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 1110010011 0001010011 807 808 - 400 - 0000110011 1000110011 0100110011 1100110011 0010110011 1010110011 0110110011 1110110011 0001110011 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 IC11 filter IC10 filter IC9 filter IC8 filter IC7 filter IC6 filter IC5 filter IC4 filter IC3 filter IC2 filter IC1 filter IC50 Operation mode IC49 Operation mode IC48 Operation mode IC47 Operation mode IC46 Operation mode IC45 Operation mode IC44 Operation mode IC43 Operation mode IC42 Operation mode IC41 Operation mode IC40 Operation mode IC39 Operation mode IC38 Operation mode IC37 Operation mode IC36 Operation mode IC35 Operation mode IC34 Operation mode Item LD1 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry LD2 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0111010011 1111010011 814 1011010011 0110010011 806 813 1010010011 805 0011010011 0010010011 804 812 1100010011 803 1101010011 0100010011 802 0101010011 1000010011 801 811 0000010011 800 810 1111100011 799 1001010011 0111100011 798 809 1011100011 1234567890 SW1 797 No. Data on indoor unit system LD8 B B OC OS Unit (A, B)* 1 Hours since last maintenance [ h ] When WR2 is used, the four LDs on the left (LD1-4) display operation mode, and the four LDs on the right (LD5LD8) display port address. (Displayed alternately every five seconds) Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 401 - 1101001011 0011001011 1011001011 0111001001 1111001011 0000101011 1000101011 0100101011 1100101011 0010101011 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 IC39 filter IC38 filter IC37 filter IC36 filter IC35 filter IC34 filter IC33 filter IC32 filter IC31 filter IC30 filter IC29 filter IC28 filter IC27 filter IC26 filter IC25 filter IC24 filter IC23 filter IC22 filter IC21 filter IC20 filter IC19 filter IC18 filter IC17 filter IC16 filter IC15 filter IC14 filter IC13 filter IC12 filter Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0101001011 843 0010001011 836 842 1100001011 835 1001001011 0100001011 834 841 1000001011 833 0001001011 0000001011 832 840 1111110011 831 1110001011 0111110011 830 0110001011 1011110011 829 839 0011110011 828 838 1101110011 827 1010001011 0101110011 826 837 1001110011 1234567890 SW1 825 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B)* 1 Hours since last maintenance [ h ] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 0110101011 1110101011 0001101011 1001101011 0101101011 1101101011 0011101011 1011101011 0111101011 1111101011 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 IC50 filter IC49 filter IC48 filter IC47 filter IC46 filter IC45 filter IC44 filter IC43 filter IC42 filter IC41 filter IC40 filter Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD5 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 LD4 Display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1010101011 1234567890 SW1 853 No. Data on indoor unit system LD6 LD7 LD8 B OC OS Unit (A, B)* 1 Hours since last maintenance [ h ] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] - 402 - HWE09080 - 403 - 1111011011 0000111011 1000111011 0100111011 1100111011 0010111011 1010111011 0110111011 1110111011 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 0 to 254 0 to 254 Control board Reset counter INV board Reset counter -99.9 to 999.9 LD5 Power factor phase angle 1 LD4 -99.9 to 999.9 LD3 W-phase current effective value 1 LD2 -99.9 to 999.9 LD1 Display U-phase current effective value 1 Item *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 0111011011 1001011011 873 878 0001011011 872 1011011011 1110011011 871 0011011011 0110011011 870 877 1010011011 869 876 0010011011 868 1101011011 1100011011 867 875 0100011011 866 0101011011 1000011011 874 0000011011 865 1234567890 SW1 864 No. Other types of data LD6 LD7 LD8 A A A A A OC A A A A A OS Unit (A, B) *1 The unit is [ time ] The unit is [ deg ] The unit is [ A ] Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ] HWE09080 - 404 - 0101000111 1101000111 0011111111 1011111111 0111111111 1111111111 907 1020 1021 1022 1023 Item LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 Display LD5 *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed. 1001000111 906 1100000111 899 905 0100000111 898 0001000111 1000000111 897 904 0000000111 896 1110000111 1111111011 895 903 0111111011 894 0110000111 1011111011 893 1010000111 0011111011 892 902 1101111011 891 901 0101111011 890 0010000111 1001111011 889 900 0001111011 1234567890 SW1 888 No. Other types of data LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS Unit (A, B) *1 Remarks [ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c321 44.398116, Tue Aug 04 2009 14:24:39 Creator Tool : PScript5.dll Version 5.2 Modify Date : 2009:11:30 16:23:22+09:00 Create Date : 2009:11:30 16:16:20+09:00 Metadata Date : 2009:11:30 16:23:22+09:00 GTS PDFX Version : PDF/X-1:2001 Trapped : False Producer : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows) GTS PDFX Conformance : PDF/X-1a:2001 Format : application/pdf Title : 0000001653.book Creator : 1033204 Document ID : uuid:2d7f0cc2-6149-4506-8559-a2eeda9f4671 Instance ID : uuid:df0474ae-abfb-4346-a134-3b4eda38d987 Page Count : 414 Author : 1033204EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools